Inglés 5F0012720BN (11.

19)

5F0012720BN

SEAT Leon Inglés (11.19)

SEAT Leon
Owner’s manual
Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
Model:
The following items were delivered
YES NO
with the vehicle:
Vehicle Registration:
On-board documentation
Vehicle identification
number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key

or vehicle delivery:
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
SEAT Official Service:
Location:

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
Date: right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Signature of owner: Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
Service advisor:
All rights on changes are reserved.

Telephone:
❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.19
Introduction
Thank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve- WARNING
hicle. Read and always observe safety infor-
With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy mation concerning the passenger's
a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology front airbag ››› page 30, Fitting and us-
and top quality features. ing child seats.
We recommend reading this Instruction Man-
ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle
so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily
driving.
Information about handling is complemented
with instructions regarding the operation and
maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure
its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we
want to give you valuable advice and tips to
drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting
the environment.
We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.
About this manual ® Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab- Note
sence of this symbol does not guarantee
that the term is not a trademark. Texts after this symbol contain addition-
This manual describes the features of the ve- al information.
hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of  It indicates that the section continues on
the features described below will be intro- the next page.
duced in the future or will only be available in
You can access the information in this manual
certain markets.
using:
Some of the features described here are
● Thematic table of contents that follows the
not included in all the types or variations
of the model and they can be varied or manual’s general chapter structure.
modified based on technical or marketing ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics
requirements without it being considered to indicate the pages containing “essential”
misleading advertising. information, which is detailed in the corre-
sponding chapters.
Some details on the drawings may vary from
its vehicle and must be interpreted as a ● Alphabetical index with many terms and
standard representation. synonyms to help you find information.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards, WARNING

backwards) in this manual refer to the travel
direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta- Texts after this symbol contain informa-
ted. tion about safety and warn you about
possible accident or injury risks.
The audiovisual material is only meant to
help the users better understand some fea-
tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the CAUTION
instruction manual. Access the instruction Texts after this symbol indicate possible
manual to see the complete information and damage to the vehicle.
warnings.

The features marked with an asterisk For the sake of the environment
 are included by default only in certain Texts after this symbol contain informa-
versions of the model, supplied as op- tion about the protection of the environ-
tional only for certain versions or only of- ment.
fered in certain countries.
Printed and digital instruction man- Related videos
ual The operation of some of the vehicle's fea-
The printed instruction manual contains rele- tures can be shown as an instruction video:
vant information about the use of the vehicle
and the Infotainment System.
The digital version of the manuals contains
more in-depth information. It is available on
SEAT's official website.
To view the digital version of the manual: Fig. 2 SEAT website

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 2

● OR enter the following address in the navi-
gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your-
Fig. 1 SEAT website seat/manuals-offline.html

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1 choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”.
● OR enter the following address in the navi-
gator website: Note
Video instructions are only available in
http://www.seat.com/owners/your- certain languages.
seat/manuals-offline.html

and select your vehicle.

Frequently Asked Ques- How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncture
kit? ››› page 40
How do you check and top up the brake fluid?
››› page 339
tions How do you change a wheel? ››› page 41 How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val-
ues? ››› page 348
Before driving How do you change a fuse? ››› page 54
Vehicle washing tips ››› page 359
How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 133 How do you change a light? ››› page 57

How do you adjust the steering wheel? How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 49 Functions of interest
››› page 14 Easy Connect, Car menu ››› page 92
Useful tips
How do you adjust the exterior mirrors? How does the START-STOP system work?
››› page 130 How do you set the time? ››› page 80 ››› page 251
How do you turn on the exterior lights? When should the vehicle inspection should be What parking assistants are available?
››› page 118 performed? ››› page 85 ››› page 300
How does the automatic gearbox selector lever What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels on How does the rear assist work? ››› page 305
work? ››› page 255 the steering wheel perform? ››› page 95
How does the adaptive cruise control work?
How do you refuel? ››› page 322 How do you remove the luggage compartment ››› page 276
cover? ››› page 139
How do you activate the windscreen wipers and How can the SEAT driving mode be adjusted?
windscreen washer system? ››› page 127 How do you drive in an economical and environ- ››› page 264
mentally-friendly way? ››› page 267
Emergency situations How does the lane departure warning system
How do you check and top up the engine oil? work? ››› page 284
A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What does ››› page 334
this mean? ››› page 89 How does tyre pressure monitoring work?
How do you check and top up the engine cool- ››› page 352
How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 332 ant? ››› page 338
How do you open the vehicle without a key (Key-
How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 47 How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid? less Access)? ››› page 104
››› page 340
Where is the vehicle tool kit located? Interior lighting and ambient light ››› page 126
››› page 38
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
67
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
153
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
General views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . 7
Instruments and warning/control Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Easy Connect system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Correct sitting position of vehicle occu- Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Full Link* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
SEAT Media Control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 15 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
WLAN access point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 18 Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Navigation in Offroad mode* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Vehicle Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 46
Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 138 Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-
Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Net partition* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5
 Table of Contents

SEAT Driving modes (SEAT Drive Pro- Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

file)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Emergency brake assistance system (Front Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Lane Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 356
Stabilisation and brake assistance sys- Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 300 Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Parking aid parking and manoeuvring Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
(ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Accessories and modifications to the ve-
Parking System Plus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 364
Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)* . . . . . . . 305 Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 367
Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Information about the EU Directive
Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Indications about the technical data . . . . 372
Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Engine management and emissions control Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

6
 General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

1 Rear lid 4 Bonnet 7 Action in the event of a puncture

– Opening from outside ››› page 112 – Unlocking lever ››› page 332 – Anti-puncture kit ››› page 38
– Emergency opening ››› page 113 – Open/close ››› page 332 – Wheel change ››› page 41
2 Fuel tank 5 Levels control
– Fuel capacity ››› page 372 – Oil ››› page 334
– Open/Close cap ››› page 322 – Brake fluid ››› page 339
3 Opening and closing – Battery ››› page 341
– Doors ››› page 109 6 Towing the vehicle
– Central locking ››› page 100 – Towline anchorage ››› page 52
– Manual release ››› page 110 – Tow start ››› page 50
7
 General views of the vehicle

Overview (left hand drive)

1 Electric windows ››› page 114 8 Wipers and rear window wiper 15 Air conditioning ››› page 155
2 Central locking ››› page 100 ››› page 127 16 Hazard warning lights ››› page 124
3 Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 130 Driver information system ››› page 87

4 Open bonnet lever ››› page 332 9 Easy Connect ››› page 92

5 Headlight switch ››› page 119 10 Front passenger airbag disconnection

display ››› page 25
6 Turn signal and main beam lever
››› page 121 11 Fuses ››› page 54

Cruise control ››› page 270 12 Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 14

7 Warning lamps ››› page 89 13 Ignition lock ››› page 246

14 Starter button ››› page 247

8
 General views of the vehicle

Overview (right hand drive)

1 Open bonnet lever ››› page 332 7 Headlight switch ››› page 119 16 Fuses ››› page 54
2 Easy Connect ››› page 92 8 Central locking ››› page 100
3 Hazard warning lights ››› page 124 9 Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 130
4 Turn signal and main beam lever 10 Electric windows ››› page 114
››› page 121 11 Air conditioning ››› page 155
Cruise control ››› page 270 12 Starter button ››› page 247
5 Warning lamps ››› page 89 13 Front passenger airbag disconnection
6 Wipers and rear window wiper display ››› page 25
››› page 127 14 Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 14
Driver information system ››› page 87 15 Ignition lock ››› page 246
9
 General views of the vehicle

Interior view

1 Armrest ››› page 146 8 Electronic parking brake ››› page 292
2 Isofix anchors ››› page 32 9 Seat adjustment ››› page 133
3 Headrest adjustment ››› page 134
4 Seat belts ››› page 15
5 Panoramic roof ››› page 116
6 Interior mirror ››› page 130
7 Disconnecting the front passenger front
airbag ››› page 25

10
 Safe driving

Safety – Ensure that all windows provide a clear and

good view of the surroundings.
– Always pay attention to traffic and do not
get distracted by passengers or telephone
calls.
– Make sure all luggage is secured
Safe driving ››› page 138. – Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
– Make sure that no objects can interfere with
Advice about driving the pedals. – Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrors – Always reduce your speed as appropriate
Safety first! properly according to your size. for road, traffic and weather conditions.
– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats – When travelling long distances, take breaks
WARNING
always have the headrests in the in-use po- regularly - at least every two hours.
● This manual contains important informa- sition ››› page 134.
tion about the operation of the vehicle, – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
both for the driver and the passengers. The – Instruct passengers to adjust the headrests or stressed.
other sections of the on-board documenta- according to their height.
tion also contain further information that WARNING
– Protect children with appropriate child
you should be aware of for your own safety Driving under the influence of alcohol,
seats and properly applied seat belts
and for the safety of your passengers. drugs, medication or narcotics may result
››› page 28.
● Ensure that the on-board documentation in severe accidents and even loss of life.
is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- – Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics
pecially important when lending or selling your passengers also to assume a proper
may significantly alter perception, affect
the vehicle to another person. sitting position ››› page 12.
reaction times and safety while driving,
– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your which could result in the loss of control of
passengers also to fasten their seat belts the vehicle.
Before driving properly ››› page 15.

For your own safety and the safety of your Safety equipment
passengers, always note the following points Factors influencing safety
before every trip: Never put your safety or the safety of your
– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn As a driver, you are responsible for yourself passengers in danger. In the event of an acci-
signals are working properly. and your passengers. dent, the safety equipment may reduce the »

– Check tyre pressure.

11
 Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover part

Correct sitting position of The correct sitting positions for the driver and
of the safety equipment in your SEAT1): passengers are shown below.
vehicle occupants If your physical constitution prevents you
● three-point seat belts,
from maintaining the correct sitting position,
● belt tension limiters for the front and rear Correct position on the seat contact a specialised workshop for help with
side seats,
any special devices. The seat belt and airbag
● belt tensioners for the front seats, can only provide optimum protection if a cor-
● front airbags, rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom-
● knee airbags,
mends taking your car in for technical serv-
ice.
● side airbags in the front seat backrests,
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
● side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,
injury in the event of an accident or sudden
● head-protection airbags, braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the
● “ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rear following positions:
child seat system
● height-adjustable front headrests, Valid for all vehicle occupants:
Fig. 3 The correct distance between the driver
● rear headrests with in-use position and and the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm ● Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is
(10 inches). at the same level as the top of your head, or
non-use position,
as close as possible to the same level as the
● adjustable steering column.
top of your head and under no circumstances
The safety equipment mentioned above below eye level. Keep the back of your neck
works together to provide you and your pas- as close as possible to the headrest ››› Fig. 4.
sengers with the best possible protection in ● Short people must lower the headrest com-
the event of an accident. However, these pletely, even if your head is below its upper
safety systems can only be effective if you edge.
and your passengers are sitting in a correct ● Tall people must raise the headrest com-
position and use this equipment properly. pletely.
Safety is everyone's business! ● Always keep your feet in the footwell while
Fig. 4 Correct belt web and headrest positions the vehicle is in motion.

1) Depending on the version/market.

12
 Safe driving

● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly board check translation). If you are sitting side the window. Otherwise the airbag and
››› page 18. closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot seat belt may offer insufficient protection
protect you properly. and also increase the risk of injury in the
The following also applies to the driver: event of an accident.
● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-
right position so that your back rests com- Number of seats
pletely against it. Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi-
The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 in
● Move the steering wheel so it is at least
the rear. All seats are equipped with a safety
tion
25 cm (10 inches) away from the sternum
belt.
››› Fig. 3 and you can hold it with both hands If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,
on both sides, on the outer part, with your In some versions, your vehicle is approved the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases.
arms slightly bent. only for 4 seats. 2 front seats and 2 rear Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-
● The steering wheel must always point to- seats. ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect
wards the chest and never towards the face. sitting positions substantially reduce the pro-
WARNING tective function of seat belts and, therefore,
● Move the seat in such a way that you can
Sitting in an incorrect position may in- increase the risk of severe or even lethal inju-
step on the pedals with your knees slightly ries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is espe-
bent and with a distance between the knees crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries in
the event of sudden braking or manoeu- cially heightened when a deploying airbag
and the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in- strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed
vring, in case of collision or accident and if
ches) ››› Fig. 3. an incorrect sitting position. The driver is re-
the airbags deploy.
● Adjust the height of the seat so that you sponsible for all people, particularly children,
● Before starting the car, all passengers
can reach the top of the steering wheel. must be sitting in a correct position and inside the vehicle.
● Always keep both feet in the footwell so stay like that for the entire journey. This al- The following list contains examples of incor-
that you have the vehicle under control at all so applies to a correct use of the seat belt. rect sitting positions that could be dangerous
times. ● The maximum amount of people in the for all vehicle occupants.
vehicle is the same as the amount of seats
For the passenger, the following applies: with seat belts. When the vehicle is in motion:
● Move the seat backrest to an almost up- ● For children, always use a certified pro-
● Never stand in the vehicle.
right position so that your back rests com- tection system, certified and suited for their
weight and height ››› page 28. ● Never stand on the seats.
pletely against it.
● While driving, always keep your feet in ● Never kneel on the seats.
● Move the seat as far back as possible (mini-
mum 25 cm between the chest and the dash- the footwell. Never place them over the ● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the
seat or the dashboard, for example, or out- rear. »
13
 Safety

● Never lean against the dash panel. Steering wheel position adjust- ● Never adjust the steering wheel while the
● Never lie on the rear seats. ment vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust
● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
the steering wheel while the vehicle is in
motion, stop safely and make the proper
● Never sit sideways. adjustment.
● Never lean out of a window. ● The adjusted steering wheel should be
● Never put your feet out of a window. facing your chest and not your face so as
not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro-
● Never put your feet on the dash panel.
tection in the event of an accident.
● Never place your feet on the bench or on ● When driving, always hold the steering
the backrest of the seat. wheel with both hands on the outside of the
● Never travel in a footwell. ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions
to reduce injuries when the driver's front
● Never sit on the armrests.
airbag deploys.
● Never travel without wearing the seat belt. Fig. 5 Lever in the lower left side of the steering
column. ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
● Never travel in the luggage compartment. o'clock position or in any other manner
Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In
WARNING only when the vehicle is stationary. such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys,
you may sustain injuries to your arms,
Sitting in an incorrect position increases
● Pull the ››› Fig. 5 1 lever down, move the hands and head.
the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the
event of accidents and sudden braking or steering wheel to the desired position and lift
manoeuvres. the lever back up until it locks.
● All occupants must sit correctly during
WARNING Pedal area
the journey and wear the seat belt correct-
ly. Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-
● Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit- ment function and an incorrect adjustment Pedals
of the steering wheel can result in severe or
ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or
fatal injury. – Ensure that you can always press the ac-
are not at a proper distance of the airbag
● After adjusting the steering column, push
celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim-
risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries,
the lever ››› Fig. 5 1 firmly upwards to en- paired to the floor.
especially if the airbags deploy and strike
them. sure the steering wheel does not acciden- – Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
tally change position while driving. paired to their initial positions.

14
 Seat belts

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-

tened during the trip and do not obstruct
Seat belts Rear seat belts fastened display*
the pedals ››› .
The whys and wherefores of
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals
clear and which are secured to prevent them seat belts
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten- Control lamps
ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be  It lights up red
pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the
Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.
vehicle.
The control lamp  lights up to remind the Fig. 6 Instrument panel: left rear seat occu-
Wear suitable footwear driver to fasten their seat belt. pied and corresponding seat belt fastened dis-
play.
Always wear shoes which support your feet
Before starting the vehicle:
properly and give you a good feeling for the
Depending on the model version, when the
pedals. ● Fasten your seat belt securely.
ignition is switched on, the seat belt status
● Instruct your passengers to fasten their display ››› Fig. 6 on the instrument panel in-
WARNING
seat belts properly before driving off. forms the driver whether the passengers in
● Restricting pedal operation can lead to the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.
● Protect children by using a child seat ac-
critical situations while driving.
cording to the child's height and weight
It indicates that the corresponding seat
● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor ››› page 28.  is empty.
coverings over the original floor mats. This
would reduce the pedal area and could ob- When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed Indicates that the seat is occupied and
struct the pedals. Risk of accident. exceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the
 the occupant is wearing the seat belt.
● Never place objects in the driver footwell. seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened
An object could move into the pedal area while driving, a warning sound will be heard The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of
and impair pedal operation. for a few seconds. The warning light will also 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats
flash . is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An
audible warning will also be heard if the vehi-
The lamp  goes out when the driver and cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).
passenger seat belts are fastened with the
ignition switched on. If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while
driving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt »
15
 Safety

status is displayed for approximately 30 sec- tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened
onds. The indication can be hidden by press- gy released in a collision. Taken together, all at all times and are not damaged.
ing the  button on the dash panel. these features reduce the releasing kinetic
energy and consequently, the risk of injury. WARNING
This is why it is so important to fasten seat ● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at
The protective function of seat belts before every trip, even when "just driving all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
around the corner". optimal protection from seat belts can be
belts
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat achieved only if you use them properly.
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown ● Never allow two passengers (even chil-
that wearing seat belts is an effective means dren) to share the same seat belt.
of substantially reducing the risk of injury and ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-
improving the chances of survival when in- hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
volved in a serious accident. Furthermore, ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or
properly worn seat belts improve the protec- fragile objects (such as glasses or pens,
tion provided by airbags in the event of an etc.) because this can cause injuries.
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged
is required by law in most countries.
or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air- ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
Fig. 7 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will bags, the seat belts must be fastened and in any other incorrect position.
not be thrown forward in the event of sudden worn. The front airbags, for example, are only ● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as
braking.
triggered in some cases of head-on collision. an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the
The front airbags will not be triggered during proper fit and function of the seat belts, re-
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- ducing their capacity to protect.
in the proper position. They also help prevent
sions, overturns or accidents in which the air- ● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not
uncontrolled movements that may result in
bag trigger threshold value in the control unit be blocked with paper or other objects, as
serious injury and reduce the risk of being
is not exceeded. this can prevent the latch plate from en-
thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-
dent. gaging securely.
● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts Important safety instructions for or similar items to alter the position of the
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of
the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
the use of seat belts belt webbing.
● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
– Always wear the seat belt as described in the connections, belt retractors or parts of
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-
this section.
16
 Seat belts

the buckle could cause severe injuries in amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will
the event of an accident. Therefore, you be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.
must check the condition of all seat belts Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
at regular intervals. 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
● Seat belts which have been worn in an ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
accident and have been stretched must be (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
replaced by a specialised workshop. Re- even higher.
newal may be necessary even if there is no
apparent damage. The belt anchorage Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
should also be checked. not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
collision, they will move forward at the same
● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat Fig. 9 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver speed their vehicle was travelling just before
moved or modified in any way. who is wearing a seat belt. the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise
The effects of the laws of physics in the case collisions.
the retractors may not work properly.
of a head-on collision are easy to explain: the
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-
body in a collision are so great that it is not
ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting on
possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In
Head-on collisions and the laws of both the vehicle and its passengers.
a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are
physics The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on thrown forward and will make violent contact
the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-
the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher screen or whatever else is in the way
they are, the more energy there is to be “ab- ››› Fig. 8.
sorbed” in the event of an accident.
It is also important for rear passengers to
The most significant factor, however, is the wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles wise be thrown forward violently through the
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
for example, the corresponding kinetic ener- the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
gy is multiplied by four. danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ››› Fig. 9.
Given that the passengers of the vehicle in
Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown our example do not have their seat belts fas-
forward violently. tened, in the event of a collision the entire

17
 Safety

How to properly adjust your Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc- WARNING
cupants in the position that most protects
seat belt them in the event of an accident or sudden
● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-
tion unless the seat backrest is in an up-
braking ››› .
right position and the seat belt is worn cor-
Fastening and unfastening the seat rectly, according to your size.
belt Fastening the seat belt
● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-
Fasten your seat belt before each trip. cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal
injuries in the event of an accident or sud-
● Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly
den braking.
››› page 12.
● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,
● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in
can cause severe injuries if the belt moves
an upright position ››› . from hard areas of the body to soft areas
● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web- (e.g. the stomach).
bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do
not twist the seat belt when doing so ››› .
● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the
corresponding seat ››› Fig. 10.
Fig. 10 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt
into the buckle. ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.

Releasing the seat belt

Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle
has come to a standstill ››› .

● Press the red button on the buckle

››› Fig. 11. The latch plate is released from the
buckle.
● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up easily and the trim will not be damaged.
Fig. 11 Release the seat belt's buckle.

18
 Seat belts

Correct seat belt position belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op- WARNING
timum position to ensure the airbag provides
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can
the maximum protection. The seat belt must
cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of
therefore always be worn and the webbing
an accident.
correctly positioned.
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe on the centre of the shoulder, never across
or even fatal injuries ››› page 12, Correct sit- the neck or the arm.
ting position of vehicle occupants. ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie ably on the torso
on the centre of the shoulder, never across ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie
the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind across the pelvis, never across the stom-
the shoulder. ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-
Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and headrest posi-
fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if
tions, viewed from front and the side. ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across
necessary to take up any slack.
the pelvis, never across the stomach.
● For pregnant women, the lap part of the
● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- seat belt must lie as low as possible over
bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up the pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding”
any slack. the stomach››› Fig. 13.
● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-
In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt
tened.
must lie evenly across the chest and as low
as possible over the pelvis, never across the ● Once the seat belt is positioned correct-
stomach and must be worn properly at all ly, don't pull it away from your body with
times during the pregnancy ››› Fig. 13. your hand.
● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or
Adapting the position of the belt webbing fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.
to your size ● Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings
Fig. 13 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.
The seat belt can be adapted using the fol- or similar instruments to alter the position
lowing equipment: of the belt webbing.
Seat belts offer their maximum protection in
the event of an accident and reduce the risk
● Belt height adjustment for the front seats.
of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when Note
they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if If your physical constitution prevents you
the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat from maintaining the correct position of the »
19
 Safety

belt webbing, contact a specialised work- Maintenance and disposal of seat ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-
shop for help with any special devices to belt tensioners tection for one accident and must be
ensure the optimum protection of the seat changed if they have been activated.
belt and airbag. SEAT recommends taking The belt tensioners are components of the
your car in for technical service. seat belts that are installed in the seats of For the sake of the environment
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
Airbag modules and belt tensioners may
ers or remove and install parts of the system
contain perchlorate. Observe the legal re-
when performing other repair work, the seat
Seat belt tensioners belt may be damaged. The consequence
quirements for their disposal.

may be that, in the event of an accident, the

How the seat belt tensioner works belt tensioners function incorrectly or may
not function at all.
The seat belts for the occupants in the front
seats are equipped with belt tensioners. So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
The belt tensioners are activated by sensors, do not cause any injuries or environmental
although only in severe head-on, lateral and pollution, regulations, which are known to the
rear-end collisions. This retracts and tightens specialised workshops, must be observed.
the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of
the occupants. WARNING
The belt pre-tensioners work in combination ● Improper use or repairs not carried out by
with the airbag system. In case of overturn, qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-
the pre-tensioners do not activate unless the vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners
head airbags are deployed. may fail to trigger or may trigger in the
wrong circumstances.
Note ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-

● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. belts, including the removal and refitting of
● The relevant safety requirements must be system parts in conjunction with other re-
observed when the vehicle or components pair work, must be performed by a special-
of the system are scrapped. Specialised ised workshop only.
workshops are familiar with these regula-
tions, which are also available to you.
20
 Airbag system

your safety ››› page 15, The whys and

Airbag system wherefores of seat belts.
how serious, is not a determining factor for
the airbags to have been triggered.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
Brief introduction if you are not properly seated when the air-
WARNING
bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-
Related video ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle suming an incorrect sitting position can
occupants assume a correct sitting position lead to critical or fatal injuries.
while travelling. ● All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain
Sharp braking before an accident may cause
critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be gered. Children up to 12 years old should
thrown forward into the area of the deploying always travel on the rear seat. Never trans-
airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may port children in the vehicle if they are not
Fig. 14 Vehicle interior inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. restrained or the restraint system is not ap-
This also applies to children. propriate for their age, size or weight.
Always maintain the greatest possible dis- ● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-
Why is it so important to wear a tance between yourself and the front airbag. ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-
seat belt and to sit correctly? This way, the front airbags can completely erly ››› page 15.
deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best mum protection.
protection, the seat belt must always be worn Description of the airbag system
The most important factors for triggering the
properly and the correct sitting position must
airbag are the type of accident, the angle of
be assumed. The airbag system offers additional protec-
impact and the vehicle speed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat tion for the occupants in combination with the
Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- seat belts.
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
rate resulting from the collision and detected The airbag system comprises the follow-
mind that the airbag system can only work
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration ing modules (as per vehicle equipment):
effectively when the vehicle occupants are
occurring during the collision and measured
wearing their seat belts correctly and have ● Electronic control unit
by the control unit remains below the speci-
adjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, it ● Front airbags for driver and passenger
fied reference values, the front, side and/or
is most important to properly wear the seat
head-protection airbags will not be triggered. ● Knee airbag for the driver
belts at all times, not only because this is re-
Take into account that the visible damage in
quired by law in most countries, but also for
a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter
● Side airbags »
21
 Safety

● Head airbag WARNING alised. Some factors play an important role,

● Airbag control lamp  on the instrument such as the properties of the object the vehi-
● The seat belts and airbags can only pro-
panel ››› page 23 cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle
vide maximum protection if the occupants
speed, etc.
● Key-operated switch for front passenger are seated correctly ››› page 12.
airbag ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
● Control lamp for disabled/enabled status tem, have the system checked immediately vation.
of the front passenger airbag. by a specialised workshop. Otherwise The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
there is a danger that during a collision, the tory and activates the respective restraint
The airbag system operation is monitored system may fail to trigger, or not trigger
system.
electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- correctly.
luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- If the deceleration rate is below the prede-
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis). fined reference value in the control unit the
airbags will not be triggered, even though the
Airbag activation
There is a fault in the system if the control accident may cause extensive damage to the
lamp : car.
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
● does not light up when the ignition is thousands of a second, to provide additional
protection in the event of an accident. A fine The following airbags are triggered in seri-
switched on ››› page 23,
dust may develop when the airbag deploys. ous head-on collisions:
● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is
This is normal and it is not an indication of fire ● Driver airbag.
switched on,
in the vehicle. ● Front passenger front airbag
● turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on, The airbag system is only ready to function ● Knee airbag for the driver.
when the ignition is on.
● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
In special accidents instances, several air- The following airbags are triggered in seri-
moving.
bags may activate at the same time. ous side-on collisions:
The airbag system is not triggered if: ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
dent.
● the ignition is switched off sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-
over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. ● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
● there is a minor frontal collision
cident.
● there is a minor side collision
Activation factors
● there is a rear-end collision
The conditions that lead to the airbag system
● the vehicle turns over. activating in each situation cannot be gener-

22
 Airbag system

In an accident with airbag activation: verified. They will switch off after a few sec- may deploy during an accident in spite of
● the interior lights switch on (if the interior onds. the fault.
light switch is in the courtesy light position); If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system
● the hazard warning lights switch on; control lamp  remains on or flashes, it indi- CAUTION
cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat
● all doors are unlocked; Always pay attention to any lit control
belt tensioner system ››› . Have the system
● the fuel supply to the engine is cut. lamps and to the corresponding descrip-
checked immediately by a specialised work- tions and instructions to avoid damage to
shop. the vehicle or harm to the occupants.
If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,
Operation of the airbags the warning lamp      re-
mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that
Airbag system control lamps the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front
passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp
does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the
It lights up on the combi-instru-
 control lamp  on the instrument panel,
ment
there is a fault in the airbag system ››› . If
Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners . the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault in
Have the system checked immediately by a special- the disabling of the airbag system ››› . Have
ised workshop. the system checked immediately by a speci-
alised workshop.
  It lights up on the dash panel
WARNING
Front passenger front airbag deactivated.
Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat
belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat
belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to
  It lights up on the dash panel trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.
Front passenger front airbag activated. ● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-
The control lamp turns off automatically 60 seconds taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the
after the ignition is switched on system checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
Several warning and control lamps light up ● Do not mount a child seat in the front
for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- passenger seat or remove the mounted
ed on, signalling that the function is being child seat! The front passenger front airbag
23
 Safety

Front airbags ditional protection for the head and chest in

the event of a severe frontal collision ››› .
Their special design allows the controlled es-
cape of the propellant gas when an occu-
pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the
head and chest are protected by the airbag.
After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-
ciently to allow visibility.

WARNING
● The deployment space between the front
passengers and the airbags must not in
any case be occupied by other passenger,
pets and objects.
● The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
● It is also important not to attach any ob-
Fig. 16 Front passenger airbag located in jects such as cup holders or telephone
dash panel. mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
Fig. 15 Driver airbag located in steering bag units.
wheel. The front airbag for the driver is located in the
steering wheel ››› Fig. 15 and the airbag for
the front passenger is located in the dash
panel ››› Fig. 16. Airbags are identified by the
word “AIRBAG”.
When the driver and front passenger airbags
are deployed, the covers remain attached to
the steering wheel and dashboard, respec-
tively ››› Fig. 15 ››› Fig. 16.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the front occupants ad-

24
 Airbag system

Activate and deactivate front pas- SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turns
rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the off.
senger front airbag*
front passenger airbag.
WARNING
When the front passenger airbag is deacti-
vated, this means that only the front passen- ● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for
ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other disabling or switching on the airbag.
airbags in the vehicle remain activated. ● Always switch off the ignition before dis-
abling the front passenger airbag! Failure
Deactivate and activate the front passen- to do so could result in a fault in the airbag
ger front airbag deactivation system.

● Switch the ignition off. ● Never leave the key in the airbag disa-
bling switch as it could get damaged or en-
● Open the glove compartment on the front
able or disable the airbag during driving.
passenger side.
Fig. 17 Front passenger front airbag switch. ● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,
● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for reactivate it as soon as possible so that it
deactivating the front passenger airbag can fulfil its protective function.
››› Fig. 17. About 3/4 of the key should enter;
this is as far as it will go.
● Turn the key gently to change its position to
 (deactivate) or to  (activate). If you have
difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the
key as far as it will go.
● Close the glove compartment.
● When deactivating the airbag, switch the
ignition on and check that the control lamp
Fig. 18 Dash panel: control lamp for the deac-
  remains lit where it says
tivation of the front passenger front airbag.
     in the central part of the
Deactivate the front passenger front airbag dashboard ››› Fig. 18.
only if you have to use a rear-facing child ● When reactivating the airbag, check that
seat in the front passenger seat. when the ignition is switched on, the  
control lamp does not light up and the  

25
 Safety

Knee airbag* when it is deployed. Objects should never be

placed or mounted in this area.

WARNING
● The knee airbag is deployed in front of
the driver's knees. Always keep the deploy-
ment areas of the knee airbags free.
● Never not fix objects to the cover or in the
deployment area of the knee airbag.
● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a
distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be- Fig. 22 Illustration of completely inflated side
tween your knees and the location of the airbags on the left side of the vehicle.
Fig. 19 On the driver side: location of the knee this airbag. If your physical constitution
airbag prevents you from meeting these require- The side airbags are located in the driver's
ments, make sure you contact a special- seat and front passenger seat backrests
ised workshop. ››› Fig. 21.
The locations are identified by the text “AIR-
BAG” in the upper region of the backrests.
Side airbags* In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-
bag system provides additional protection for
the upper body in the event of a severe side
collision ››› .
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the
risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the
Fig. 20 On the driver side: airbag action radius body facing the impact. In addition to their
for the knees. normal protection, the seat belts also hold
the passengers in the event of a side collision;
The knee airbag is located on the driver side this is how these airbags provide maximum
below the dash panel ››› Fig. 19. Airbags are protection.
identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
Fig. 21 Side airbag in driver's seat.
The area framed in red (deployment area)
››› Fig. 20 is covered by the knee airbag
26
 Airbag system

WARNING holders) to the doors. This would impair the Head-protection airbags*
● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
protection offered by the side airbags.
forward, or are not seated correctly while ● The built-in coat hooks should be used
the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
risk of injury if the side airbag system is any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
triggered in an accident. pockets.
● In order for the side airbags to provide ● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
their maximum protection, the prescribed must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-
sitting position must always be maintained ster because the system may be damaged.
with seat belts fastened while travelling. In this case, the side airbags would not be
● In a side-on collision the side airbags will
triggered.
not work if the sensors do not correctly ● Under no circumstances should protec-
measure the pressure increase on the inte- tive covers be fitted over seats with side Fig. 23 Location of head-protection airbags.
rior of the doors, due to air escaping airbags unless the covers have been ap-
through the areas with holes or openings in proved for use in your vehicle. Because the The head-protection airbags are located on
the door panel. airbag deploys from the side of the back- both sides in the interior above the doors
● Never drive if the interior door panels
rest, the use of conventional seat covers ››› Fig. 23 and are identified with the text “AIR-
would obstruct the side airbag, seriously BAG”.
have been removed or if the panels have
reducing the airbag's effectiveness.
not been correctly fitted. In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-
● Any damage to the original seat uphols- protection airbag system gives the vehicle
● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-
tery or around the seams of the side airbag occupants additional protection for the head
ers in the door panels have been removed,
units must be repaired immediately by a and upper body in the event of a severe side
unless the holes left by the loudspeakers
specialised workshop.
have been closed properly. collision ››› .
● The airbags provide protection for just
● Always check that the openings are The area framed in red is covered by the
one accident; replace them once they have
closed or covered if loudspeakers or other head-protection airbag when it is deployed
deployed.
equipment are fitted inside the door pan-
● Any work on the side airbag system or re-
››› Fig. 23 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-
els.
jects should never be placed or mounted in
moval and installation of the airbag com-
● Occupants of the outer seats must never this area ››› .
ponents for other repairs (such as removal
carry any objects or pets in the deploy-
of the front seat) should only be performed In the event of a side collision the head-pro-
ment space between them and the airbags,
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, tection airbag is triggered on the impact side
or allow children or other passengers to
travel in this position. It is also important
faults may occur during the airbag system of the vehicle. »
operation.
not to attach any accessories (such as cup

27
 Safety

The head-protection airbags reduce the risk

of injury to passengers in the front and rear
● Any work on the head-protection airbag Transporting children
system or removal and installation of the
side seats facing the impact. airbag components for other repairs (such safely
as removal of the roof lining) should only
WARNING be performed by a specialised workshop.
● In order for the head-protection airbags Otherwise, faults may occur during the air- Safety for children
to provide their maximum protection, the bag system operation.
prescribed sitting position must always be ● The side and head airbags are managed Related video
maintained with seat belts fastened while through sensors located in the interior of
travelling. the front doors. To ensure the correct oper-
● For safety reasons, the head-protection ation of the side and head-protection air-
airbag must be disabled in those vehicles bags neither the doors nor the door panels
fitted with a screen dividing the interior of should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting
the vehicle. See your technical service to loudspeakers). If the front door is dam-
make this adjustment. aged, the airbag system may not work cor-
rectly. All work carried out on the front door Fig. 24 Vehicle interior
● There must be no other persons, animals
must be done in a specialised workshop.
or objects between the occupants of the
outer seats and the deployment space of
the head-protection airbags so that the Introduction
head-protection airbag can deploy com-
pletely without restriction and provide the For safety reasons, as we have learned from
greatest possible protection. Therefore, accident statistics, we recommend that chil-
sun blinds which have not been expressly dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
approved for use in your vehicle may not be seats. Depending on their age, height and
attached to the side windows weight, children travelling in rear seats must
● The built-in coat hooks should be used use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave sons, the child seat should be installed in the
any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or
pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on in the centre back seat.
coat hangers.
The physical laws involved and the forces
● The airbags provide protection for just acting in a collision apply also to children
one accident; replace them once they have ››› page 17. But unlike adults, children do not
deployed.

28
 Transporting children safely

have fully developed muscle and bone struc- Child seats group classification Child seats that have been tested and ap-
tures. This means that children are subject to proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129
a greater risk of injury. standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or
ECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-
with the test number below it).
ways use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle. Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
We recommend the use of child safety prod-
stalling and using child seats.
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-
gramme, which includes systems for all ages We recommend you to always include the
made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
www.seat.com). together with the on-board documentation.
These systems have been especially de- Fig. 25 Examples of child seats. SEAT recommends you use child seats from
signed and approved, complying with the the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
ECE-R44. regulation. Use only child seats that are officially ap- child seats have been designed and tested
proved and suitable for the child. for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE- child seat for your model and age group at
observe any statutory requirements when in-
R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco- SEAT dealers.
stalling and using child seats. Always read
and note ››› page 30. nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.
Child seats by approval category
We recommend you always carry the manu-
Child seats by weight group Child seats may have the approval category
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific
gether with the on-board documentation.
ries: (all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-
Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).
Age group Weight of the child ● Universal: child seats with universal appro-
Group 0 Up to 10 kg val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no
need to consult any list of models. In the case
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child
Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg
seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether
belt.
Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg ● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,
Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg in addition to the standard requirements of »
29
 Safety

universal approval, requires safety devices to Fitting and using child seats Warnings about fitting a child seat
lock the child seat, which require additional Take the following general warnings into ac-
testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- count if you are going to fit a child seat. They
proval include a list of vehicle models for are valid for all child seats regardless of their
which they can be installed. attachment system.
● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval
requires a dynamic test of the child seat for ● Please read and follow the child seat man-
each vehicle model separately. Child seats ufacturer's operating instructions.
with vehicle-specific approval also include a ● The child seat should preferably be fitted to
list of vehicle models for which they can be the rear seat behind the front passenger seat
installed. so that the child can exit the vehicle on the
Fig. 26 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sun
● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must visor pavement side.
meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE- ● Set the height of the seat belt such that it
R 129 standard in relation to installation and adapts to the child seat naturally, without
safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt
which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi- height regulator must be used with rear-fac-
cle. ing child seats.
● To correctly use a child seat in the back,
the front backrest must be adjusted so that
there is no contact with the child seat in the
back in the case that it goes opposite to the
direction of the car. In the case of front facing
restraint systems, the front backrest must be
adjusted so that there is no contact with the
child's feet.
Fig. 27 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the
passenger side door ● If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-
led, in which the method of attachment to the
car is through the seat belt and support

30
 Transporting children safely

bracket, it should never be installed in the with such force that it can cause serious or highest, most upright position. If you have a
central rear seat as the ground clearance is fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old fixed seat, do not install any child restraint
lower than in other places and the support should always travel on the rear seat. system in this location.
bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-
Therefore we strongly recommend you to ● For those vehicles that do not include a
ciently stable. key lock switch to deactivate the airbag,
transport children on the rear seats. This is
● When fitting a child seat on the front pas- the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- the vehicle must be taken to a technical
senger seat, the seat must be moved back- ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- service. Do not forget to reconnect the air-
wards as far as possible and placed in the bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 25. bag when an adult wants to sit in the front
highest position. The backrest must also be When transporting children, use a child seat passenger seat.
put in a vertical position1). suitable for the age and size of each child ● Never allow a child to be transported in a
››› page 29. vehicle without being properly secured, or
Important information about the front pas- to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-
senger front airbag WARNING ling. In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal
A sticker with important information about the ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-
injuries to themselves and to the other vehi-
passenger airbag is located on the passeng- senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- cle occupants.
er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
● Never leave a child alone in the child seat
door frame ››› Fig. 26. accident increases.
or in the vehicle.
● An inflating front passenger airbag can
Read and always observe the safety informa- ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall
tion included in the following chapters: strike the rear-facing child seat and project
must not wear a normal seat belt without a
it with great force against the door, the roof
child seat, as this could cause injuries to
● Safety distance with respect to the passen- or the backrest.
the abdominal and neck areas during a
ger airbag ››› page 21. ● Never install a child seat facing back-
sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-
● Objects between the passenger and the wards on the front passenger seat unless dent.
passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags the front passenger front airbag has been
● When a child seat is mounted in the rear
disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to
on page 24. seats, the door child-proof lock should be
the child! However, if necessary, the front
activated ››› page 111.
The passenger side front airbag, when ena- passenger front airbag must be deactiva-
bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing ted ››› page 25. If the passenger seat has a
backward since the airbag can strike the seat height adjustment option, move it to the

1) Compliance with current national legislation

and the manufacturer's instructions is required

when using or installing child seats.
31
 Safety

Attachment systems ● Automatic three-point seat belt. When- this type of seat you should also consult the
ever possible, it is preferable to attach the list of approved vehicles for this assembly,
Depending on the country, different attach- child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than available in the instructions for child restraint
ment systems are used for safely installing attaching them with an automatic three-point systems.
child seats. seat belt ››› page 36.
Recommended systems for attaching
Additional attachment: child seats
Attachment systems overview
● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach- ● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided SEAT recommends attaching child seats as
ment system allowing quick and safe attach- over the back of the rear seat and attached follows:
ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at- to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points
● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-
tachment establishes a rigid connection be- are located at the back of the rear seat back-
tween the child seat and the car body. rest on the boot side ››› page 35. The rings site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support
for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked bracket or i-Size.
The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, with an anchor symbol. ● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-
called connectors. These connectors are fit- FIX and Top Tether.
● Support bracket: some child seats rest on
ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found
the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.
between the seat cushion and the backrest WARNING
The support bracket prevents the child seat
of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-
from tipping forward in the event of impact. Incorrect use of the support bracket can
FIX attachment systems are used mainly in
Child seats fitted with a support bracket cause serious or fatal injury.
Europe ››› page 33. If necessary, ISOFIX at-
should only be used in the passenger seat ● Make sure the support bracket is correct-
tachment may have to be supplemented with
and side rear seats ››› . For the assembly of ly and safely installed.
a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

32
 Transporting children safely

Fix a child seat with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* system

Fig. 28 Rear seat: ISOFIX securing rings. Fig. 29 Rear seats: fitting a child seat with the
ISOFIX system.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily secured to the seat frame and, in others, they hind the seat backrest or in the boot)
and safely on the rear side seats with the are secured to the rear floor. The “ISOFIX” ››› page 35.
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system. rings are located between the rear seat
To understand the compatibility of the “ISO-
backrest and the seat cushioning ››› Fig. 28.
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on each FIX” systems in the vehicle, check the table
The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear
rear side seat. In some vehicles, the rings are below.
part of the backrests of the rear seats (be-

Vehicle Isofix positions

Electrical
Weight group Size classa) Front passenger seat
equipment Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag on airbag off
F ISO/L1 X X X X
Baby carrier
G ISO/L2 X X X X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.
IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's
vehicle list into account.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class. »
33
 Safety

Vehicle Isofix positions

Electrical
Weight group Size classa) Front passenger seat
equipment Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag on airbag off
Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- X X --- X

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- X X --- X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.
IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's
vehicle list into account.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.
a) The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the class

according to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat.

Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX” ● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX/iSize” the correspondent ring ››› page 35. Ob-
system retaining rings until it is heard to engage se- serve the manufacturer's instructions.
You are obliged to follow the seat manufac- curely ››› Fig. 29. If the child seat is equipped ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure
turer's instructions. with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to that it is properly anchored.

34
 Transporting children safely

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* Top Tether* securing belts
attachment system are available from Tech-
nical Services.

WARNING
The retaining rings are designed only for
use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system
child seats.
● Never secure other child seats that do
not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys-
tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas- Fig. 31 Back of the rear seats: Top Tether se-
tening rings - this can result in potentially curing rings.
fatal injuries to the child.
● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- Child seats with the Top Tether system come
rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-
securing rings. cle anchor point, located at the back of the
rear seat backrest and provide greater re-
straint.
The objective of this strap is to reduce for-
ward movements of the child seat in a crash,
to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from
hitting the inside of the vehicle.
Fig. 30 Rear seats: adjustment and assembly
according to the Top Tether belt. Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-
ted seats
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child
safety seats that have Top Tether. Please
carefully read and follow the seat manufac-
turer instructions to learn the proper way to
install the Top Tether strap. »

35
 Safety

Securing the retainer strap ● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu- WARNING
● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to facturer's instructions.
An undue installation of the safety seat will
deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining increase the risk of injury in the event of a
strap. Releasing the retaining strap
crash.
● Place the belt under the headrest of the ● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-
● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in
back seat ››› Fig. 30 (depending on the in- er's instructions. the luggage compartment.
structions of the chair itself, lift or remove the ● Push the lock and release it from the an- ● Never secure or tie luggage or other
headrest if necessary). choring support. items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or
● Slide the strap and secure it properly with the upper ones (Top Tether).
the anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 31.

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

If you want to fit a universal approval catego- cle. You will find any necessary information bel. The following table shows the different
ry (U) child seat in your vehicle, you must on the child seat’s orange ECE approval la- fitting options.
check that the seat is approved for your vehi-

36
 Transporting children safely

Seating position

Weight group Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

Airbag activated airbag disabledc)

Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF

X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration.
U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.
UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.
a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.
b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.
c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt WARNING

● Set the height of the seat belt such that it
When travelling, children must be secured
adapts to the child seat naturally, without in the vehicle with a restraint system suita-
twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt ble for age, weight and size.
height regulator must be used with rear-fac- ● Read and always observe information
ing child seats. and warnings concerning the use of child
● Put the seat belt in place and pass it seats ››› page 30.
through the child seat according to the in-
structions of the child seat manufacturer.
● Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
● Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle
until you hear the engagement click.
37
 Emergencies

Emergencies 5

6
Jack*
Hook for extracting the central wheel
Tyre repairs
trims* TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*
Self-help Some of the items listed are only provided in
The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)
certain model versions, or are optional extras.
Emergency equipment will reliably seal punctures caused by the
penetration of a foreign body of up to about
WARNING
4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign
Vehicle tool kit When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
and spare wheel are loose in the interior
they can be violently thrown in case of a After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,
sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe- you must again check the tyre pressure
cially in accidents, causing serious injury. about 10 minutes after starting the engine.
● Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre You should only use the tyre mobility set if the
mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo- vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-
rary spare wheel are safely secured in the miliar with the procedure and you have the
luggage compartment. necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you
should seek professional assistance.
WARNING
Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following
Fig. 32 Underneath the floor panel of the lug- cases:
cause injury or accidents.
gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.
● Never work with inappropriate or dam- ● If the wheel rim has been damaged.
The vehicle tool kit is located under the floor aged tools. ● In outside temperatures below -20°C
panel in the luggage compartment. To ac- (-4°F).
cess the vehicle tools ››› page 139. Note ● In the event of cuts or perforations in the
The tool kit includes: The jack does not generally require any tyre greater than 4 mm.
maintenance. If required, it should be ● If you have been driving with very low pres-
1 Adapter for the anti-theft bolt* greased using universal type grease. sure or a completely flat tyre.
2 Towing eye, removable ● If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
3 Wheel spanner* date.
4 Crank handle for jack

38
 Self-help

WARNING ual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of Anti-puncture kit contents*
involuntary movement of the vehicle.
Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-
gerous, especially when filling the tyre at
the roadside. Please observe the following WARNING
rules to minimise the risk of injury:
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- same performance properties as a conven-
ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur- tional tyre.
rounding traffic to fill the tyre.
● Never drive faster than 80 km/h
● Ensure the ground on which you park is (50 mph).
flat and solid.
● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking
● All passengers and particularly children and fast cornering.
must keep a safe distance from the work
● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
area.
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn the tyre.
other road users. Fig. 33 Standard representation: anti-punc-
ture kit contents.
● Use the tyre mobility system only if you
For the sake of the environment
are familiar with the necessary procedures. The anti-puncture kit is located underneath
Otherwise, you should seek professional Dispose of used or expired sealant observ-
the floor covering in the luggage compart-
assistance. ing any legal requirements.
ment. It includes the following components
● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem- ››› Fig. 33:
porary emergency use only until you can Note
reach the nearest specialised workshop. 1 Valve insert remover
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased
● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre at SEAT dealerships. 2 A sticker to be adhered to the instrument
mobility set as soon as possible. cluster, within the driver's visual field, to
● The sealant is a health hazard and must remind that the maximum advisable
Note
be cleaned immediately if it comes into speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
contact with the skin. Take into account the separate instruction
3 Filler tube with cap
manual of the tyre mobility set* manufac-
● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of
turer. 4 Air compressor
the reach of small children.
5 ON/OFF switch
● Always stop the engine, apply the hand
brake and put it in gear when using a man- 6 Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated
in the inflator tube). »
39
 Emergencies

7 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- ● Remove the bottle from the valve. ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
toring system (it can also be integrated in ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
the inflator tube). ing the tool ››› Fig. 33 1 . ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
8 Tube for inflating tyres 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
9 12 volt connector Inflating the tyre 80 km/h (50 mph).
● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube ● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 33 2 to the instru-
10 Bottle of sealant
››› Fig. 33 8 into the tyre valve. ment cluster, within the driver's visual field.
11 Spare tyre valve
● Check that the air bleed screw is closed ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at ››› Fig. 33 6 . ››› page 41.
the lower end for a valve insert. The valve in- ● Start the engine and leave it running.
sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this WARNING
● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 33 9 into the
way. This also applies to its replacement part When inflating the wheel, the air compres-
11 . vehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 154.
sor and the inflator tube may become hot.
● Turn the air compressor on with the
● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
ON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 33 5 .
● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube
Sealing and inflating a tyre ● Keep the air compressor running until it rea-
or hot air compressor on flammable mate-
ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). rial.
Sealing the tyre A maximum of 8 minutes.
● Allow them to cool before storing the de-
● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use ● Disconnect the air compressor. vice.
the ››› Fig. 33 1 tool to remove the insert. ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated, ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
Place it on a clean surface. unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
››› Fig. 33 10 .
distributed throughout the tyre. good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 33 3 into tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the
the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break valve.
automatically. CAUTION
● Repeat the inflation process.
● Remove the lid from the filling tube Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-
● If the indicated pressure still cannot be
››› Fig. 33 3 and screw the open end of the mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid
tube into the tyre valve. reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
overheating! Before switching on the air
and request assistance from an authorised compressor again, let it cool for several mi-
● With the bottle upside down, empty all of
technician. nutes.
the contents into the tyre.

40
 Self-help

Check after 10 minutes of driving Changing a wheel ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and
wait in a safe place (for instance behind the
Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 33 5 again roadside crash barrier).
and check the pressure on the gauge 6 .
Related video
WARNING
1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: ● Always observe the above steps and pro-
● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be tect yourself and other road users.
sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block
● You should obtain professional assistance the wheel on the opposite side of the car
with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-
››› . Fig. 34 Wheels cle from moving.

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:

● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value
What to do first Integral wheel trim
again.
● Carefully resume your journey until you ● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and
reach the nearest specialised workshop with- in a safe place as far away from traffic as
out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). possible.
● Have the damaged tyre replaced. ● Apply the electronic parking brake.
● Switch on the hazard warning lights.
WARNING
● Manual transmission: select the 1st gear.
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
● Automatic transmission: Move the selector
and can cause accidents and serious in-
jury. lever to position P.
● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from
sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. your vehicle. Fig. 35 Remove the wheel cover.
● Seek specialist assistance. ● Have the vehicle tool kit ››› page 38 and
the spare wheel* ready ››› page 354. The wheel covers must be removed for ac-
cess to the wheel nuts.
● Observe the applicable legislation for each
country (reflective vest, warning triangles,
Removing
etc.).
● Take the wheel brace and the wire hook
from the vehicle tool kit ››› page 38. »
41
 Emergencies

● Hook the wire through one of the grooves of Removal ● Insert the special adapter ››› Fig. 37 1 (ve-
the trim. ● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools ››› Fig. 32) hicle tools ››› page 38) onto the anti-theft
● Insert the box spanner through the hook, over the cap until it clicks into place wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.
rest it on the tyre and remove the wheel trim ››› Fig. 36. ● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto
››› Fig. 35. ● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. the adapter as far as it will go.
● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 43.
Fitting The caps protect the wheel nuts and should
● Press the trim against the wheel so that the be remounted after changing the tyre. Note
hole for the valve fits over the tyre valve. The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a Make a note of the code number of the an-
● Make sure that the trim is correctly fitted all special cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe
the way around the wheel. If you are using an bolts and is not for use with standard wheel place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a
anti-theft wheel lock, screw it in the opposite nuts. new adapter, you can obtain it from the
position to the valve. SEAT Official Service, indicating the code
number.

Anti-theft wheel nuts

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 37 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and

Fig. 36 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps. adapter.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt

● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.

42
 Self-help

Loosening wheel nuts If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push and cause an accident, serious injury and
on the end of the wheel wrench with your loss of vehicle control.
foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and
● Use only wheel nuts which correspond to
take care not to slip during this operation.
the rim in question.
● Never use different wheel nuts.
Loosening wheel nuts
● Wheel nuts and threads should be clean,
● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go
free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-
››› Fig. 38. sible to screw them easily.
● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the ● To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, only
bolt approximately one turn anticlock- use the wheel wrench that came with the
wise ››› . car from the factory.
● The wheel nuts should only be loosened
Fig. 38 Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.
Important information about wheel nuts slightly (about one turn) before raising the
Factory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe- vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!
cially matched during construction. There- ● Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or
fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts
wheel nuts with the right length and heads have been tightened to the prescribed tor-
must be used. This ensures that wheels are que, they could come loose while driving.
fitted securely and that the brake system ● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel
functions correctly. rims with bolted ring trims.
In certain circumstances, you should not even ● If wheel nuts are tightened below the
use wheel nuts from vehicles of the same prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could
model. come loose while driving. If tightening tor-
Fig. 39 Wheel change: tyre valve 1 and the que is too high, the wheel nuts or threads
In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft can be damaged.
correct position for the anti-theft wheel locking
bolt 2 or 3 . locking bolt must be threaded onto positions
››› Fig. 39 2 or 3 , taking the tyre valve’s po-
Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not be
car to loosen the wheel nuts. possible to mount the hubcap.

Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turn WARNING

before raising the vehicle with the jack.
If the wheel nuts are not properly tight-
ened, they could come loose while driving
43
 Emergencies

Raise the vehicle ● Find the support point on the strut (sunken
you do not, the jack* could slip as it does
area) closest to the wheel to be changed not have an adequate grip on the vehicle:
››› Fig. 40. risk of injury!
● Turn the jack* crank handle, located below ● You should never place a body limb such
the strut support point, to raise it until the as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that
tab 1 ››› Fig. 41 is below the housing provi- is solely supported by the jack.
ded. ● If you have to work underneath the vehi-
● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” onto cle, you must use suitable stands addition-
the housing provided on the strut and the mo- ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of
bile base 2 is resting on the ground. The accident!.
base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- ● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one
spect to the support point 1 . side or the engine is running.
Fig. 40 Jack position points. ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is
● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is
slightly lifted off the ground. raised. The vehicle may come loose from
the jack due to the engine vibrations.
WARNING
The factory-supplied jack* is only de- CAUTION
signed for changing wheels on this model. The vehicle must not be raised on the
On no account attempt to use it for lifting crossbar. Only place the jack* on the
heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in- points designed for this purpose on the
jury. strut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam-
● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. aged.
If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*
could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-
Fig. 41 Cross member: positioning the jack on
sultant risk of injury.
the vehicle. Removing and installing a wheel
● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-
● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks, Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
ground. If necessary use a large, strong even those approved for other SEAT mod- nuts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
board or similar support. If the surface is slip- els could slip, with the consequent risk of
injury. When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may
pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a
● Only mount the jack* on the support hit and damage the brake disc. For this rea-
rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-
son, please take care and get a second per-
ping ››› . points designed for this purpose on the
strut, and always align the jack correctly. If son to assist you.
44
 Self-help

Taking off the wheel tightening torque checked immediately with a Works after changing a wheel
● Unscrew the wheel nuts using the box torque wrench that is working perfectly.
● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.
spanner and place them on a clean surface. Before checking tightening torque, have any
● Take off the wheel. rusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw re- ● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap .
placed and clean the wheel hub threads. ● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-
Putting on the spare wheel Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to tion.
Check the direction of rotation of the tyre the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the
››› page 45. been tightened to the prescribed torque, they spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-
could come loose while driving. gage compartment ››› page 138.
● Place the spare wheel or temporary spare
● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-
wheel into position.
ted tyre as soon as possible.
● Screw on the wheel nuts in position and Tyres with directional tread pattern ● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-
tighten them loosely with a box spanner.
tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory
● To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nuts Tyres with directional tread pattern have
››› page 352.
use the corresponding adaptor. been designed to operate best when rotating
● Have the tightening torque of the wheel
in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre
● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*. nuts checked as soon as possible with a tor-
sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on
● Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the tyres with directional tread. Always observe que wrench ››› page 45. Meanwhile, drive
wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di- the indicated direction of rotation in order to carefully.
agonal pairs (not in a circle). guarantee optimum grip and help avoid ● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as
● Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear. possible.
››› page 41. If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction
The wheel nuts should be clean and turn of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the
easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- of particular importance when the road sur-
ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos-
ting the wheel. sible or remount it with the correct direction
of rotation.
Tightening torque of the wheel nuts
The recommended tightening torque for
wheel nuts for steel and alloy wheels is
120 Nm. After changing a wheel, have the
45
 Emergencies

Changing the windscreen Note

wiper blades ● The windscreen wiper arms can be

moved to the service position only when
the bonnet is properly closed.
Wiper service position
● You can also use the service position, for
example, if you want to fix a cover over the
windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of
ice.

Fig. 44 Changing the rear wiper blade

Changing the wiper rear wiper
blades The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as
standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is
responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.
If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of
Fig. 42 Wipers in service position. the water as it is wiped across the windscreen
will be louder.
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-
The wiper arms can be raised when the wip- ularly. If the wipers scrape across the
ers are in service position ››› Fig. 42. glass, they should be changed if they are
damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .
● Close the bonnet ››› page 331.
If this does not produce the desired results,
● Switch the ignition on and off.
Fig. 43 Changing the windscreen wiper the setting angle of the windscreen wiper
● Press the windscreen wiper lever down- arms might be incorrect. They should be
blades
wards briefly ››› page 127 4 . checked by a specialised workshop and cor-
rected if necessary.
Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.
Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind- Damaged windscreen wiper blades should
screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- be replaced immediately. These are availa-
tion. ble from qualified workshops.

46
 Self-help

Raising and lowering windscreen wiper ● Hold down the release button 1 while gen- CAUTION
arms tly pulling the blade in the direction of arrow
● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the
B .
● Place the windscreen wipers in the service wiper arms, only leave them in the service
position ››› page 46. ● Insert a new blade of the same length and position.
● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-
● Before driving, always lower the wiper
fastening point. rection to the arrow B and hook into place
arms.
button 1 .
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades ● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

● Raise the wiper arms.

WARNING Jump start
● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt
Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-
from the windscreen wiper blades.
duce visibility and increase the risk of acci- Jump leads
● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or dent and serious injury.
damp cloth may be used ››› . ● Always replace damaged or worn wind- The jump lead must have a sufficient wire
screen wiper blades or blades that no lon- cross section.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades ger clean the windscreen properly. If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
● Lift and unfold the wiper arms. charged battery, the battery can be connec-
● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 43 1 CAUTION ted to the battery of another vehicle to start
and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di- ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers
the engine.
rection of the arrow. could scratch the glass. Jump leads must comply with standard DIN
● Fit a new wiper blade of the same length ● If products containing solvents, rough 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-
and design on to the wiper arm and hook it sponges or sharp objects are used to clean tions). The wire cross section must be at least
into place. the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least
● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind- aged. 35 mm2 for diesel engines.
screen. ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint
thinner or similar products to clean the win- Note
Changing the rear wiper blade dows. ● The vehicles must not touch each other,

● Lift and fold the wiper arm. ● In icy conditions, always check that the otherwise electricity could flow as soon as
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- the positive terminals are connected.
● Turn the blade slightly ››› Fig. 44 (arrow A ). fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it ● The discharged battery must be properly
may help to leave the vehicle parked with connected to the on-board network.
the wipers in service position ››› page 46.

47
 Emergencies

Jump start: description 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
the positive + terminal of the vehicle flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes
with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 45. until the engine is running.
3. Connect the other end of the red jump
lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- Removing the jump leads
hicle providing assistance B . 9. Before you remove the jump leads,
4a. In vehicles without a Start-Stop system: switch off the dipped beam headlights if
connect one end of the black jump lead they are switched on.
to the negative terminal – of the vehicle 10. Turn on the heater blower and heated
providing the current B ››› Fig. 45. rear window in the vehicle with the flat
4b. In vehicles with a Start-stop system: battery. This helps minimise voltage
connect one end of the black jump lead peaks which are generated when the
Fig. 45 Diagram of connections for vehicles leads are disconnected.
X to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-
without Start Stop system
id piece of metal in the engine block, or 11. When the engine is running, disconnect
to the engine block itself ››› Fig. 46. the leads in reverse order to the details
5. Connect the other end of the black jump given above.
lead X to a solid metal component bol-
Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient
ted to the engine block or to the engine
metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-
block itself of the vehicle with the flat
minals.
battery. Do not connect it to a point near
the battery A . If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-
6. Position the leads in such a way that onds, switch off the starter and try again after
they cannot come into contact with any about 1 minute.
moving parts in the engine compart-
Fig. 46 Diagram of connections for vehicles ment. WARNING
with Start Stop system ● Please note the safety warnings referring
Starting to working in the engine compartment
Jump lead terminal connections ››› page 331.
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles boosting battery and let it run at idling ● The battery providing assistance must
››› . speed. have the same voltage as the flat battery

48
 Self-help

(12V) and approximately the same capaci- Note Keyless Access system, the steering wheel
ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com- could lock ››› .
The vehicles must not touch each other,
ply could result in an explosion.
otherwise electricity could flow as soon as
● Never use jump leads when one of the
WARNING
the positive terminals are connected.
batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! A vehicle with no power should never be
Even after the battery has thawed, battery towed.
acid could leak and cause chemical burns. ● When towing, never remove the ignition
If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. Tow start and towing key or disconnect the ignition with the start
● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga- button. Otherwise, the electronic lock of
rettes away from batteries, danger of ex- Introduction the steering column could suddenly be-
plosion. Failure to comply could result in an come blocked and it would be impossible
explosion. Tow-starting means starting the engine of to steer the vehicle. This could cause an
● Observe the instructions provided by the accident, serious injury and loss of control
the vehicle while another pulls it.
manufacturer of the jump leads. of the vehicle.
Towing means one vehicle pulling another ● If during towing the vehicle runs out of
● Do not connect the negative cable from
that is not roadworthy. power, stop towing immediately and re-
the other vehicle directly to the negative
terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit- Always consider the legal provisions relating quest the assistance of specialist person-
ted from the battery could be ignited by to tow-starting and towing. nel.
sparks. Danger of explosion.
For technical reasons, towing a vehicle
● Never attach the negative cable to fuel WARNING
with a discharged battery is not allowed.
system components or the brake lines in The jump start should be used instead Vehicle handling and braking capacity
the other vehicle.
››› page 47. change considerably during towing. Please
● The non-insulated parts of the battery observe the following instructions to mini-
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access mise the risk of serious accidents and in-
jump lead attached to the positive battery system, towing is only allowed with the igni- jury:
terminal must not touch metal parts of the tion on!
● As the driver of the vehicle being towed:
vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is – You should depress the brake much
● Position the leads in such a way that they towed with the engine switched off and the harder as the brake servo does not op-
cannot come into contact with any moving ignition connected. Depending on the battery erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid
parts in the engine compartment. charge status, the drop in voltage may be so crashing into the towing vehicle.
● Do not lean on the batteries. This could large, even after just a few minutes, that no – More strength is required at the steer-
result in chemical burns. electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g. ing wheel as the power steering does »
the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the
49
 Emergencies

not operate when the engine is switch- electronic lock of the steering column be re- umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no
ed off. leased if they are activated. power supply or there is an electric system
● As the driver of the towing vehicle: ● If the battery is flat, it is possible that the fault, the engine must be tow-started to de-
engine control units may not operate correct- activate the electronic parking brake and
– Accelerate with particular care and
ly. the electronic lock of the steering column.
caution.
– Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
However, if the vehicle must absolutely be
– Brake earlier than usual and more tow-started (in the case of manual gear- Towing instructions
smoothly. boxes):
● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear. Towing requires some expertise and experi-
CAUTION ence, especially when using a tow rope. Both
● Keep the clutch pressed down.
● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam-
drivers should be familiar with the difficulties
● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- involved in towing. For this reason, inexper-
ple the paint, remove and replace the lid
and towing eye carefully.
ing lights of both vehicles. ienced drivers should abstain from towing.
● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic
● Once both vehicles are moving, release the During towing, it should be ensured that no
converter and damage it during towing. clutch. impermissible tractive forces or shocks are
● Once the engine starts, press the clutch generated. When towing on an unpaved
and disengage the gear to avoid colliding road, there is always a risk of overloading and
with the towing vehicle. damaging the anchorage points.
Instructions for tow-starting
During towing, the towing vehicle can signal
Vehicle's should not generally be tow- CAUTION
the change of direction even with the hazard
started. The jump start should be used in- ● When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could warning lights turned on. To do so, at the
stead ››› page 47. enter the catalytic converter and damage same time, the turn signal lever must be oper-
it. ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, the
For technical reasons, towing the following
vehicles is not allowed: ● Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m hazard warning lights will go off. When the
in attempt to start it. There is risk of dam- turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi-
● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. age to the catalytic converter. tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto-
● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- matically reactivated.
cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access Note
locking and ignition system the steering re- Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
The vehicle can only be tow-started if the
mains locked and the electronic parking electronic parking brake and, if appropri- ● Leave the ignition on, so that the steering is
brake cannot be deactivated nor can the ate, the electronic lock of the steering col- not blocked, and the electronic parking brake

50
 Self-help

may be deactivated and the turn signals and If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de- pended, the engine must be switched off,
wash/wipe operated. vice, towing with a tow bar is only permitted otherwise the transmission may be damaged.
● More strength is required at the steering if it has been specially designed to be instal-
wheel as the power steering does not oper- led on a tow hitch ››› page 308. Cases where towing the vehicle is not per-
ate when the engine is switched off. mitted
When the vehicle has to be towed: ● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-
● You should depress the brake much harder
as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid Check whether the vehicle may be towed cant.
hitting the towing vehicle. ››› page 51, Cases where towing the vehi- ● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-
cle is not permitted. cause the steering remains locked and, if ap-
● Bear in mind the information and instruc-
tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed. The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or propriate, the electronic parking brake can-
tow rope in the normal way, with all four not be deactivated or the electronic lock of
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle wheels on the road; it can also be towed with the steering column released.
● Accelerate with particular care and cau- either the front or rear wheels lifted off the ● If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-
road. elled.
tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.
● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly. ● Switch the ignition on. ● When, for example, after an accident, the
smooth rotation of the wheels or the steering
● Bear in mind the information and instruc- ● Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-
operation cannot be guaranteed.
tions in the manual of the towed vehicle. lector lever in the N ››› page 254 position.
● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:
Tow rope or tow bar speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).
● Observe legal requirements.
It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a ● The vehicle must not be towed further than
● Keep in mind the instructions in the manual
tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A 50 km (30 miles).
tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is on towing vehicles.
● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with
not available.
automatic transmission are only allowed to CAUTION
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid be towed with the front wheels suspended.
If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-
damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to
cant in the automatic transmission the car
use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim- Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive
may only be towed with the driven wheels
ilarly elastic material. (4Drive) lifted clear of the road, or transported on a
Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be special car transporter or trailer. »
the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket. towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehi-
cle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-

51
 Emergencies

Note that can completely and securely tighten the

towing eye in its housing.
The vehicle can only be towed if the elec-
● After towing, unscrew the towing eye
tronic parking brake and the electronic
lock of the steering column are deactiva- clockwise with a suitable object.
ted. If the vehicle has no power supply or ● Replace the cover and tighten on its right
there is an electric system fault, the engine side until the tab snaps into the bumper.
must be tow-started ››› page 47 to deacti-
● Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
vate the electronic parking brake and the
electronic lock of the steering column.
store it in the luggage compartment along
with the other vehicle tools.
Fig. 48 Right side of the front bumper: towline
anchorage in position.
CAUTION
Front towline anchorage
The towing eye must always be completely
The housing of the removable towline an- and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be
chorage is on the right side of the front bump- released while towing and tow-starting.
er underneath a cover ››› Fig. 47.
The towing eye should always be kept in the
vehicle.
Bear in mind the instructions for towing
››› page 50.

Fitting the towline anchorage

● Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
Fig. 47 On the right side of the front bumper:
remove the cover. tool kit in the luggage compartment
››› page 38.
● Remove the cover by pressing down on its
left-hand side and leave it hanging from the
vehicle ››› Fig. 47.
● Screw the towing eye in the housing by
turning it as far as it will go anticlock-
wise ››› Fig. 48 ››› . Use a suitable object

52
 Self-help

Rear towline anchorage screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case, ● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a
the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal- towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow
led and used for towing ››› page 308, ››› . with a tow bar if this has been specially de-
Bear in mind the instructions for towing signed to be installed with a tow hitch. If an
unsuitable tow bar is used, both the tow
››› page 50.
hitch and the vehicle may be damaged. In-
stead, a tow rope should be used.
Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with-
out a factory-equipped towing bracket)
● Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit in the luggage compartment
››› page 38.
Fig. 49 On the right side of the rear bumper: ● Press the top right hand side of the cover
remove the cover. ››› Fig. 49 to unclip it.
● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-
hicle.
● Screw the towline anchorage into the hous-
ing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock-
wise ››› Fig. 50››› . Use a suitable object
that can completely and securely tighten the
towing eye in its housing.
● After towing, unscrew the towing eye
clockwise with a suitable object.
● Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
Fig. 50 Right side of the rear bumper: towline store it in the luggage compartment along
anchorage in position. with the other vehicle tools.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on the CAUTION

right side of the rear bumper behind a lid ● The towing eye must always be com-
››› Fig. 49. pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it
Vehicles equipped as standard with a towing could be released while towing and tow-
bracket do not have any housing for the starting.

53
 Emergencies

Fuses and bulbs perage (same colour and markings) and Fuses inside the vehicle
size.
● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-
Fuses ple or similar.

Introduction
CAUTION
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various ● To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec-
electrical components. Likewise, an electrical tric system, before replacing a fuse always
component can be protected by several turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-
fuses. trical elements and remove the key from
the ignition.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted Fig. 51 On the driver's side dashboard: fuse
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they box cover.
fuse blows after a short time, you must have can damage the electrical system.
the electrical system checked by a special-
Opening and closing the fuse box situated
ised workshop as soon as possible.
Note below the dash panel
WARNING ● One component may have more than one ● Open: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 51.

The high voltages in the electrical system fuse. ● Close: push back the cover it in until it clicks
can give serious electrical shocks, causing ● Several components may run on a single into place.
burns and even death! fuse.
● Never touch the electrical wiring of the ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than Identifying fuses below below the dash-
ignition system. those indicated in this chapter. board by colours
● Take care not to cause short circuits in
Colour Amp rating
the electrical system.
Black 1

WARNING Purple 3
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or Light brown 5
bridging a current circuit without fuses can
cause a fire and serious injury. Brown 7.5
● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only Red 10
replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-
54
 Fuses and bulbs

Colour Amp rating Fuses in the engine compartment Replace a blown fuse
Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

CAUTION
● Always carefully remove the fuse box
Fig. 52 In the engine compartment: fuse box
covers and refit them correctly to avoid Fig. 53 Image of a blown fuse.
cover.
problems with your vehicle.
Preparations
● Protect the fuse boxes when open to To open the engine compartment fuse box
avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and ● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-
● Open the bonnet  ››› page 331.
humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam- cal equipment.
age to the electrical system. ● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse
● Open the corresponding fuse box
box cover ››› Fig. 52.
››› page 54, ››› page 55.
● Then lift the cover out.
● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Recognise a blown fuse
Push the locking tabs down until they click
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured
audibly into place.
››› Fig. 53.
● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has
blown.

To replace a fuse
● Remove the fuse.
● Replace the blown fuse by one with an
identical amperage rating (same colour and
markings) and identical size. »
55
 Emergencies

● Replace the cover again or close the fuse

No. Consumers/Amps No. Consumers/Amps
box lid.
14 Air conditioner fan 40 36 Right LED headlight 7.5

15 KESSY 10 37 Left LED headlight 7.5

Fuse placement
16 Connectivity Box 7.5 38 Trailer 25
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same 17 Instrument panel 7.5 39 Right door 30
amperage (same colour and markings) and
size. 18 Rear camera 7.5 40 12V socket 20

Fuses in the vehicle interior 19 KESSY 7.5 42 Central locking 40

No. Consumers/Amps 20 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10/15 43 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 30

1 SCR, Adblue 20 21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15 44 Trailer 15

4 Alarm horn 7.5 22 Trailer 15 45 Electric driver's seat 15

5 Gateway 7.5 23 Sunroof 20 47 Rear window wiper 15

6 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5 24 Right lights 40 49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 7.5

Air conditioning and heating con- 25 Left door 30 52 Driving mode. 15

7 trol panel, rear window heating, AA 10
26 Heated seats 20 53 Heated rear window 30
compressor
27 Interior light 30 Fuse arrangement in engine compartment
Diagnosis, handbrake switch, light
8 switch, reverse light, interior light- 7.5 28 Trailer 25
ing, lit-up door sill No. Consumers/Amps
Parking aid control unit, front cam- 1 ESP control unit 25
9 Steering column 7.5 32 7.5
era, radar
10 Radio display 7.5 2 ESP control unit 40/60
33 Airbag 7.5
11 Left lights 40 Engine control unit (diesel/pet-
Reverse switch, clima sensor, elec- 3 30/15
34 7.5 rol)
trochromic mirror
12 Radio 20
4 Engine sensors 7.5/10
Diagnosis, headlight control unit,
13 Taxis 5 35 7.5
headlight adjuster 5 Engine sensors 7.5/10

56
 Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumers/Amps In-line fuse Amperes dangerous area ››› in Working in the en-
gine compartment on page 331.
6 Brake light sensor 7.5 Rear power sockets 7.5
Always use identical bulbs with the same
7 Engine power supply 7.5/10 designation. The name can be found on the
Note base of the bulb holder.
8 Lambda probe 10/15
● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,
9 Engine 10/20 those indicated in this chapter. These
there are different sets of headlights and tail
should only be changed by a specialised
10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20 workshop. lights:

11 PTC 40 ● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- ● Halogen headlights.

pear in the following tables.
12 PTC 40 ● Full-LED main headlights*
● Some of the equipment listed in the ta-
● Halogen headlights with LED daytime run-
13 Automatic gearbox pump 30 bles below pertain only to certain versions
of the model or are optional extras. ning lights*
15 Horn 15 ● Rear bulb light
● Please note that the above lists, while
16 Fuel pump control unit 7.5/20 correct at the time of printing, are subject ● LED rear light*
to change.
17 Engine control unit 7.5
Full-LED headlight system*
Terminal 30 (positive refer-
18 7.5 Full-LED headlights handle all light functions
ence)
Changing bulbs (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam
19 Front windscreen washer 30 and route light) with light emitting diodes
(LEDs) as a light source.
21 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30 Introduction
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the
22 Engine control unit 7.5
Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be
23 Starter motor 30 practical skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recom- replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an
mends that you consult a technical service or authorised workshop to have it replaced.
24 PTC 40
request assistance from a specialist. In gen-
31 Pressure pump 1.0 15 eral a specialist is needed if, in addition to the Bulbs (12 V)
bulbs, other vehicle components require re- Depending on the level of equipment fitted in
32 Front electronic differential 15 moval. the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or all
If you choose to change the engine compart- of the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDs
ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a have an estimated life that exceeds that of »
57
 Emergencies

the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an au- LED rear lights Type Note
thorised workshop for its replacement.
● Please check at regular intervals that all
Reverse lights W16W
Light source used for each function lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
The remaining functions work with LEDs your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
Halogen headlights. Type not only in the interest of your own safety,
WARNING but also that of all other road users.
Daytime running light/side
P21W SLL
light ● Take particular care when working on
● Before changing a bulb, make sure you

components in the engine compartment if have the correct new bulb.

Dipped beam headlights H7 LL
the engine is warm. Risk of burns. ● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb
Main beam headlights H7 LL ● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper
glass can break when you touch the bulb, towel instead, since the fingerprints left on
Turn signal PY21W LL
causing injury. the glass will vaporise as a result of the
heat generated by the bulb, they will be
● When changing bulbs, please take care
Full-LED main head- Type deposited on the reflector and will impair
lights not to injure yourself on sharp edges, in its surface.
particular on the headlight housing.
● Depending on the level of equipment fit-
No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with
LEDs ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for
CAUTION part or all of the interior and/or exterior
● Remove the ignition key before working lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that
Front fog light Type exceeds than that of the car. If an LED light
on the electric system. Otherwise, a short
Fog/cornering lights* H8 circuit could occur. fails, go to an authorised workshop for its
replacement.
● Switch off the lights and the parking light
Rear lights Type before changing a bulb.
● Take good care to avoid damaging any
Brake light/tail light P21W LL
components.
Side lights 2x W5W LL

Turn signal PY21W LL For the sake of the environment

Retro fog light H21W Please ask your specialist retailer how to
dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.
Reverse lights P21W LL

58
 Fuses and bulbs

Dipped beam headlight bulb – Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 55 3 Turn signal bulb
pressing inwards to the right.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
that the lug on the base fits into the recess
on the reflector.

Daytime running light bulb

Fig. 54 Dipped beam headlights. Fig. 57 Turn signal bulb.

Fig. 56 Day light bulb.

– Raise the bonnet.

– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 56 1 anti-

Fig. 55 Dipped beam headlights. clockwise and pull. Fig. 58 Turn signal bulb.
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
– Raise the bonnet. – Raise the bonnet.
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
– Move the loops ››› Fig. 54 1 in the direc- same time. – Move the loop ››› Fig. 57 1 in the direction
tion of the arrow and remove the cover. – Installation involves all of the above steps in of the arrow and remove the cover.
– Remove connector ››› Fig. 55 2 from the reverse sequence. – Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 58 2 anti-
bulb. clockwise and pull. »

59
 Emergencies

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb – Raise the bonnet. Front fog light bulb*
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
– Move the loop ››› Fig. 59 1 in the direction 3 Valid only for versions with incandescent bulbs
same time.
of the arrow and remove the cover.
– Installation involves all of the above steps in
– Slide connector ››› Fig. 60 2 to the left or
reverse sequence.
right and pull.
– Remove the bulb by disconnecting the con-
Main beam headlight bulb nector.
– Installation involves all of the above steps in
reverse sequence.

Fig. 59 Main beam headlight bulb.

Fig. 61 Front fog light: remove the grille.

Fig. 60 Main beam headlight bulb.

60
 Fuses and bulbs

– Check that the bulb works properly. Tail light bulbs located in the body-
work
Note
● Due to the difficulty of accessing fog
light bulbs, have them replaced at a Tech-
nical Service or specialised workshop.
● LED fog lights should only be replaced by
specialised personnel.

Fig. 62 Front fog light: remove the bulb holder

Follow the steps indicated:

– Remove the screw ››› Fig. 61 1  from the
fog light grille using a screwdriver and ex-
tract the grille.
– Remove the 3 screws ››› Fig. 61 2 .
– Remove the metal clip situated on the up-
per part of the fog light by pulling away
from the vehicle 3  and extract the fog
light.
– Remove the connector ››› Fig. 62 1 from
Fig. 63 Luggage compartment: location of the
the bulb.
bolt securing the tail light unit. Remove the rear
– Turn the bulb holder 2 anti-clockwise and light unit from side panel. »
pull.
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anticlockwise at the
same time.
– Installation involves all of the above steps in
reverse sequence.

61
 Emergencies

CAUTION Tail lights bulbs located in the rear

Take care when removing the rear light unit lid
to make sure there is no damage to the
paintwork or any of its components.

Note
Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to
place under the glass on the rear light unit,
to avoid any scratches.
Fig. 64 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail
light.

– Check which of the bulbs is defective.

– Open the rear lid.

– Remove the cover by prying the flat side of

a screwdriver into the recess and remove
the cover from the opening ››› Fig. 63 1 .
– Carefully loosen the screw located behind
the cover with a screwdriver, turning it anti-
clockwise (arrows) ››› Fig. 63 2 .
– Tilt the light in the direction of the arrows
until it comes out of its housing (positions 3 Fig. 65 Remove the cover from the boot lid and
detach the bulb holder.
and 4 ) ››› Fig. 63.
– Remove the bulb holder ››› Fig. 64 unlock-
ing the retaining tabs 1 .
– Change the damaged bulb.

– To refit follow the steps in reverse order, tak-

ing special care when fitting the bulb hold-
er. The securing tabs must click into place.

62
 Fuses and bulbs

– Reinstall the bulb holder, making sure that The rear lid must be open to change the
locking clips A ››› Fig. 65  are properly bulbs.
clipped on.
– Remove the rear lid cover in the direction
– Replace the cover of the rear lid lining. indicated ››› Fig. 67.
– Turn the reverse lights bulb holder anti-
clockwise in the direction of the arrow 1
LED tail light bulbs located in the ››› Fig. 68.
rear lid – Remove the bulb holder from its housing 2 .

– Change the defective bulb and reinstall the

Fig. 66 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder
bulb holder in its housing, following these
The rear lid must be open to change the instructions in reverse order.
bulbs. – Check that the new bulb works properly.
– Remove the rear lid cover in the direction
indicated ››› Fig. 65 .
– Unlock the retaining tabs A of the bulb
holder, following the direction of arrows 1
and 2 ››› Fig. 65 .
Fig. 67 Remove the cover from the rear lid
– Remove the bulb holder, moving it in the di-
rection of arrow 3 ››› Fig. 65 .
– Lightly press the defective bulb into the
bulb holder 1 , then turn it to the left 2 and
remove it ››› Fig. 66.
– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb
holder and turn it to the right as far as it will
go.
– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from
the glass part of the bulb.
– Check that the new bulb works properly. Fig. 68 Remove the bulb holder.

63
 Emergencies

Changing the number plate bulbs – Turn the connector lock ››› Fig. 70 in the di- Side turn signals
rection of arrow 1 and pull on the connec-
tor.
– Rotate the bulb holder in the direction of
the arrow ››› Fig. 70 2 and extract it to-
gether with the bulb.
– Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
– Insert the bulb holder into the number plate
light and rotate all the way in the opposite
direction to the arrow ››› Fig. 70 2 .
Fig. 69 In the rear bumper: Number plate light. Fig. 71 Turn signal integrated in the rear view
– Plug the connector into the bulb holder.
mirror
– Insert the number plate light carefully into
the opening on the bumper. Ensure that the The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-
number plate light is in the correct position. grated in the rear view mirrors.

– Insert the number plate light into the bump- In case of failure, go to an authorised work-
er until it audibly clicks into place. shop to have it replaced.

Additional brake light

Taking into account that it consists of LED

Fig. 70 number plate light: remove the bulb bulbs, the change should be made at a tech-
holder. nical service centre.
Follow the steps indicated:
– Press the number plate light in the direction
of the arrow ››› Fig. 69.
– Detach the number plate light.

64
 Operation

Fig. 72 Instruments and controls.

66
 Controls and displays

Operation 8

9
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control lever for:
69
18
– Automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . . .
Depending on the equipment:
157

– Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 127 – USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Controls and displays – Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 – Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-
– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Interior view 10 According to features: radio or dis- – Storage compartment
play for Easy Connect (navigation, 19 Depending on equipment fitted,
Overview radio, TV/video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 gear lever or selector lever for:

1 Door handle
11 Depending on the equipment, but- – Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
tons for: – Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
2 Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
– SEAT driving modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 20 Electronic parking brake switch . . . . . 292
3 Electric control to adjust exterior
– Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 21
– Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-
4 Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 22
– Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 cess closing and start-up sys-
5 Control lever for:
– Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
– Turn signals and main beam
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 – Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 23 Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . . . 162

– Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 270 12 Depending on the equipment, glove 24 Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-
compartment with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
– Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . 89
– CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 206 25 Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6 According to features, lever for:
13 Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 26 Adjustable steering column. . . . . . . . . . 14
– Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . 276
14 Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . . 25 27 Storage compartment
7 Steering wheel with horn and
15 Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 28 Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
16 Front passenger seat heating con- 29 Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
– On-board computer controls . . . . . 87
trol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 30 Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
– Controls for radio, telephone,
navigation and speech dialogue
17 Depending on the equipment, con- 31 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 »
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 trols for:

– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- – Heating and ventilation system or

shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 257 manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
67
 Operation

Note Instruments and warn- After switching the engine on with a 12-volt
battery that is heavily discharged or newly
● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-
tion is only fitted on certain models or are
ing/control lamps changed some system settings (such as the
time, the date, the personalised comfort set-
optional extras.
tings and the programming) might be altered
● The arrangement of switches and con- Instrument panel or deleted. Check and correct these settings
trols on right-hand drive models* may be once the battery is sufficiently charged.
slightly different from the layout shown in Introduction
››› page 66. However, the symbols used to WARNING
identify the controls are the same.
Any distraction may lead to an accident,
with the risk of injury.
● Do not operate the instrument panel con-
trols when driving.
Fig. 73 Related video: ● To reduce the risk of accident and injury,
Dash panel only make adjustments to the instructions
on the screen of the instrument panel and
The vehicle can be fitted with a instrument to the instructions on the screen of the Info-
panel digital lap timer or one Digital (SEAT tainment system when the vehicle is sta-
Cockpit). tionary.

68
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 74 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 74: 2 Engine coolant temperature display 4 Adjuster button and display.
››› page 85 or natural gas gauge in 5 Speedometer.
1 Revolution counter (with the engine run- vehicles with natural gas engine (CNG)
ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi- 6 Fuel gauge ››› page 82.
››› page 84
nute) ››› page 82.
3 Displays on the screen ››› page 72.

69
 Operation

Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 75 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument

panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments: The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrument All views will display information on the
1 Engine coolant temperature display panel digital with monochrome screen in col- screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi-
››› page 85 our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi- cle status, navigation1) and driving aids1).
ble using the button  of the multifunction
2 Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi- In Classic View and Semicircular watches it is
steering wheel. By selecting different infor-
nute the engine is running ››› page 82. possible to customise the information dis-
mation profiles, indications other than the
played under Information Profiles
3 Gear engaged or position of the selec- classic circular instruments can be displayed,
tor lever currently selected ››› Fig. 75 8 .
such as navigation data, multimedia informa-
4 Screen display ››› page 72 tion or travel data.
Information profiles
5 Speedometer The 3 views are:
With the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER option (info-
6 Digital speed display tainment button    > Vehicle > View
– Classic View
7 Fuel gauge ››› page 82. > Instrument cluster) you can choose
– Digital maps (no information profiles)
8 Information Profile ››› page 70.
– Semicircular watches

1) Depending on the version.

70
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

between the different information display op- ● Information about the final destination. Navigation map in the SEAT Digital
tions that will be shown in the SEAT Digital Digital display of the remaining travelling
Cockpit*
Cockpit. time, distance to the destination and the esti-
mated time of arrival.
Classic View ● Operating range. Digital display of the re-
The revolutions per minute and speedometer maining range.
needles appear along the entire length ● Travel time.
››› Fig. 75. ● Route guidance.
● Journey. Digital display of the distance
View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*1)
travelled.
Personalisation of the information that ap-
● Assistance systems. Graphic representa-
pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 of
tion of different assistance systems.
these items of information can be displayed
at the same time, but the user chooses which ● Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec- Fig. 76 Infotainment system:: map transfer key
to display, and in what order, by moving the ted.
Depending on the features, the SEAT Digital
finger vertically over the dials. ● Navigation. Graphical representation of
Cockpit can display a detailed map. To do
Depending on the version, the Views can be the navigation with arrows.
this, select the Navigation option in the
memorised by exiting the menu or keeping It may vary based on the features, the num- menu menu on the instrument panel
the View button pressed. ber and the contents of the selectable infor- ››› page 74.
● Consumption. Graphic representation of mation profiles.. Depending on the features or the navigation
the current consumption and digital display map, it can be shown in the Digital SEAT
of the average consumption. Cockpit or on the Infotainment system or on
● Audio. Digital display of the current audio
both at the same time. If it is displayed only in
the Infotainment system, the SEAT Digital
playback.
Cockpit will only display the arrows for ma-
● Altitude. Digital display of the current alti- noeuvres. »
tude above sea level.
● Compass. Digital display of the compass.

1) Pre-set information depending on the “Driving

mode” selected.
71
 Operation

Transfer of navigation map ● Display of travel data (multifunction dis- Selector lever positions (DSG® dual clutch
Using the map transfer key ››› Fig. 76, the play) and menus for different settings shift)
map is transferred from the Infotainment sys- ››› page 74 The current position of the selector lever is
tem to the Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice ver- ● Service interval display ››› page 85 shown on the side of the lever and on the in-
sa. ● Speed warning ››› page 74 strument panel display. When the lever is in
the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in
Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- ● Speed warning for winter tyres
some cases, the gear engaged in each case
tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu, ● Start-Stop system status display is shown on the instrument panel display .
you can transfer the map back to the Info-
››› page 251
tainment System.
● Signs detected by the traffic signal detec- Outside temperature indicator
tion system ››› page 78 If the outside temperature is lower than ap-
● Indication of active cylinder management proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystal
Status display
status (ACT®) ››› page 267 symbol”  on the outside temperature dis-
Possible indications on the instrument ● Low consumption driving  play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-
panel display til the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C
● Identifying letters on engine (LDM)
(+43 °F) ››› .
Different pieces of information can be dis- ● Driver assistance system display
played on the screen of the instrument panel, When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux-
››› page 270
depending on the features of the vehicle. iliary heater is switched on or when driving at
● Copyright
very low speeds, the outside temperature in-
● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
dicated may be higher than the actual tem-
● Warning and information messages Doors, bonnet and rear lid open perature due to the heat produced by the en-
● Odometer When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv- gine.
● Time ››› page 80 ing, the instrument panel display shows if any The margin of measurement ranges from
of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are -45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F).
● Indications of the radio and navigation sys-
opened and, in some cases, it is also indica-
tem
ted by an audible warning. The display may
● Indications of the phone
Gear-change recommendation
vary according to the type of instrument pan-
● Outside temperature el fitted. While driving, the instrument panel of certain
vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-
● Indications of the compass
tion for saving fuel ››› page 262.
● Selector lever positions
● Gear-change recommendation
››› page 262
72
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Odometer cates the direction in which you are driving ● At outside temperatures above +4 °C
The odometer registers the total distance with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest. (+39 °F), there may be ice even when the
travelled by the car. When the Infotainment system is on and there “ice crystal symbol” is not on.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis- is no route guidance active, the graphic rep- ● The outside temperature sensor takes a
resentation of a compass is also shown. guideline measurement.
tance travelled since the last time it was reset
to zero.
Low consumption driving * Note
Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Depending on the equipment, when driving, ● There are different instrument panels and
● Briefly press the button  ››› Fig. 74 4 the  display appears on the instrument therefore the versions and instructions on
to reset the trip recorder to 0. panel when the vehicle is in low consumption the display may vary. In the case of dis-
● Keep the button  4 pressed for status due to active cylinder management plays without warning or information texts,
about 3 seconds and the previous value will (ACT®)* ››› page 267. faults are indicated exclusively by the con-
be displayed. trol warning lamps.
Identifying letters on engine (LDM) ● Some indications on the instrument panel
Vehicles with digital instrument panel: Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: screen may be concealed by a sudden
● Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain- event, e.g. an incoming call.
● Switch the ignition on, but do not start the
ment system or the multifunction steering ● Depending on the equipment, some set-
engine.
wheel ››› page 74. tings and instructions can be carried out or
● Hold the button  ››› Fig. 74 4 down displayed on the infotainment system as
Speed warning for winter tyres for more than 15 seconds to display the iden- well.
tifying letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). ● If there are several warnings at the same
If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is
time, the symbols will be displayed one af-
displayed on the instrument panel
Copyright ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-
››› page 74.
Legal text about the property rights and bols will stay on until you remove the
Speed warning settings can be changed in copyrights of the instrument cluster. cause.
the infotainment system, by pressing the info- ● If when switching on the ignition warnings
tainment button    > Vehicle > SET- WARNING are shown about existing faults, it might not
TINGS > Driver assistance ››› page 92. be possible to change the settings or show
Even when the outside temperature is high-
the information as described. In this case,
er than freezing temperature, some roads
Indications of the compass go to a specialised workshop and request a
and bridges could be frozen.
repair.
Depending on the equipment, when the igni- ● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that
tion is on, the instrument panel display indi- there may be a risk of freezing.

73
 Operation

Instrument panel menus Open the Service menu Setting the clock
To open up the Service menu, select the Select the Time menu and set the correct
The number of menus and information items Range information profile while in the Driv- time by turning the right thumbwheel of the
available will depend on the vehicle’s elec- ing data menu, and keep the  key press- multifunction steering wheel.
tronics and features. ed on the multifunction steering wheel for ap-
A specialised workshop can programme or proximately 4 seconds. When it is released,
modify additional functions, according to the the Service menu will be displayed. Now Driving data indicator (multifunc-
vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting you can browse through the menu using the
keys on the multifunction steering wheel as
tion display)
a SEAT dealership for this.
usual.
Some menu options can only be read when The display of the travel data (multifunction
the vehicle is stationary. display) shows different values about the
Restart the service interval display journey and the consumption.
■ Driving data ››› page 74 Select the Service menu and follow the in-
■ Assistance systems structions on the screen of the instrument Change from one display to another
■ Lane Assist On/Off ››› page 284 panel.
Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel:
■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 272
● Press the rocker switch  on the wiper
■ ACC (only display) ››› page 276 Restart the oil service
lever ››› page 87.
■ Navigation Select the Restore Oil service menu and
■ Audio follow the instructions on the instrument pan- Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:
el display. ● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-
■ Telephone
■ Vehicle status ››› page 76 tion steering wheel ››› page 88.
Restart journey data
■ Lap timer* ››› page 81
Select the Reset trip menu and follow the Changing memory
instructions on the instrument panel display Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:
to reset the value.
Service Menu ● Press the  button on the windscreen

Identifying letters on engine (LDM) wiper lever or the  button of the multifunc-
3 Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display
(Digital SEAT Cockpit) tion steering wheel.
Select the menu Engine code. The identify-
In the Service menu various settings can be ing letters of the engine will be shown on the
adjusted depending on the features. instrument cluster display at the bottom left.

74
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Vehicles with digital instrument panel: function wheel pressed down for about 2 tion appears from a range of less than
● While in Travel data > General infor- seconds. 2,400 km and cannot be deactivated.2)
mation press  on the multi-function steer- – Distance: Distance covered in km (m)
ing wheel to switch between the 3 memo- Select the instructions after switching on the ignition.
ries1): In the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi- – Average speed: The average speed
cle settings, you can display different travel will be shown after driving for approxi-
– Since start: The memory is deleted if
data ››› page 92. mately 100 metres.
the journey is interrupted for more than 2
hours. – Current consumption: The current – Digital speed display: Current
– Since refuelling: Display and stor- fuel consumption display operates speed displayed in digital format.
age of the journey data and the con- throughout the journey, in litres/100 km; – Convenience consumers: Displays a
sumption values collected. When refuel- and with the engine running and the ve- list of the connected comfort systems
ling, the memory is deleted. hicle stopped, in litres/hour. that increase energy consumption, e.g.
– Long-term: This memory contains trav- – Average consumption: The average air conditioning.
el data up to a maximum of 19 hours and fuel consumption is displayed after driv-
59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, ing for approximately 300 metres. Setting a speed warning
or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or – Travelling time: This indicates the ● Select the display Warning at --- km/h
9999.9 km. When one of these values is hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ig- or Speed warning at --- mph.
exceeded (varies depending on the ver- nition was switched on. ● Press the button  on the windscreen
sion of the instrument panel), the memo-
– Range: Approximate distance in km that wiper lever or the button  on the multifunc-
ry is deleted.
can still be travelled if the same driving tion steering wheel to store the current speed
style is maintained. and activate the warning.
Delete journey data presets
– AdBlue range or : Approximate ● Activate: adjust to the desired speed within
● Select the memory that you wish to erase.
distance in km that can still be travelled 5 seconds using the rocker switch  on the
● Hold the  button of the multifunction with the current level of the AdBlue® tank windscreen wiper lever or by turning the
steering wheel or the  button of the multi- with the same driving style. The indica- thumbwheel on the multifunction steering
wheel. Next, press the button  or  »

1) This will show all data on the display at the

same time: distance travelled, average con-

sumption, average speed and autonomy.
2) Not available in all countries.
75
 Operation

again or wait several seconds. The speed is symbols may vary depending on the version Driver alert system (break recom-
stored and the warning activated. of the instrument panel.
mendation)*
● Deactivate: press button  or button Existing faults can also be checked manually.
 . The stored speed is deleted. To do so, open the menu Vehicle status or
Vehicle ››› page 74.
The warning can be adjusted for speeds be-
tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h
Priority 1 warning (red)
(155 mph).
The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-
Display Oil temperature companied by audible warnings).  Stop
driving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi-
The engine reaches its operating tempera-
nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio-
ture when, under normal driving conditions,
nal assistance.
the oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F)
and 120°C (248°F). If a great effort is required Fig. 77 On the instrument panel display: driver
Priority 2 warning (yellow)
from the engine and the outside temperature alert system symbol.
is high, the engine oil temperature may in- The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-
crease. This does not present any problem as companied by audible warnings). Operating Function and operation
long as the warning lamps  or  faults or the lack of operating fluids can
Fatigue detection determines the driving be-
››› page 335 do not appear on the display. cause damage to the vehicle or a fault.
haviour of the driver when starting a journey,
Check the faulty function as soon as possible.
making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-
If necessary, seek professional assistance.
stantly compared with the current driving be-
Warning and information messages haviour. If the system detects that the driver is
Information message
(Vehicle status) tired, an audible warning is given with a
It provides information about processes in the sound and an optic warning is shown with a
The system runs a check on certain compo- vehicle. symbol and complementary message on the
nents and functions when the ignition is instrument panel display ››› Fig. 77. The mes-
switched on and while the vehicle is moving. sage on the instrument panel display is
Faults displayed on the instrument panel as shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-
red and yellow warning symbols accompa- pending on the case, is repeated. The system
nied with messages and, depending on the stores the last message displayed.
case, even an audible warning ››› page 89. The message on the instrument panel display
The representation of the messages and can be switched off by pressing the 
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the
76
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

button  on the multi function steering ● In unfavourable weather conditions ● In some situations, the system may incor-
wheel ››› page 87. ● When a sporty driving style is employed rectly interpret an intended driving ma-
The message can be recalled to the instru- ● In the event of a serious distraction to the
noeuvre as driver tiredness.
ment panel display using the multifunction driver ● No warning is given in the event of the ef-
display ››› page 74. fect called microsleep!
Fatigue detection will be restored when the ● Please observe the indications on the in-
Conditions of operation vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, strument panel and act as is necessary.
when the ignition is switched off or when the
Driving behaviour is only calculated on
driver has unbuckled their seat belt and
speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to
opened the door.
Note
around 200 km/h (125 mph). ● Fatigue detection has been developed
In the event of slow driving during a long peri-
for driving on motorways and well paved
Switching on and off od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys- roads only.
tem automatically re-establishes the tired-
Drowsiness detection can be activated or de- ● If there is a fault in the system, have it
ness calculation. When driving at a faster
activated in the Easy Connect system with checked by a specialised workshop.
speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-
the key    > Vehicle > SETTINGS >
ted.
Driver assistance ››› page 92. A mark
indicates that the adjustment has been acti-
WARNING
vated.
Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-
System limitations gue detection system tempt you into taking
any risks when driving. Take regular breaks,
The Fatigue detection has certain limitations sufficient in length when making long jour-
inherent to the system. The following condi- neys.
tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- ● The driver always assumes the responsi-
vent it from functioning. bility of driving to their full capacity.
● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) ● Never drive if you are tired.

● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) ● The system does not detect the tiredness
of the driver in all circumstances. Consult
● When cornering
the information in the section ››› page 77,
● On roads in poor condition System limitations.

77
 Operation

Road signs detection system*1) Within its limitations, the system also displays Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display
additional signals, such as time-specific pro- ● There is a fault in the system. Have the sys-
hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers tem checked by a specialised workshop.
››› page 308 or limitations that only apply in
the event of rain. Even on journeys without Speed warning currently unavailable
signs, the system may display any applicable ● The speed warning function of the road
speed limits. sign detection system is faulty. Have the sys-
The traffic sign detection system does not tem checked by a specialised workshop.
work in all countries. Keep this in mind when
Dynamic Road Sign Display: please
travelling abroad.
clean the windscreen.
● The windscreen is dirty in the camera area.
Shown on the display
Clean the windscreen.
In Germany, on motorways and vehicle
roads, besides speed limits and overtaking Dynamic Road Sign Display currently
provisions the system also displays the end of restricted.
prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the ● The navigation system is not transmitting
time in other countries is always shown. data. Check if the navigation system has up-
The traffic signs detected by the system are dated maps.
displayed on the dash panel display ● OR: the vehicle is in a region not included
››› Fig. 78 and, depending on the navigation on the navigation system's map.
system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain-
Fig. 78 On the instrument panel display: ex- ment system as well ››› page 92. No data available
amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi- ● The traffic sign detection system does not
tions with their respective additional signs. Road sign detection system messages: work in the current country.

The traffic sign detection system records the There are no traffic signs available
Activate and deactivate the road sign dis-
standard traffic signs in front of the vehicle ● The system is in its start-up phase.
play on the instrument panel
with a camera located on the base of the in- ● OR: the camera has not recognized any
terior mirror and provides information about The permanent display of road signs on the
mandatory or prohibitive sign.
speed limits and overtaking prohibitions. instrument panel can be activated or

1) System available depending on the country.

78
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

deactivated in the infotainment system using Speed warning country in question for driving with a trailer,
the   > Vehicle > SETTINGS > If the system detects that the permitted the system automatically displays the usual
Driver assistance button. speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h
with a “gong” and visually with a message on (50 mph).
Display of traffic signs the dash panel display. If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti-
When the traffic sign detection system is con- vated, the system displays the speed limits as
The speed warning can be adjusted or deac-
nected, a camera located on the base of the if there were no trailer hitched.
tivated completely in the infotainment system
interior rear-view mirror records the traffic
using the    > Vehicle > SETTINGS >
signs in front of the vehicle. After checking Limited operation
Driver assistance ››› page 92 button.
and evaluating the information from the cam-
The speed is adjusted in steps of 5 km/h The traffic sign detection system has certain
era, the navigation system and the current
(3 mph) within a range of between 0 km/h limitations. The following cases may lead the
vehicle data, up to three valid road signs are
(mph) and 20 km/h (12 mph) above the maxi- system to operate with limitations or not at
displayed, ››› Fig. 78  with their additional
mum speed permitted. all:
signs.
● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,
● First: The sign that is currently valid for the Trailer mode
rain, fog or intense mist.
driver is shown in the left side of the screen In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
For example, a maximum speed limit of ● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-
device from the factory and a trailer that is
130 km/h (100 mph) ››› Fig. 78 . electrically connected to the vehicle, it is on traffic or by the sun.
● Second: A sign valid only in certain circum- possible to activate or deactivate the display ● When driving at high speeds.
stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown sec- of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer, ● If the camera is covered or dirty.
ond, together with the additional rain sign. such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi-
● If the traffic signs are out of the camera's
tions. Activation or deactivation is performed
● Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is field of vision.
in the infotainment system using the   
working while you are driving, the signal with ● If the traffic signs are partially or totally
> Vehicle > SETTINGS > Driver assis-
the additional rain sign will be shown first, on covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi-
tance ››› page 92 buttons.
the left, as it is the one that is applicable at cles.
the time. For trailer mode, the display of speed limits
● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil
● Third: A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal
provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad- the regulations.
No overtaking at certain times, will be dis-
justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a ● In the case of damaged or bent traffic
played in third place ››› Fig. 78 .
range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and signs. »
130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speed
greater than that which is permitted in the

79
 Operation

● In the case of variable messages on over-

tion system may differ from the actual cur- ● The use of outdated maps on the naviga-
head or gantry signs (LED-based variable rent traffic situation. tion system may cause the system to show
traffic signs or other lighting units). traffic signs incorrectly.
● The system may not detect or correctly
● If the maps on the navigation system are show all the traffic signs. ● In the waypoints mode of the navigation
not up-to-date. ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have system, the traffic sign detection system is
● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles priority over the recommendations and dis- only partly available.
that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on plays provided by the system. ● Failure to heed the control lamps and
lorries. corresponding text messages when they
light up may result in damage to the vehi-
WARNING
WARNING cle.
If messages are ignored, the vehicle may
The technology in the traffic sign detection stall in traffic and cause accidents and se-
system cannot change the limits imposed vere injuries.
by the laws of physics and only works with- Time
● Never ignore the messages displayed.
in the system's limits. Do not let the extra
convenience afforded by the traffic sign ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity Setting the time on the infotainment sys-
detection system tempt you into taking any and in a safe place. tem
risks when driving. The system is not a re-
● Press the infotainment    button.
placement for driver awareness.
Note ● Press the Vehicle > SETTINGS > Date
● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
To avoid affecting the correct operation of and time function button to adjust the time
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
the system, take the following points into ››› page 92.
consideration:
● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and
● Regularly clean the area of vision of the Setting the time on analogue the instru-
fog may lead to the system failing to dis- ment panel
camera and keep it in a clean state, without
play traffic signs or not displaying them
snow or ice. ● To set the time (for all vehicle clocks), press
correctly.
● Do not cover the field of vision of the and hold the button  on the instrument
● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-
camera. panel until the Time is displayed.
ered or damaged, system operation may
be impaired. ● Always replace damaged or worn blades ● Release the button  . The time is dis-
when required to avoid lines on the cam- played on the instrument panel display and
era's field of vision. the hours field is highlighted.
WARNING
● Check that the windscreen is not dam- ● Afterwards, press the button  until the
The driving recommendations and traffic aged in the area of the camera's field of vi- desired time is displayed. To scroll quickly,
indications shown on the traffic sign detec- sion. hold the button  .
80
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

● When they have finished setting the hour, The following menus can be displayed: Menu “Lap”
wait until the minute field is marked on the in-
● Stop The timer of the current lap stops
strument panel display.
● Lap and a new lap starts immediately.
● Afterwards, press the button  until the
New lap The time for the lap you have just
desired time is displayed. To scroll quickly, ● Pause completed is included in the statis-
hold the button  . ● Partial time tics.
● Release the button  in order to finish ● Statistics For approx. 5 seconds a partial time
setting the time. Partial
is displayed. The timer continues in
time
parallel.
Change from one menu to another
Adjusting the time in the SEAT Digital
Cockpit ● Vehicles without multifunction steering The current lap timer will be inter-
wheel: press the rocker switch  on the Stop rupted. The lap does not end. The
● While in the Driving data menu, select Pause menu is displayed.
the Range function (infotainment button windscreen wiper lever ››› page 87.
   > Vehicle > View > Driving ● Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:
Menu “Pause”
data > Range). turn the right thumbwheel ››› page 88.
● Press the button  on the multifunction Continue The interrupted timer continues.
steering wheel until the Service menu is dis- Menu “Stop”
A new timer starts. The halted lap
played on the instrument panel display Start the timing. New lap ends and is included in the statis-
››› page 74. If you have previously done laps tics.
● Select the menu Time. and they are included in the statis-
The timer of the current lap ends
tics, it will start with the appropriate Interr.
● Adjust the correct time by turning the right and is cancelled. It is not included in
Start lap number. lap
the statistics.
thumbwheel of the multifunction steering It is only possible to start a new first
wheel. lap if the statistics have previously The current timer ends. The lap is in-
been set to zero in the Statis- End
cluded in the statistics.
tics menu.

Lap timer* Timing starts when the vehicle Menu “Partial time”
moves off.
Since
If the vehicle is already moving, the For approx. 5 seconds a partial time
You can access the timer via the selection start Partial
timer begins once the vehicle has is displayed. The timer continues in
menu ››› page 74. stopped.
time
parallel. »
It allows you to manually time lap times on a
Statis- The Statistics menu is dis-
racing circuit, memorise them and compare tics played on the screen.
them to the vehicle's previous best times.
81
 Operation

Menu “Partial time” ● While driving, do not handle the timer in For the sake of the environment
complicated driving situations.
The timer of the current lap stops Changing up a gear early will help you to
and a new lap starts immediately. save fuel and minimise emissions and en-
New lap The time for the lap you have just gine noise.
completed is included in the statis- Revolution counter
tics.
The rev counter indicates the number of en-
The current lap timer will be inter- Fuel gauge
Stop rupted. The lap does not end. The gine revolutions per minute.
Pause menu is displayed.
Together with the gear-change indicator, the
rev counter offers you the possibility of using
Menu “Statistics” the engine of your vehicle at a suitable
View of recent lap times:
speed.
– total time The beginning of the red zone of the rev
– best lap time
counter indicates the maximum speed in any
– worst lap time
– average duration of the laps gear after running-in and with the engine hot.
A maximum of 10 laps is possible, as However, it is advisable to change up a gear
well as a total duration of 99 hours, or move the selector lever to D (or lift your
59 minutes and 59 seconds. foot off the accelerator) before the needle
If one of the 2 limits is reached, new reaches the red zone ››› . Fig. 79 Analogue instrument panel: fuel gauge
timing can only be started by first
setting the statistics to zero. We recommend that you avoid high revs and
that you follow the recommendations on the
Back This returns to the previous menu.
gear-change indicator. Consult the addition-
Resetting All the memorised statistical data al information in ››› page 262, Selecting the
to zero are reset. optimal gear.

WARNING CAUTION
Do your best to avoid handling the timer ● To prevent damage to the engine, the rev
while driving. counter needle should only remain in the
● Only set the timer or consult statistics red zone for a short period of time.
when the vehicle is stationary. ● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs Fig. 80 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge.
and heavy acceleration and do not make
the engine work hard.
82
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Control lamps You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- CAUTION
hicle in the ››› page 372 section.
It lights up, and in addition, the Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An
 lower diode lights up in red irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring
WARNING
and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust
Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may system. The catalytic converter or the par-
been reached ››› . Refuel as soon as you have the stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- ticulate filter may get damaged!
opportunity. vere injuries.
When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-
● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could
es red. Note
reach the engine irregularly, particularly
when driving up or down slopes. The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to
 It lights up yellow the fuel pump symbol points out towards
● The steering system and the driver assis-
the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank
Presence of water in diesel. tance systems and brakes do not work
flap.
Turn off the engine and seek professional assistance. when the engine is running irregularly or
switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-
The display only works when the ignition is lar supply thereof.
switched on. ● Always refuel when there is only one
The fuel range is displayed on the instrument quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicle
panel. to stop due to lack of fuel.

83
 Operation

Natural gas level (CNG)

3 Valid in vehicles equipped with natural gas engine (CNG)

Fig. 81 Analogue instrument panel: natural gas

gauge

A Natural gas gauge The display only works when the ignition is the refuelled amount with a slight delay
B Petrol gauge switched on. (depending on the refuelled amount).

Control lamp Things to note

If the vehicle is left parked for a long time im-
 It lights up green ››› Fig. 81 1
mediately after refuelling, the natural gas lev-
The vehicle is running on natural gas. el indicator may not accurately indicate the
The lamp goes off when the natural gas runs out. The same level shown after refuelling when the
engine changes to operate with petrol. vehicle is started up again. This is not due to a
leak in the system, but to a drop in pressure in
It lights up, and in addition, the the gas tank for technical reasons after a
 lower diode lights up in red cooling phase just after refuelling.

The fuel reserve level has been reached. Note

When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-
es red. In vehicles with natural gas engines, the
petrol tank fuel level gauge may display

84
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Engine coolant temperature indica- B Normal zone. At high outside tempera- CAUTION
tures and when making the engine work
tor ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,
hard, the diodes may continue lighting up
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and
and reach the upper zone. This is no
making the engine work hard for approxi-
cause for concern, provided the control
mately the first 15 minutes when the engine
lamp does not light up 
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm
C Warning area. When the engine is work- also depends on the outside temperature. If
ing hard, especially at high outside tem- necessary, use the engine oil temperature*
peratures, the diodes may light up in the ››› page 74››› page 76 as a guide.
warning area. ● Additional lights and other accessories in
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-
The coolant temperature gauge only works fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-
when the ignition is switched on. atures and high engine loads, there is a risk
of the engine overheating.
Fig. 82 Analogue instrument panel: engine
Control and warning lamp
coolant temperature indicator. ● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-
tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle
 It lights up red is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can
reduce the cooling effect, which could
 Do not carry on driving!
Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-
high. cialist assistance.

 Flashes red
Service intervals
Fault in the engine coolant system.
The service interval indication appears on the
● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
instrument panel display and the Infotain-
let it cool down.
Fig. 83 Digital instrument panel: engine cool- ment system.
ant temperature indicator. ● Check the engine coolant level
There are different versions of instrument
››› page 338.
panels and infotainment systems, so the ver-
A Cool zone. The engine has not reached ● If the warning lamp does not switch off even
sions and instructions on the screens may
operating temperature yet. Avoid high if the coolant level is correct, request assis- vary.
speeds and stressing the engine if it has tance from specialised personnel.
not reached operating temperature. SEAT distinguishes between services with en-
gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and »
85
 Operation

services without engine oil change (e.g. In- Service due Check the date of the current service on the
spection). When the time for a service or an inspec- infotainment system
tion comes, an audible warning will be emit- ● Press the infotainment button   .
In vehicles with Services established by
time or mileage, the service intervals are al- ted when the ignition is switched on and the ● Press the function button Vehicle > SET-
ready pre-defined. fixed key symbol  may appear on the in- TINGS ››› page 92.
strument panel for a few seconds, along with ● Select the Service menu option to display
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-
one of the following messages:
vals are determined individually. Thanks to information about the services.
technological progress, maintenance work ● Service now!
has been greatly reduced. Because of the Vehicles with analogue instrument panel
● Please have your vehicle inspec-
technology used by SEAT, with this service ● Press and hold the button 
ted.
you only need to change the oil when the ve- ››› Fig. 74 4 for more than 5 seconds to con-
● Oil change service due! sult the service message
hicle so requires. To calculate this variation
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use ● Oil change service and inspection
and individual driving styles are considered. due! Vehicles with digital instrument panel
The advance warning first appears 20 days ● The date of the service can only be read
before the date established for the corre- Inspection of compressed natural gas through the Service menu ››› page 74.
sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re- tanks (CNG) reminder
maining until the next service are always Resetting service interval display
When less than 90 days for the review of the
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
compressed natural gas tanks (CNG), when
the time is given in complete days. The cur- dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
the ignition is switched on, the instrument
rent service message cannot be viewed until lows:
panel display will a reminder for review of
500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-
the gas tanks and an audible warning will be
ly lines are visible on the display. Vehicles with analogue instrument panel
emitted.
● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-
Inspection reminder As approaches the service date of inspection ton  ››› Fig. 74 4 .
of the gas tanks, the message and the audi-
If a service or an inspection has to be carried ● Switch ignition back on.
ble warning will stop modify accordingly.
out soon, a service reminder will be dis- ● Release the  button and press it
played when the ignition is switched on.
Consult a service notification again for the next 20 seconds.
The figure displayed are the kilometres that
With the ignition switched on, the engine off Vehicles with digital instrument panel
can still be travelled or the time until the next
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current
service. ● The service interval display can only be re-
service notification can be read:
set through the Service menu ››› page 74.

86
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Do not restart the indicator between the

Using the instrument panel Operation with the wiper lever
service intervals, otherwise the information
displayed will be incorrect.
Introduction
If the oil change service is reset manually, the
service interval display changes to a fixed With the ignition switched on, it is possible to
service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible read the different functions of the display by
oil change service. scrolling through the menus.
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,
Note
the multifunction display can only be operat-
● The service message disappears after a ed with the steering wheel buttons.
few seconds, when the engine is started or
when  button is pressed on the wiper Some menu options can only be read when
lever, or the  button on the multifunction the vehicle is at a standstill. Fig. 84 Wiper lever: control keys.
steering wheel.
WARNING As long as a priority 1 ››› page 76 warning is
● In vehicles with the LongLife system in
active, it will not be possible to access any
which the battery has been disconnected Distracting the driver in any way can lead
menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and
for a long period of time, it is not possible to to an accident and cause injuries.
calculate the date of the next service.
hidden with the button ››› Fig. 84 1 .
● Never use the menus on the instrument
Therefore the service interval display may
panel display while the vehicle is in motion.
not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the Select a menu or an informative display
maximum service intervals permitted ● Switch the ignition on.
››› page 356. Note
● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,
● If you reset the display manually, the next After loading or changing the 12-volt bat- press button 1 ; if necessary, several times.
service interval will be indicated as in vehi- tery, check the system settings. If the pow-
cles with fixed service intervals. For this ● To display the menus ››› page 74 or to re-
er supply is interrupted, the system settings
reason we recommend that the service in- might be incorrect or deleted. turn to the selection of menus from a menu or
terval display be reset by a SEAT author- from an informative display, hold down the
ised Dealer. rocker button 2 .
● If the period of 48 months for an inspec- ● To change from one menu to another, press
tion at a specialised workshop of com- the upper or lower part of the rocker switch.
pressed natural gas tanks (CNG) is excee- ● To open the menu or the informative display
ded, the vehicle may not working in this
mode.
shown, press button 1 or wait a few seconds »

87
 Operation

until the menu or the informative display Operation using the multifunction a few seconds until the menu or the informa-
opens automatically. tive display opens automatically.
steering wheel
Changing menu settings Changing menu settings
● In the menu displayed, press the upper or ● In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-
lower part of the rocker switch 2 until the re- wheel of the multifunction steering wheel
quired menu option is checked. The option ››› Fig. 85 until the desired option of the menu
appears framed. is highlighted. The option appears framed.
● Press button 1 to make the required modi- ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 85 to make the
fications. A mark indicates that the system or required modifications. A mark indicates that
function is activated. the system or function is activated.

Back to menu selection Back to menu selection

Fig. 85 Right side of the multifunction steering
Select Back on the corresponding menu to Press the button   or   ››› Fig. 85.
wheel: buttons to the menus and information
exit. displays on the instrument panel.

Note As long as a priority 1 ››› page 76 warning is

If when switching on the ignition warnings active, it will not be possible to access any
are shown about existing faults, it might not menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and
be possible to change the settings or show hidden with the button  of the multifunction
the information as described. In this case, steering wheel ››› Fig. 85.
go to a specialised workshop and request a
repair. Select a menu or an informative display
● Switch the ignition on.
● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,
press the button  ››› Fig. 85; if necessary,
several times.
● To change menus, use buttons  
or   ››› Fig. 85.
● To open the menu or the information dis-
played, press the button  ››› Fig. 85 or wait

88
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Button for the driver assistance ● Select the driver assistance system and ac- Depending on the model, additional text
tivate or deactivate it ››› page 87. A mark in- messages may be viewed on the instrument
systems*
dicates that driver assistance system is panel display. These may be purely informa-
switched on. tive or they may be advising of the need for
● Afterwards, mark or confirm the selection action ››› page 68, Instrument panel.
with button  on the windscreen wiper Depending upon the equipment fitted in the
lever or button  on the multifunction steer- vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-
ing wheel . times a symbol may be displayed on the in-
strument panel.
The driver assistance systems can also be
switched on and off in the infotainment sys- When certain control and warning lamps are
tem, in the menu Vehicle settings lit, an audible warning is also heard.
››› page 92.
Red warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-

Control lamps  mation on the instrument panel display

 Parking brake on ››› page 290.

Control and warning lamps
 Fault in the brake system ››› page 290.

Fig. 86 On the turn signal and main beam lev-  Fault in the steering system ››› page 263.
er: button for driver assistance systems (de-
pending on versions). Driver or passenger has not fastened seat
 belt ››› page 15.
With the turn signal and main beam headlight
 Press the foot brake ››› page 277.
lever button, you can activate or deactivate
Fig. 87 Related video
the driver assistance systems displayed in the AdBlue level too low, OR fault in the SCR
Assistance systems menu .
 system ››› page 328.
The control and warning lamps are indicators
of warnings ››› , faults or certain functions.
Activate or deactivate a driver assistance Some control and warning lamps come on Yellow warning lamps
system when the ignition is switched on, and switch Notification central lamp: additional infor-
● Press ››› Fig. 86 1 or 2 briefly to open the off when the engine starts running, or while  mation on the instrument panel display
Driving aids menu. driving.
 Front brake pads worn ››› page 290. »
89
 Operation

Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by The front passenger front airbag is activa-  Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 118.
 the system; OR ESC or ASR in operation   ted ››› page 23.
››› page 296. Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not
  properly closed ››› page 72.
Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)
ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC in
 ››› page 284.  Engine cooling fluid ››› page 85.
Sport mode ››› page 296. 
Fault in the ABS ››› page 296.  Engine oil pressure ››› page 335.
  Error in the lane assist warning system
Rear fog light switched on ››› page 118. ››› page 284.  Fault in the battery ››› page 342.
 
Fault in the emission control system Main beam assist (Light Assist)
 Fault in the lighting of the vehicle  ››› page 118.
››› page 329.  ››› page 118.
 Service interval display ››› page 85.
Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault
 Low engine oil level ››› page 335.
 in the management of the diesel engine
Mobile telephone is connected via Blue-
››› page 329.
Fault in the gearbox ››› page 261.
 tooth® ››› page 233.

Fault in the petrol engine management Mobile telephone battery charge status
 ››› page 329. 
Windscreen cleaning fluid too low  ››› page 233.
››› page 127.
 Particulate filter blocked ››› page 329.  Risk of freezing ››› page 72.
Other warning lamps
 Fault in the steering system ››› page 263.  Start-Stop system activated ››› page 251.
Turn lights or emergency lights on
 Tyre monitor system ››› page 352.  ››› page 118.  Start-Stop system unavailable
››› page 251.
 Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 82.  Trailer turn signals ››› page 118.
Low consumption driving status
Adblue level low, OR fault in the SCR sys-
 ››› page 73.
 Press the foot brake ››› page 255.
 tem ››› page 328.
Speed regulator ››› page 270; OR Adap- WARNING
Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-  tive Cruise Control (ACC) ››› page 277.
 sioners ››› page 23. If the warning lamps and messages are ig-
 Lane assist warning (Lane Assist) nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, it
Front passenger front airbag is disa- may stall in traffic, or accidents and seri-
  ››› page 284.
bled ››› page 23.  ous injuries may occur.

 Natural gas operating mode ››› page 84. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text
messages.
90
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble.
● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
dent for the driver and for other road users.
If necessary, switch on the hazard warning
lamps and put out the warning triangle to
advise other drivers.
● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool.
● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is
a hazardous area and could cause severe
injuries ››› page 331.

91
 Operation

Easy Connect system General operating information WARNING

The following section contains all of the rele- Any distraction may lead to an accident,
Introduction vant information for changing the settings in with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy
the Vehicle Settings menu. General infor- Connect system while driving could dis-
The infotainment system brings together im- mation on the operation of the infotainment tract you from traffic.
portant vehicle functions and systems into a system, as well as on the warning and safety
single central control unit, e.g. menu settings, instructions that must be taken into account,
radio equipment and the navigation system. is found in ››› page 163

Vehicle menu settings

Fig. 88 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 89 Easy Connect: Vehicle Menu.

Open the Vehicle settings menu ● OR: Press the infotainment button  to go ● To select a function in the menu, press the
● Switch the ignition on. to the Vehicle ››› Fig. 89 menu. desired button.
● Press the SETTINGS function button to open
● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on.
the Vehicle settings menu.
● Press the Infotainment button    and
then the Vehicle ››› Fig. 88 function button.

92
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Activation and deactivation of the traction control system (ASR) and the elec-
ESC system – tronic stability control (ESC) system, selecting the Sport / Off-road* mode of the ››› page 296
electronic stability control (ESC Sport)

Tyre monitor system Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 352
Tyres
Activation and deactivation of the speed warning, adjusting the speed warning
Winter tyres
value
››› page 350

Dynamic Light Assist, Light Assist, motorway function, turning-on time, headlamp
Light assistance range adjustment, automatic lights when raining, one-touch signalling, travel ››› page 118
mode.
Vehicle lights
Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls ››› page 126
Coming/Leaving home function Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions ››› page 123
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Activation and deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. ››› page 276
Front Assist (ambient traffic Activation and deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning dis-
monitoring system) play
››› page 272

Lane Assist (lane departure

warning assistance)
Activation and deactivation of lane departure warning, adaptive lane guidance ››› page 284
Driver assis-
tance
Display on the instrument panel, activation and deactivation of the speed warn-
Dynamic Road Sign Display
ing
››› page 78

Trailer recognition (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer), use to calcu-
Trailer detection
late the route, maximum speed for trailer
››› page 79

Driver alert system Activation and deactivation ››› page 76 »

93
 Operation

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ParkPilot
Automatic activation, front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear sound ››› page 301,
treble, adjust Infotainment volume ››› page 304
Auto Hold Switching on and off when starting off ››› page 294
Parking and ma-
noeuvring Electric parking brake Switching on and off automatically ››› page 292
Manoeuvre braking Switching on and off ››› page 304
Displaying the parking space Switching on and off

Ambient lighting – Switching on and off, selecting brightness, colour, area or total ››› page 126
Synchronous adjustment, lower the passenger side mirror while reversing (kerb
Mirrors and
Rear view mirrors
function), fold in after parking, exterior mirrors heating, dim when dark
››› page 130
windscreen wip-
ers Activate and deactivate automatic wipers if raining, rear window wiping in re-
Windscreen wipers
verse gear
››› page 127

Convenience opening, automatic closure in case of rain, automatic closure with

Electric windows
central locking
››› page 114
Opening and
closing Door unlocking, lock/unlock automatically when driving,audio confirmation
Central locking “Easy Open”, “Easy Entry” access assistance, automatic opening of the rear lid, ››› page 100
interior monitoring

Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Ad-

vice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed display,
Instrument panel Multifunction display
speed warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, reset data “when setting
››› page 74
off”, reset data for “total calculation”, traffic signal detection

Date and time – Time source, time, select time zone, time format, date, date format ››› page 80
Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, GNC consumption,
Units – –
electric consumption, pressure

Vehicle ID number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change
Service –
service
››› page 85

94
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Restore all settings and data Restore all settings –
Factory settings
Restore settings/data sepa‐ Lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, background lighting, rear
–
rately view mirrors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, instrument panel

When the function button check box is activa- Any changes made using the settings menus The actual number of menus available and
ted , the function is active. are automatically saved on closing those the name of the various options will depend
menus. on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.
Pressing the menu button  will always take
you to the last menu used.

Multifunction steering wheel*

Operation of the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 90 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes a multifunction the audio, telephone and radio/navigation
module from where it is possible to control functions without needing to distract the driv-
er. »

95
 Operation

Applies to vehicles with analogue instrument panel

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

A Turn announcement volume
Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down.
Turn up/down.

A
Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute voice navigation
Press

Activate/deactivate voice control.b)

B a)
This function can be used from any mode, except in the case of an active call.

Short press: Switch to the – No active call: Radio/Me-

No function for the other modes
Search for the previous/next previous/next track. dia functionality (except
C / D No function (navigation, assistants, vehicle
stationc). Long press: Fast rewind/for- AUX)
status, travel data).
wardd). – Active call: no function

Change menu on instrument panel.

E / F a)
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).

Colour instrument panel: switch to the previous menu.

G
Monochrome instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

– There is no active call: Re-

Coloured instrument panel: Coloured instrument panel: cent calls list. – Active route: access the view to
H List of stations available next track (only if the instru- – Active call: go to the call stop route guidance.
No function
Turn (only if the instrument panel ment panel is in audio options list (call in standby, – No active route: list last destina-
is in audio menu). menu). hang up, mute microphone, tions.
private number, etc.).

H
Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.
Press
a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).
c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.
d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

96
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

A Turn announcement volume
Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down.
Turn up/down.

A
Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute voice navigation.
Press

Enable/disable voice controlb).

B a)
This function can be used from any mode, except in the case of an active call.

Short press: Switch to the – No active call: Radio/Me-

No function for the other modes
Search for the previous/next previous/next track. dia functionality (except
C / D No function (navigation, assistants, vehicle
stationc). Long press: Fast rewind/for- AUX)
status, travel data).
wardd). – Active call: no function

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.b)

Short press b): Change views Classic Info / Digital Maps / Semicircular dials
G
Long press b): access the “Personalised Profiles” configuration view.

If there is a map on the Digital

– There is no active call: Re- Scorecard: Zoom in-out (with and
cent calls list. without active route).
H List of sources available List of sources available – Active call: go to the call If there is no map on the Digital
No function
Turn (audio/media). (audio/media). options list (call in standby, Panel: the map is transferred from
hang up, mute microphone, the infotainment System display
private number, etc.). to the Digital Panel (with and
without active route).

H Auto/Manual Zoom Zoom if the

No function No function No function No function
Press map on the DigitScorecard.
a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).
c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.
d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

97
 Operation

Opening and closing cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote
control and new battery is several metres
around the vehicle.
Set of vehicle keys If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle
using the remote control key, this should be
Related video re-synchronised ››› page 100 or the battery
changed ››› page 99.
Different keys belonging to the vehicle may
be used.
Fig. 93 Vehicle key with alarm button.
Control lamp on the vehicle key
Fig. 91 Opening and Key to the ››› Fig. 92, ››› Fig. 93 When a button on the vehicle key is pressed,
closing
1 Unlock the vehicle the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 92 (arrow)
once briefly, but if the button is held down for
2 Lock the vehicle
a longer period the control lamp flashes sev-
Vehicle key 3 Unlock only the rear lid. Press the button eral times, such as in convenience opening.
until all the turn signals on the vehicle
flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open If the vehicle key control lamp does not light
the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it up when the button is pressed, replace the
will lock again. In addition, the lamp on key's battery ››› page 99.
the key flashes.
Spare key
4 Folding the key shaft in and out
To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,
5 Alarm button*. Only press in the event of
the vehicle ID number is required.
an emergency! When the alarm button is
pressed, the vehicle's sounds and the turn Each new key contains a microchip which
signals light up for a short time. Press must be coded with the data from the vehicle
again to disconnect. electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not
Fig. 92 Assignment of buttons on the remote work if it does not contain a microchip or the
control key. With the vehicle key the vehicle may be microchip has not been encoded. This is also
locked or unlocked remotely ››› page 100. true for keys which are specially cut for the
The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- vehicle.
tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-
98
 Opening and closing

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be Note To change the battery
obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-
● Only use the key button when you require
cialised workshop or an approved key service
the corresponding function. Pushing the
qualified to create this kind of key.
button unnecessarily could accidentally
New keys or spare keys must be synchronised unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is
before use ››› page 100. also possible even when you are outside
the radius of action.
WARNING ● Key operation can be greatly influenced
● Never leave children or disabled persons by overlapping radio signals close to the
in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they vehicle working in the same range of fre-
may not be able to leave the vehicle or quencies, for example, radio transmitters or
manage on their own. mobile telephones.
● Obstacles between the remote control Fig. 94 Vehicle key: opening the battery com-
● An uncontrolled use of the key could start
and the vehicle, bad weather conditions partment cover.
the engine or activate any electric equip-
ment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk and discharged batteries can considerably
of accident. The doors can be locked using reduce the range of the remote control.
the remote control key. This could become ● If the buttons of the vehicle key are
an obstacle for assistance in an emergen- pressed or one of the central locking but-
cy situation. tons ››› page 103 is pressed repeatedly in
● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. short succession, the central locking brief-
An unauthorised use of your vehicle could ly disconnects as protection against over-
result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock
always take the key with you when you it if necessary.
leave the vehicle. ● Spare remote control keys are available
● Never remove the key from the ignition if at your Technical Service, where they must
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the be matched to the locking system. Fig. 95 Vehicle key: removing the battery.
steering could suddenly block and it would ● Up to five remote control keys can be
be impossible to steer the vehicle. used. SEAT recommends you ask a specialised
workshop to replace the battery.

CAUTION The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-

All of the vehicle keys contain electronic
cle key, under a cover. »
components. Protect them from damage,
impacts and humidity.
99
 Operation

Changing the battery Synchronize the vehicle key The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked for
● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 98. a long period (e.g. in a private garage) may
If the  button is pressed frequently outside run down and fail to start the motor.
● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-
of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-
hicle key ››› Fig. 94 in the direction of the ar- WARNING
hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-
row ››› .
ing the key. In this case, the key must be re- The incorrect use of the central locking
● Extract the battery from the compartment synchronised as described below: system may cause serious injuries.
using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 95.
● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 98. ● The central locking system will lock all
● Place the new battery in the compartment doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can
as shown ››› Fig. 95, pressing in the opposite ● If necessary, remove the cover from the
prevent any non-authorised individual from
direction to that shown by the arrow ››› . driver door lever ››› page 110. opening the doors and accessing the vehi-
● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 94, pressing it ● Press the  button on the vehicle key. For cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or
onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite di- this, it must remain with the vehicle. accident, locked doors will complicate ac-
rection to that shown by the arrow until it cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas-
● Open the vehicle within one minute using
sengers.
clicks into place. the key blade. The key has been synchron-
● Never leave children or disabled people
ised.
CAUTION alone in the vehicle. The central locking
● If necessary, fit the cap.
button can be used to lock all the doors
● If the battery is not changed correctly,
from within. Therefore, passengers will be
the vehicle key may be damaged. locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked
● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage in the vehicle can be exposed to very high
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- Central locking or very low temperatures.
place the dead battery with another of the ● Depending on the time of the year, tem-
same voltage, size and specifications. Introduction peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
● When fitting the battery, check that the cle can be extremely high or extremely low
polarity is correct. Central locking functions correctly when all resulting in serious injuries and illness or
the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If even death, particularly for young children.
the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be ● Never leave individuals locked in a closed
For the sake of the environment
locked with the key. and locked vehicle. In case of emergency,
Please dispose of your used batteries cor-
If the vehicle has the Keyless Access locking they may not be able to exit the vehicle by
rectly and with respect for the environ-
and ignition system, it may only be locked themselves or get help.
ment.
with the ignition off and the driver's door
closed.

100
 Opening and closing

Description Unlocking one side of the vehicle only Accidental lock-out

When you lock the vehicle with the key, the The central locking system prevents you from
Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid doors and the rear lid are locked. When you being locked out of the vehicle in the follow-
and the tank flap to be unlocked centrally: open the door, you can either unlock only the ing situations:
● From outside, using the vehicle key
driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select
● If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot
the required option, use Easy Connect*
››› page 102. be locked with the central locking switch
››› page 101.
● From outside with the Keyless Access ››› page 103.
››› page 104 system, Automatic locking (Auto Lock)* Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,
● From inside, by pushing the central locking
The Auto Lock function locks the doors and when all the doors and the rear lid have been
button ››› page 103.
the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed closed. This prevents the accidental locking
Various functions are available to improve the of about 15 km/h (9 mph). of the vehicle.
vehicle safety: The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-
Note
tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle
● Security system “Safe” ››› page 106 ● Never leave any valuable items in the ve-
can also be unlocked via the central locking
● Self-locking system to prevent involuntary switch or by pulling one of the inside door hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is
unlocking handles. not a safe.
● Selective unlocking system ● If the LED on the driver door sill lights up
The Auto Lock function can be activated and
for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is
● Automatic speed dependent locking and deactivated in the radio or in the Easy Con-
locked, the central locking system or anti-
unlocking system (Auto Lock) nect* ››› page 101 system. theft alarm* is not working properly. You
● Emergency unlocking system In the event of an accident in which the air- should have the fault repaired at a SEAT
bags inflate, the doors will be automatically Official Service or specialised workshop.
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocked to facilitate access and assistance. ● The vehicle interior monitoring of the an-
unlocking ti-theft alarm* system will only function as
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un- Turn signals intended if the windows and the sunroof*
intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve- are closed.
The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-
hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in- hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle
cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec- is locked.
onds, it re-locks automatically. Central locking settings
If it does not flash, this indicates that one of
the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not Central locking settings can be changed in
closed correctly. the Easy Connect* system. »
101
 Operation

Unlocking doors The doors unlock automatically when the key car. This function prevents the vehicle from
● Select: key    > Vehicle > SET- is removed from the ignition. In addition, you remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is
TINGS > Opening and closing > Cen- can unlock the doors by pressing central pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you
tral locking > Unlocking the doors. locking key  ››› page 103 or, individually, by press the  button for at least one second.
operating the internal door handle (e.g. so
You can choose to unlock all the doors or that a passenger can get out). Selective unlocking system
only the driver door when you unlock the The selective unlocking system allows you to
vehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank
also unlocked. Unlock and lock from the outside flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain
With the Driver setting, when you press the locked.
 button on the remote control key once, only
the driver door is unlocked. If that button is Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap:
pressed twice, the rest of the doors and the ● Press (once) the  button on the remote
rear lid will be unlocked. control key or turn the key once in the open-
ing direction.
If the  button is pressed, all the vehicle
doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the
mation signal* is heard. tank flap simultaneously:
● Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the  but-
Automatic locking (Auto Lock) ton on the remote control key, or turn the key
Vehicles with Easy Connect Fig. 96 Remote control key: buttons. twice within 5 seconds in the opening direc-
● Select: button    > Vehicle > tion.
● Lock: press the  ››› Fig. 96 button.
SETTINGS > Opening and closing > The Safe* security system and the anti-theft
Central locking > Lock automatically ● Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se-
alarm* deactivate immediately when only
when driving. curity system: push the  button again and
the driver door is opened.
hold for 2 seconds.
Vehicles with radio ● Unlock: press the  button. In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro-
● Select: button  > control button  gramme the security central locking system
● Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the 
Central locking > Lock while driv- directly ››› page 101.
button for at least 1 second.
ing.
WARNING
The vehicle will be locked again automatical-
If the function is activated, all the vehicle
ly if you do not open one of the doors or the Observe the safety warnings ››› in Lock-
doors are locked at speeds above 15 km/h (9
rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the ing system “Safe” on page 107.
mph).
102
 Opening and closing

Note ● The LED in the central locking switch lights Related video Keyless Access
up when all the doors are closed and locked.
● Do not use the remote control key until
● You can open the doors individually from
the vehicle is visible.
the inside by pulling the inside door handle.
● Other functions of the remote control key
››› page 114, Convenience open/close ● In the event of an accident in which the air-
function. bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will
be automatically unlocked to facilitate ac-
cess and assistance. Fig. 98 Technology

Unlocking and locking from the in- WARNING

side
● The central locking switch also works
with the ignition switched off, except when
the “safe” system is activated.
● The central locking switch does not oper-
ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside
and the security system is switched on.
● Locked doors could delay assistance in
an emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe-
cially children, in the vehicle.

Note
Fig. 97 Driver's door: central locking switch. Your vehicle will lock automatically when it
reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)
● Lock: press the  ››› Fig. 97 button. (Auto Lock) ››› page 101. You can unlock the
● Unlock: press the  ››› Fig. 97 button. vehicle again using the  button on the
central locking switch.
Please note the following when using the
central locking switch to lock your vehicle:

● It is not possible to open the doors or the

rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,
e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).

103
 Operation

Unlock and lock the vehicle with Depending on the equipment, the vehicle one of the sensor surfaces on the front door
may have the Keyless Access system. handles is touched.
Keyless Access*
Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- The following features are then available
tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle without having to use the vehicle key actively:
without actively using its key. To do this, all
● Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle using
that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in
the detection area where you are attempting the handles of the front doors or the soft-
to access the vehicle ››› Fig. 99 and to touch touch/handle on the rear lid.
one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- ● Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using the
dles ››› Fig. 100 ››› . sensor of the driver or passenger door han-
dle.
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via
the front doors only. When doing so, the re- ● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine
mote control key must be no further than ap- with the starter button ››› page 246.
Fig. 99 Keyless Access: proximity zones. prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.
The central locking and locking systems op-
It does not matter where you carry the key, erate in the same way as a normal locking
e.g. in your jacket pocket. and unlocking system. Only the controls
change.
Once the doors have been locked, they can-
not be opened again immediately. This will Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a
enable you to check that the doors are prop- double flash of the indicator lights; locking by
erly closed. a single flash.
If you wish you may unlock only the corre- If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and
sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec- the rear lid are closed leaving the last key
essary adjustments can be made in vehicles used inside the vehicle and none outside, the
with a driver information system vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve-
Fig. 100 Door handle: sensor surfaces
››› page 92››› page 74. hicle's indicator lights will flash four times.
The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if
››› Fig. 100
General information you do not open any door or the rear lid.
A Unlocking sensor surface on the inside of
the door handle. If a valid key is in the proximity of the car The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-
B Locking sensor surface on the outside of
››› Fig. 99, the Keyless Access locking and onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open
starting system gives the key entry as soon as any door or boot hatch.
the door handle.

104
 Opening and closing

Unlocking and opening the doors ● Touch (twice) the sensor surface of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity
(Keyless-Entry) ››› Fig. 100 (arrow) of one of the front door
B sensors are disabled for a certain period of
● Grip one of the front door handles. When handles to lock the vehicle without activating time.
you do this, you touch the sensor surface the “Safelock” security system ››› page 106.
Sensors will again be enabled:
››› Fig. 100 A (arrow) of the handle and the
vehicle unlocks. Unlocking and locking the boot hatch ● After a time.

● Open the door. When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-
matically unlocks on opening if there is a val- ton  on the key.
On vehicles with selective opening or info- id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 99. ● OR: if the boot is opened.
tainment system configuration, pulling the
Open or close the rear lid normally. ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with
door handle twice will unlock all doors.
After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If the key.
In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys- the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid
tem: closing and locking the doors will not lock automatically after closing it. Keyless Access temporary disconnection
(Keyless-Exit) function*

● Switch the ignition off. What happens when locking the vehicle You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless
with a second key Access unlocking for one locking and unlock-
● Close the driver's door.
If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and ing cycle.
● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface
it is locked from the outside with a second ve- ● Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-
››› Fig. 100 (arrow) on one of the front
B
hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked
door handles. The door that is used must be hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-
for engine ignition ››› page 246. In order to
closed. wise the vehicle cannot be locked.
enable engine ignition, press the  button on
● Close the door.
the key inside the vehicle.
In vehicles with the “Safe” security sys- ● Push the central locking button  on the re-
tem: closing and locking the doors mote control and touch the locking sensor
Automatically disabling sensors
(Keyless-Exit) surface of the driver door handle
If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a
● Switch the ignition off.
long period of time, the proximity sensors on ››› Fig. 100 B within the following 5 seconds.
● Close the driver's door. Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise the
the passenger doors are automatically disa-
vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also
● Touch (once) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 100 bled.
possible if the vehicle is locked through the
B (arrow) on one of the front door handles.
If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- driver’s door lock.
The vehicle locks with the “Safe” security sys- dles is often activated in an unusual manner ● To check that the function has been deacti-
tem ››› page 106. The door that is used must
be closed.
with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches
vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull »
105
 Operation

on the door handle. The door should not Note key is covered by another object (e.g. an
open. aluminium case).
● If the vehicle battery has little or no
The next time the door can only be unlocked charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost ● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a

via the remote control or the lock cylinder. or entirely out of charge, you will probably layer of salt, the correct functioning of the
The next time the door is locked/unlocked, not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle sensors on the door handles may be affec-
with the Keyless Access system. The vehi- ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.
Keyless Access will be active again.
cle can be unlocked or locked manually ● If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-
››› page 110. matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the
Convenience functions
● To control the proper locking of the vehi- gear stick is in position P.
To close all the electric windows and the sun- cle, the release function is disabled for ap- ● To improve the safety of your vehicle, the
roof using the comfort function, keep a fin- prox. 2 seconds. remote control of the system is equipped
ger for a few seconds on the locking sensor
● If the message Keyless access system with a position sensor. If this remote control
surface ››› Fig. 100 B (arrow) of the door does not detect movement for a certain
faulty is displayed on the screen of the
handle until the windows and roof have length of time, the system will conclude
dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the
closed. operation of the Keyless Access system. that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on
How the doors open when touching the sen- Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec- a night table) so it will be disabled.
sor surface on the door handle will depend ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
on the settings that have been activated in this.
the infotainment system, using the button ● Depending on the function set on the in- Locking system “Safe”1)
   > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Open- fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte-
ing and closing. rior mirrors will unfold and the surround When the vehicle is locked, the “Safe” securi-
lighting will come on when unlocking the ty system puts the door handles out of opera-
CAUTION vehicle using the sensor surface on the tion and makes it difficult for unauthorized
driver and passenger door handles
The sensor surfaces on the door handles people to enter. The doors cannot be opened
››› page 130. from inside ››› .
could engage if hit with a water jet or high
● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle
pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle Depending on the vehicle, when switching the
key in the proximity. If at least one of the or the system fails to detect one, a warning
will display on the dash panel screen. This ignition off, a warning may be displayed on
electric windows is open and the sensor
could happen if any other radio frequency the control panel screen stating that the
surface ››› Fig. 100 B (arrow) on one of the
signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. “Safe” security system is activated.
handles is activated continuously, all win-
dows will close. from a mobile device accessory) or if the

1) Available depending on market and version.

106
 Opening and closing

Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe” WARNING ● The turn signal light will flash twice on
security system. opening and deactivating the alarm.
Do not leave anyone (especially children)
● Press the locking button  once on the ve- ● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-
in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside
hicle key. and the “Safe” security system* is activa- ing and activating the alarm.
ted, as the doors and windows cannot then
Lock the vehicle without activating the be opened from the inside. Locked doors When does the system trigger an alarm?
“Safe” system. could delay assistance in an emergency.
The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for
● Press the locking  button on the vehicle about 30 seconds alongside a sound and
key twice. optical (flashing) warning signals and will be
repeated about ten times when the vehicle is
● On vehicles with the Keyless Access locking Anti-theft alarm system* locked and the following unauthorised ac-
and ignition system: touch the sensor surface
on the outside part of the door handle twice. tions are attempted:
Description
● Opening a door that is mechanically un-
When the “Safe” security system is disa- The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to locked using the vehicle key without switching
bled, the following needs to be taken into break into the vehicle or steal it. The system on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer-
account: will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig- tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is
● The vehicle can be opened and unlocked nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced. no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is
from the inside using an inside door handle. activated immediately on opening the door).
The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned
● The anti-theft alarm is activated. on when the vehicle is locked with the key. ● A door is opened.
● The vehicle interior monitoring system and The system is immediately activated and the ● Opening the bonnet.
the anti-tow system are disabled. turn signal light located on the driver door will ● The rear lid is opened.
flash along with the turn signals, indicating
● When the ignition is switched on with a non-
“Safe” status that the alarm and the locking security sys-
tem (double lock) have been turned on. authorised key.
The flashing frequency of the diode in the ● Undue manipulation of the alarm.
door sill immediately confirms the process. If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,
they will not be included in the protection ● Disconnection of the vehicle battery.
Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence
for a brief period, then it stops for approxi- zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con- ● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles
mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse- with interior monitoring ››› page 108).
flashing slowly. quently closed, they will be automatically in- ● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with
cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle
anti-tow system ››› page 108). »
and the turn signals will flash accordingly
when the doors close.
107
 Operation

● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with ● If, after the audible warning goes off, an- The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow
anti-tow system ››› page 108). other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-
● When the vehicle is transported on a ferry rear lid is opened after a door has been ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched
or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or opened), the alarm is triggered again. on. In order to activate it, all the doors and
vehicle interior monitoring ››› page 108). ● The anti-theft alarm is not activated the rear lid must be closed.
● When a trailer connected to the anti-theft when the vehicle is locked from within using If the “Safe” security system* ››› page 106 is
alarm system is disconnected. the central locking button . switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring
● If the driver door is unlocked mechanical- and the tow-away protection are automati-
How to turn OFF the alarm ly with the key, only the driver door is un- cally disconnected.
locked, the rest of the doors remain locked.
● Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button 
Only when the ignition has been turned on Activation
of the key. will the other doors be available - but not
● It is automatically switched on when the
● OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key. unlocked - and the central locking button
will be activated. anti-theft alarm is activated.
If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanically ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat
using the key, the key must be inserted into then the anti-theft alarm will not operate
Deactivation
the ignition, and the ignition must be turned correctly. ● Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
on within 15 seconds of opening the door. chanically or by pressing the  button on the
● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if
Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. the battery is disconnected or not working remote control. The time period from when
and the ignition will be blocked. for any reason. the door is opened until the key is inserted in
● The alarm is triggered immediately if one the contact should not exceed 15 seconds,
CAUTION of the battery cables is disconnected while otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
If the anti-theft security system is switched the alarm system is active. ● Press the  button on the remote control
off, the vehicle interior monitoring and the twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors
tow-away protection are automatically will be deactivated. The alarm system re-
disconnected. Interior monitoring and the anti- mains activated.

tow system* The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-

Note tow system are automatically switched on
● After 28 days, the indicator light will be It is a monitoring or control function incorpo- again next time the vehicle is locked.
switched off to prevent the battery from ex- rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detects
unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior
hausting if the vehicle has been left parked
sound. monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must
for a long period of time. The alarm system
remains activated.
108
 Opening and closing

be done each time that the vehicle is locked; ● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,
Doors
if not, they will be automatically switched on. such as loose papers, items hanging from the
rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- Introduction
tow system should be switched off if animals
Note
are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, The doors and rear lid can be locked man-
their movements will trigger the alarm) or ● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is ually and partially opened, for example if the
when, for example, the vehicle is transported activated without the volumetric sensor key or the central locking is damaged.
or has to be towed with only one axle on the function, relocking will activate the alarm
ground. with all its functions, except the volumetric WARNING
sensor. This function is reactivated when
the alarm is switched on again, unless it is Opening and closing doors carelessly can
Deactivation through the infotainment cause serious injury.
deliberately switched off.
system
● If the alarm has been triggered by the ● If the vehicle is locked from outside, the
● Turn off the ignition and select: key    doors and windows cannot be opened from
volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by
> Vehicle > SETTINGS > Opening and a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver the inside.
closing> Central locking > Interior door when the vehicle is opened. The flash ● Never leave children or disabled people
monitoring. is different to the flash indicating the alarm alone in the car. They could be trapped in
● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle is activated. the car in an emergency and will not be
interior monitoring and the tow-away protec- ● The vibration of a mobile phone left in- able to get themselves to safety.
tion are switched off until the next time the side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in- ● Depending on the time of the year, tem-
door is opened. terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
sensors react to movements and shakes in- cle can be extremely high or extremely low
False alarms side the vehicle. resulting in serious injuries and illness or
● If on activating the alarm, any door or the even death, particularly for young children.
Interior monitoring will only operate correctly
rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-
if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-
vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and WARNING
serve related legal requirements.
the anti-tow system will only be activated
once all the doors are closed (including the Getting in the way of the doors and the rear
The following cases may cause a false rear lid). lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-
alarm: jury.
● Open windows (partially or fully). ● Open and close the doors and the rear lid

● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or

only when there is nobody in the way. »
completely).

109
 Operation

CAUTION Special characteristics

● The anti-theft alarm will remain active
When opening and closing in an emergen-
cy, carefully disassemble components and when vehicles are unlocked. However, the
then reassemble them carefully to avoid alarm will not be triggered ››› page 107.
damage to the vehicle. ● After the driver door is opened, you have 15
seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this
time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.
Emergency unlocking or locking of ● Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-
the driver’s door bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-
activates the anti-theft alarm system.

Fig. 102 Driver door handle: lever the cover off Note
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
If the central locking system should fail to op- the vehicle is locked manually using the
erate, the driver door can still be locked and key shaft ››› page 100.
unlocked by turning the key in the lock.
As a general rule, when the driver door is
locked manually all other doors are locked. Emergency lock of doors without
When it is unlocked manually, only the driver
lock cylinders
door opens. Please observe the instructions
Fig. 101 Driver door handle: Concealed lock relating to the anti-theft alarm system
cylinder. ››› page 107.
● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 98.
● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in
the cover on the driver door handle
››› Fig. 102 then remove the cover upwards.
● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to
unlock or lock the vehicle.

Fig. 103 Locking the door manually.

110
 Opening and closing

If the central locking system should fail to Childproof locks Deactivating the childproof lock
work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder – Unlock the vehicle and open the door
will have to be locked separately. whose childproof lock you want to deacti-
The emergency lock is located on the front of vate.
the front passenger's door and the rear – With the door open, rotate the groove in the
doors. It can only be seen if the door is open. door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise
● Pull the cap out of the opening. for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 104 and
clockwise for the right hand side doors.
● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to
the right as far as it will go (if the door is on Once the childproof lock is activated, the
the right side) or to the left (if the door is on door can only be opened from the outside.
the left side).
● Replace the cap. Fig. 104 Childproof lock on the left hand side
door.
Once the door has been closed it can no lon- Rear lid
ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- The childproof lock prevents the rear doors
rior door handle once to unlock and open the from being opened from the inside. This sys- Introduction
door. tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-
cidentally while the vehicle is running.
WARNING
This function is independent of the vehicle
Careless and unsuitable locking, opening
electronic opening and locking systems. It
and closing of the rear lid can cause acci-
only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- dents and serious injury.
ted and deactivated manually, as described
● The rear lid must not be opened when the
below:
reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may
damage the tail lights.
Activating the childproof lock
● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in down with your hand on the rear window.
which you wish to activate the childproof The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
lock. ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while
door using the ignition key, clockwise for driving. »
the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 104 and an-
ti-clockwise for the right hand side doors.
111
 Operation

● Closing the rear lid without observing Opening and closing the rear lid If the doors are locked, the rear lid is also
and ensuring it is clear could cause serious locked.
injury to you and to third parties. Make sure
that no one is in the path of the rear lid.
● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into
the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-
soning!
● Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-
low children to play inside or next to it, es-
pecially if the rear lid is open. Children
could enter the luggage compartment,
close the rear lid and become trapped. A Fig. 105 Rear lid: opening from outside.
locked vehicle can reach extremely high
and low temperatures, depending on the The rear lid opening system operates electri-
time of year, thus causing serious injuries, cally. It is activated by using the insignia sha-
illness or even death. ped handle on the rear lid ››› Fig. 105.
To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the  or
CAUTION
 buttons of the vehicle key.
Before opening or closing the rear lid, make
sure that there is enough space to open or
A warning appears on the instrument panel
close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a display if the rear lid is open or not properly
garage. closed.* An audible warning is also given if it
is opened while the vehicle is moving faster
than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
Note
Before closing the rear lid, make sure that Opening and closing
the key has not been left inside the luggage
● To open: pull on the handle and lift it up
compartment.
››› Fig. 105. The rear lid opens automatically.
● Close: hold the gate by one of the handles
fitted to the inner lining and close it by moving
it downwards.

112
 Opening and closing

Emergency unlocking of the rear lid Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-
gage compartment
Valid for the model: Leon
● Insert the key blade into the slot and move
the key in the direction of the arrow until the
lock unlocks ››› Fig. 106.

Valid for the model: Leon Sportourer ST

● Remove the cover by inserting a screwdriv-
er into the slot ››› Fig. 107 .
● Insert the key into the opening and turn it in
the direction of the arrow until the latch is re-
Fig. 106 Detail of the luggage compartment:
emergency unlocking (LEON model). leased ››› Fig. 107 .

Fig. 107 Detail of the luggage compartment:

emergency unlocking (Leon Sportourer ST
model).

The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in

the event of an emergency (e.g. no battery).
There is a groove in the luggage compart-
ment allowing access to the emergency
opening mechanism.

113
 Operation

Window controls The front and rear electric windows can be Convenience opening:
operated by using the controls on the driver ● Press and hold the  button on the remote
door. The other doors each have a switch for control key until all the windows and the sun-
Electrically opening and closing their own window. roof* have reached the desired position.
the windows
Always close the windows fully if you park the ● OR: First unlock the vehicle using the  but-
vehicle or leave it unattended ››› . ton on the remote control key and then keep
the key in the driver door lock until all the win-
You can use the electric windows for approx.
dows and the sunroof* have reached the re-
10 minutes after switching off the ignition if
quired position.
neither the driver door nor the front passen-
ger door has been opened and the key has Convenience closing:
not been removed from the ignition.
● Press and hold button  on the remote
control key until all the windows and the sun-
Safety switch *
roof* are closed ››› .
The safety control ››› Fig. 108 5 on the driver ● OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the
door can be used to disable the electric win-
"lock" position until all the windows and the
dow buttons on the rear doors.
sunroof* are closed.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear
Fig. 108 Detail of the driver's door: window doors are activated. During convenience closing, first the windows
controls. and then the sliding sunroof will be closed.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors
● Opening the window: press the button . are deactivated. Different settings can be changed using the
Easy Connect system. Select: key    >
● Closing the window: pull the button . The safety control symbol  lights up in yel- Vehicle > SETTINGS > Opening and
low if the buttons on the rear doors are closing > Window operations > Con-
Buttons on the driver door switched off. venience opening.
1 Window on the front left door
Convenience open/close function One-touch opening and closing
2 Window on the front right door
The electric windows can be opened or The one-touch automatic opening and clos-
3 Window on the rear left door
closed from outside using the vehicle key: ing is used to open or close the windows
4 Window on the rear right door
completely. It will not be necessary to hold
5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric the button of the corresponding electric win-
window buttons in the rear doors. dow.

114
 Opening and closing

For the automatic raising function: pull the ● Never close the rear lid without observing window could not be closed before at-
button for the corresponding window up- and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise tempting to close it again.
wards until it reaches the second position. could cause serious injury to you and third
For the automatic lowering function: pull parties. Make sure that no one is in the path
of a window.
the button for the corresponding window up- Window anti-trap function
wards until it reaches the second position. ● If the ignition is switched on, the electric
equipment could be activated with risk of The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-
Stop automatic movement: push or pull on injury, for example, in the electric windows.
the button of the corresponding window. jury when the electric windows close.
● The doors can be locked using the re-
mote control key. This could become an ● If a window is obstructed when closing au-
Resetting one-touch opening and closing obstacle for assistance in an emergency tomatically, the window stops at this point
The one-touch opening and closing function situation. and lowers immediately ››› .
is not active after the vehicle battery has ● Therefore always take the key with you ● Next, check why the window does not close
been disconnected or is flat and will have to when you leave the vehicle. before attempting it again.
be reset. ● The electric windows will work until the ● If you try within the following 10 seconds
ignition has been switched off and one of and the window closes again with difficulty or
● Pull the button of the corresponding win-
the front doors has been opened. there is an obstruction, the automatic closing
dow and hold it for one second in this posi-
tion. ● If necessary, use the safety switch to dis- will stop working for 10 seconds.
able the rear electric windows. Make sure ● If the window is still obstructed, the window
● Release the button and pull upwards and
that they have been disabled.
hold again. The one-touch function is now will stop at this point.
● For safety reasons, you should only use
ready for operation. ● If there is no obvious reason why the win-
the remote control open and close func-
tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.
dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by
The automatic one-touch electric windows pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-
can be reinitialised individually or several at a To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the
windows when pressing the button to close dow closes with maximum force. The roll-
time. back function is now deactivated.
them. The windows stop moving as soon as
the button is released. ● If more than 10 seconds pass, the window
WARNING
will open fully when you operate one of the
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro-
Note buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated. »
duction on page 109.
● Incorrect use of the electric windows can If the window is not able to close because it
result in injury. is stiff or because of an obstruction, the
window will automatically open again
››› page 115. If this happens, check why the
115
 Operation

WARNING cially if they have access to the vehicle Opening and closing the sunroof
key. If using they key unattended, they
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Elec-
could lock the vehicle, start the engine,
trically opening and closing the windows
switch on the ignition and activate the sun-
on page 115.
roof.
● The roll-back function does not prevent
● After switching off, it is still possible to
fingers or other parts of the body getting
open or close the sunroof during a short
pinched against the window frame. Risk of
space of time provided that neither the
accident.
driver nor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION
Sunroof* ● To prevent damage, during winter tem-
Fig. 109 On the interior roof lining: turn the
peratures remove any ice or snow that switch to open and close.
Introduction might be on the car roof before opening the
sunroof or adjusting the tilt position.
The sunroof only works when the ignition is ● Before leaving the vehicle or in case of
switched on. Once the ignition has been rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the
switched off, you can still open or close the sunroof open or in a tilted position, water
sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver can enter the interior and can cause con-
door and the front passenger door are not siderable damage to the electrical system.
opened. As a result, other damage can occur in the
vehicle.
WARNING
If the sunroof is used negligently or without Note
paying due attention, it can cause serious ● Leaves and other loose objects that ac- Fig. 110 On the interior roof lining: press the
injury. switch and pull on it to raise and lower the roof.
cumulate on the sunroof rails should be
● Open or close the sunroof and the sun regularly cleaned away either by hand or
blind only when no one is in their path of with a vacuum. To open the sunroof, the switch must be in the
movement. ● If the sunroof does not work correctly, the
position 1 .
● Never leave any key inside the vehicle anti-trap function will not work either. Con- ● Open: turn the switch to position ››› Fig. 109
when exiting. tact a specialised workshop. 3 .
● Never leave a child or any other person
who may need help in the vehicle, espe-
116
 Opening and closing

● Comfort position: turn the switch to position Once the ignition has been switched off, you Convenience function to open or
››› Fig. 109 2 . can still open or close the sun blind for a few
close the sunroof*
● Close: turn the switch to position minutes provided the driver door and the
››› Fig. 109 1 . front passenger door are not opened.
● Lift: Push the switch to position ››› Fig. 110
Opening completely (automatic function)
4 . For an intermediate position, hold down
the switch until you reach the desired posi- ● Press button ››› Fig. 111 1 briefly.
tion.
● Lower: pull the switch to position ››› Fig. 110 Closing completely (automatic function)
5 . For an intermediate position, hold down ● Press the button 2 briefly.
the switch until you reach the desired posi-
tion. Stop automatic operation
● Press button 1 or button 2 briefly.
Fig. 112 Door handle: sensor surface.

Opening and closing the sunshade To set the intermediate position The sunroof can be opened and closed with
blind ● Press button 1 or button 2 until the cor- the convenience function, just like the win-
3 Valid for vehicles: with sun blinds rect position is set. dows.

Using the door lock*

● Hold the key in the door lock of the driver
door in either the unlocking or locking posi-
tion to open or close the roof in the tilted po-
sition. Release the key to interrupt this func-
tion.

Using the remote control

● Keep the locking or unlocking button press-
ed to open or close the roof. If you release the
Fig. 111 On the interior roof lining: sunshade
blind buttons. button is the opening or closing will stop. »

117
 Operation

Using the Keyless Access* system (only

closing)
● Glass roof: within approx. 5 seconds of the
activation of the anti-trap function, keep the
Lights
● Press and hold the locking sensor surface control pulled backwards ››› Fig. 110 (arrow
››› Fig. 112 (arrow) on the door handle to 5 ) until the roof is completely closed. Vehicle lighting
close the sunroof. If you release the sensor ● Sunshade blind: within approximately
surface, the closing movement stops. 5 seconds of having activated the anti-trap Related video
function, press button ››› Fig. 111 2 until the
sun blind closes completely.
Anti-trap function of the panoramic ● The sunroof or sun blind close without
sunroof and sunshade the anti-trap function intervening!
● If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close,
The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of visit a specialised workshop. Fig. 113 Lights and visi-
injury when closing the sunroof and the sun bility
blind ››› . If the sunroof or sun blind encoun- WARNING
ter resistance or an obstacle when closing,
Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the
they reopen immediately.
anti-trap function can cause serious inju- Control lamps
● Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not ries.
● Always be careful when closing the sun-
close.  It lights up
roof and sun blind.
● Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.
Driving light totally or partially faulty.
● No person should ever remain in the way
● If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closed
of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when Fault in the cornering light system.
due to an obstacle or some resistance, it closing without the anti-trap function.
stops at the corresponding position and then
● The anti-trap function does not prevent
opens. For automatic closing, a new closing  It lights up
fingers or other parts of the body from be-
attempt might take place. Rear fog light switched on ››› page 120.
coming trapped against the roof frame and
● If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to injuries occurring.
close, close it without the anti-trap function.
 It lights up

Closing the sunroof or sun blind without Left or right turn signal.
the anti-trap function The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn
signal is faulty.
● The switch ››› Fig. 109 should be in the
“closed” position 1 . Hazard warning lights on ››› page 124.

118
 Lights

 It lights up Headlight switch The driver is personally responsible for the

correct use and adjustment of the lights in all
Trailer turn signals situations.

 It lights up Automatic dipped beam headlight control

*
Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 121.
The automatic dipped beam control is merely
intended as an aid and is not able to recog-
 It lights up
nise all driving situations.
The Light Assist system is on ››› page 122. When the light switch is in position , the
vehicle lights and the instrument panel and
Several warning and control lamps light up
switch lighting switch on automatically in the
for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- Fig. 114 Dash panel: lights control.
following situations ››› :
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec- ● Turn the switch to the required position ● The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex-
onds. ››› Fig. 114. ample, when driving through a tunnel. They
switch off when adequate lighting is detec-
WARNING Sym- Ignition switch- Ignition is ted.
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con-
bol ed off switched on
● The rain sensor detects rain and activates
trol and warning lamps on page 90. Fog lights, dipped Light off or day- the wipers. They switch off when the wipers
 beam and side time driving light have not been activated for a few minutes.
lights off. on.

The “Coming Daytime running lights

Automatic control
home” and “Leaving The daytime running lights consist of individu-
of dipped beam
 home” guide lights
and daytime run- al lights, integrated in the front headlights.
may be switched
ning light. These lights come on when the daytime run-
on.
ning lights are switched on. On vehicles
 Side light on. equipped with LED tail lights, the rear side
light is switched on as well ››› .
Dipped beam head- Dipped beam
 light off switched on. The daytime running lights turn on every time
the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in »

119
 Operation

position  or , according to the level of ex- ● When the light switch is in position  or .
distracting other road users. This could re-
terior lighting. sult in a serious accident.
WARNING
When the light switch is in position , a light ● Always make sure that the headlights are
sensor automatically switches dipped beam If the road is not well lit and other road correctly adjusted.
on and off (including the control and instru- users cannot see the vehicle well enough
ment lighting) or the daytime running lights or at all, accidents may occur.
Note
depending on the level of exterior lighting. ● The automatic dipped beam control
● The legal requirements regarding the use
( ) only switches on the dipped beam
when there are changes in light conditions of vehicle lights in each country must be
Motorway light*
but not, for example, when it is foggy. observed.
The motorway light is available on vehicles ● The dipped beam headlights will only
equipped with full-LED lights. work with the ignition on. The side lights
WARNING
The function is connected and disconnected come on automatically when the ignition is
via the corresponding Easy Connect system The side lights or daytime running lights turned off.
are not bright enough to illuminate the road
menu.
ahead and to ensure that other road users
● Activation: when going above 110 km/h are able to see you.
Fog lights
(68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip- ● Always use your dipped beam head
ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.
er's visibility distance. ● Never drive with daytime lights if the road
● Deactivation: when reducing the speed of is not well lit due to weather or lighting
the vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), the conditions.
dipped beam immediately returns to its nor- ● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,
mal position. when activating the daytime running light
the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-
Audible warnings to advise the driver that cle which does not have the rear lights on
the lights have not been switched off may not be visible to other drivers in the
darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in
If the key is not in the ignition and the driver conditions of poor visibility.
door is open, an audible warning signal is Fig. 115 Dash panel: lights control.
heard in the following cases: this will remind
you to turn the light off. WARNING The warning lamps  or  also show, on the
If the headlights are set too high and not light switch or instrument panel, when the
● When the parking light is on ››› page 121. used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or front fog lights are on.

120
 Lights

● Turning on the front fog lights* : pull the 2 Left turn light or left-hand parking light When the parking light is switched on, the
light switch out to its first click position (ignition switched off). front side light and the tail light on the corre-
››› Fig. 115 1 , from positions ,  or . 3 Main beam on: control lamp  lit up on sponding side of the vehicle turn on.
● Turning on the rear fog light : pull the the instrument panel.
light switch fully out 2 from position ,  or Parking light on both sides
4 Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con-
. trol lamp  lit up. ● Switch the ignition off.
● To switch off the fog lights, press the light ● Place the light switch in position .
switch or turn it to position . Push the lever all the way down to turn off the
● Lock the vehicle from the outside.
corresponding function.
Note In doing so, only the side lights of both head-
Convenience turn signals lights light up, and additionally the tail lights
The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind
you. You should use the rear fog light only When the ignition is switched on, move the will do so partially.
when visibility is very poor. lever as far as possible upwards or down-
wards and release the lever. The turn signal WARNING
will flash three times. Improper or lack of use of the turn signals,
Turn signal and main beam lever The convenience turn signal can be activated or forgetting to deactivate them can con-
and deactivated in the Easy Connect system fuse other road users. This could result in a
using the key    > Vehicle > SET- serious accident.
TINGS > Lighting > Light assistance ● Always give warning when you are going
> Convenience turn signal ››› page 92. to change lane, overtake or when turning,
activating the turn signal in good time.
In vehicles that do not have the correspond-
● As soon as you have finished changing
ing menu, this function can be deactivated in
lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn
a specialised workshop.
signal off.

Parking light 
WARNING
The parking lights will only work with the igni-
tion off. If said light is on, an audible warning Incorrect use of the headlights may cause
Fig. 116 Turn signal and main beam lever. accidents and serious injury, as the main
will sound while the driver door is open.
beam may distract or dazzle other drivers. »
More the lever to the required position: ● Switch the ignition off.
1 Right turn light or right-hand parking light ● Move the turn signal lever up or down.
(ignition switched off).
121
 Operation

Note Main beam assist (Light Assist)* ● OR: while the main beam is on, pull the turn
signal light and main beam headlights lever
● If the turn signal lever is left on after the
The main beam assist acts within the limits of forwards ››› Fig. 116 4 .
key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
the system and depending on environmental ● OR: push the turn signal and main beam
an acoustic signal sounds when the driver
and traffic conditions. Once switched on, the headlight lever forwards to manually turn on
door is opened. This is intended as a re-
minder to switch off the turn signal, unless system is activated as of a speed of about 60 the main beam. The main beam assist will
you wish to leave the parking light on. km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated below then be deactivated.
about 30 km/h (18 mph) ››› .
● If the convenience turn signals are oper-
ating (three flashes) and the other conven- When the system is activated and the cam- Malfunctions
ience turn signals are switched on, the ac- era detects other vehicles that may be daz- The following conditions may prevent the
tive part stops flashing and only flashes zled, the main beam is automatically switch- main beam headlight control from turning off
once in the new part selected. ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is automati- the headlights in time or from turning off alto-
● The turn signal only works when the igni- cally switched on. gether:
tion is switched on. The hazard warning
The main beam assist generally detects illu- ● In poorly lit towns with highly reflective
lights also work when the ignition is switch-
minated areas and deactivates the main
ed off. signs.
beam when passing through a town, for ex-
● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the ● Other insufficiently lit road users (such as
ample.
control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn pedestrians or cyclists).
signals) and the vehicle turn signal will
Switching the main beam assist on  ● On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps)
flash at double speed.
● Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch
and when oncoming vehicles are partially
● The main beam headlights can only be obscured.
switched on if the dipped beam headlights to the position .
● When the drivers of other oncoming vehi-
are already on. ● From the base position, press the turn signal
cles (such as a truck) can see over a guard
● In cold or damp weather conditions, the and main beam headlights lever forwards
rail in the centre of the road.
headlights, tail lights and turn signals may ››› Fig. 116 3 When the lamp  is displayed
mist up inside temporarily. This is normal on the instrument panel display, the main ● If the camera is damaged or the power
and in no way effects the useful life of the beam assist is switched on. supply is cut off.
vehicle lighting system. ● In fog, snow and heavy rain.
● The parking light does not activate auto- Switching the main beam assist off  ● With dust and sand turbulence.
matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig- ● Turn the light switch to a position other than
● With loose gravel in the field of vision of the
nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec-  ››› page 119.
ted. camera.

122
 Lights

● When the field of vision of the camera is ● Check that the windscreen is not dam- “Coming home” and “Leav-
misted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow, aged in the area of the field of vision of the ing home” function
ice, etc. camera.
The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”
WARNING function lights up the vehicle’s immediate
Note
The convenience features of the main proximity when getting into and out of it in the
Main beam and headlight flasher can be
beam assist should not encourage the tak- dark. When switched on, the front position
turned on and off manually at any time with
ing of risks. The system is not a replace- and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li-
the turn signal and main beam lever
ment for driver concentration. cense plate light come on.
››› page 121.
● You are always in control of the main
The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a photo-
beam and adapting it to the light, visibility
sensor.
and traffic conditions.
● It is possible that the main beam head- Fog lights with cornering light func- In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain-
light control does not recognise all driving tion* ment system you can adjust the duration of
situations and is limited under certain cir- the light switch-off delay, and activate and
cumstances. The cornering light function is an additional deactivate the function.
● When the field of vision of the camera is function to the dipped beam headlights to
dirty, covered or damaged, operation of improve lighting of the side of the road when Activating the “Coming Home” function
the main beam control may be affected. taking a sharp turn at low speed. For vehicles with light and rain sensors.
This also applies when changes are made The cornering light function works when the ● Switch off the engine and remove the key
to the vehicle lighting system, for example,
dipped beam headlights are already on and from the ignition with the light switch in posi-
if additional headlights are installed.
it is activated when driving at speeds below tion  ››› page 119.
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
● The automatic “Coming Home” function is
CAUTION
● If the steering wheel is turned or the turn only active when the light sensor detects
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- darkness.
signal is switched on, the front fog light grad-
tem, take the following points into consid-
ually turns on. After the turn, the cornering
eration: For vehicles without light and rain sensors.
light function is gradually switched off.
● Clean the field of vision of the camera ● Switch the ignition off.
● When engaging reverse gear, both front fog
regularly and make sure it is free of snow
lights turn on. ● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-
and ice.
mately 1 second.
● Do not cover the field of vision of the
camera. When the driver door is opened, the “Coming
Home” lighting comes on. The delay in »
123
 Operation

switching off the headlights is counted from Note 4. Apply the handbrake.
when the last door or boot hatch is closed.
To activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav- 5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;
ing Home” function, the rotary light switch for an automatic gearbox, move the gear
The “Coming Home” lighting turns off in
must be in position  and the light sensor lever to P.
the following cases:
must detect darkness.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-
● Automatically, once the headlight turn off
tention of other road users to your vehicle.
delay has elapsed.
● Automatically, when a vehicle door or the 7. Always take the vehicle key with you when
Hazard warning lights 
rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting you leave the vehicle.
the engine.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the
● When the rotary light switch is turned to po- hazard warning lights are switched on. The
sition  ››› page 119. two turn signal turn signal lamps   and the
● With the ignition is switched on. turn signal lamp in the switch  will flash at
the same time. The simultaneous hazard
Activating the “Leaving Home” function warning lights also work when the ignition is
switched off.
● Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
● The “Leaving Home” function is only activa- Emergency braking warning
ted when the light switch is in position 
If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-
and the light sensor detects darkness. Fig. 117 Dash panel: hazard warning lights
switch ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50
mph), the brake light flashes several times per
The “Leaving Home” lighting switches off
The hazard warning lights are used to draw second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If
in the following cases:
the attention of other road users to your vehi- you continue braking, the hazard warning
● Automatically, when the “Leaving Home” lights will come on automatically when the
cle in emergencies.
delay period ends (default 30 sec). vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off
If your vehicle breaks down: automatically when the vehicle starts to
● When the vehicle is locked using the remote
control. 1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from move again.
● When the light switch is turned to position . moving traffic.
WARNING
● With the ignition is switched on. 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard
● The risk of an accident increases if your
warning lights ››› .
vehicle breaks down. Always use the haz-
3. Switch the ignition off. ard warning lights and a warning triangle to

124
 Lights

draw the attention of other road users to The headlight range control ››› Fig. 118 is Two front occupants, luggage com-
modified according to the value of the head- Setting 0
your stationary vehicle. partment empty
light beam and the vehicle load status. This
● Due to the high temperatures that the All seats occupied, luggage compart-
offers the driver optimum visibility and the Setting 1
catalytic converter can reach, never park ment empty
in an area where the catalytic converter
headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers
could come into contact with highly inflam- ››› . All seats occupied, luggage compart-
Setting 2 ment full. With trailer and minimum
mable materials, for example dry grass or The headlights can only be adjusted when drawbar load.
spilt petrol. This could start a fire. the dipped beam is switched on.
Driver only, luggage compartment full
To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 118: Setting 3 Driving with trailer and maximum
Note
drawbar load.
● The battery will run down if the hazard Value Vehicle load statusa)
warning lights are left on for a long time,
Two front occupants, luggage compart-
Dynamic headlight range control
even if the ignition is switched off.  ment empty The control is not mounted in vehicles with
● The use of the hazard warning lights de-
dynamic headlight range control. The head-
scribed here is subject to the relevant stat- All seats occupied, luggage compart-
utory requirements.
 ment empty light range is automatically adjusted accord-
ing to the vehicle load status when they are
All seats occupied, luggage compart- switched on.
 ment full. With trailer and minimum
Light range control drawbar load.
WARNING
Driver only, luggage compartment full Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean
 With trailer and maximum drawbar load.
that the headlights dazzle and distract oth-
a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those er drivers. This could result in a serious ac-
shown in the table, it is possible to select intermediary cident.
positions. ● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load
status so that it does not blind other driv-
OR: ers.
Through the Easy Connect system, with the
button    > Vehicle > SETTINGS >
Lighting > Light assistance > Head-
light height adjustment ››› page 92).
Fig. 118 Next to the steering wheel: headlight
range control.

125
 Operation

Driving abroad Interior lights Interior and reading lights

The light beam of the dipped beam lights is

asymmetric: the side of the road on which
Lighting of the instrument panel,
you are driving is lit more intensely. displays and switches
When a car that is manufactured in a country Depending on the model, the lighting of the
that drives on the right travels to a country instrument panel and switched can be adjus-
that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor- ted in the Easy Connect system, using the
mally necessary to cover part of the head- button    > Vehicle > SETTINGS
light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad- ››› page 92.
justment of the headlights to avoid dazzling
other drivers. With the ignition on and without light activa-
tion, the analogue instrument panel lighting Fig. 119 Detail of roof lining: front lighting of
In such cases, the regulations specify certain remains activated in daytime light conditions. the passenger compartment.
light values that must be complied with for The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-
designated points of the light distribution. This minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving Knob Function
is known as “Tourist light”. through a tunnel without the  function ac-
The light distribution of the halogen and full- tive, the instrument panel lighting may even  Turns off the interior lights.
LED headlights allows the specific “tourist switch off. The objective of this function is to
light” values to be met without the need for provide the driver with a visual indication that  Turning the interior lights on or off.

stickers or changes in the settings. he or she should activate the dipped beam. The interior lights come on automati-
Central po- cally when you unlock the vehicle,
If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in- open a door or remove the key from
Note sition
strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), the the ignition.
or
“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If following message will appear Turn on the The light goes out a few seconds after
you are planning a long stay in a country lights on the instrument panel. a) closing all the doors, when locking the
that drives on the other side, you should vehicle or connecting the ignition.
take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical
Service to change the headlights. / Turning the reading light on and off

a) Depending on version.

126
 Visibility

Glove compartment and luggage com-

partment lighting*
interior lights: front vanity mirror light, rear Visibility
vanity mirror light, footwell light, sun blind
When opening and closing the glove com- and glove compartment light.
partment on the front passenger side and the ● The reading lights switch off when the ve- Windscreen wiper and rear
rear lid, the respective light will automatically hicle is locked using a key or after several window wiper systems
switch on and off. minutes if the key is removed from the igni-
tion. This prevents the battery from dis-
charging.
Window washer lever
Footwell lighting*
The lights in the footwell area below the dash
(driver and front passenger sides) will switch
on when the doors are opened and will de-
crease in intensity while driving. This intensity
setting can be changed through the infotain-
ment system menu (key    > Vehicle
> SETTINGS > lIGHTING > Interior
lighting ››› page 92).

Ambient light*
The ambient light lights up the area of the Fig. 120 Operating the windscreen wiper and
centre console and the footwell area and, rear wiper.
depending on the version, the front door pan-
els as well. More the lever to the required position:
The brightness of the ambient light can be 0  Windscreen wipers off.
adjusted through the Easy Connect menu, as
can colour, in versions with lighting on the Wiper intervals.
Use control ››› Fig. 120 A to set the in-
front door panel (button    > Vehicle 1  terval (vehicles without rain sensor), or
> SETTINGS > Ambient lighting the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
››› page 92).
2  Slow wipe.
Note
3  Continuous wipe. »
● Depending on the features fitted in the
vehicle, LEDs can be used for the following

127
 Operation

More the lever to the required position: er obstacles on the windscreen may dam- Wiper functions
age the wiper and the windscreen wiper
Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. motor. Windscreen wipers performance in differ-
4  Hold the lever down for more time to in-
● If necessary, remove snow and ice from ent situations
crease the wipe frequency.
the windscreen wipers before starting your ● If the vehicle is stopped, the activated posi-
Windscreen washer. The windscreen journey. tion temporarily moves to the previous posi-
washer function is activated by push-
● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip- tion.
5  ing the lever towards the steering
ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-
wheel, and the wipers operate simulta- ● The air conditioner comes on for approxi-
neously. icer spray for this operation. mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode
● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if when the windscreen washer is activated, 
Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-
the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash-
6  er will wipe the window approximately
windscreen wipers while dry can cause
every six seconds. er fluid entering the inside the vehicle.
damage.
● When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary
The rear window wash function is acti- ● In icy conditions, always check that the
7  vated by pressing the lever, and the according to the speed. The higher the vehi-
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- cle speed the shorter the intervals.
rear wiper starts simultaneously.
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it
may help to leave the vehicle parked with
WARNING Heated windscreen washer jets*
the wipers in service position ››› page 46.
In cold conditions you should not use the The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it does
wash/wipe system unless you have not thaw the water in the washer hoses.
Note
warmed the windscreen with the heating When the ignition is switched on the heated
and ventilation system. The windscreen ● The windscreen and window wipers only windscreen washer jets automatically adjust
washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the function when the ignition is switched on the heat depending on the ambient tempera-
windscreen and obscure your view of the and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are ture.
road. closed.
● The interval wipe speed varies according Headlight washer system*
CAUTION to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle
is moving, the more often the windscreen is The headlight washer cleans the glass of the
If the ignition is switched off with the wind- cleaned. headlights and only works when the dipped
screen wipers active, they complete their beam headlights are on. After switching on
● The rear wiper is automatically switched
wipe before returning to the rest position. the ignition, the headlights are also washed
on when the windscreen wiper is on and the
When switching the ignition back on, the when the automatic wiper is activated for the
car is in reverse gear.
windscreen wiper will continue to operate first time and then every fifth time.
at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-

128
 Visibility

Regularly clean dirt that has become encrus- Rain sensor* 0 Rain sensor off.
ted on the headlights, e.g., remains of insects. 1 Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-
To ensure the headlight washers work cor- sary.
rectly in winter, clean away any snow that A Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor
may be present on the jet covers located on
– Set control to the right: high sensitivity.
the bumper. If necessary, remove ice with an
anti-ice spray. – Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and then

Note
back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts
● The wiper will try to wipe away any ob- operating again when the windscreen wipers
stacles that are on the windscreen. The are in position 1 and the vehicle is travelling
wiper will stop moving if the obstacle at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).
blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and Fig. 121 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor A.

switch the wiper back on again.

Modified behaviour of the rain sensor
● If you stop the vehicle with the wind-
Possible causes of faults and mistaken read-
screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto-
ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 122 of the
matically change to a lower position
speed. The set speed will be resumed when
rain sensor include:
the vehicle pulls away. ● Damaged wipers: a film of water on the
● The windscreen will be wiped again ap- damaged blades may lengthen the activa-
proximately 5 seconds after the wind- tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-
screen washer has been activated, provi- sult in a fast and continuous wipe.
ded the vehicle is moving (“drip” function).
● Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger
If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec-
onds after the “drip” function, a new wash Fig. 122 Rain sensor sensitive surface the windscreen wiper.
sequence will begin without performing the ● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on
last wipe. For the “drip” function to work The rain sensor controls the frequency of the the roads may cause an excessively long
again, you have to turn the ignition off and windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the wipe when the windscreen is almost dry.
then on again. amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of the rain ● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus
sensor can be adjusted manually. Manual
effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may
wipe ››› page 127.
reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or
Move the lever to the required position make it react more slowly, later or not at all. »
››› Fig. 121:
129
 Operation

● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone

Mirrors Note
will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain
● If the light incident in the interior rear vi-
sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-
duction in the sensitive surface area and Interior mirror anti-dazzle function sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun
blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror
adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the
Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz- with automatic setting will not operate per-
sensor will vary with the size of the damage
zle function* fectly.
caused by the stone.
The anti-dazzle function is activated every ● When the interior lights are on or reverse

time the ignition is switched on. gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken
WARNING
with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the position.
to switch on the wipers. interior rear vision mirror will darken auto- ● If you have to stick any type of sticker on
● If necessary, switch on the wipers man- matically according to the amount of light it the windscreen, do not do so in front of the
ually when water on the windscreen ob- receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel- sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-
structs visibility. led if reverse gear is engaged. dazzle function from working well or even
from working at all.
WARNING
Note
● Clean the sensitive surface of the rain
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- Adjusting the exterior mirrors
sensor regularly and check the blades for
id may leak. This could cause irritation to
damage ››› Fig. 122 (arrow).
the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you
● To remove wax and coatings, we recom- come into contact with this liquid, it must
mend a window cleaner containing alco- be rinsed with large quantities of water. If
hol. necessary, get medial help.
● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the rain sensor*. This may cause
CAUTION
sensor disruption or faults.
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-
id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-
faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon
as possible. Fig. 123 Detail of the driver's door: control for
the exterior mirror.

130
 Visibility

Turn the control to the corresponding posi- Tilt function for front passenger exterior ● The adjusted position for the rear view mir-
tion: mirror* ror is stored.

L/R Turning the knob to the desired position, When parking backwards, and in order to be
able to see the kerb, the passenger side mir- Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the
adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L, vehicle*
left) and the passenger side (R, right) to ror can be automatically tilted towards the
the direction desired. passenger to provide a better view of the Using the Easy Connect system, button
kerb. The control must be in the position R1)    > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Mir-
 Depending on the equipment fitted on for this feature to be operational. rors and wipers > Mirrors can be se-
the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated
lected to fold the outside mirrors when park-
according to the outside temperature. The mirror returns to its original position as
ing and to lock the vehicle ››› page 92.
soon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h
 Folding in mirrors.
(9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re- When the vehicle is locked with the remote
turns to its original position if the position of control, the exterior mirrors are retracted au-
Synchronized regulation of the exterior
the control is adjusted. tomatically. When the vehicle is opened with
mirrors
the remote control, the exterior mirrors are
Select in the Easy Connect system menu Storing the rear view mirror settings for the deployed automatically.
   > Vehicle > Settings > Mir- tilt function
rors and wipers > Mirrors if the exterior WARNING
● Switch the ignition on.
mirrors have to be adjusted in a synchronised
● Using the Easy Connect system, button Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors
manner.
give a larger field of vision. However, they
   > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Mir-
● Turn the knob to position L1). make objects look smaller and further
rors and wipers > Mirrors select Lower
away than they really are. If you use these
● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The while reversing ››› page 92.
mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles
right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the ● Select the R1) position on the control. behind you when changing lane, you could
same time (synchronised). ● Select reverse gear. misjudge the distance. Risk of accident!
● If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-
● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so
view mirror: rotate the control to position R1). WARNING
that you can see, for example, the kerb area
well. Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking
● Release the reverse gear. care to avoid injuries. »

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-

metrical.
131
 Operation

● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror Sun protection WARNING

when there is no-one in the way of the mir-
Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.
ror.
Sun blind ● Always store sun blinds and visors in their
● When moving the mirror, take care not to
housing when not in use.
trap fingers between the mirror and the
mirror bracket.
Note
CAUTION The light above the sun visor automatically
switches off after a few minutes in certain
● If one of the mirror housings is knocked
conditions. This prevents the battery from
out of position (e.g. when parking), the mir-
discharging.
rors must first be fully retracted with the
electric control. Do not readjust the mirror
housing by hand, as this will interfere with
the mirror adjuster function. Sunshade blind*
● Before washing the vehicle in an auto- Fig. 124 Sun visor 3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST
matic car wash, please make sure to re-
tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them Options for adjusting driver and front pas-
from being damaged. Electrically retracta- senger sun visors
ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in or ● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-
out by hand. Always use the electrical
screen.
power control.
● The sun visor can be pulled out of its
mounting and turned towards the door
Note
››› Fig. 124 1 .
● If the electrical adjustment should fail to
● Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-
operate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-
tudinally backwards.
ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of
the mirror glass. There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with a Fig. 125 Rear window: sunshade blind.
● The fold-in function on the exterior mir- cover. When the cover is opened 2 a light
rors will not activate at speeds over Rear lid sunshade blind*
comes on.
40 km/h (25 mph). – Pull out the blind and hook it into the hooks
The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror
in the centre of the top of the door frame
cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed
››› Fig. 125.
back up.
132
 Seats and headrests

Seats and headrests 1 Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and

move the seat. The seat must engage
This might cause loss of control of the vehi-
cle and thus accidents or injuries. More-
when the lever is released! over, the electrical components of the front
Adjusting seats 2 Raise/lower: pull the lever up or push seats might be damaged.
down (several times if necessary) from its ● Never attach or place seat upholstery or
Related video home position. covers on the electric controls.
3 Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel. ● Never use upholstery or seat covers that
have not been explicitly authorised for the
4 Lumbar support: move the lever until the
seats of the vehicle.
required position is achieved.

WARNING
Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac-
Electric driver's seat adjustment*
Fig. 126 Vehicle interior cidents and severe injuries.
● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is
stationary, as the seats could move unex-
Manual adjustment of the front pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and
seats you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur-
thermore, an incorrect position is adopted
when adjusting the seat.
● Adjust the height, position and inclination
of the front seats only when their move-
ment area is empty.
● Make sure there are no objects in that
area.
● Make sure that the movement and lock-
ing areas of the seats are clean.
Fig. 128 Driver's seat: electric seat settings.

WARNING A Adjust the lumbar support: press the but-

Fig. 127 Front seats: manual seat settings.
Incorrectly using upholstery and seat cov- ton according to the desired position.
ers might cause an accidental activation of B Seat forwards/backwards: press the but-
the electrical seat adjustment system and
ton forwards/backwards. »
make it move unexpectedly while driving.
133
 Operation

Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the ● If the engine is started while the seats are Adjusting the headrest for tall people
button up/down. To adjust the angle of being electrically adjusted, the adjustment Push the headrest up as far as it will go.
the seat cushion, press the front of the will stop.
button up/down. WARNING
C Backrest further upright/further reclined:
If travelling with the headrests removed or
press the button forwards/backwards.
Headrest improperly adjusted, the risk of severe or
fatal injuries in the event of accidents and
WARNING sudden braking or manoeuvres increases.
● If the electric front seats are used negli- Introduction ● Always travel with the headrest correctly
gently or without paying due attention, it installed and adjusted.
can cause serious injury. The possibilities for the adjustment and disas-
● To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in
sembly of the headrests are described below.
● The front seats can also be electrically the event of an accident, adjust the head-
Always make sure that the seats are correctly
adjusted when the ignition is switched off. rest correctly based on your height, always
adjusted ››› page 12.
Never leave a child or any other person making sure that its upper edge is at the
who may need help in the vehicle. All seats are equipped with a headrest. The same height as the top of the head, but
● In the event of an emergency, electrical central rear headrest is only intended for the never below eye level. Keep the back of
adjustment can be stopped by pressing central seat of the rear bench. Therefore, do your head always as close to the headrest
any control. not install it on any other seat. as possible and centred.
● Never adjust the headrest while the vehi-

CAUTION Correct adjustment of headrest cle is in motion.

Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is ● Under no circumstances should the rear
To avoid damaging the electrical compo-
at the same level as the top of your head and passengers travel while the headrests are
nents of the front seats, please refrain from
under no circumstances below eye level. in the non-use position.
kneeling on the seat or applying sharp
pressure at a single point to the seat cush- Keep the back of your head always as close
ion and backrest. to the headrest as possible. CAUTION
When assembling and disassembling the
Adjusting the headrest for short people
Note headrests, do not let them meet the top lin-
● It may not be possible to electrically ad-
Lower the headrest completely, even if your ing of the vehicle, the back rest of the front
head is below its upper edge. In the lowest seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not,
just the seat if the vehicle battery is very
position, there may be a small distance be- this could damage the vehicle.
low.
tween the headrest and the backrest.

134
 Seats and headrests

Adjusting the headrests ● The headrest must lock correctly in one po- ● Move the headrest upwards until it arrives
sition. to the top.
● Press button ››› Fig. 131 1 , while simultane-
ously pressing on the security hole 2 with a
Removing and fitting the headrests flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide,
and remove the headrest.
● Move the backrest until it engages properly
››› in Folding down and raising the rear
seat backrest on page 136.

Fitting the rear headrests

Fig. 129 Front seat: headrest adjustment.

To mount the external headrests, the corre-
sponding backrest must be partially folded
forward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 136.

Fig. 131 Rear headrest: removal.
● Insert the headrest bars into the guides until
they perceptibly engage. It should not be
Removing and fitting the front headrests
possible to remove the headrest from the
● Move the headrest upwards until it arrives backrest.
to the top.
● Move the backrest until it engages properly
● Press the side button ››› Fig. 129 1 and re- ››› in Folding down and raising the rear
move the headrest. seat backrest on page 136.
Fig. 130 Rear headrest: headrest adjustment. ● To refit, insert the headrest into the holes in
the backrest, pushing it down until it engages. WARNING
Adjusting the height of the headrests Remove the rear headrests only when it is
● Grab the sides of the headrests with both Removing the rear headrests necessary to fit a child seat. After removing
hands and push upwards to the desired posi- To remove the headrest, the corresponding a child seat, refit the headrest immediately.
tion. To lower it, repeat the same action, backrest must be partially folded forward.
pressing the 1 ››› Fig. 129 ››› Fig. 130 button
● Unlock the backrest ››› page 136.
on the side.

135
 Operation

Seat functions Folding down and raising the rear Folding the backrest forwards
seat backrest ● Place the side seat belts in the trim clip
Folding the backrest of the front ››› Fig. 133.
passenger seat* ● Completely lower the rear headrests
››› page 135.
● Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 134 1 for-
wards and at the same time fold the backrest
down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged
when the red marking of the button 2 is visi-
ble.

Converting the table to a seat

● Raise and lock in the back rest. The red
Fig. 133 Rear seat: clip to hold the seatbelt in
place. marking on the tab 2 should no longer be
visible when the backrest is properly secured.
Fig. 132 Front passenger seat: lever to fold
down the backrest. WARNING
The front passenger seat can be folded down Serious injuries can be caused if the rear
to increase the storage space. seat backrest is lowered or lifted without
due care and attention.
››› Fig. 132 and push the seat
● Pull lever 1 ● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest
backrest 2 until the backrest is horizontal. while driving.
● Do no trap or damage the seat belt when
WARNING raising the rear seat backrest.
When the front passenger seat is folded ● When lowering or lifting the rear seat
down it cannot be occupied. Fig. 134 Rear seat: folding the backrest.
backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet
and other body parts out of its path.
The rear seat backrest is split and each part
● For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-
be lowered separately to extend the luggage
sary protection all the parts of the rear
compartment.
backrest must be properly engaged. This is
particularly important in the case of the
centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a
136
 Seats and headrests

seat whose backrest is not properly engag- Lowering the rear seat backrest Front centre armrest
ed they will fly forward, along with the with the remote release lever
backrest, during an accident or a sudden
driving or braking manoeuvre. 3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

● A red signal on the button 2 warns that

the backrest is not engaged. Always check
that the red marking is not visible when the
backrest is in the upright position.
● When the rear seat backrest is lowered or
is not properly engaged nobody else can
travel in the corresponding seats (not even
a child).
Fig. 136 Front centre armrest
CAUTION
To lift the central armrest, lift it upwards in the
Serious damage can be caused to the vehi- Fig. 135 In the luggage compartment: levers
for remote release of the left part 1 and right direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 136, setting by
cle and other objects if the rear seat back-
part 2 of the rear seat backrest. setting.
rest is lowered or lifted without due care
and attention. To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highest
● Lower the headrest properly.
● Before lowering the rear seat backrest, position. Then lower it down.
always adjust the front seats so that nei- ● Open the rear lid.
To move the armrest horizontally, move it for-
ther the headrests nor the cushions of the ● Pull the remote release lever of the left part ward ››› Fig. 136 or backward as much as
rear backrest can hit them. ››› Fig. 135 1 or right part 2 of the backrest possible in the direction of the corresponding
in the direction of the arrow. The released arrow.
part of the rear seat backrest is folded auto-
matically down and forwards. WARNING
● If this occurs, close the rear lid.
The front centre armrest may obstruct the
driver's arm movements, which could
The rear seat backrest is not engaged when
cause an accident and severe injuries.
the red marking of the button ››› Fig. 134 2 is
● Keep the storage compartments of the
visible.
centre armrest closed at all times while the
vehicle is in motion. »

137
 Operation

● Never let anyone sit on the centre arm- Transport and practical ● In vehicles equipped with tyre control sys-
tem, adjust to the new load status if necessa-
rest while the vehicle is in motion, not even
a child. This position is incorrect and may equipment ry ››› page 352.
cause severe injuries.
WARNING
Storing objects
Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri-
ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring
Positioning the luggage and cargo or braking or in case of an accident. Partic-
ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy-
It is possible to carry objects and luggage in ing and they are thrown across the inside of
the vehicle, in a trailer ››› page 308 and on the vehicle. Please observe the following
the roof ››› page 149. When doing so, please rules to minimise the risk of injury:
consider all legal provisions. ● Place all objects inside the vehicle safe-
ly.
Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely
● Secure all objects, little and large.
● Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly
● Place the objects in the cabin in such a
as possible. way that they can never reach the airbag
● Always place equipment and heavy ob- deployment areas while the vehicle is in
jects in the boot ››› . motion.
● Position heavy items in the boot as far for- ● Keep the storage compartments closed
ward as possible. at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

● Take into account the maximum authorised ● Place the objects in such a way that they

weight per axle, as well as the maximum au- never force any occupant of the vehicle to
sit in an incorrect position.
thorised weight of the vehicle ››› page 372.
● When transporting objects that take up a
● Secure the objects to the fastening rings of
seat, never let anyone use that seat.
the boot using appropriate chains or belts
● Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects
››› page 144.
loose in open storage compartment of the
● Also place small objects safely.
vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat
● Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into or on the dashboard.
account the pressure adhesive of the tyres ● Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects
››› page 348. from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin
and store them safely.
138
 Transport and practical equipment

WARNING WARNING Luggage compartment

The transport of heavy object changes ve- ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-
hicle handling and increases braking dis- pecially when the rear lid is open. Children Luggage compartment shelf
tance. Heavy objects that are not properly could climb into the luggage compartment,
3 Valid for: Leon
placed or secured may cause loss of con- closing the door behind them; they will be
trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries. trapped and run the risk of death.
● Never put too much load in the vehicle. ● Close and lock all the doors and the rear
Both the carrying capacity as well as the lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you
distribution of the load in the vehicle have lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
effects on the driving behaviour and brak- no adults or children in the vehicle.
ing ability.
● When transporting heavy objects, the CAUTION
driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due
to the displacement of the centre of gravi- Electrical wires or, depending on the fea-
ty. tures, the antenna embedded into the rear
windows could be damaged, even irrepara-
● Always distribute the load in the vehicle
bly, if they are in contact with objects. Fig. 137 In the luggage compartment: remov-
as evenly and horizontally as possible. ing and fitting the shelf.
● Always place heavy objects in the boot
Note
before the rear axle and as far away from it
as possible. Straps for securing the load to the fasten-
● Objects in the luggage compartment ing rings are commercially available from
that are unsecured could move suddenly accessory shops.
and modify the handling of the vehicle.
● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
● Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion.
Fig. 138 In the luggage compartment: remov-
● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
ing and fitting the shelf. »
● Brake earlier than usual.

139
 Operation

Removing rectly seated and it may be bent or dam- Retractable shelf

● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 137 B from aged. 3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST
their hooks A . ● If the luggage compartment is overloa-
● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup- ded, remove the tray.
ports ››› Fig. 138 by pulling it upwards and
then take it out. Note
If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un- Ensure that, when placing items of clothing
der the luggage compartment double floor on the luggage compartment cover, rear
visibility is not reduced.
››› page 141.

Fitting
● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-
cess” fits onto the axis of the supports
››› Fig. 138 and press down until it engages.
● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 137 B to the rear lid.

WARNING
Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car-
ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-
jury in case of sudden manoeuvring or
braking or in case of an accident.
● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob- Fig. 139 In the luggage compartment: unroll-
jects or in bags on the rear shelf. ing and rolling up the shelf.
● Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTION
● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that
the rear shelf is correctly fitted.
● An overloaded luggage compartment
could mean that the rear shelf is not cor-

140
 Transport and practical equipment

● The rear shelf can be stored under the lug- Store the rear shelf
gage compartment variable floor when the
3 Valid for: Leon
latter is in the top position (except for vehicles
equipped with natural gas engine CNG)
››› page 142.

Fitting the shelf

● Place the rear shelf in the housing provided
in the left side cover.
● Engage the support of the rear shelf
Fig. 140 In the luggage compartment: remov-
››› Fig. 140 1 in the right housing.
ing the shelf.
● Check that the support ››› Fig. 140 1 is
Extending the shelf properly engaged.
Fig. 141 In the luggage compartment: covers
● Pull evenly on the rear shelf using its handle for storing the rear shelf.
WARNING
››› Fig. 139 1  in a backwards direction un-
til it audibly clicks into place. Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car-
ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-
Retracting the rear shelf jury in case of sudden manoeuvring or
braking or in case of an accident.
● Press on the handle of the rear shelf in the
● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob-
direction of the arrow to release it ››› Fig. 139
jects or in bags on the rear shelf.
.
● Never carry animals on the rear shelf.
The shelf will automatically move towards
the end and will retract completely. CAUTION

Removing the shelf To retract the rear shelf, press on its handle Fig. 142 In the luggage compartment: fitting
in a downwards only direction; if you press the rear shelf.
● Press the rear shelf support ››› Fig. 140 1 it upwards it may lead to its axles breaking.
in the direction of the arrow.
Depending on the equipment, once the lug-
● Remove the rear shelf through the support gage compartment shelf has been removed,
and upwards. it can be stored under the boot floor.

● Remove the left and right covers ››› Fig. 141. »

141
 Operation

● Place the rear shelf in the corresponding Variable luggage compartment

housing ››› Fig. 142.
floor
● Put the left and right covers in their original
3 Valid for: Leon
position.

Storing the retractable shelf

3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 144 In the luggage compartment: space

to store the retractable shelf.

The retractable shelf can be stored under the

luggage compartment variable floor.
Fig. 145 Luggage compartment: adjustable
● Remove the left and right covers ››› Fig. 143 floor
A .
● Press the head of the retractable shelf in
the direction of the arrow until it engages in
Fig. 143 In the luggage compartment: space its housing ››› Fig. 144.
to store the retractable shelf.
● Put the left and right covers in their original
position.

Fig. 146 Luggage compartment: adjustable

floor

Variable floor in the tilted position

When the variable floor is tilted you can ac-
cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.
142
 Transport and practical equipment

● Lift the variable floor using handle Variable floor in the tilted position
››› Fig. 145 1, pull it back and push the back- When the variable floor is tilted you can ac-
rest of the rear seat until the movable part of cess the spare wheel or anti-puncture kit
the floor is resting on it. area.
● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 146
(arrows). ● Lift the variable floor using handle
››› Fig. 147 1 and pull it back until the front of
the floor has fully passed the tilted grooves
››› Fig. 148 3 .
Variable luggage compartment
● Run the floor through these grooves with
floor
Fig. 148 Variable luggage compartment floor: the help of handle 1 as the rear seat back-
3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST inclined slots. rest and until the floor is resting in the
grooves.
Variable floor in high position
● To move from the low position to the high WARNING
position, lift the floor using the handle ● Always secure objects, even when the
››› Fig. 147 1 , and pull it back until the front luggage compartment floor is properly lif-
of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 . ted.
● Move the floor forward over the supports as ● Only objects that do not protrude more
far as the rear seat backrest and then lower than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-
the floor with the handle 1 . ried between the rear seat and the raised
luggage compartment floor.
Variable floor in low position ● Only objects that do not weigh than ap-
Fig. 147 Variable luggage compartment floor:
positions. ● To move from the high position to the low proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between
the rear seat and the raised luggage com-
position, lift the floor using the handle
partment floor.
››› Fig. 147 1 , and pull it back until the front
of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .
● Now let the front part fall to the floor and CAUTION
slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat ● The maximum weight that can be loaded
backrest; lower the floor at the same time on the luggage compartment variable floor
with the handle 1 . in the upper position is 100 kg (Leon model)
and 125 kg (Leon Sportourer ST model). »
143
 Operation

● Do not let the luggage compartment ● Never exceed the maximum tensile load
floor fall when closing it. Always carefully of the fastening rings when securing ob-
guide it downwards in a controlled manner. jects.
Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the ● Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-
luggage compartment could be damaged. jects, the upper edge of the load is higher
than the fastening rings.
● Depending on the features, take into ac-
Fastening rings* count the instruction panels on the boot on
how to place the load.
● Never secure a child seat to the fastening
Fig. 150 In the luggage compartment: fasten- rings.
ing rings (Leon Sportourer ST model).

There are fastening rings ››› Fig. 149, Note

››› Fig. 150 on the front and rear of the boot ● The maximum tensile load that the fas-
to secure loose objects and luggage with fas- tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.
tening belts and cords. ● Belts, straps and securing systems for the
appropriate load can be obtained from
WARNING specialised dealerships. SEAT recom-
If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Fig. 149 In the luggage compartment: fasten-
ing rings (Leon model except versions with straps are used, they could break in the
spare wheel and CNG). event of braking or an accident. Objects
could then be launched across the passen-
ger compartment and cause serious or fa-
tal injuries.
● Always use belts or straps that are suita-
ble and in good condition.
● Tighten the belts and straps in a cross
layout over the load placed on the boot
floor and secure them to the fastening rings
safely.

144
 Transport and practical equipment

Net bag* The net bag can be hooked up to the lug- ● Always secure the bag hooks properly so
gage compartment in different ways. that they do not suddenly release from the
fastening rings when hooking or unhooking
Hooking the net bag into the luggage them.
compartment floor ● On hooking or unhooking them, protect
If necessary, the front eyes must be unfolded your eyes and face in case the hooks are
first ››› page 144. released suddenly.
● Always hook up the net bag hooks in the
● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings
described order. If a hook is unfastened
1 and 2››› Fig. 151 ››› . The bag zip suddenly, this may cause injuries.
should be facing upwards.

Fig. 151 In the luggage compartment: net bag Hook the net bag next to the load thresh-
hooked up at floor level (Leon Sportourer ST old
model). ● Secure the short net hooks to the fastening
rings ››› Fig. 152 1 ››› . The bag zip should
be facing upwards.
● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bag

The hooked up net bag is taut ››› .

● Release the net bag from the fastening

rings.
● Store the net bag in the luggage compart-
Fig. 152 In the luggage compartment: rings 1 ment.
and hooks 2 for securing the net bag (Leon
Sportourer ST model). WARNING
To secure the elastic net bag on the fasten-
The luggage compartment prevents light
ing rings of the boot it must be stretched
luggage from moving. The net bag has a zip
out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bag
and can be used to store small objects.
is hooked up or unhooked incorrectly the
hooks could cause injuries.
145
 Operation

Bag hooks WARNING

Never use the hooks to hang luggage or
other objects. In case of sudden braking or
an accident, the hooks could break.

Trapdoor for transporting long ob-

jects*

Fig. 156 In the luggage compartment: open-

ing the trapdoor.
Fig. 153 In the luggage compartment: bag
hooks (Leon model). On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,
there is a tailboard for transporting long items
in the interior, such as skis.
To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects
should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before
they are inserted through the tailboard.

Fig. 155 In the rear seat backrest: opening the

When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-
trapdoor. el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard

● Lower the centre armrest.
Fig. 154 In the luggage compartment: bag ● Pull the release lever in the direction of the
hooks (Leon Sportourer ST model). arrow and push the tailboard cover
››› Fig. 155
1 down and forwards.
There may be hooks for hanging bags on
both sides of the luggage compartment ● Open the rear lid.
››› Fig. 153. ● Insert the long objects through the gap
from the luggage compartment.
The retaining hooks have been designed to
secure light shopping bags. ● Secure the objects with the seat belt.

146
 Transport and practical equipment

● Close the rear lid.

Net partition* Pulling out and securing the net partition
● Pull up handle ››› Fig. 157 2 to remove the
Closing the tailboard net from the casing 4 .
Using the separation net behind
● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The ● Hook in the net partition on the right side 3
the rear seat*
red mark on the luggage compartment side (magnified image).
should never be visible. 3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST
● Hook in the net partition in the left side
● Close the rear lid. housing 1 pulling the rod.
● Lift the centre armrest if necessary.
The net partition is properly assembled when
Note the T-shaped ends are firmly secured in the
corresponding housings 3 and 1 .
The tailboard can also be opened from the
luggage compartment. To do so, press the
Retracting the net partition
release lever down, in the direction of the
arrow, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 156. ● Unhook the rod from the housings 3 and
1 .
● Roll up the net into the casing 4 lowering it
Fig. 157 In the luggage compartment: secur- with your hand.
ing the net partition.
Removing the net partition
● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
● Press the left or right release catch
››› Fig. 158 in the direction of the arrow 1 .
● Remove the casing from the support in the
direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 158 2 .

Fitting the net partition

● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
● Fit the casing in the right and left supports.
Fig. 158 In the luggage compartment: remov-
ing the net partition. ● Press the casing into the left and right sup-
ports in the opposite direction to the arrow
››› Fig. 158 2 until it engages. »
147
 Operation

The red markings on the release buttons Using the net partition while the Fitting the net partition
should no longer be visible.
rear seat backs are folded down ● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.

3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST ● Remove the net partition from the side sup-
WARNING
ports.
● Always secure objects, even when the
● Place the net casing in the rail slots in the
net partition is properly assembled.
direction of the arrows ››› Fig. 159 1 .
● There should be nobody behind the as-
sembled partition when the vehicle is mov- ● Push the casing towards the left side of the
ing. vehicle in the direction of arrow ››› Fig. 159 2
and as far as it will go.
CAUTION ● Check that the net is secure.

Incorrect handling of the net partition

Pulling out and securing the net partition
could cause damage.
● Pull up handle ››› Fig. 160 2 to remove the
● Do not “release” the net partition when
Fig. 159 Assembling the net partition in the net from the casing ››› Fig. 160 4 .
lowering it, as the net and other vehicle
rear seat backrests.
parts could be damaged. Roll down the net ● Hook in the net partition on the right side
partition by hand. ››› Fig. 160 3 (magnified image).
● Hook in the net partition in the left side
housing ››› Fig. 160 1 pulling the rod.

The net partition is properly assembled when

the T-shaped ends are firmly secured in the
corresponding housings ››› Fig. 160 3 and
1 .

Retracting the net partition

● Remove the rod from the housings in the
trims of the roof side members.
Fig. 160 In the luggage compartment: net par- ● Roll up the net into the casing ››› Fig. 160
tition hooked in place with the rear seat backs
4 lowering it with your hand.
folded down.

148
 Transport and practical equipment

Removing the net partition parts could be damaged. Roll down the net ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
● Pull the net casing out approximately 5 cm partition by hand. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
in the opposite direction to the arrow times to suit visibility, weather, road and
››› Fig. 1592 . traffic conditions.
● Remove the casing from the rails by pulling
in the opposite direction to the arrows
Roof carrier*
CAUTION
››› Fig. 1591 .
● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri-
Introduction
● Lift the rear seat backrests. er system before entering a car wash.
The vehicle roof has been designed to opti- ● Vehicle height is increased by the instal-
WARNING mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system
During a sudden driving or braking ma- bars or conventional roof carrier systems and the load secured on them. For this pur-
noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob- cannot be secured to the roof water drains. pose, check that your vehicle's height does
jects could be flung though the interior and not surpass the headspace limit, for exam-
cause serious or fatal injuries.
As the roof water drains are integrated in the ple, for underpasses or for entering garage
roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- doors.
● Always secure objects, even when the
proved cross bars and roof carrier systems
net partition is properly assembled. ● Cross bars, the roof carrier system and
can be used.
● There should be nobody behind the as- the load secured on them should not inter-
fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path
sembled partition when the vehicle is mov- Cases in which cross bars and the roof of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid.
ing.
carrier system should be disassembled.
● On opening the rear lid make sure that it
● When they are not used. does not knock into the roof load.
WARNING
● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.
The rear seat backrests should only be lif-
● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- For the sake of the environment
ted again once the net partition has been
disassembled. mum height, for example, in some garages. When cross bars and a roof carrier system
are installed, the increased air resistance
WARNING means that the vehicle uses more fuel.
CAUTION
● Always secure the load properly using
Incorrect handling of the net partition belts or retaining straps that are suitable
could cause damage. and in a good condition.
● Do not “release” the net partition when ● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a
lowering it, as the net and other vehicle negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-
tre of gravity and driving performance.
149
 Operation

Securing the crossbars and the or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories Note
can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.
roof carrier system Always read the assembly instructions that
Always secure the crossbars and the roof come with the crossbars and the roof carri-
carrier system properly. Always take the as- er system carefully and keep them in the
sembly instructions that come with the cross- vehicle.
bars and the roof carrier system in question
into account.
Loading the roof carrier system
LEON model
The front and rear attachment points 1 and The load can only be secured if the crossbars
2 are only visible when the doors are open and the roof carrier system are properly in-
››› Fig. 161. stalled ››› .

Fig. 161 Leon: attachment points for the roof Leon Sportourer ST model Maximum authorised cargo on the roof
railings for the roof carrier system.
The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail- The maximum authorised cargo permitted to
ings. The attachment points can be seen on be transport on the roof is 75 kg. This figure
bottom of the roof railing ››› Fig. 162. comes from the combined weight of the roof
carrier, the cross bars and the load itself on
WARNING the roof ››› .
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- Always check the weight of the roof carrier
bars and the roof carrier system may cause system, the cross bars and the weight of the
the whole system to detach from the roof load to be transported and weigh them if
and cause an accident and injuries. necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-
● Always take the manufacturer assembly thorised roof load.
instructions into account.
If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier
Fig. 162 Leon Sportourer ST: attachment ● Check threaded joints and attachments with a lower weight rating, you will not be
points for the roof railings for the roof carrier travelling and if necessary tighten them af-
system. able to carry the maximum authorised roof
ter you have travelled a short distance.
load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-
When making long trips, check the threa-
The crossbars are the basis of a series of mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is
ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.
special roof carrier systems. For safety rea- listed in the fitting instructions.
● Do not modify or repair the crossbars or
sons, special fixtures must be used to safely
roof carrier system.
transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards
150
 Transport and practical equipment

Distributing a load
Storage compartment ● Ensure that no objects can fall into the
Distribute loads uniformly and secure them driver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-
correctly ››› . tion.
Introduction
● When the vehicle is stationary, remove
Check attachments Use the storage compartments only for small the objects in the footwell.
Once the cross bars and roof carrier system or light items.
have been installed, check the bolted con- WARNING
nections and attachments after a short jour- WARNING
If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they
ney and subsequently with a certain frequen- Objects inside the vehicle that are not se- might be damaged or lit inadvertently. This
cy. cured could be thrown across the cabin in could lead to severe burns and damage to
the event of sudden braking or manoeu- the vehicle.
WARNING vring. This may cause severe injuries as
● Before moving a seat, make sure there
well as loss of control of the vehicle.
● Never exceed the maximum authorised are no lighters in the moving part area of
load on the roof and on the axles or the ve- ● Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or the vehicle.
hicle's maximum authorised weight. heavy items in open storage compartments
● Before closing a storage compartment,
of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the
● Never exceed the load capacity of the make sure there are no lighters in the clos-
cover behind the rear seats, or inside
cross bars and the roof carrier system, ing area.
pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi-
even if the maximum authorised roof load ● Never leave a lighter inside a storage
cle.
has not been reached. compartment or any other surface of the
● Keep the storage compartments closed
● Secure heavy items as far forward as vehicle as it could ignite due to the high
at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
possible and distribute the vehicle load temperatures on such surfaces, particular-
uniformly. ly during the summer.
WARNING
WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi- CAUTION
cult the use of the pedals. This may cause
If the load is loose or not secured, it could ● Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob-
loss of control of the vehicle and increases
fall from the roof carrier system or cause jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat
the risk of severe injuries.
accidents and injuries. and cold could damage them or render
● Make sure that nothing prevents you from them useless.
● Always use belts or retaining straps that
using the pedals at any time.
are suitable and in a good condition. ● Objects made from transparent materi-
● Always secure the mat in the footwell. als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses,
● Never place other mats or other type of magnifying glasses or transparent suction »
covers on the factory-fitted mat.
151
 Operation

pads stuck to the windows can concentrate WARNING A drink holder is built into the folding table
sunlight and damage the vehicle. ››› page 153.
If the glove compartment is left open, the
risk of causing severe injuries in the event
WARNING
of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu-
Glove compartment vring increases. The table must always be closed while
driving to decrease the risk of injuries.
● Always keep the glove compartment
closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Object holder under front seats*

Folding table
3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 163 On the front passenger side: glove

compartment.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the

CD player and SD card reader are located in Fig. 165 Storage compartment under the front
the glove compartment. Its operation is de- seats.
scribed in ››› page 197.
Fig. 164 Front left seat: folding table. Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handle
Opening and closing the glove compart- and take the drawer out.
ment Depending on the model version, at the rear
of the front seats, there may be “plane-style” Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until
Opening: Pull the handle ››› Fig. 163 and folding tables for passengers in the rear it engages.
open the glove compartment. seats.
Closing: Press the glove compartment up- WARNING
● To open the tray, open it up in the direction
wards. If the drawer is left open, it could prevent
of the arrow ››› Fig. 164.
use of the pedals. This may cause serious
● To fold it back, push the folding table down accidents and injuries.
as far as possible.
152
 Transport and practical equipment

● Always keep the drawer closed while the WARNING dent while driving, hot beverages in the
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer bottle holders might spill and cause burns.
Hanging clothes may decrease the driver's
and any objects in it could fall into the driv- ● Ensure that no bottles or other objects
visibility, which may cause serious acci-
er's footwell and obstruct the pedals. are dropped in the driver footwell while
dents and injuries.
● Always hang clothes from hangers in
driving, as they could get under the pedals
CAUTION and obstruct their working.
such a way that the driver's visibility is not
affected. ● Never place glasses, food or other heavy
The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.
● Only hang light pieces of clothing from
objects drink holders. These heavy objects
may be thrown across the cabin in the
the hangers of the vehicle. Never leave
event of an accident and cause serious in-
heavy, hard or sharp objects in the pockets
Other object holders of these pieces of clothing.
juries.

You will find more object holders, compart- ● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up
the clothing, as this could interfere with the WARNING
ments and supports in other parts of the vehi-
cle: function of the head-protection airbags. Closed bottles may explode inside the ve-
hicle due to cold or heat.
● In the centre console.
● Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle
● In the top of the glove compartment in vehi- if the temperature inside is very high or very
cles that do not have a CD reader. The load
Drink holder low.
of the compartment should not exceed 1.2 kg.
● Below the instrument panel in the driver's
Introduction CAUTION
area there is a removable box for access to Do not leave open cans in the drink holders
The storage compartments of the driver and
fuses and relays. The load of the compart- when the vehicle is in motion. If the drink is
passenger doors contain a bottle holder.
ment should not exceed 0.2 kg. spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may
● Other storage compartments are found in The folding tables of the front seats contain damage the vehicle and its electrical sys-
more bottle holders ››› page 152. tem.
the rear seat, to the left and the right of the
seats.
WARNING
Note
There are hangers on the struts of the doors Incorrect use of the bottle holders may
and the rear. cause injuries. The inside elements of the drink holders
can be extracted for cleaning.
● Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.
In the event of sudden braking or an acci-

153
 Operation

Front drink holders Power sockets

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 168 Detail of the side lining of the luggage

compartment: 12 volt power socket (valid only
Fig. 166 Centre console: front drinks holders. for the Leon Sportourer ST model).

● Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 167,

There are two cup holders in the centre con-
sole ››› Fig. 166. ››› Fig. 168.
● Insert the plug of the electrical appliance
into the power socket.

Electrical equipment can be connected to

the 12 volt power socket.
The appliances connected to each power
socket must not exceed a power rating of 120
Watt.
Fig. 167  Centre console: 12 volt front power
socket  Rear of the centre console: USB sock- USB power sockets
ets. Depending on the equipment and the coun-
try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-
tions exclusively for charging or as a power
socket.
These USB ports are located at the rear of
the console, between the front seats

154
 Air conditioning

››› Fig. 167 . These connectors can work at Air conditioning The LED on each control lights up to indicate
a maximum power of up to 10.5 W per port. that the respective function of a control has
been switched on.
They are not intended for file playback.
Heating, ventilation and
Dust and pollen filter
WARNING cooling
The dust and pollen filter with its activated
The power socket works only when the igni-
charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier
tion is on. Improper use may cause serious Related video
injury or even fire. Children should there- against impurities in the air taken into the ve-
fore not be left in the vehicle unattended if hicle interior.
the button is also left behind. Otherwise The dust and pollen filter must be changed
there is a possibility that they may be in- regularly so that air conditioner performance
jured.
is not adversely affected.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to
CAUTION
Fig. 169 Air conditioning use in areas with very high levels of air pollu-
Always use the correct type of plugs to tion, the filter must be changed more fre-
avoid damaging the sockets. quently than stated in the Service Schedule.
Introduction
Note WARNING
● The use of electrical appliances with the Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, sever- Reduced visibility through the windows in-
engine switched off will cause a battery al systems may have been fitted: creases the risk of serious accidents.
discharge. ● Always ensure that all windows are free
● The heating and ventilation heats and
● Should the connected appliance over- of ice and snow, and that they are not fog-
ventilates the passenger compartment. It ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-
heat, immediately switch it off and discon-
cannot cool. erything outside.
nect it from the socket.
● The manual air conditioning and the Cli- ● Only drive when you have good visibility.
● Before switching the ignition on or off, un-
plug the appliances from the USB ports to
matronic cool and dehumidify the air. They
● Always ensure that you use the air condi-
protect them from any damage caused by operate most effectively with the windows
tioning, heater or rear window heating to
fluctuations in voltage. and the sunroof closed. maintain good visibility to the outside.
To switch a specific function on, press the ap- ● Never leave the air recirculation on for a
propriate button. Press the button again to long period of time. If the cooling system is
switch off the function. switched off and air recirculation mode »
155
 Operation

switched on, the windows can mist over mate control or air conditioning checked the luggage compartment designed for this
very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. by a specialised workshop. purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-
● Switch air recirculation mode off when it ● Repairs to the climate control or air con- structing these slots with any kind of ob-
is not required. ditioning require specialist knowledge and ject.
special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a ● Do not smoke while air recirculation
SEAT Official Service. mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air
WARNING
conditioning system leaves residue on the
Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and evaporator, producing a permanent un-
Note
reduce driver concentration possibly re- pleasant odour.
sulting in a serious accident. ● When the cooling system is turned off, air
● It is advisable to turn on the air condition-
● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or coming from the outside will not be dried. ing at least once a month, to lubricate the
use the air recirculation for long periods of To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-
time; the air in the vehicle interior will not recommends leaving the cooling system crease in the cooling capacity is detected,
be refreshed. (compressor) turned on. To do this, press a Technical Service should be consulted to
the  button. The button lamp should check the system.
light up.
CAUTION ● The maximum heat output required to de-
● When the engine is under extreme strain,
switch off the compressor for a moment.
● To replace the pollen filter, always visit a frost windows as quickly as possible is only
service centre. available when the engine has reached its
● Switch the climate control or air condi- normal running temperature.
tioner off if you think it may be broken. This ● Keep the air intake slots in front of the
will avoid additional damage. Have the cli- windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to
ensure heating and cooling are not im-
paired, and to prevent the windows from
misting over.
● The air from the vents flows through the
vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in

156
 Air conditioning

Climatronic* controls

Fig. 170 In the centre console: Climatronic con-

trols.

Automatic mode  for the passenger side to set a different tem- Maximum cooling power  
Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, perature. The recirculation of air and the cooling sys-
and air distribution. Automatic mode is disa- tem turn on automatically and air distribution
bled when the ventilation is modified manual- Blower  adjusts automatically to the position .
ly. The power of the fan is automatically adjus-
ted. Defrost/demist function  
Cooling mode  The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is di-
The fan is also adjusted manually by turning
Press the button to switch on or off the cool- the control. rected at the windscreen and air recirculation
ing system. is automatically switched off. To defrost the
Air distribution  /  /  windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidi-
Temperature 1 / 2 fied at temperatures over approximately
The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort.
+3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum
The temperature of the right and left sides It can also be manually distributed to the de-
output.
can be adjusted separately using the adjust- sired zone by pressing the corresponding
ers. The selected temperature is shown on button:
the display of the climate control panel. Infotainment system: 
 The airflow is directed towards the chest The climate control operation and settings
Synchronisation: press button  so that
 The airflow is directed towards the foot- menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect
settings on the driver's side apply to the pas-
senger side. Use the temperature regulator well. system screen. »
 The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

157
 Operation

Heated rear window  To avoid possible damage to the battery, an Seat heating  
automatic temporary disconnection of this
This only works when the engine is running ››› page 162
and switches off automatically after a maxi- function is possible, coming back on when
mum of 10 minutes. normal operating conditions are re-establish-
Switching off
ed.
It should be switched off as soon as the glass Press button  or manually set the fan to .
is demisted. By saving electrical power you Air recirculation 
can also save fuel.
››› page 161

Manual air conditioning* controls / Heating and fresh air system

Fig. 171 In the centre console:  controls for the manual air conditioning;  heating and fresh air system controls.

Cooling mode  air temperature, as this system cannot cool or Air distribution  /  /  /  / 
Manual air conditioning: Press the button to dehumidify the air. Turning regulator 3 distributes the air to the
switch on or off the cooling system. desired zone:
Blower 
Temperature 1 Turning the regulator 2 sets the fan power.  The airflow is directed towards the chest
 The airflow is directed towards the chest
Turn the control to adjust the temperature. At level 0 the fan and manual air conditioning
and the footwell area.
Heating and fresh air system: The tempera- are disconnected. Level 6 is the maximum.
 The airflow is directed towards the foot-
ture cannot be lower than that of the exterior
well.
158
 Air conditioning

 The airflow is directed towards the wind- Air recirculation  Function button: Function
screen and the footwell area.
››› page 161
OFF: Switch off and switch on the Climatronic.
Defrost/demist function  Seat heating   SYNC: Synchronise driver and front passenger tem-
Manual air conditioning: When control 3 is in peratures.
››› page 162
position  the air flow is directed at the wind-
SETTINGS The air conditioning settings submenu is
screen and air recirculation is disconnected opened. The following settings can also be adjusted:
automatically or not activated. Increase the
fan power to clear the windscreen of con- Operating the Climatronic through Air conditioning profile: Adjust the
densation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the Easy Connect system* power of the fan in AUTO mode. You can choose
between low, medium and high.
the air, the cooling system will automatically 3 Valid for vehicles with a Media System Colour.
switch on. Automatic air recirculation: Switching
In the Easy Connect system it is also possible automatic air recirculation on and off
Maximum cooling power   to perform various adjustments to the Clima- ››› page 161.
tronic.
Manual air conditioning: When the control is
in position   air recirculation and the
Open the air conditioner menu Operating the Climatronic through
cooling system are connected automatically
and the air flow is automatically adjusted to ● Press the  button on the Climatronic the Easy Connect system*
position . control panel.
3 Applies to vehicles with Media System Plus /
● OR: press the    button in Easy Con- Navi System / Navi System Plus.
Heated rear window  nect. With the rotating switch select the air
This only works when the engine is running conditioner menu and open it.
and switches off automatically after a maxi-
On the touch screen you can see and
mum of 10 minutes.
change the current settings, for example, the
It should be switched off as soon as the glass temperature set for the driver and passenger
is demisted. By saving electrical power you sides, the air distribution and the fan speed.
can also save fuel.
To switch a function on or off, or to select a
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an submenu, you must press the corresponding
automatic temporary disconnection of this function button.
function is possible, coming back on when
normal operating conditions are re-establish- Fig. 172 Easy Connect screen: Climate control
ed. menu. »
159
 Operation

In the Easy Connect system it is also possible Function button: Function the Infotainment system using the Infotain-
to perform various adjustments to the Clima- ment button    > Settings > Units.
tronic. Air conditioning profile: Adjust the
power of the fan in AUTO mode. You can choose The cooling system cannot be activated
between low, medium and high.
Open the air conditioner menu If the air conditioning system cannot be
● Press the  button of the Climatronic Automatic air recirculation: to switch switched on, this may be caused by the fol-
automatic air recirculation on and off
control panel. lowing:
››› page 161.
On the screen you can view and change the Back : Close the submenu.
● The engine is not running.
current settings, such as, for example, the ● The fan is switched off.
temperature set for the driver and passenger
● The air conditioner fuse has blown.
sides. Temperatures up to +22°C (+72°F) are
shown with blue arrows, and temperatures Climate control usage instructions ● The outside temperature is lower than ap-
over +22°C (+72°F) with red arrows. proximately +3°C (+38°F).
The interior cooling system only works when
● The air conditioner compressor has been
To switch a function on or off, or to select a the engine is running and fan is switched on.
submenu, you must press the corresponding temporarily switched off because the engine
function button. coolant temperature is too high.
Economic use of the air conditioning
● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
Function button: Function conditioner checked by a specialised work-
compressor consumes engine power and has
shop.
OFF: Climatronic is switched off. influence on fuel consumption.

ON: Climatronic is switched on. The air conditioner operates most effectively Special characteristics
with the windows and the panoramic sliding If the humidity and temperature outside the
SYNC: Synchronise driver and front passenger tem-
sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has vehicle are high, condensation can drip off
peratures.
heated up after standing in the sun for some the evaporator in the cooling system and
SETTINGS The air conditioning settings submenu is time, the air inside can be cooled more quick- form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is
opened. The following settings can also be adjusted: ly by opening the windows and the panoram- normal and does not indicate a leak!
ic sliding sunroof briefly.
Automatic supplementary heater: to
activate/deactivate the automatic activation of Note
the auxiliary heating for colder countries (only Change the temperature unit (Climatron-
for engines with auxiliary heating). With the op- After starting the engine, any residual hu-
ic)
tion deactivated, depending on the outside tem- midity in the air conditioner could mist over
perature the heating may need more time than The temperature display can be changed
normal to reach a comfortable temperature. from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the screen of
160
 Air conditioning

the windscreen. Switch on the defrost func- When the outside temperature is very high, ● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C
tion as soon as possible to clear the wind- selecting manual air recirculation mode for a (+38°F).
screen of condensation. short period refreshes the vehicle interior ● The cooling system is switched off and the
more quickly. outside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F).
For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is ● The cooling system is switched off, the out-
Air vents switched off when the button   is press- side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) and
ed or the air distributor turned to . the windscreen wipers are switched on.
To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-
lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents must Switching the manual air recirculation WARNING
remain open. mode on and off
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro-
● Turn the corresponding thumbwheel in the ● Press the button  to connect or discon- duction on page 156.
required direction to open and close the air nect manual air recirculation. ● If the cooling system is switched off and
vents. When the thumbwheel is in the  posi- air recirculation mode switched on, the
tion, the corresponding air vent is closed. Climatronic automatic air recirculation windows can mist over very quickly, con-
mode siderably limiting visibility.
● Change the air direction using the ventila-
With the automatic air recirculation mode ac- ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it
tion grille lever.
tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in- is not required.
There are other additional, non-adjustable air terior is enabled. If the system detects a high
vents in the dash panel, in the footwells and in concentration of hazardous substances in the CAUTION
the rear area of the passenger compartment. ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched
Do not smoke when air recirculation is
on automatically. When the level of impurities
switched on in vehicles with an air condi-
Note drops to within a normal range, recirculation
tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the
Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen- mode is switched off. cooling system vaporiser and on the acti-
sitive objects should never be placed in The system is unable to detect unpleasant vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and
front of the air outlets as they may be dam- smells. pollen filter, leading to a permanently un-
aged or made unsuitable for use by the air. pleasant smell.
● Automatic air recirculation is activated and
deactivated in the climate control menu
Note
Air recirculation  ››› page 159.
Climatronic: air recirculation mode is acti-
The air recirculation will not connect auto- vated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasant
Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient
matically in versions without humidity sensor odours from entering the vehicle interior »
air from entering the interior.
and in the following external conditions:
161
 Operation

● The outdoor or indoor temperature is great-

when it is in reverse and while the automat- the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single
ic windscreen wiper is working. er than +25°C (77°F). point on the seat cushion or backrest.
● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating
WARNING
materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can
Seat heating* People who cannot perceive pain or tem- damage the seat heating.
perature because of medications, paralysis ● In the event of smells, switch off the seat
With the engine on, the seat cushion and the or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have heating immediately and have it inspected
a limited perception of these, may suffer by a specialised workshop.
seat backrest can be heated electrically.
burns to the back, buttocks or legs when
using seat heating.
Control seat heating For the sake of the environment
● People with limited pain and temperature
● Press buttons  or  on the control panel thresholds must never use seat heating. The seat heating should remain on only
to turn on the seat heating as high as possi- when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces-
● If an abnormality in the device's temper-
ble. sary fuel waste.
ature control is detected, have it checked
● Press buttons  or  repeatedly to adjust it by a specialist workshop.
to the required level.
● To turn off the seat heating, press button  WARNING
or  repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.
If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can
If the ignition is switched on again in approx. adversely affect the operation of the seat
the next 10 minutes, the driver seat heating is heating, increasing the risk of burns.
automatically turned on to the level set the ● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to
last time. using the seat heater.
● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is
Cases in which the heat seating should wet or damp.
not be switched on ● Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp
Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the on the seat.
following conditions are met: ● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

● The seat is not occupied.

CAUTION
● The seat has a cover.
● To avoid damaging the heating elements
● A child seat has been installed on the seat.
of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on
● The seat cushion is wet or damp.
162
 Introduction

Infotainment System system can distract your attention from the

traffic.
WARNING
Place the connecting cables of external
● Always drive carefully and responsibly. equipment so that they do not interfere
Introduction ● Select volume settings that allow you to with the driver’s mobility.
hear sounds from outside the vehicle at all
Safety warnings times (e.g. emergency services sirens and WARNING
horns).
External devices that are loose or not prop-
Safety warnings regarding the Info- erly secured could move around the pas-
WARNING senger compartment during a sharp ma-
tainment system
The volume level may suddenly change noeuvre or accident.
Only operate the infotainment system and its when you switch audio source or connect a ● Avoid placing external devices on the
various functions when the traffic situation new audio source. doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash
really permits this. ● Lower the base volume before connect- panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or
ing or switching audio sources. near the area marked “AIRBAG” or between
WARNING these areas and the occupants. They could
cause serious injury in an accident, espe-
● Before starting the trip, you should famili- WARNING cially when the airbags inflate.
arise yourself with the different infotain-
The driving recommendations and traffic
ment system functions.
indications shown on the navigation system WARNING
● High audio volume may represent a dan- may differ from the current traffic situation.
ger to you and to others. Hearing may be The armrest* must always remain closed
● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have
impaired if the volume is too high, even for during the journey as it could restrict the
priority over the recommendations and dis-
short periods of time. driver’s movements.
plays provided by the navigation system.
● Changes to the Infotainment system set-
tings should be made when the car is stop- WARNING
ped, or by a passenger. WARNING
Opening the CD or DVD player can lead to
Connecting, inserting or removing a data
injuries from invisible laser radiation.
medium while driving can distract your at-
WARNING ● Have CD or DVD repaired only by a spe-
tention from the traffic and cause an acci-
Current traffic requires maximum attention dent. cialist workshop. »
from public road users. Distracting the driv-
er in any way can lead to an accident and
cause injuries. Operating the Infotainment

163
 Infotainment System

CAUTION – Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu-

larly shaped CDs or DVDs.
The Infotainment system can be damaged
by the incorrect insertion of a data storage – Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual
device or the insertion of an incompatible Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker
data storage device. than normal CDs.
● When inserting a data storage device,
make sure it is correctly positioned. CAUTION
● Applying force may irreparably damage The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-
the memory card slot locking mechanism. aged if the volume is too high or the sound
● Only use compatible memory cards. is distorted.
● When inserting and removing CDs and
DVDs, always hold them at right angles to Note
the front of the CD/DVD drive without tilt-
For the proper functioning of the Infotain-
ing so as not to scratch them.
ment system it is important that the date
● If a CD or DVD is inserted while another is and time set in the vehicle are correct.
already in the unit or being ejected, the
CD/DVD drive may be damaged. Always
wait until the data medium is completely
ejected.

CAUTION
Foreign objects stuck to a CD or DVD, or if it
is not round, the player may be damaged.
● Only clean, standard 12 cm CDs or DVDs
should be used.
– Do not affix stickers or other items to
the data medium. Stickers may peel off
and damage the drive.
– Do not use printable data media. Prin-
ted labels and coverings may peel off
and damage the CD/DVD drive.

164
 Introduction

Overview of the unit

Media System Colour

Fig. 173 Overview of the controls (this configura-

tion depends on the version).

1 Radio Mode (change of band frequency 5 Volume and sound settings ››› page 174 10 Settings button (search and selection)
››› page 189 6 Vehicle settings ››› page 92, ››› page 169
2 Touchscreen ››› page 170 ››› page 228
3 Telephone mode* / TP Settings 7 Main menu ››› page 169
››› page 233 8 Volume. Off/on ››› page 169
4 Media mode (audio sources) 9 Slot for memory cards ››› page 206
››› page 197

165
 Infotainment System

Media System Plus / Navi System / Navi System Plus

Fig. 174 Overview of the controls

1 Main menu ››› page 169

2 Full Link1) ››› page 179
3 Volume. Off/on ››› page 169
4 Touchscreen ››› page 170

1) If your vehicle does not have Full Link*, pressing

the key will bring up a message on the screen

telling you that you can activate this function in
an Official Service of your choice.
166
 Introduction

Main menus

Fig. 175 Menu summary (these menus depend on the equipment in question). »

167
 Infotainment System

 Radio ››› page 189  Navigation ››› page 214  Telephone ››› page 233

RADIO main menu ››› page 189 New destination ››› page 217 Bluetooth® ››› page 234
RDS radio data services ››› page 190 Route options ››› page 218 ››› page 218 Tethering ››› page 235
Digital radio mode ››› page 191 My destinations ››› page 219 Function buttons ››› page 236
Memory buttons ››› page 192 Special destinations (POI) ››› page 220 Enter number ››› page 238
Save station logos ››› page 193 View ››› page 221 Agenda ››› page 239
Select, tune and save stations ››› page 193 Split screen ››› page 221 Short messages (SMS) ››› page 240
SCAN automatic playback ››› page 194 Map display ››› page 222 Call list ››› page 241
TP traffic information ››› page 194 Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide ››› page 222 Quick dial keys ››› page 242
Setup ››› page 195 Predictive navigation ››› page 223 Setup ››› page 242
Import vCards ››› page 224
Media ››› page 197 Navigation with images ››› page 224 Sound ››› page 174
 Road signs ››› page 224

Data and file formats ››› page 197 Route guidance in Demo mode ››› page 224
 Full Link ››› page 179
Playback order ››› page 200 ››› page 200 Setup ››› page 225
Change the media source ››› page 203 Offroad mode ››› page 226 Requirements ››› page 180
Change track ››› page 203 Activation of Full Link ››› page 181
Selecting an album by cover ››› page 204 Tethering of portable devices ››› page 182
Selecting a track from a track list ››› page 204
 Vehicle
MirrorLink® ››› page 183
Data bank view ››› page 205 Instrument panel ››› page 229 Apple CarPlay™ ››› page 183
Insert or remove a CD or DVD ››› page 206 Sport ››› page 229 Android Auto™ ››› page 184
Memory card ››› page 206 Offroad ››› page 230 Frequently Asked Questions ››› page 185
External data storage device connected to the USB Consumers ››› page 230
port ››› page 207 Driving data ››› page 231
External audio source connected to the AUX-IN multi-  SEAT Md. Climate ››› page 185
Ecotrainer ››› page 231
media socket ››› page 208 Vehicle status ››› page 232 WLAN access point ››› page 186
External audio source with Bluetooth® ››› page 208
Images ››› page 213
 Traffic ››› page 222 Images ››› page 213
Setup ››› page 214 
Traffic information (TP) ››› page 194
Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide ››› page 222  Control ››› page 159

 Setup ››› page 173

168
 Introduction

General instructions for use countries. For further information, contact Note
the local authorities.
Depending on the infotainment version,
Introduction ● On vehicles with ParkPilot, the audio vol- there may be more icons on the second
ume is automatically lowered when reverse page. In this case, to see the remaining
gear is selected. The volume can be low- icons press the function button ››› Fig. 177
ered in the menu Sound > Volume. (arrow) or slide your finger horizontally
across the screen.

Diagram of the menus

Fig. 176 Related video
Rotary push buttons and infotain-
ment buttons
If the setup is changed, this may change the
display on the screen and the Infotainment Rotary/push buttons
system may behave in a manner different to The left rotary push button  is the on/off
that described in this manual. button if pressed and the volume knob if
turned.
Note
● Just press a button or the screen to use Infotainment buttons
the infotainment system's functions.
The buttons on the unit are shown in this
● The equipment’s software depends on manual with the word “infotainment button”
Fig. 177 Main menu
the market in question, so it is possible that and their function within a rectangle, for ex-
not all of the function buttons or described ample, the infotainment button   .
The Infotainment system touchscreen can be
functions are available. The equipment is
used to select the different main menus. The Infotainment buttons are used by press-
not faulty if a function button is missing.
● Due to country-specific legislation, cer- Press the Infotainment button    to ing them or pressing and holding.
tain functions may not be available on the open the menus summary .
screen when the vehicle is travelling above The display of the touchscreen's main menu
a certain speed.
can be switched between “grid” and “carou- Switching on and off
● Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi- sel” and vice-versa using the menu Settings
cle may provoke noise in the speakers. When the system is turned on, it starts up with
> Screen ››› page 173.
the volume at which it was turned off, as long
● Restrictions on the use of devices using
as it does not exceed the preset maximum
Bluetooth® technology may apply in some
start-up volume. Select Sound > Volume. »
169
 Infotainment System

The unit will switch off automatically when played on the instrument panel by a volume
the key is removed from the ignition or when bar.
the on/off button is pressed (depending on
It is possible to preset certain volume settings
the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In-
and adjustments. Select    > Sound >
fotainment system is switched on again, it will
Volume.
switch off automatically after approximately
30 minutes (switch-off delay).
Muting the Infotainment system sound
Note ● Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise
until it displays .
● The Infotainment system is a part of the
vehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi- ● OR: press the left wheel of the multifunction Fig. 179 Sound setup menu
cle. steering wheel.
● If the battery has been disconnected, the Active areas of the touchscreen that call up a
Playback is paused while in Media mode (ex- certain function are called “function buttons”.
ignition must be activated before switching
cept AUX). The screen displays . These buttons are operated by pressing them
on the Infotainment system.
on the screen or holding them down.
The function buttons appear in this manual as
Operation of the function buttons
Changing the basic volume a “function button” and a button symbol
and the instructions on the screen inside a rectangle .
Increasing or decreasing the volume or
These activate functions or open submenus.
muting the sound
The currently selected menu is displayed in
Raise the volume: turn the volume control  the title bar ››› Fig. 178 A of the submenus.
clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on
Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be se-
the multifunction steering wheel upward .
lected.
Lower the volume: turn the volume control 
clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on Increase or decrease the size of the im-
the multifunction steering wheel downward ages displayed on the screen
.
The size of the navigation map image and im-
Changes in volume are indicated by a vol- age views can be enlarged or reduced. To do
ume bar on the screen. The volume can be Fig. 178 View of some of the function buttons
this, slide 2 fingers across the screen to sepa-
on the screen.
controlled using the steering wheel controls. rate them or bring them together.
In this case, the changes in volume are dis-
170
 Introduction

Overview of screen and function buttons Display and function buttons: operation Mark list entries using the setup button
and effect and open them
Display and function buttons: operation
● Turn the adjustment knob to search and se-
and effect OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.
lect from the list.
The title bar shows the selected menu Press to close a pop-up window or an in-
A
and other function buttons. × put window.
● Press the setup button to activate the
marked entry on the list.
B Press it to open another menu. Press them to change the setup adjust-
/ ments one at a time. Search lists (scrolling the screen)
The scroll bar is shown on the right. Scroll
the bar by sliding your finger vertically on Move the scroll button across the screen The scroll bar is shown on the right and its
C  size depends on the entries in the list
it ››› page 171, Open list entries and by sliding your finger.
search in lists. ››› Fig. 180 1 .
Movable cursor: Move the cursor by slid- ● On the bar: Press above or below the mark
ing your finger across the screen. Open list entries and search in lists or slide your finger vertically over the mark
OR: Press a point on the screen where until you reach the desired position.
you want the sound to be directed.

D Fixed crosshair: Press on the arrows to

move the sound around according to your Input window with on-screen key-
preferences. pad
OR: Press the central button to centre the
stereo sound in the centre of the passen-
ger compartment

Press it on some lists to move up a level,


one by one.
Fig. 180 Entries on a setup menu list.
BACK Button to return to the previous menu or
 move up through the folder structure.
The entries on a list can be activated by
When pressed, a pop-up window opens pressing them on the screen or by using the
 (options window) which displays other settings button.
setup options.

Some functions are activated  or deac-

Fig. 181 Input window with on-screen keypad. »
/
tivated  by pressing this box.

171
 Infotainment System

The on-screen keypad is used for functions Function icon and text: operation and ef- The status bar on the screen can display, for
such as entering an memory name, selecting fect example, the current time and outside tem-
a destination address or entering a search perature.
term for searching long lists. 2 Press to show symbols on the keypad.
All displays can be viewed only after com-
The input line with cursor is located in the top If there are fewer than 99, it shows the pletely restarting the Infotainment system.
bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed number of entries that can be selec-
3
here. ted. Pressing opens the list according
to the entry.
Initial configuration wizard
Input windows for “free text input” Scroll bar, the size of which depends
4
on the number of matching entries.
In the input masks for open text, you may en-
ter letters, numbers and characters in any If the button is held down, special
combination. characters based on that letter are
displayed. Press the desired charac-
5
ter to enter it. Some special charac-
Input windows for selecting a saved entry
ters can be written out instead (e.g.
(e.g. selection of a destination address) “AE” for “Ä”).
It is only possible to enter a sequence of let-
ters, numbers and characters that matches a  Space bar

stored entry. Deletes characters on the input line

from right to left.
Matches are suggested on the input line  Fig. 182 Initial configuration wizard
››› Fig. 181 4 . In the case of compound Press and hold to delete several char-
names, it is necessary to enter a space. acters.
It will help you to set up your Infotainment
BACK  Close the input window. system the first time you switch it on.
Overview of the function buttons*
Every time you switch on the Infotainment
Function icon and text: operation and ef- system, the initial setup screen will appear
fect Additional information and display ››› Fig. 182 if any parameters have not been
set or if the NEVER function button has not
Letters and Press them to copy them into the input options
been pressed.
digits line.
The displays appearing on the screen may
Press to change the keypad to anoth- vary depending on the settings, and may dif-
er language. Keypad languages can fer from those described here.
1
be selected from the menu System
settings > Speech.
172
 Introduction

Function button: function Function button: function Function button: function

Closes the Configuration Wizard, and Once one or more settings have been Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) : If this function is
the main menu or last mode in which applied, finalise the configuration in active and the infotainment system is not used,
CLOSE
you used the Infotainment system will the main menu of the wizzard. the screen will automatically switch off after ap-
appear. FINISH If you have not set all the parameters, prox. 10 seconds. Pressing the screen or pressing
the Initial Configuration Wizard will one of the infotainment buttons will turn the
Disables the possibility of changing start the next time you turn the Info- screen on again.
the settings of the Infotainment sys- tainment system on.
NEVER tem. To configure the system go to: Brightness : To select the brightness level of the
System settings and select Con- a) Only valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus. screen.
figuration wizard.
Day / Night : To select the type of display (Day,
START Starts up the Configuration Wizard. Night or Automatic).
Menu and system settings Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a
If the system includes navigation, the
function button is pressed is active.
A date and time are set automatically
The settings that can be selected varies de-
by the GPS. Show clock in standby mode : In standby mode, the
pending on the country and the equipment in
time is displayed on the infotainment system
Search and save the radio stations question, and on the vehicle's equipment. screen.
B with the best reception at that time in
all available bands. ● Press the Infotainment button    and Date and time : Change the time and date settings.
then press the SETTINGS function button.
Link your mobile phone to the Infotain- Clock time source : To select the time source (GPS
C
ment system. or manual).
Press the function button of the main menu or
Add your home address using your the functions for which you want to change GPS : The time and date can be selected using
D a) current position or by manually enter- the settings. All settings are automatically the Time zone function button. In this case, the
ing an address. applied when the menus are closed. Time and Date function buttons for manual
entry will not be active.
Previous or next parameter to config-
ure. Function button: function Manual : The time and date can be set manual-
When a parameter has been config- ly using the Time and Date function buttons.
PREVIOUS Screen : To change the screen settings.
ured, the only way to reconfigure it is
Time : To set the time manually.
by clicking on it on the main menu, not Menu : To select the main menu display mode
NEXT
by using the Previous/Next buttons. (Mosaic or Carousel). Time zone : To adjust the desired time zone.
When you configure a parameter, 
will be displayed over it. Time format : To select the time display format (12
or 24 hours).

Date : To set the current date. »

173
 Infotainment System

● Press the Infotainment button    and

Function button: function Function button: function
then press the Sound function button.
Date format : To select the date display format Factory settings : When the original factory settings ● Press the main menu function button for the
(DD.MM.YYYY, YY-MM-DD or MM-DD-YY). are restored, all inputs and settings that are made
are deleted, depending on the selected settings. settings that have to be changed. All settings
Language : To select the desired language for texts are applied instantly.
and phrases in the voice control system. Bluetooth : To change the Bluetooth® ››› page 243
settings. Overview of screen and function buttons
Additional keypad languages : To select additional key-
board languages. WLAN a): To change the WLAN access point settings
››› page 211. Function button: function
Units : To set the units of measurement of the vehi-
Volume : To change the volume settings.
cle's displays: distance, speed, temperature, volume, System information : Display of the system information
consumption and pressure. (device number, hardware and software versions). Warnings : To set the playback volume of warn-
Data transfer for SEAT apps Update : To update the navigation data, do
ings, such as traffic announcements.
››› page 214 No remove the memory card while Navigation announcements : To set the playback
Data transfer for SEAT apps : This allows data to be the navigation data are being installed.
exchanged between the vehicle and SEAT apps. volume of audio driving recommendations.
They are not personal data. Copyright : Information about copyright. Voice control : To set the playback volume of
Operation via apps : Change the level of interaction
voice control.
Configuration wizard : Opens the Infotainment system’s
with apps. initial configuration wizard. Maximum switch-on volume : To set the equipment's
Deactivate : This limits specific functions that
maximum switch-on volume.
a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus.
require a higher level of security. Speed-dependent volume adjustment (GALA): To set
Confirm : Allows 100% of functions of the app, the extent to which the volume is adjusted de-
and certain specific actions on the Infotain- Note
pending on the speed. The volume of the audio
ment system have to be confirmed. For the proper functioning of the Infotain- will increase automatically as the speed of the
Allow : Allows all available functions to be exe- vehicle increases.
ment system it is important that the date
cuted from the app.
and time set in the vehicle are correct. Entertainment fading when parking : To adjust the
Voice control : To change the voice control settings desired reduction in audio volume when ParkPi-
››› page 175. lot is active.
Remove safely : To eject the data medium (SD/USB Volume and sound settings Entertainment fading (nav. announcements) : Adjusts
card) from the system. After correctly ejecting the the playback volume when the navigator is
data storage device from the system, the function The settings that can be selected varies de- speaking.
button becomes inactive (grey colour). pending on the country and the equipment in
question, and on the vehicle's equipment.

174
 Introduction

Function button: function Adjust the playback volume of external

Voice control
audio sources
Volume : To set the playback volume of audio
If you need to increase the playback volume How it works
sources connected via the AUX-IN multimedia
jack (Low, Medium or High). Also see for the external audio source, first lower the
base volume on the infotainment system. 3 Not available for model: Media System Colour
››› page 174, Overview of screen and function
buttons.
If the sound from the connected audio source
Bluetooth audio : To set the playback volume of is very low, increase the output volume on
the audio sources connected by Bluetooth® the external audio source. If this is not
(Low, Medium or High). Also see ››› page 174,
enough, change the input volume to medium
Overview of screen and function buttons.
or high.
Equaliser : To adjust the sound properties.
If the sound from the connected external au-
Balance - Fader : To adjust the sound distribution. The dio source is too loud or distorted, lower the
cursor indicates the current sound distribution in the output volume on the external audio source.
passenger compartment. To modify the sound distri- If this is not enough, change the input vol-
bution, briefly press on the desired position in the ume to medium or low.
passenger compartment view or use the arrow keys Fig. 183 Voice control: main screen
for a step-by-step modification. To centre sound dis-
tribution in the passenger compartment view, press
Many of the radio, media, telephone and nav-
the central function button located between the ar-
rows. igation functions can be changed by voice
commands.
Sound focus : Optimizes the sound in the passenger
compartment. The voice control of the infotainment system
will only be available for the language selec-
Subwoofer *: Adjusts the volume of the subwoofer. ted in System settings ››› page 173.
Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a func-
● Voice control settings ››› page 178.
tion button is pressed is active.

Disabling voice navigation during calls : During a tele- Start and stop voice control
phone conversation, audio driving recommendations
will not be given. ● To activate voice control, briefly press the
button on the multifunction steering wheel .
● When activating voice control, a dialogue
start tone will sound and the main voice con-
trol screen will be displayed, ››› Fig. 183, (the »
175
 Infotainment System

main screen will appear in the format selec- command can also be spoken followed by a If you make a mistake when speaking a com-
ted in Voice control settings ››› page 178). function of the infotainment system, such as mand, or pronounce it incompletely and it
The spoken indications guide you through the “Help with navigation”. has no effect, you may repeat the command.
following “dialogue”. The symbol  remains activated.
● Speak the desired command and follow the Interacting with the dialogue mode
● Briefly press button  to repeat the com-
instructions in the “dialogue”. Often a func- Icons in upper left corner: mand.
tion can be activated by different spoken
commands. If in doubt, try speaking a com- The system waits for a user's command.
 Voice control instructions
mand or say Help.
The system has recognised a command
● When an action is taken (e.g., call a con-  and will act shortly.
Follow the instructions shown below for opti-
mal operation of the voice control.
tact), the voice control ends automatically
The system transmits a spoken com-
and you must activate it again if you want to  mand and confirms the command that ● Speak slowly and clearly if possible. The
continue with it. There are certain commands system will not recognise words that are un-
has been given.
after which the voice control does not end, clearly pronounced, or words and numbers
and it waits by saying Next command?. The system is in paused mode. (max. 3
 minutes).
that are missing syllables.
● To manually end voice control, press and ● Telephone numbers should be spoken digit
hold the button  until the corresponding  /  Hide or show the voice control menu
by digit, or by blocks units, tens or hundreds.
confirmation signal sounds, or briefly press ›››
Fig. 183.
● Speak at a normal volume, without exag-
the  button twice, or press the function but-
Operation during the dialogue gerated pronunciation or long pauses.
ton  in the upper right corner of the screen.
● Avoid outside and nearby noise (for exam-
● You can also end the voice control by While the infotainment system transmits a
ple, conversations inside the vehicle). Close
speaking the following commands: Stop or spoken instruction, the symbol  will be dis-
all doors, windows and the sliding sunroof.
Cancel. played on the screen.
● Do not direct the air from the outlets to-
● You can stop the speech by pressing the wards the roof of the passenger compart-
Voice control help
upper left icon on the screen or button  and ment.
It is recommended to listen to the Help the voice recognition will resume for the user.
● If you are driving at high speed, talk a little
first time you use the voice control.
IMPORTANT: The system will ONLY recog- louder.
● Activate voice control . nize a command when the symbol  is
By activating voice control the system takes
● Say the command Help to start it in the lan- displayed as “active” on the panel or on
you to the main screen ››› Fig. 183, which will
guage indicated System Settings, and fol- the touchscreen.
display the contexts in which the system op-
low the instructions in the dialogue. The Help
erates and the main commands.
176
 Introduction

From here you can command the system Effect Voice command Voice control (NAVIGATION)*
based on the context that you want to oper-
ate, or give a voice command directly. PLAY SIMILAR TITLESa) Play similar titles Effect Voice command

When selecting each of the contexts (Naviga- a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus Enter address
tion, Telephone, Radio, Media, Voice control) ENTER THE ADDRESS Guide to City, Street,
a menu will displayed listing the main com- Voice control (TELEPHONE) numbera)
mands, and providing brief explanations of
how to give each of them, as a help mode. Effect Voice command Search for car parks
SEARCH FOR SPEC.
Call Name Surname DESTINATIONa) Search for restaurants
Voice control (RADIO) Home near destination
CALL CONTACTS
Effect Voice command Call Name Surname Mo- HOME ADDRESS Home address
bile
LISTEN TO THE RADIO Listen to the radio LAST DESTINATIONS Last destinations
Call 01234
Station STATION NAME 1 CALL NUMBERS NAVIGATION TO CON- Navigate to Name Sur-
SELECT STATION Call number TACTS name
Set station
Show all calls Start route guidance
Frequency 87.9 CALL LIST ROUTE GUIDANCE
SELECT FREQUENCY Missed calls Route information
Set frequency
REDIAL Redial a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus
Band FM
CHANGE BAND CALL MAILBOX Call mailbox
Change band Voice control
SMS Read out text message
Effect Voice command
Voice control (MEDIA) SERVICE Breakdown call
Pardon?
Effect Voice command INFORMATION Information call
Back
Play Jukeboxa)
SOURCE SELECTION VOICE CONTROL Main menu
Listen to CD
Cancel voice control
Select track / album / ar-
MUSIC SELECTION
tist / genre Pause voice control »

177
 Infotainment System

Effect Voice command Function button: function

Help Input tone in voice dialogue : the input tone to confirm
HELP an order is activated.
What can I say?
End tone in voice dialogue : the end tone to confirm an
VOICE BUTTON  order is deactivated.
a) Available depending on equipment
Note
Voice control is not available when parking

Voice control settings

● Press the infotainment button  > Set-
tings > Voice control.

When closing a menu, the changes will be

made automatically.

Function button: function

Example commands (infotainment system) : Display voice
control examples on the infotainment system screen.

Example commands (instrument cluster) a): Display voice

control examples on the instrument panel.

Voice control session start tone : a signal will sound

when activating voice control. Press to deactivate
the signal.

Voice control session end tone : a signal will sound when

deactivating voice control. Press to deactivate the
signal.

178
 Connectivity

Connectivity The Full Link system brings together technol-

ogies that allow communication between the
WARNING
The use of applications while driving can
Infotainment System and mobile devices:
Data transfer distract your attention from the traffic. Dis-
tracting the driver in any way can lead to
● MirrorLink®
an accident and cause injuries.
● Android Auto™
Introduction ● Always drive carefully and responsibly.
● Apple CarPlay™
This communication can allow data to be
read and/or written. Interfaces CAUTION
From the menu SETTINGS > Data trans- ● In areas where special regulations apply
To access the Full Link system, press the info-
fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to tainment button  or press the infotainment or the use of mobiles forbidden, it must be
activate/deactivate the function and a drop- switched off at all times. The radiation pro-
button    and then select the Full
duced by the mobile when switched on
down menu called Operation via apps Link context.
may interfere with sensitive technical and
which controls the level of interaction be-
medical equipment, possibly resulting in
tween the apps and the system. WARNING malfunction or damage to the equipment.
Any applications that are not suitable or ● SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam-
execute incorrectly may cause damage to age caused to the vehicle as a result of the
Full Link* the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. use of applications that are of poor quality
● SEAT recommends the use of the Apps or are defective, the inadequate program-
that SEAT provides for this vehicle. ming of the applications, the insufficient
Full Link technology description coverage of the network, the loss of data
● To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must
3 Not available for model: Media System Colour activate the option Settings > Data during transmission or the improper use of
transfer for SEAT apps. mobiles.

● The interaction level of the Apps on the

system must be: Allow. Note
● Protect the mobile terminal with its appli- ● The use of Full Link technology could in-
cations from improper use. crease the amount you pay for data.
● Never make modifications to the applica- ● SEAT recommends having a high battery
Fig. 184 Related video
tions. charge on the device when connected to
● Consult the instruction manual for the Full Link.
The Full Link connection is made through a
USB cable. mobile terminal. ● SEAT recommends that to use Full Link,
the “Date and time” should be correctly »
179
 Infotainment System

configured. Select Settings > Time and Requirements for Full Link websites to confirm whether your phone
date. is compatible with the system.
● SEAT apps are designed to communicate Mirror Link
with the vehicle and interact with it through – Check smartphone compatibility:
the Full Link connection. www.mirrorlink.com/phones
● You can find further information on the
– MirrorLink® 1.1 or higher
technical requirements, compatible devi-
ces, suitable applications and availability – Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or
at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers. the CCC must be installed in the de-
vice.
Android Auto
Is Full Link blocked? – Check smartphone compatibility. An-
droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/
– Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher
– Install Android Auto™ app
Apple CarPlay
– Check smartphone compatibility. Apple
CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay
– iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher
– Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see
phone settings)

Fig. 185 Message on Infotainment system 3 USB cable connecting car to phone:
screen. Use the approved USB cable supplied
Fig. 186 Full Link Requirements
with the phone.
If your vehicle does not have Full Link, you
can purchase it as an accessory at your 1 Full Link Activated: If you do not have
SEAT dealer ››› Fig. 185. Full Link in your vehicle you can acquire it
as an accessory at your Authorised Serv-
ice.
2 Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror-
Link®, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™
180
 Connectivity

Activation of Full Link Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not What should I do if it does not con-
necessary to establish the connection be-
nect?
tween the smartphone and Full Link.
Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces- Restart the mobile device.
sary to enable all of the app features1). Check the USB cable. Check whether the
Proceed as follows to use Full Link: USB cable is damaged. Check that neither
connection (USB/micro USB) is damaged or
● Switch on the Infotainment system worn.
● Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's
USB port using a USB cable ››› page 244. Check that the USB ports are correctly
connected. Check that the USB port of the
● In the main menu for the Full Link settings,
vehicle and the device are not damaged
Fig. 187 Full Link Setup select Activate data transfer for and/or deteriorated.
SEAT apps ››› Fig. 187.
● Clean the USB ports (device and vehicle).
Finally, a message will appear stating that ● Try with another compatible mobile device.
data transfer will commence when the device ● Have the USB port replaced at a SEAT au-
is connected. Please note that data is trans-
thorised service.
ferred over connections between your vehi-
● Have the mobile device repaired or replace
cle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec-
ted, the technology compatible with your de- it.
vice can be used.

Note

Fig. 188 Full Link menu Depending on your smartphone, it may

have to be unlocked for the connection to
occur.

1) Using the data connection to transfer the

smartphone apps to Full Link may involve addi-

tional charges. Please check the charges with
your operator.
181
 Infotainment System

Tethering of portable devices that View of the device list For further information:
support MirrorLink®, Android Auto™ iPhone™ devices only support Apple Car- MirrorLink®:
Play™. www.mirrorlink.com
and/or Apple CarPlay™ technolo-
gies There are some Android devices that support Apple CarPlay™:
MirrorLink® and Android Auto™. www.apple.com/ios/carplay

Bear in mind that once the device is connec- Android Auto™:

ted it will not be available as an audio source. www.android.com/auto

Full Link Settings Note

● In order to use Android Auto™ technology
Function button: function
it is necessary to download the Android
Activate data transfer for SEAT apps : allows the ex- Auto™ application, located on Google
change of information between the vehicle and ap- Play™.
plications authorised by SEAT. ● Only compatible applications can be
used, in accordance with the technology
Fig. 189 Full Link menu
Last Mode connected.

When you enter Full Link for the first time, the If the telephone connection is terminated on-
technologies available for pairing the porta- ly by unplugging the cable, the next time the
ble device are displayed. device is connected, the session will start
without the user having to take any action1).
Once the device connects via USB, the sys-
tem will offer you the technologies available
Information
for establishing a connection.
Consult the mobile device manual.
In the event of simultaneous connections be-
tween two devices with different operating Depends on each technology:
systems, a choice will be presented for which
one to make the connection with ››› Fig. 189. 1. Availability in a country
2. Third party applications

1) Unless the device requires the screen to be un-

locked in order to establish the connection.

182
 Connectivity

MirrorLink® To avoid distracting the driver while driving, Function button: function
only specially adapted applications can be
used ››› in Full Link technology descrip- 1 : 1
Press to change to the mobile
tion on page 179. device screen.

SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup

Requirements
Press to return to the MirrorLink®
In order to use MirrorLink®, the following re- ››› Fig. 191 1
main menu.
quirements must be met:
Press to display all the function
● The device must be compatible with Mirror- ››› Fig. 191 2 buttons in the lower or upper
Link®. right-hand margin of the screen.
● Depending on the device that is used, a ››› Fig. 191  /  Allows buttons 1 and 2 to be
Fig. 190 Function buttons in the general view suitable application must be installed for the OR: Right adjust-
hidden or shown.
of compatible applications. use of MirrorLink®. ment button

Initiating the connection MirrorLink® setup

● In order to initiate the connection with the
Function button: function
device, just connect it to the Infotainment sys-
tem via the USB cable. Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows : Allows MirrorLink®
pop-up windows in applications that support it.
● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-
quest that you accept the device.

Function buttons and possible messages Apple CarPlay™*

3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele-
Function button: function
Fig. 191 Other MirrorLink function buttons. phones. Also, iPhone™ mobile telephones only
To return to the Full Link main support Apple CarPlay™
Full Link
MirrorLink® is a protocol which enables com- menu.
Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enables
munication between a device and the Info-
Press to close the open apps. communication between a device and the in-
tainment system. Then press the apps to be fotainment system.
This makes it possible to display and operate CLOSE APPS closed or the Close all function
button to close all the open ap- This makes it possible to display and operate
content and functions on the device from the
plications. content and functions on the device from the
screen of the infotainment system.
screen of the infotainment system. »
183
 Infotainment System

Requirements Android Auto™* mobile device for the confirmations needed

In order to use Apple CarPlay™, the following to pair it with the Infotainment system.
3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones.
requirements must be met: ● If you are starting the session using Android
Android Auto™ is a protocol which enables Auto™ technology, the device also automati-
● Make sure that you do not have Apple communication between a device and the in- cally connects to the Infotainment system via
CarPlay™ restricted on your device, at: Set- fotainment system. Bluetooth® and it will not be possible to pair
tings > General > Restrictions > another device via Bluetooth®.
CarPlay > ON. This makes it possible to display and operate
content and functions on the device from the Holding down the  button on the multifunc-
● The mobile device must be compatible with
screen of the infotainment system. tion steering wheel will start the Android™
Apple CarPlay™.
voice “engine”.
Requirements
Initiating the connection To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-
In order to use Android Auto™, the following ment system, press the  button.
In order to initiate the connection with the de- requirements must be met:
vice, just connect it to the Infotainment sys-
tem via the USB cable. ● The mobile device must be compatible with Note
Android Auto™. Some devices require a change in the USB
● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-
● The Android Auto™ application should al- connection mode in order to use Android
quest that you accept the device. Auto™.
ready be downloaded and installed on the
● If you start the session using Apple ● Make sure that your device is in “Media
mobile device.
CarPlay™ technology, it will not be possible Transfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it is
to pair another device via Bluetooth®. The fol- connected to the Infotainment system.
Initiating the connection
lowing message will appear in the main
Phone menu: In order to initiate the connection with the de-
vice, just use the USB cable to connect it to Note
Please disconnect Apple CarPlay the infotainment system and follow the in- Android Auto™ requires the use of Google™
first to connect a different mo- structions on the device to be paired. services, as well as certain basic applica-
bile phone. tions of the Android system.
● The first connection to Android Auto™ must
● Make sure that you always have Google™
Holding down the  button on the multifunc- be done while the vehicle is stationary.
tion steering wheel will start the Apple™ voice services updated in order to use this tech-
● Once the first pop-up window about ac- nology.
“engine”.
cepting data transfer between the car and
To return to the basic contents of the Infotain- the device has been accepted, a message
ment system, press the SEAT icon. will appear requesting that you check your

184
 Connectivity

Frequently asked questions about Where can I find compatible Apps? Can MirrorLink® be installed in a previous SEAT
Full Link model?
Compatible apps are listed at the following links:
www.mirrorlink.com/ No, it is not possible.
What connection method is used? www.android.com/auto/
www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ Where can I find more information about Full
USB Cable. Link?
Where can I download the apps?
Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle? If you have any questions, please see our Innova-
On Google Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink® and tion/Connectivity sections on our website:
No. The USB cable supplied with the device should on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™. www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re-
be used. [email protected]
If Full Link stops working, where can I go to repair
Is it possible to navigate? it?

Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link If the problem is in the car, you should go to the deal-
technologies if the technology is available in your er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should SEAT Media Control*
country and if you have the Navigation app. see your mobile telephone vendor.

What is the difference between using the Full Link Will WhatsApp be certified? Introduction
system navigator (via a device) instead of anoth- 3 Not available for model: Media System Colour
er navigator? The WhatsApp situation depends on the technology.

Advantages: Daily updates. Is MirrorLink® available in my country?

Issues: data consumption, reception problems.
Yes, MirrorLink® is available in all countries and re-
Can I send voice messages? gions where SEAT is located.

With certified applications, you can reply, not send. What are the differences between MirrorLink®,
Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™? Fig. 192 Related video
What applications will be visible while driving?
MirrorLink® is not compatible with Android Auto™ and
Depending on the technology:
The SEAT Media Control1) app can be used
Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies.
– for MirrorLink®: Apps certified by SEAT and the They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is to remotely operate some partial functions in
CCC, designed for mobile devices with the Android™ oper- Radio, Media and Navigation mode. Informa-
– for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™, ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone. tion can be exchanged between a device
– for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™. and the Infotainment System. »

1) Availability depends on the country.

185
 Infotainment System

The functions are operated by means of a Data transmission and control WLAN access point*
Tablet or partially by a mobile phone.
functions
Operating requirements:
Introduction
● A tablet or mobile phone. 3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

● The app must be available on the corre- The Infotainment System can be used to
sponding device. share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-
● There must be a WLAN connection between ces ››› page 187, Configuration for sharing
the Infotainment System and the device. Se- a connection over WLAN.
lect Menu > Media > Settings > WLAN > The Infotainment System can also use the
Share connection over WLAN > Config- WLAN hotspot of an external device to pro-
uration. vide Internet to the devices connected to the
hotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 187, Config-
Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti- Fig. 193 SEAT Media Control Main menu
ure Internet access.
vated:
With SEAT Media Control you can operate
● From the SETTINGS menu > Data trans- the Infotainment System from other places in Note
fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to the vehicle in Radio and Media modes and, ● Data transmission may incur charges.
activate/deactivate the function and a drop- depending on the country and the equip- Due to the high volume of data exchanged,
down menu called Operation via apps ment, you can exchange the following infor- SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate tar-
which controls the level of interaction be- mation between a device and the Infotain- iff for data transmission. Mobile phone op-
tween the apps and the system . Select Menu ment System: erators can provide the relevant informa-
> Settings > Data transfer from mo- tion.
bile devices. ● Navigation destinations. ● The exchange of data packages may
● Traffic information. generate additional costs, depending on
You can obtain information about technical your mobile phone rate, particularly if you
● Social media contents.
requirements on the SEAT website or at SEAT are abroad (for example, roaming rates).
dealerships. ● Audio transmission.

Telephone functions do not form part of this ● Vehicle data.

app. ● Location-specific information, for example,
POIs.

186
 Connectivity

Configuration for sharing a con- key must have a minimum of 8 characters ● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the
and a maximum of 63. WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router
nection over WLAN
● SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of starts flashing.
Establishing the connection with the wire- 32 characters). ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.
less network (WLAN) ● Do not send network name (SSID): The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-
● Press the Infotainment button  and then Activate the checkbox to deactivate the visi- ed.
press the Settings menu. bility of the wireless (WLAN) network.
Repeat this process to connect other devices.
● Activate the wireless network. To do so,
The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-
press the WLAN function button. ed. To complete the connection, it may be
● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the necessary to enter other data into the device. Configure Internet access
device that is to be connected. If necessary,
Repeat this process to connect other devices.
refer to the manufacturer’s instruction man- The Infotainment System can use the WLAN
ual. hotspot of an external device to establish an
● Activate the mobile device assignment on internet connection.
the Infotainment System. To do so, press the
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)1)
Enable WLAN connection button and acti- Establishing the connection with the wire-
Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to create less network (WLAN)
vate the checkbox.
a ciphered local wireless network quickly and
● Enter and confirm the network key dis- ● Activate and check the wireless hotspot on
simply.
played on the device. the external device. If necessary, refer to the
● Establish the connection with the wireless manufacturer’s instruction manual.
The following settings can also be made on network (WLAN) ››› page 211. ● Press the Infotainment  button and then
the menu Share connection: ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN router press the Settings menu; OR access Media
● Security level: WPA2 encryption auto- until the warning light on the router starts or SEAT Md. Ctrl. and press the SETTINGS
matically generates a network key. flashing. If the WLAN router does not support menu.
WPS the network must be configured man- ● Press on the menu WLAN > Enable WLAN
● Network key: Network key automatically
ually. connection and check the verification box.
generated. Press the function button to man-
ually change the network key. The network ● Press the Find function button and select
the device you want from the list. »

1) This function depends on the equipment and

the country in question.

187
 Infotainment System

● If necessary, enter the network key of the

device in the Infotainment System and con-
firm with OK.

Manual settings:
● To manually enter the network settings of
an external (WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-

ed. To complete the connection, it may be
necessary to enter other data into the device.

Note
Due to the large number of devices on the
market, it is not possible to guarantee fault-
free operation of all functions.

188
 Operating modes

Operating modes Function button: function

Previous or next station that is stored or
Radio / on the station list. See Settings
››› page 195.
Related video Stops the station search (visible only if
Scan
it is running ››› page 195).

a) The Media System Colour model has 15 memories.

Indications and possible icons

Fig. 196 Radio mode: station list (FM).
Display: Meaning
Press the infotainment button    and
Fig. 194 Radio mode
then select the Radio context to open the RA- Frequency or name of the station or
DIO main menu ››› Fig. 195. A
radio text. The name of the radio sta-
tion and the radio text will only be dis-
played if RDS is active.
RADIO main menu RADIO main menu function buttons
The RDS radio data service is deacti-
Function button: function RDS off
vated.

Memory keys (1 to 18a) memories, 3 Traffic information can be retrieved:

1
banks (screens) ››› page 192) TP select Radio > Settings >
Traffic programme (TP).
BAND Select the band.
No stations with traffic news are avail-
STATION  able.
List of radio station that can be tuned.
LIST
The radio station is stored on a memo-
MANUAL Selecting the frequency manually.  ry button.

Selecting the information shown on the

VIEW Note
Fig. 195 RADIO main menu. screen. Only available in DAB mode.
● The AM and DAB bands will be available
Settings menu for the current frequen-
SETTINGS according to countries and/or equipment.
cy band.
In this case, the BAND function button will
not be displayed. »
189
 Infotainment System

● Being underground, in tunnels, in areas (Radio text), traffic announcements (TP) and Set a station name
with tall buildings or mountains can inter- the type of station (PTY). In certain cases the station name is exces-
fere with the radio reception. Depending on the country and the equip- sively long. This text can be locked / unlocked
● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to ment in question, RDS can be deactivated in by pressing on the name of the station for
the windows may affect reception on vehi- the FM Settings menu ››› page 195. about 3 seconds until an audible warning is
cles with a window aerial. heard (a point will flash to the right and left of
In general, no radio data services are avail-
● Radio stations are responsible for the the station name).
able without RDS.
content of the information they transmit.
Radio text
Station name and automatic station track-
ing Some stations that have RDS transmit addi-
Radio data services RDS (FM band) If the RDS function is available, the names of
tional information in text, the so-called radio
text.
the stations can be displayed on the RADIO
main menu and on the Station list . The radio text is displayed in the upper half of
the screen above the memory buttons
FM stations temporarily transmit other con-
››› Fig. 195 A .
tent on different regional frequencies under
the same name (for example, Station 3). The radio text display can be deactivated in
the Settings ››› page 195.
In general, automatic station tracking takes
charge of switching to the frequency with the
Order of the station list
best reception of the station that is tuned at
any given time, while driving. However, this The stations available at any given time are
may cause a regional broadcast to be inter- displayed on the station list screen (STA-
Fig. 197 Standard representation: FM station rupted. TIONS function button). This list can be sorted
listing menu by broadcast group, genre or alphabetically
Automatic frequency switching and automat-
››› Fig. 197.
The RDS (Radio Data System) or radio data ic station tracking can be deactivated in FM
service offers additional FM information such Settings ››› page 195. Note
as the display of the station name, automatic
The RDS functionality will be limited in
station tracking (AF), texts broadcast by radio
some countries for infrastructure reasons,
and traffic announcements (TP), automatic

190
 Operating modes

station tracking (AF) and station type (PTY) The selected DAB station is shown in the top
may not be available.1) bar of the screen. The selected station en-
semble is shown below ››› Fig. 198.

Additional DAB stations (Secondary Serv-

Digital radio mode (DAB, DAB + and ice Components)
DMB audio)*
Some DAB stations temporarily or perma-
nently offer additional stations (for example,
for the transmission of sporting events).
DAB stations containing additional stations
Fig. 199 Station information display in DAB
mode. are identified on the station list by the symbol
.
The DAB radio tuner supports the DAB, DAB +
and DMB audio transmission standards. Select additional stations

In Europe, digital radio is transmitted over Press the name of the main station on the
band III frequencies (from 174 MHz to 240 DAB main menu to select an additional sta-
MHz). tion. Or, select the additional station from the
Fig. 198 Display of memory buttons in DAB station list.
mode. The frequencies are called “channels” and
have an abbreviation (eg 12 A). On the DAB main menu, the name of the ad-
ditional tuned station is displayed next to the
In a channel, several available DAB stations abbreviated name of the main DAB station.
are grouped together in an “ensemble”.
Additional stations can not be saved.
Starting the Digital radio mode
Automatic station tracking
● In the RADIO main menu, press the BAND
function button and select DAB . DAB radio is not currently available every-
where. DAB radio mode displays the areas
The last DAB station that was selected will be without DAB coverage . »
played, if it can still be tuned in that location.

1) Depends on the market and unit in question.

191
 Infotainment System

If the DAB station that is being listened to can is possible to tune to a station with similar Function button: function
no longer be tuned (e.g. there is no DAB cov- content.
erage), the infotainment system tries to find Station List : Simultaneous display of radio text and
and tune the same station in the different Radio text slideshows instead of memory keys ››› Fig. 199.
available frequency bands. If the station can Radio text : The radio text is displayed instead of the
Some stations transmit additional text infor-
not be found again, the radio sound is muted. memory buttons.
mation, the so-called radio text.
Automatic station tracking can be activated
in the DAB Settings in the following modes Radio text is displayed in the upper half of the Slideshow : Slideshows are shown in full screen mode.

››› page 196: screen above the memory buttons ››› Fig. 198
or on the Station Information or Radio text Note
● DAB - DAB station tracking: The radio tries screens of the Display menu ››› page 192. Not all DAB stations broadcast radio text
to tune to the same station on an alternative
The radio text display can be deactivated in and slideshows.
DAB frequency. To allow station tracking,
both DAB stations need to broadcast the the DAB Settings ››› page 196.
same station identification, or to signal the
other corresponding DAB station through Slideshow Memory buttons
DAB. Some stations transmit additional visual infor-
● DAB - FM Automatic switching: The radio mation in the form of images.
tries to tune to the same station in the FM fre- These images are displayed as a slideshow
quency band. To allow station tracking, the on the Stations or Slideshow screens of the
DAB station and the FM station need to Screen menu ››› page 192.
broadcast the same station identification, or
to signal the other corresponding FM station The slideshow can be displayed in full screen
through DAB. When the corresponding FM by pressing on the current image.
station has been found, “FM” is displayed be-
hind the name of the station. If the corre- Screen Menu
sponding DAB station becomes available The function buttons refer to the menu that is
again, it returns to DAB mode after a while displayed when the View button is pressed Fig. 200 RADIO main menu.
and the “FM” identification is concealed. ››› Fig. 198.
In the Radio main menu, you can store sta-
● Switch to a similar station: This allows
tions from all available frequency wave-
service providers to indicate alternative sta- Function button: function
lengths on the numbered function buttons.
tions with similar content. In this way, if the ra-
Preset list : Viewing the preset buttons ››› Fig. 198. These function buttons are called “memory
dio loses coverage of a DAB station and does
buttons”.
not find an alternative FM or DAB frequency, it
192
 Operating modes

Storing the station on the memory buttons Save station logos ● If you want to change the logo of a memory

See: Preset stations ››› page 194. button where a button has already been
Save automatically (only in FM and DAB saved, it must first be deleted from the button
mode)1) in question.
Change the memory bank (screens)
● Move your finger over the screen from left When a station is saved, the station logo is
Note
to right or vice-versa. automatically assigned.
Not all stations are in the database, so it is
● OR: Press one of the function buttons If there are 2 or more logos in the database,
not always possible to assign logos auto-
››› Fig. 200 A there is the option to choose the appropriate matically.
one.
Selecting the station from the memory
buttons Saving manually
Select, tune and save stations
● Press the memory button corresponding to Station logos can be imported from a com-
the desired station. patible data medium (for example, memory
card or memories with a USB port).
Selecting stations
The stored stations can only be played by Press the function button  or 
pressing the corresponding memory button ● Press the function button Settings and then Select the sta-
tion using the
››› Fig. 195.
provided it can be received at your current Station logos . This switches between stations
arrow keys
location. ● Press the stored station button that you available for tuning ››› page 195.
want to use to store a station logo. Press the Stations ››› Fig. 195
Storing the station logo on the memory ● Select the source in which the logo has function button to open the station
buttons been memorized (for example, SD Card 1 ). It is list.
Saved stations can be assigned logos recommended that the logos should be put in Selecting sta- Browse the list and tune to the sta-
››› page 193. the root directory of the memory unit. tions from the tion you want by pressing it.
station list
● Select the station logo. Press the BACK  ››› Fig. 196
● Repeat the process to assign other logos; function button to close the list. If it
is not used, the list will close auto-
press the infotainment key    and then matically after a while. »
select the Radio context to return to the Ra-
dio main menu.

1) Not available for the Media System Colour

model.
193
 Infotainment System

Manually tuning a station frequency Presetting stations Start and end automatic playback
Display the Press the Manual function button Press the Stations ››› Fig. 195 Start automatic Press the Settings function button
frequency ››› Fig. 195. function button to open the station playback and then select Scan .
band list.
Press the  function button to
Turn the adjustment knob. The stations that are already stor- stop automatic playback on the
Changing the
ed on a memory key are marked on station that is being played.
frequency step OR: Press the + or – keys on the the station list with the symbol  End automatic
by step dial displayed on the screen. Automatic playback also ends
››› Fig. 196. playback
when a station is selected man-
Press and hold one of the arrow Select the desired station by ually using the memory buttons,
Saving a sta-
buttons on the left of the multifunc- pressing and holding it down on or when the screen is changed.
tion from the
tion steering wheel. Releasing the the screen. A screen opens for sav-
stations list
Quickly track button switches to the next radio ing the station on the memory but-
the frequency station that can be tuned. tons.
band OR: Keep your finger on the scroll Press the memory key where the
Traffic information (TP)
button in the frequency band and station will be saved.
move your finger to move the but- It is only possible for traffic information to be
ton. A sound is heard and the station is tracked with the TP function if the station in
saved on the memory button. Re-
question can be tuned. Stations with the traf-
Briefly press the settings button. peat the process to continue sav-
ing other station on the list. fic information function are shown on the RA-
Selecting a station using the mem- DIO main menu and on the station list with
Hide the fre- ory button also ends the manual
quency band
The Settings menu can be used the symbol TP ››› Fig. 195 and ››› Fig. 196.
selection of frequencies. If no oper- Delete preset to delete all of the saved stations
ations are performed, the frequen- stations together, or separately Some stations without their own traffic infor-
cy band is hidden after a while. ››› page 195. mation support the TP function by broad-
casting traffic announcement from other sta-
Presetting stations tions (EON).

Press and hold the desired preset Automatic playback (SCAN)

Activating and deactivating the TP func-
Saving the sta- button ››› Fig. 195 until an audible
signal is heard. When automatic playback is active, all tune- tion
tion that is be-
ing listened to. able stations in the selected frequency band ● In the Settings (FM, AM, DAB) menu,
The tuned station is stored on a
preset button.
are played for approximately 5 seconds activate  or deactivate  the
each. Traffic programme (TP) function button by
pressing it ››› page 195.

194
 Operating modes

Active TP function and station selection ● Press the Cancel function button to end the
Function button: function
Traffic announcements are played in Audio current travel warning. The TP function re-
mains active. Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be-
mode.
tween all of the saved stations in the selected
● OR: Press the Deactivate function button to
If a station without the TP function in FM mode frequency band.
end the current traffic announcement and
is selected, the radio tries to find stations with Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch
deactivate the TP function permanently. The
this function in the background. If none are between all of the tuneable stations in the selec-
function can be reactivated in the Settings
found, it will be displayed half way up the left ted frequency band.
menu.
hand side of the screen . Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of
traffic information stations) is active ››› page 194.
In AM mode or in Media mode, a traffic sta-
tion is automatically tuned in the background Settings (FM, AM, DAB) Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset sta-
tions.
as long as there is one available. Depending
on the situation this operation may take some FM settings Station logos : To assign or delete manually the sta-
time. Select the FM frequency band by pressing tion logos saved in the memory keys ››› page 193.
the infotainment key  and then selecting Radio text : The radio text is active ››› page 190, Ra-
Incoming traffic announcement the Radio context. dio text.
In Audio mode, traffic announcements are OR: Press the BAND function button and se- Advanced settings a): Radio data services (RDS) set-
played automatically when they are re- lect the FM frequency band. tings.
ceived.
Press the SETTINGS function button to open Autostore station logos a): The stations saved on the
While the traffic announcement is playing, a memory buttons are automatically assigned ra-
the FM settings menu.
pop-up window is displayed and the radio dio station logos if they are available in the info-
tainment system. Also see ››› page 193.
switches, if necessary, to the traffic informa- Function button: function
tion station. Station logo region a): This allows the vehicle's re-
Sound : Sound settings ››› page 174. gion (country) to be selected. This optimizes the
Media mode is interrupted and the volume is automatic assignment of station logos. The op-
set as adjusted ››› page 174. Scan : Automatic playback (SCAN function). When tion also allows the system to select the region
automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable automatically.
The volume of the traffic announcement can stations in the selected frequency band are played
be changed with the volume control . The for approximately 5 seconds each ››› page 194. Automatic frequency control (AF) a): Automatic sta-
modified volume remains as set for subse- tion tracking is active. When there is no check in
Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons  check box , the function button RDS regional
quent warnings. and . The setting applies to all frequency bands will be inactive (grey). »
(FM, AM and DAB).

195
 Infotainment System

Function button: function Function button: function Function button: function

Radio data system (RDS) a): The Radio Data System Scan : Automatic playback (SCAN function). When Sound : Sound settings ››› page 174.
(RDS) is deactivated ››› page 190. If there is no automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable
check in check box , the traffic information stations in the selected frequency band are played Scan : Automatic playback (SCAN function). When
station (TP), radio text, station name and pro- for approximately 5 seconds each ››› page 194. automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable
gram type functions will not be available. stations in the selected frequency band are played
Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons  for approximately 5 seconds each ››› page 194.
RDS regional a): Set the RDS automatic station and . The setting applies to all frequency bands
tracking ››› page 190. (FM, AM and DAB). Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons 
and . The setting applies to all frequency bands
Fixed : Only alternative frequencies of the Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be- (FM, AM and DAB).
set station with an identical region program tween all of the saved stations in the selected
are set. frequency band. Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be-
tween all of the saved stations in the selected
Automatic : It always changes to the frequen- Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch frequency band.
cy of the set station that has the best signal between all of the tuneable stations in the selec-
at the time, even if a regional broadcast that ted frequency band. Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch
is in progress is interrupted. between all of the tuneable stations in the selec-
Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of ted frequency band.
a) This depends on the country and unit in question. traffic information stations) is active ››› page 194.
Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of
Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset sta- traffic information stations) is active ››› page 194.
AM settings tions.
Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset sta-
Select the AM frequency band by pressing Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored on tions.
the infotainment key  and then select the memory buttons ››› page 193.
Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored on
Radio context.
memory buttons ››› page 193.
OR: Press the BAND function button and se- DAB settings
Radio text : The radio text is active ››› page 190, Ra-
lect the AM frequency band. Select the DAB frequency band by pressing dio text.
Press the SETTINGS function button to open the infotainment key  and then select the
Advanced settings : DAB services settings.
the AM settings menu. Radio context.
Autostore station logos a): Station logos are as-
OR: Press the BAND function button and se- signed automatically when the radio stations are
Function button: function lect the DAB frequency band. stored on the memory buttons ››› page 193.
Sound : Sound settings ››› page 174. Press the SETTINGS function button to open DAB traffic announcements : DAB traffic announce-
the DAB settings menu. ments are played in the same way as TP traffic
announcements in any equipment mode.

196
 Operating modes

Function button: function Media Copyright

Consider the legislation on the intellectual
Other DAB announcements : DAB announcements
Introduction property of audio and video files.
(news, sports information, weather, warnings,
etc.) are played while the DAB Radio mode is ac-
tive. Note
DAB - DAB station tracking : Automatic station track- ● MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technolo-
ing within the DAB frequency range is active. gy and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer
IIS.
Automatic DAB - FM switching : Switching to the FM
frequency band is permitted for automatic sta- ● This product is protected by certain Mi-
tion tracking. crosoft Corporation copyright and proper-
Fig. 201 Related video
ty rights. The use or commercialization of
Switch to a similar station : This allows service pro-
technology of this type outside the config-
viders to indicate alternative stations with similar Audio or image sources containing files in dif-
uration of this product, without a licence
content.b) ferent media are known as “media sources”.
from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft
These audio files can be played through the
a) This depends on the country and unit in question. branch is prohibited.
corresponding players or the infotainment
b) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus ● The infotainment system only plays com-
system's audio inputs.
patible undamaged audio files; other files
Only supported files are displayed and are ignored.
played. Other files are ignored. ● Check the list of compatible devices on
the SEAT website.

Requirements for data media and files

The factory-fitted CD and DVD players are Only standard 12 cm CD/DVDs and 32 mm x Any playable file formats on the list will here-
class 1 according to DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6 / VDE 24 mm x 2.1 mm or 1.4 mm memory cards can inafter be known as “audio files”. A CD con-
0837. be inserted in the infotainment system. taining these types of audio files is called an
“audio data CD”. »

197
 Infotainment System

Valid for the model: Navi System Plus

Playback requirements
Data media
Audio files Video files
 Optical discs: v Maximum resolution 720 x 576 pixel and 25-30fps
– Audio CD (up to 80 min). (frames per second).
– Digital Audio Specification.
– Standard video DVD and compatible audio DVD. – MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 formats
– MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) files with transfer
– CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700 (.mpg, .mpeg, .m2ts, .avi and .mkv) with a maximum
rates from 32 to 320 kbit/s or variable transfer
MB (megabyte) with the ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF resolution of 352x288 pixels.
rate.
1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system. – ISO MPEG-4 format (.mp4, .m4v, .avi, .mov, .3gp
– WAV files (.wav).
– DVD +/- R / RW up to a maximum of 4.7 GB and double layer and .mkv).
– WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo without
DVD up to max. 8.5 GB in the Joliet file system (single session – MPEG-4 ASP DivX format 4, 5 and 6 (.avi, .divx
copy protection and transfer rates of up to
only); UDF. and .mkv).
384kbit/s.
 Memory cards: – Xvid MPEG-4 format (.avi and .mkv).
– AAC files (.m4a, .m4b and .aac) without copy
– SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 or – MPEG-4 H.264 format:
protection.
VFAT (max 2 GB). (.mp4, .m4v, .mov, .3gp, .avi, .m2ts, .mkv, .flv, .f4v
– OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates of
– SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT and and .webm).
up to 256kbit/s.
NTFS file systems. – Windows Media Video 9 format
– FLAC files (.flac).
 USB data media: (.wmv, .asf, .mp4, .m4v, .mov, .3gp and .avi).
– Matroska container files (.mka).
– Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications. – MJPEG format (.avi, .mov, .mp4 and .m4v).
– FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system. – Theora format (.ogv).
– Different generations of iPods™a), iPads™a) and iPhones™a).
– MTP players with the trademarks “PlaysForSure” or “Ready- – Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats.
ForVista”.. – Playlists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries.
 Jukebox (internal SSD memory). – File names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters.
– On DVD, a maximum of 1000 files per medium and directory.
– On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per directory.
– On the Jukebox (SSD), a maximum of 3000 files.

 Playback of audio files through the AUX-IN jack. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 208.

 Playing audio files via Bluetooth®b). – The external media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth® profile ››› page 208.

 Playing audio files over WLAN. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 211
a) iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ are protected trademarks of Apple Inc.
b) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.

198
 Operating modes

Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi System

Data media Requirements for playing audio files

– Digital Audio Specification.
 Optical discs: – MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) files with transfer rates from 32 to 320 kbit/s or varia-
– Audio CD (up to 80 min).
ble transfer rate.
– CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700 MB (megabyte) with
– WAV files (.wav).
the ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system.
– WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo without copy protection and transfer rates
 Memory cards: of up to 384kbit/s.
– SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 or VFAT (max 2 GB). – AAC files (.m4a, .m4b and .aac) without copy protection.
– SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT and NTFS file systems. – OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates of up to 256kbit/s.
– FLAC files (.flac).
 USB data media:
– Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications. – Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats.
– FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system. – Playlists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries.
– Different generations of iPods™a), iPads™a) and iPhones™a). – File names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters.
– MTP players with the trademarks “PlaysForSure” or “ReadyForVista”.. – On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per di-
rectory.

– The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 208.
 Playback of audio files through the AUX-IN jack.
– The external media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth® profile
 Playing audio files via Bluetooth®b). ››› page 208.
– The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 211
 Play audio files through WLAN.
a) iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ are protected trademarks of Apple Inc.
b) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. »

199
 Infotainment System

Valid for the model: Media System Colour

Media sources Playback requirements

– MP3 files (.mp3) with a rate of 8 to 320 kbit/s or variable rate.
 SD and MMC memory cards according to file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, XFAT or – WMA (.wma) files up to 9.2 mono / stereo without copy protection.
VFAT (max 2GB), as well as SDHC and SDXC memory cards.
– Playlists in PLS, M3U, WPL and ASX formats.
– Playlists not exceeding 1000 items or 20 kB.
 USB data support with specification 2.0 according to file system FAT12, FAT16, – File names and addresses no longer than 256 characters.
FAT32 or VFAT (max 2GB). – On memory cards: a maximum of 1000 folders and a maximum of 2048 files.

 Playing audio files via Bluetooth®a). – The external media player must support the Bluetooth A2DP.

a) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.

Read and bear in mind the instruction manual The reading speed can vary considerably Playback order of files and folders
for the external data storage device. depending on the size, the usage status
(copying and deleting processes), the struc-
Limitations and indications ture of the folders and the type of files of the
data media used.
Dirt, high temperatures and mechanical
damage can cause data media to fail. Con- Playlists only establish a certain playback
sider the indications provided by the manu- order. The files are not saved in them. Play-
facturer of the data media. lists cannot be played if the files on the data
media are not saved to the path to which the
Quality differences between data media pro-
playlist refers.
duced by different manufacturers can cause
playback interference. A cover can only be displayed when the
name starts with “Cover”, “Folder” or “Al-
Consider copyright legislation!
bum”.
The configuration of data media or of the
equipment or programs used for recording Note
may cause some tracks or data media to be
● Do not use memory card adaptors, USB
unreadable. On the Internet, for example, can
extension cords or USB hubs!
be found information about the best way to
● SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio-
record audio files or data media (compres- Fig. 202 Example of the structure of an audio
ration or loss of files on data storage devi-
sion rate, ID3 tag, etc.). data CD.
ces.
200
 Operating modes

The audio files  stored on data media are Note It will continue playing the last media source
often arranged by file folders  and playlists selected from the same point.
● The playback sequence can be modified
 to establish a certain playback order.
by selecting the different playback modes The media source being played is indicated
Depending on their name on the data media, ››› page 202. on the dropdown list when pressing the
tracks, folders and playlists are ordered nu- ● Playlists do not play automatically, they SOURCE function button ››› Fig. 203.
merically and alphabetically. have to be selected directly from the track If there is no available media source, the Me-
The illustration shows an example of a con- selection menu ››› page 204. dia main menu is displayed. »
ventional audio data CD, containing tracks
, folders  and subfolders ››› Fig. 202.
In this case the tracks will be played as fol- MEDIA main menu
lows1):

1. Tracks 1 and 2 in the root directory

(Root) of the CD
2. Tracks 3 and 4 in the first F1 folder of
the CD root directory
3. Track 5 in the first subfolder F1.1 of fold-
er F1.
4. Track 6 in the first subfolder F1.1.1 of
subfolder F1.1
5. Track 7 in the second subfolder F1.2 of Fig. 203 MEDIA main menu.
folder F1
Using the Media main menu, different media
6. Track 8 and 9 in the second folder F2
sources can be selected and played.

● Press the infotainment button    and

then select the Media context to open the
MEDIA main menu ››› Fig. 203.

1) The Mix/repeat including subfolders function must

be active in the Media settings menu
››› page 214.
201
 Infotainment System

MEDIA main menu function buttons Function button: function Indications and symbols of the MEDIA
main menu
Function button: function Playback is resumed. The  func-
 tion button changes to  . Display: Meaning
The media source that is being
played. Press to select another me- Play similar tracks. Information about the artist name, al-
dia source. Creates a virtual playlist that in- bum name and song title.
b) cludes tracks with a similar rhythm
JUKEBOX b): Internal hard drive A Audio CD: track information if availa-
to the one being played if available
(SSD) ››› page 209. ble via Gracenote®a). If no data is
using Gracenote®.
available, it only displays Track and
CD/DVD b): Internal CD and DVD the corresponding order number.
Opens the menu Media Set-
drive ››› page 206. SETTINGS
tings.
Album cover.
SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memo- The system prioritizes the display as
Repeats all the tracks that are on
ry card ››› page 206. the same memory level as the track follows:
SOURCE  being played at that moment. If in 1st Cover embedded in the file(s).
USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data stor-
MEDIAa)
age device connected to the USB
 the Media Settings menu the 2nd Image in the file folder.
REPEAT Mix/Repeat including subfolders option B
3rd Image provided by the Grace-
port  ››› page 207. note® databasea)
is enabled, it also includes the sub-
folders. 4th Icon of the connected device.
AUX : External audio source con-
nected to the AUX-IN multimedia If playing a video file, by pressing the
socket ››› page 208.  Repeat the current track. icon (cover) it can be played on full
REPEAT screen.
BT AUDIO : Bluetooth® audio
››› page 208. Random playback of tracks that are
C
The playing time so far and time re-
at the same memory level as the maining in minutes and seconds.
WLAN *c): External audio source current track. If in the Media Set-
connected by WLAN ››› page 211 tings menu the The RDS radio data service is deacti-
MIX  RDS offb) vated. The RDS can be activated in
Mix/Repeat including subfolders option
Depending on the level, track list, is enabled, it also includes the sub- the FM settings menu.
SELECTION
folders or source. folders.
The TP function is active and can be
TPb)
Changes track in Media mode or a) Depends on the equipment in question tuned in.
/ fast forward/rewind. b) Only available for the Navi System Plus model. There is no traffic news station availa-
Playback stops. The  function c) Not available for the Media System Colour model. b) ble.
 button changes to  .

202
 Operating modes

Display: Meaning Switching the Media source Changing track in the MEDIA main
menu
DAB not available.
b)
a)Gracenote® is a database available on the Infotain-
ment system hard drive that contains information on
the tracks of different artists and albums. In order for
the user to benefit from the functions offered by
Gracenote®, the tracks must contain the artist and/or
album data (only available for the model: Navi Sys-
tem Plus.
b) Depends on the market and unit in question.

Note Fig. 204 MEDIA mode: switching media

● When the media source is inserted, play- source. Fig. 205 MEDIA main menu.
ing will not start automatically; it is neces-
sary for the user to select the source. Nor ● Lower the base volume on the Infotainment
The tracks of the Media source that is being
will the media source change when it is system. listened to can be changed successively us-
ejected. ● From the Media main menu, press the ing the arrow buttons.
● In order to see the different covers inside SOURCE function button ››› Fig. 204 and se-
The arrow buttons cannot be used to exit a
of the same album/folder, make sure that lect the desired media source.
playlist or start the playback of a playlist.
the tracks contain different information
about the Artist or Album in its metadata. If In the pop-up window, the Media sources not Both actions have to be performed manually
not, you will see the same cover for all of selected are shown as deactivated (in grey). from the track selection menu ››› page 204.
tracks contained in the same album/folder.
When a Media source that has already been
Control through the MEDIA main menu
played is selected again, playback is re-
sumed from the point at which it was stop- Action Function
ped.
At the start of the current
track. If the track has
Note Briefly press the func- been played for less than
The Media source can be changed in the tion button  once. 3 seconds, it returns to
Track list view: select Media > View. the start of the previous
track. »

203
 Infotainment System

Action Function Selecting an album by cover Selecting a track from a track list
3 Not available for model: Media System Colour
Press the function but- If the track has been
ton  twice in a row. played for more than 3
seconds, it returns to the
start of the previous track.
If the first track is being
played, pressing the but-
ton goes back to the last
track on the data media
that is being played.

Briefly press the func- To the next track. It

tion button  once. changes the last track to
the first track on the data
Fig. 207 Media Mode: list of folders of a Media
media that is being
Fig. 206 Selection by cover. source.
played.

Press and hold function Rewind. Clicking on the current cover ››› Fig. 205 1
button  .
will display all of the album covers available
Press and hold function Fast forward. in the active Media source ››› Fig. 206.
button  .
It is possible to browse through all the albums
Change to the previ- by sliding the covers right or left or using the
Slide your finger hori-
ous/next track, with the bottom horizontal scroll bar.
same playback times as
zontally over the screen. The cover selection view closes after approx-
changing tracks with the
keys  or  . imately 5 seconds of inactivity and the Media
main menu is displayed again.
Fig. 208 Media Mode: list of tracks of a Media
source.

Open a list of tracks

● Press the SELECT function button on the
MEDIA main menu ››› Fig. 205 to open the
track list. The track that is playing is highligh-
ted ››› Fig. 208.

204
 Operating modes

● Search the track list and press the track

Function button: function Data bank view
you want.
3 Not available for model: Media System Colour
Press the function button to open the top
C
If there is track information available, the folder of the Media source.
track (on audio CDs) or the file name (MP3) is
displayed instead of Track + num.  Start playback of the first track.

Repeat all tracks.

Overview of the function buttons in the
Repeats all the tracks that are on the
track list
same memory level as the track being
played at that moment. If in the Media
Function button: function  Settings menu the
Open the Sources menu. Select anoth- Mix/Repeat including subfolders option is
A enabled, it also includes the subfolders
er Media source by pressing.
››› page 214.
Indicates the media source being ex- Fig. 209 Media Mode: data bank view
plored. If pressed, it goes to the root of Random play.
the device shown on the icon. On the track list, click the Show database view
Includes all the tracks that are on the
JUKEBOX a): Internal hard disk of the info- same memory level as the track being option. The content of the current Media
played at that moment. If in the Media source will be listed by Playlists , Artists ,
tainment system (SSD) ››› page 209.  Settings menu the Albums , Genres , Tracks and Videos
CD/DVD a): Internal CD and DVD drive Mix/Repeat including subfolders option is
enabled, it also includes the subfolders
››› Fig. 207.
››› page 206.
››› page 214. When selecting one of the folders Artists ,
SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memory
Albums or Titles , a search button is displayed
card ››› page 206. CLOSE
To close the tracks list. in the upper right corner (magnifying glass)
B
USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data storage de-
× that allows searching within the selected cat-
vice connected to the USB port  a) egory ››› page 171, Input window with on-
Only available for the model: Navi System Plus.
››› page 207. b)
screen keypad.
Not available for the Media System Colour model.
BT AUDIO : External Media Player con- To return to the folder view, press the
nected via Bluetooth® ››› page 208. Note Show folder view option on the SELECTION

AUX : Audio source connected to the Tracks, folders and playlists can also be
menu.
AUX-IN socket ››› page 208. selected by turning the setting button, and
they can be played or opened by pressing
WLAN *b): External audio source connec-
it.
ted by WLAN ››› page 211.
205
 Infotainment System

Insert or remove a CD or DVD1) Ejecting a CD or DVD ● If after inserting a number of different or

3 Not available for model: Media System Colour ● Press button  1 . DVDs and receiving the CD or DVD drive
error, every time, contact a specialised
● The CD or DVD in the drive will be ejected
workshop.
and must be removed within approximately
10 seconds.

If the CD is not removed within 10 seconds, it Inserting or ejecting a memory

is automatically retracted for security rea-
card
sons without activating the CD mode.
Depending on the features and the country,
Unreadable or defective CD or DVD the vehicle may have one or two slots for SD
If the data on an inserted CD or DVD cannot cards.
be read or a defective CD or DVD is inserted,
Fig. 210 Slots for data storage devices in the the corresponding warning appears on Inserting a memory card
glove compartment. screen. Insert the compatible memory card, with the
The driver should refrain from operating the Depending on the equipment, unreadable cut corner first and the contacts facing down,
unit while the vehicle is in motion. Insert or CDs or DVDs are automatically ejected 3 into slot ››› Fig. 210 2 or ››› Fig. 173 9 , until it
change the data storage device before mov- times and reinserted to start another three clicks into place.
ing off! read attempts before this indication is dis-
played. Removing a memory card
The CD and DVD drives can play audio CDs
and DVDs and audio data CDs and DVDs. The inserted memory cards must be pre-
Note pared for removal.
● Uneven road surfaces and strong vibra-
Insert a CD or DVD ● From the main Media menu, press the
tions can cause playback to jump.
● Insert a CD or DVD into the slot SETTINGS button to open the Media Set-
● When the temperature inside the equip-
››› Fig. 210 3 with the printed side facing up-
ment is too high, loading and playback of
tings menu or press the infotainment button
wards, until the equipment inserts it automati-    and then press Settings, to open
CDs and DVDs is disabled.
cally. the System settings menu.

1) The DVD drive is only available for the Navi

System Plus model.

206
 Operating modes

● Press the Remove safely function button. A The USB port  supplies the usual USB volt- Possible error messages after connecting
dropdown menu appears with the following age of 5 volts for a USB connection. external data media
options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and
External hard disks larger than 32 GB must be Cause and actions to
USB2*. Pressing the corresponding function Error message
reformatted for the FAT32 file system in some take
button disables it.
circumstances. You will find the necessary
● Press the inserted memory card. The mem- software and information on the Internet. It is not possible to play the
ory card “jumps” to the eject position. external data media or es-
Take into account all other instructions and tablish communication with
● Remove the memory card. the adapter cable that is
limitations regarding requirements for media
sources. Source is not
used.
supported.
Check that the external data
External data storage device con- iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ media is connected and op-
nected to the USB port  Depending on the country and equipment,
erates correctly.
If possible, update the exter-
iPods™, iPads™ or iPhones™ can be connec- nal data media software.
Depending on the features and the country, ted via the device's own USB cable to the ve-
the vehicle may have one or two USB con- hicle’s USB port  and used as audio sour- Communication interrupted.
nections ››› page 244. ces. Device not re-
Check that the external data
Where this manual refers to external data sponding.
After connecting an iPod™, iPad™ or iPhone™, media is connected and op-
storage devices, this means USB mass stor- erates correctly.
the list views specific to the iPod™ are dis-
age devices containing supported audio files, played at the top selection level ( Play- Due to the large number of different data storage de-
such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks. lists,  Artists,  Albums,  Tracks, vices and various iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ genera-
Only supported audio files are displayed and  Podcasts, etc.). tions available, it is not possible to guarantee fault-
free operation of all functions described here.
played. Other files are ignored.
Further operation of the external data medi- Disconnecting
um (changing track, selecting tracks and
playback modes) is described in the appro- Data media be prepared for disconnection.
priate chapters of this manual ››› page 197. ● From the main Media menu, press the SET-
TINGS button to open the Media Settings
Instructions and restrictions menu or press the infotainment button
Compatibility with Apple™ devices and other    and then press Settings, to open
media players depends on the unit. the System settings menu. »

207
 Infotainment System

● Press the Remove safely function button. A Connecting an external audio source to Note
dropdown menu appears with the following the AUX-IN multimedia socket
● Please read and observe the manufac-
options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and ● Connect the external audio source to the turer's instruction manual for the external
USB2*. Pressing the corresponding function AUX-IN multimedia socket. audio source.
button disables it.
● Start playback on the external audio ● Interference noise may be heard if the ex-
● Now the data storage device can be dis-
source. ternal audio source is powered from the 12-
connected. volt power socket of the vehicle.
● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE

Note function button and select AUX .

● Do not connect an external media player The playback volume of the connected ex-
Connect an external audio source
at the same time to play music via Blue- ternal audio source should be adjusted to the
tooth® and via the USB port  with the In- volume of the other audio sources via Bluetooth®
fotainment system, as this could cause ››› page 174.
playback limitations. In the Bluetooth® Audio mode, audio files that
● If the external player is an Apple™ device,
are playing on a device connected by Blue-
Information on operating an external au-
it cannot be simultaneously connected by
tooth can be listened to on the infotainment
dio source connected to the AUX-IN multi-
USB and by Bluetooth®. system.
media socket
● If a connected source is not recognized,
Operation Effect Conditions
disconnect and reconnect it. If the data
cannot be played, the corresponding indi- ● The Bluetooth® audio source must support
Selection of another au- The external audio
cation will be displayed. dio source from the Info- source continues to run in the A2DP Bluetooth® profile.
tainment system. the background. ● In the Bluetooth® Settings menu the
Stopping playback on The infotainment system Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be
External audio source connected to the external audio remains in the AUX menu. on. Select Telephone > Settings >
the AUX-IN multimedia socket  source. Bluetooth

Remove the connector The infotainment system

Depending on the equipment and country from the AUX-IN multi- remains in the AUX menu. Starting Bluetooth® audio transfer
there may be an AUX-IN multimedia socket media jack. ● Activate Bluetooth® visibility on the external
››› page 244. Bluetooth® audio source.
The connected external audio source cannot ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE
be operated with the infotainment system's function button and select BT audio .
controls.

208
 Operating modes

● Press Search for new device in order to con- The “jukebox” is located on the hard drive of
phone, to prevent possible interference
nect an external Bluetooth® audio source for noise and malfunctions. the Infotainment system (SSD1)).
the first time ››› page 234.
● To play music, do not link the external Compressed audio files (MP3 and WMA) and
● OR: Select a Bluetooth® external audio media player simultaneously to Bluetooth® some video files (Podcasts, AVIs, etc.) can be
source from the list. and the USB interface of the infotainment imported from different data storage devices
● Please refer to the instructions on the system, as this can cause limitations during to the jukebox and this used to play them.
screen of the Infotainment system and on the playback.
The files will only be copied when the engine
Bluetooth® audio source regarding the rest of ● The system response time may vary, de-
is running. Copying copy-protected CDs and
the procedure. pending on the connected external play-
DVDs is prohibited
back device.
You may need to manually start playback on ● If the external player is an Apple™ device,
the Bluetooth® source. Importing files
it cannot be simultaneously connected by
USB and by Bluetooth®. ● In Media mode, press the SETTINGS func-
When the Bluetooth® device is disconnected,
tion button and then select Manage Jukebox .
the infotainment system remains in Blue-
tooth® audio mode. ● Press the  IMPORT function button.
Jukebox (SSD) ● Select the desired source from the Select
Controlling playback source menu.
3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus
The extent to which the Bluetooth® audio sys-
The data storage device is prepared. This op-
tem can be operated through the infotain-
eration may take a few seconds.
ment system depends on the connected
Bluetooth® device. ● Activate the checkboxes to the right of the
files or folders to be imported.
Note
● If Select all is activated, all files and folders
● Due to the large number of possible Blue- on the data storage device will be imported.
tooth® audio sources, it is not possible to
● Press the  IMPORT function button.
guarantee fault-free operation of all de-
scribed functions. Depending on the selection, all files and fold-
● Always switch off the warning and serv- ers will be imported with the indicated name
ice tones on a connected Bluetooth® audio Fig. 211 Manage Jukebox to the Jukebox. »
source, e.g. key tones on a mobile tele-

1) Solid-State-Drive (SSD).
209
 Infotainment System

If no track information is available, the audio ● When the file import ends, a message will The tracks saved can be checked and
files will be placed in the following folders: appear. opened from these lists according to different
categories.
Audio data CD Deleting files
■ Album Jukebox
● In Media mode, press the SETTINGS func-
■ Unknown albums ● Playlist
tion button and then select Manage Jukebox .
■ Título.mp31) ● Artist
● Press the DELETE  function button.
■ Artists ● Album
● Activate the checkboxes to the right of the
■ Unknown artists ● Music genre
files or folders to be deleted.
■ Unknown albums
● If Select all is activated, all the files and ● Title
■ Título.mp31)
folders on the data storage device will be de- ● Video
leted.
● Non-playable files (an unsupported file has
Functions and progress display during the
● Press the DELETE  function button. The been imported).
copying operation
files and folders will be deleted according to
While copying, an animation is displayed the selection made. Note
along with the progress percentage on the ● When the files have been deleted, a mes- ● If the Infotainment system cancels a
import screen.
sage will appear. copying operation, check the storage
Audio data CD: It is not possible to copy and ● Press the BACK  function button to close space on the internal hard drive and check
play files at the same time. the menu. the data storage device.
● Due to copyright laws, before any
● Press the Cancel function button to end the
Opening stored audio and video files change in ownership of the Infotainment
import of the whole track that is currently be-
system, all files stored on the jukebox must
ing imported. ● Change to Jukebox (SSD) content.
be deleted.
● To obtain information on the status of the
When storing the tracks, they are stored un- ● There are several possible reasons why
import, press the Information function button. der different categories and lists according to files may be shown as inactive (grey): files
● Press the BACK  function button to close the information available. that cannot be imported (e.g. images), files
the import screen with the progress informa- that are already stored in the Jukebox or
tion.

1) The name and extension of the file are exam-

ples.
210
 Operating modes

● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE ● Press the SETTINGS function button to open
files that take up more space than availa-
ble in the internal memory. function button and select WLAN . the Media settings menu.
● Please refer to the instructions on the ● Press the WLAN function button, then the
screen of the Infotainment system and on the Share connection over WLAN button will
Connect an external audio source WLAN audio source regarding the rest of the appear along with information about the use
procedure. of WLAN.
via WLAN*
● Press the function button Share connec-
3 Not available for model: Media System Colour Controlling playback tion over WLAN, then you can Enable
WLAN allows wireless connection between an The extent to which the WLAN audio can be WLAN connection and access the WLAN
external audio source and the Infotainment controlled via the Infotainment system de- network Configuration.
system. pends on the connected WLAN device and ● Press the Configuration function button
the app that is used. to configure the WLAN network.
To use this connection, the device being con-
nected must have an app compatible with Note Function button: function
the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) communi-
● The Infotainment system does not pro-
cation protocol. Enable WLAN connection : To turn on/off the WLAN net-
vide an internet connection, it only estab-
work.
lishes a wireless connection between the
Conditions
mobile device and said system. Security level: WPA2 encryption automatically
● Having a compatible (UPnP) app installed ● Via the WLAN, only the connection be- generates an 8 character network key.
on the device. tween the device and the Infotainment sys- Network key : Network key automatically gener-
● Having the Enable WLAN connection op- tem can be guaranteed, its operation de- ated. Press the function button to manually
tion active, which can be found in the wireless pends on the application itself. change the network key. The network key must
connection configuration. have a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum
of 63.
● Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain-
ment system using a password generated by WLAN settings SSID : Name of the WLAN network of the infotain-
the system. Pairing must be done from the ment system.
3 Not available for model: Media System Colour
device to be connected. Do not send network name (SSID) : Activate the
To access the WLAN settings the ignition must checkbox to deactivate the visibility of the WLAN
Starting the WLAN audio transfer be switched on. network.

● Start the UPnP app or the app for the play- ● Select the Media main menu by pressing To save the changes made to the configura-
back of the WLAN audio source. the infotainment key  and then select the tion of the mobile access point, press the
Media context. SAVE button.
211
 Infotainment System

Video DVD mode The unit's DVD drive is configured to read the Function button: function
regional code for the region in which the vehi-
3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus
cle was originally sold.  : Move the control menu window.

 : Minimise the control menu win-

Starting the DVD mode dow.
C
● Insert a compatible DVD in the DVD drive.  : Maximise the control menu win-
dow.
The reading of DVD data may take a few sec-
onds.  : Close the control menu.

The DVD's “intro” (short initial sequence) is Use the arrow buttons to browse the
played. Next, the different DVD menus are D DVD menu. Confirm the selection by
pressing OK .
displayed.
E Press to open the DVD main menu.
Fig. 212 DVD main menu. Controlling a DVD menu
To move to the next or previous
● Briefly touch the screen to activate the / chapter.
function buttons in the DVD mode main menu
››› Fig. 212. Playback stops. The  function but-
 ton changes to  .
Function button: function Playback is resumed. The  func-
 tion button changes to  .
SOURCE Display and selection of the source.

To display the control menu and re- This menu contains the Video (DVD)
SETTINGS
turn to the main DVD screen settings.
DVD MENU
››› Fig. 213.
Note
Fig. 213 DVD mode control menu. A Chapter display.
● The visual appearance of the DVD film
Displays play time duration and re- menus and the menu options which it offers
Regional code of video DVD B
maining play time. are the responsibility of the DVD manufac-
Quite often, the playback of DVD video is turer.
limited to certain regions (for example, to the ● The difference in behaviour of some films
US and Canada) by so-called region “co- when using the same mode is the responsi-
des”. These DVDs can only be played on bility of the DVD manufacturer.
units that are coded for the same region.
212
 Operating modes

● You may not be able to play video DVDs The available audio channel languages and ● Press the SOURCE function button to select
which you have burned yourself. subtitles depend on the DVD that is inserted. the source where the pictures in question are
located.
● The Infotainment system screen only dis- All or part of the content of a video DVD can
plays the image when the vehicle is stop- be protected by a password (PIN) if the DVD
ped. Whilst in motion, the screen discon- allows parental settings. In addition, you can
Function button: function
nects (the image), but the audio remains choose the restriction level based on age, SOURCE Selection of the source.
active. with 1 being the least restrictive (all audien-
ces) and 8 the most restrictive (adults). SELECTION Opens a list of image files.

The image viewed was obtained via

Video settings (DVD) GPS localisation and upon pressing

3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus Images  this function button, the navigator
menu opens to start a route to this
3 Not available for model: Media System Colour destination.
While in the DVD mode press the SETTINGS
function button and then select the Video set- Rotate the image view 90° left or
tings (DVD) option. right, or by swiping your fingers
/ across the screen in a circular direc-
tion.
Function button: function
Format : To select the screen format. If Automatic is
 Reset the view of the image.
selected, the optimal format for the screen is set au- To stop the playback of a slideshow.
tomatically.  The  function button changes to
.
Audio channel : To select the language of the voice in-
structions. To continue the playback of a slide-
Subtitles : To select the subtitle language. Fig. 214 Images main menu.
 show. The  function button
changes to  .
Enter/change PIN for parental settings : Parental settings
password. Using the Images menu, image files can be Change image PREVIOUS or NEXT,
viewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide- / or by sliding your finger horizontally
Child protection : To select the level of protection you across the screen.
show.
want to associate with DVD playback.
The image files must be stored on a compati- SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu. »
The options within the Video Settings (DVD) ble data storage device.
menu may vary depending on the DVD or the
● Press the Infotainment  button and then
chapter that is playing.
select the Images context.
213
 Infotainment System

Enlarging or reducing the view Function button: function Function button: function
● Slide 2 fingers across the screen, moving
Complete: The images are displayed fully on Video settings : Settings for playing DVD videos or
them further apart or closer together.
the screen. files.

Requirements for viewing images Display time : To adjust the display time of images Remove safely : To prepare external data media for ex-
during a slideshow. traction or disconnection. See also ››› page 206, In-
Image files Maximum resolu- serting or ejecting a memory card and
Repeat slideshow : The active slideshow is repeated ››› page 207, External data storage device con-
tion
infinitely. nected to the USB port .
BMP 4MP
Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of
JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode) traffic information stations) is active ››› page 194.
Media settings a)
JPG 64MP Only available for the model: Navi System Plus.
● Select the MEDIA main menu by pressing
GIF 4MP
the infotainment key  and then select the
PNG 4MP Media context.
Navigation1)
● Press the SETTINGS function button to open
the Media settings menu.
Introduction
Image settings
Function button: function
Open the Image settings menu
Sound : Sound settings ››› page 174.
● Press the SETTINGS function button in the
main Images menu. Manage Jukebox a): To import files to the jukebox or to
delete existing files ››› page 209.
Function button: function Mix/repeat including subfolders : Subfolders are inclu-
Fig. 215 Navigation
ded in the selected playback mode ››› page 197.
Image view : To adjust the image view format.
Bluetooth® : Bluetooth® settings ››› page 243 General information
Automatic: Images scale to the size of the
screen (the image may not be displayed com- WLAN a): WLAN settings ››› page 211. A GPS (Global Positioning System) satellite
pletely). system locates the current position of the ve-
hicle. The vehicle’s sensors measure the

1) Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus.

214
 Operating modes

distance travelled. The measurements are Possible limitations in navigation Updating navigation data
compared with the stored detailed map re- In areas that are not or are only partially digi- The current navigation data can be downloa-
sources, according to road indications stored tised (e.g. insufficient definition of one-way ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor-
in them. Traffic reports, if any, will also be tak- streets and road categories), the Infotain- ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.
en into account in the route calculation (dy- ment system will still attempt to provide route
namic route guidance ››› page 222). Using all Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT
guidance.
the data available, the Infotainment system dealerships.
calculates the optimum route to the destina- In the case of missing or incomplete naviga-
The procedure is described on the internet at
tion. tion data, it may not be possible to determine
www.seat.com.
the exact position of the vehicle. This may
The destination is defined by entering an ad- mean that navigation is not as precise as usu-
dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta- Using navigation data
al.
tion or hotel. ● Insert the memory card ››› page 206.
Navigation announcements and graphic rep- Navigation area and update of navigation ● Wait for the testing icon to disappear.
resentations will guide you to your destina- data
tion. If the inserted memory card contains naviga-
Road layouts change continuously. There-
tion data, the following message appears:
Depending on the country, some functions of fore, if the navigation data are not updated,
“The source contains a valid naviga-
the infotainment system will not be available then errors or inaccuracies may occur.
tion database”. Navigation can be started.
on the screen when travelling higher than a SEAT recommends updating navigation data
certain speed. It is not a malfunction, but is on a regular basis. Note
due to compliance with legislation.
● The inserted memory card must be pre-
pared before it is ejected ››› page 206.
CAUTION
Updating and using navigation da- ● Navigation is not possible without the SD
The navigation announcements may be in-
accurate (e.g. due to out-of-date data).
ta from an SD card card.
3 Only available for the model: Navi System ● Do not remove the memory card while
the navigation data is in use. This could
The SD card is factory fitted in slot 2 for SD damage the memory card!
Instructions for navigation cards. ● The navigation memory card cannot be
Navigation data that is currently valid for this used as a memory for other files.
When the Infotainment system is unable to re-
ceive any data from GPS satellites (tunnels, unit in order to allow all functions to be used ● SEAT recommends using only the original

garages), navigation can still continue using in full. SEAT cards. The use of other memory cards
could limit its operation.
the vehicle sensors.
215
 Infotainment System

Updating and installing navigation ● Insert the memory card containing the nav- Navigation main menu
igation data ››› page 206.
data
● Press the infotainment key  > Settings
3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus
> System information.
The Infotainment system is equipped with an ● Press UPDATE to import the stored naviga-
internal navigation data memory. The re- tion data.
quired navigation data are already installed ● Follow the instructions displayed on the
on the system.
screen.
The Infotainment system always requires the
navigation data that is currently valid for this Once installed, the memory card can be re-
unit in order to allow all functions to be used moved. The memory card must be prepared
in full. Using an old version may lead to errors for removal ››› page 206.
Fig. 216 Navigation main menu
during navigation.
CAUTION
Navigation functions can only be used if the
Updating navigation data Do not remove the memory card while the navigation data for the area where the vehi-
navigation data is being installed. The
To update navigation data visit our website: cle is driving is available in the infotainment
memory card may be irreparably dam-
www.seat.com. system.
aged!
The navigation data must be installed after The Navigation main menu allows you to se-
downloading. Navigation is not possible from Note lect a new destination, call up a previously
the memory card. used or stored destination and search for
● The navigation memory card may not be
points of interest.
used as memory storage for other files. The
Installing navigation data
Infotainment system will not recognise the
Opening the main Navigation menu
The installation process takes about 2 hours. files saved on it.
● Press the Infotainment  button and then
If the Infotainment system is switched off, the ● SEAT recommends a CLASS 101) memory
card for the use of navigation data. The use select the Navigation context to open the
installation process is paused and will auto-
of other memory cards could limit its oper- last menu that was open in navigation.
matically resume when switched back on.
ation. ● If the Navigation main menu is not dis-
● Switch the ignition on. played, select Navigation again until the
main Navigation menu is displayed.

1) The speed class of an SD card.

216
 Operating modes

● OR: Press the  function button to return New destination (entering the des- egories. When necessary, enter the name of
menu by menu to the Navigation menu. the city to refine the search.
tination)
Navigation main menu function buttons ››› Fig. 217
and indicators
Press to open the cursor buttons (, ),
A
Function button: function which allow you to move within the text.

A The split screen is displayed ››› page 221.

Steering
Messages and function buttons on the map When narrowing down the destination ad-
B
display ››› page 222. dress, please note that every entry restricts
NEW DEST : To enter a new destination ››› page 217. the available range of subsequent selections.

ROUTE : During route guidance ››› page 218. To enter an address press the function but-
Fig. 217 Search screen. tons in the following order:
MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destina-
tions ››› page 219. ● In the Navigation main menu, press the ● Country, City (or postcode), Centre
New destination function button. (starts the route to the centre of the indicated
POI : Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta-
tions and restaurants) within a particular search area city), Street, Number, Junction, LAST DES-
● Press the OPTIONS function button and se-
››› page 220. TINATIONS, START (starts route guidance to
lect the desired destination entry type
the selected destination).
VIEW : To modify or activate or deactivate the split (Search, Address, POI or On the map).
screen and show POI ››› Fig. 216 A ››› page 221. ● Using voice control*, if you say Town, street On the map
SETTINGS : Open the Navigation Settings and number, without pauses, and then the in-
● Select the destination on the map or enter
menu. struction “Start Route Guidance” a route to
it using GPS coordinates and confirm with
the given destination will start.
OK .

Search
Function button: function
Search for addresses and Points of Interest
using the keypad to enter them ››› Fig. 217. Store : Store the point of interest in the destination
memory ››› page 219.
For cities, post codes and points of interest,
the full details must be entered. You can also Edit : Edit the destination or enter another one.

search for points of interest by names or cat- Route options : Setting route options, see Naviga-
tion Settings > Route options. »
217
 Infotainment System

● Select the desired route by pressing it. During dynamic route guidance, you re-
Function button: function
ceive information about reported traffic con-
Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point The route criteria settings in the Route op- gestion on the route. An additional navigation
of interest. tions menu are modified accordingly. announcement is given if the route is recalcu-
If a route is not selected, the route guidance lated.
starts automatically after approx. one minute During a navigation announcement, you can
After starting route guidance according to the setting selected in Route change its volume using the button .
options.
For other announcement settings, select
Once the route has been calculated, the sys- Navigation > Settings > Navigation
tem gives the first navigation announcement. announcements.
Up to 3 navigation announcements are given
before a turn. Note
● Press the adjustment knob to listen to the ● If you miss a turning during route guid-
last audible navigation instruction. ance and are currently unable to turn back,
keep on driving until the navigation system
The indicated distances depend to a great offers a new route.
extent on the type of road and the traffic ● The quality of the announcements and
speed. On motorways, for example, naviga- recommendations depends on the naviga-
Fig. 218 Route calculation.
tion announcements are received much earli- tion data available and any reported traffic
When starting route guidance, the route is er than in urban traffic. problems.
calculated based on the data that have been The corresponding navigation announce-
selected in the Route options menu. ments are also given on roads with several
Three alternative routes are proposed lanes that split, and on roundabouts, for ex- Route
››› Fig. 218. These 3 routes correspond to the ample: “Leave the roundabout at the second
selectable route options: Economical, Fast exit.” In the Navigation main menu, press the Route
and Short. function button.
A navigation announcement informs you
when you have reached your “destination”. The Route function button is only displayed
– Blue route: Economic route.
with route guidance activated.
– Red route: Fastest route. A navigation announcement informing you
that you have reached the “destination area”
– Orange route: Shortest route to the Function button: function
is given if the exact destination cannot be
destination, even if it results in longer reached. STOP GUIDANCE : Aborts current route guidance.
travelling time.
218
 Operating modes

Function button: function The stored destinations can be selected from The starting point of a route is always the
the My destinations menu. vehicle’s current position. The destination is
ENTER DESTINATION : To enter a new destination or a the end point of a route. Stopover destina-
new stopover ››› page 217. ● Press the My destinations function button in
tions are driven to before the destination.
the main Navigation menu.
CONGESTION AHEAD : To exclude a section of the
● Select the desired function button. ● In the Navigation main menu, press the
route. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route func-
tion button and then CANCEL CONGESTION . STORE POSITION , ROUTES , DESTINATIONS , My Destinations function button.
LAST DESTINATIONS OR HOME ADDRESS . ● Press the ROUTES function button.
CHANGE ROUTE a): The map of the calculated route
appears and by holding a finger on the route and If you have not stored any routes or want to
dragging the finger across said map, the route is Store position
create a new route, press the New route func-
changed to the road(s) that you want and the new ● By pressing the STORE POSITION function
route is then recalculated. tion button and then follow the instructions as
button, the current position is stored as a for a new destination, before pressing Store .
ROUTE DETAILS : View route information. Flagged destination in the Destination
memory. Pressing on a stored route brings up the fol-
a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus lowing function buttons:
To save the stored position permanently as a
flagged destination, change the name of Function button: function
My destinations (destination mem- the position in the destination memory. Oth-
Delete : To delete a stored route.
erwise, the saved position is overwritten when
ory)
another flagged destination is saved. Edit : To edit and store a route.

● Mark the Flagged destination in the Start : To start route guidance.

destination memory.
● Press the Store function button. Function buttons and indications in the New
route or Edit menu
The name can be changed in the following
input window. Press the  function button to Function button or message: function or
store the destination. meaning

Routes  Stopover.

Fig. 219 List of saved routes.

In the Route mode, you can define various  Destination.
destinations (final destination and stopovers).
... Estimated time of arrival. »

219
 Infotainment System

Function button or message: function or Available function buttons If a home address has not yet been stored,
meaning an address can be assigned.
Moving a stopover or a destination to
 another position on the list. Press and Assigning the home address for the first time:
... Calculated distance to destination.
drag to move the destination.
Position : Press to store the vehicle's current position
... Estimated travelling time. a)
Only displayed with route guidance activated and as the home address.
when a destination has been added to the tour.
Address : Press to enter the home address manually.
... Distance to the next stopover. b) Only displayed with route guidance activated.
Editing the home address:
Last destinations The home address can be edited in the Naviga-
Press on the destination to display the
function buttons List of last destinations. tion settings > Manage memory menu.

 Delete destination.
My destinations
Starting route guidance direct to the se- ● Press the Options function button and se- Special destinations (POI)
 lected destination. The stages are omit- lect the desired function button.
ted.

Opening the detailed view of the desti- Function button: function

 nation in question.
Destination memory : View of destinations stored man-
ually and from imported vCards ››› page 224, Im-
Available function buttons porting vCards (electronic business cards).

New desti- Favourites : List of destinations stored as favourites.

Add a new destination.
nation
Contacts : List of phone book contacts that have a
Destina- Adding a new destination from My stored address (postal address).
tions destinations.
Fig. 220 Points of interest on the map.
Storing To store the created route in the route Home address
memory.
Only one address or position can be stored The points of interest saved in the memory
Start Start route guidance. as the home address at any one time. are divided into different categories. Each
category of special destinations has a sym-
Calculate To update the calculated distance and Pressing will start guidance to the stored
bol assigned to it.
estimated arrival time.a) home address.
In the Map settings menu, you can indicate
Stop To stop active route guidance.b)
the special destinations that you want to
220
 Operating modes

display on the map. Up to 10 categories can Function button: function The split screen ››› Fig. 221 A shows the in-
be selected. formation detailed below:
Map display in three dimensions (bird's
eye view). ● Pressing the name displays a menu with the
Selecting a point of interest on the map
 following options:
The places of interest and well-known
Function button: function buildings are also shown in detail and
in colour. Function button: function
There are several points of interest in the area.
1 Press this symbol to open a list of points of in- Audio : Current audio source.
a) To display the destination on the map.
terest.
Compass : Displays a compass with the current di-
The only point of interest in this zone. Press the To display the route on the map.
2 symbol to open the detailed view of the point of
a) rection and position of the vehicle (street name).

interest. Auto / To switch between day and night for- Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres,
Day / Night mat. POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them brings
up additional information
Quick POI search SPLIT
Show the split screen ››› page 221. FREQUENT ROUTES a): Information on the user's most
In the Navigation main menu, press the POIs SCREEN
frequent routes.
function button and the three main catego- POI Show special destinations.
ries will appear. Alternatively, enter the name Position : current vehicle position in coordinates and
of the point of interest to be searched using a) Only displayed with route guidance activated. GPS status (satellite reception).
the new destination keypad, or press a) Only shown when route guidance is not active or
Search nearby on the map ››› table on when predictive route guidance is active.
page 221. Split screen
Press the  function button to close the split
screen.

View At any moment during navigation, pressing

inside the map will make a pop-up menu ap-
In the Navigation main menu, press the View pear with the following functions:
function button.
Function button: function
Function button: function
Clicking on the map : Shows the details of the selected
Map display in two dimensions (con- point, street name or coordinates
 ventional).
Only when you press on an icon on the map: »
Fig. 221 Split screen displayed.
221
 Infotainment System

Function button: function Function buttons and messages on the Traffic bulletins and dynamic desti-
map display.
nation guidance (TRAFFIC)
POI : name of the point of interest (when only one
To activate function buttons  and , press
appears on the map).
function button .
Group of POIs : more points of interest (when you
press on the map on various POIs grouped to- Function button: function
gether).

FAVOURITE : name of the favourite.

 Current altitude indicator.

HOME ADDRESS : Home address.  To centre the vehicle position on the map.

Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.

To centre the destination on the map. On-
ly displayed if either Display destination
Add stopover : only when you have an active route.
 on map or Display route on the map is se-
lected ››› page 221.
Search nearby : enters in the search menu, but only Fig. 223 Traffic reports
for the area around the point selected on the map. To change the orientation of the map
 (north-facing or direction of travel). Only The Infotainment system constantly receives
Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active) available in 2D mode.
traffic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back-
Map scale. To change the scale, turn the ground, if a traffic information station is
 adjustment knob or move two fingers to- tuned.
Map display gether or apart on the screen.
Traffic bulletins are displayed on the map
Selecting automatic scaling. If the func- with symbols ››› page 223, Traffic reports on
 tion is active, the symbol is displayed in map (selection) and they are required dy-
blue.
namic destination guidance ››› page 223,
Briefly increases the scale of the map Dynamic route guidance.
 (zoom) The selected scale is displayed
again after a few seconds. List of available traffic reports
Mute or repeat the last announcement, ● Press the Infotainment  button and then
 change the announcement volume. select the Traffic context.
Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip-
ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data are
displayed. Select Navigation > Settings >
Fig. 222 Messages and function buttons on
Map > Show road signs.
the map display.

222
 Operating modes

Dynamic route guidance Symbol: Meaning Predictive navigation

In order for dynamic route guidance to func-
tion, Dynamic route must be activated in the  : Accident
route options.
If a traffic report is received that affects the
 : Slippery road surface (ice or snow)
route being travelled, an alternative route will
be searched for if the system calculates that  : Slippery road surface
time can be saved.
 : Danger
If, on the other hand, the alternative route
does not save time, the route will continue  : Road works
with the traffic jam. In both cases, an an-
nouncement will be made.  : Strong wind Fig. 224 Predictive navigation
Shortly before reaching the announced traf-
 : Road closed to traffic When you activate Predictive navigation, the
fic jam, it is indicated again.
system detects and stores in the background
Avoiding a traffic jam by following the instruc- During route guidance, traffic incidents that routes that are frequently followed, without
tions of a traffic bulletin does not always save do not affect the calculated route calculated them being active destination routes.
time, for example, if alternative routes are are displayed in grey.
This function has no navigation announce-
congested. The effectiveness of dynamic
The length of a traffic jam on the calculated ments unless the user requires them by press-
navigation depends on the traffic bulletins
route is shown by a red line. ing the right thumbwheel of the multifunction
that are received.
steering wheel.
Incidents that affect the calculated route and
The rest of the route that has to be travelled
that have led to the recalculation of the route ● On the main screen of the Navigation menu,
can be manually excluded to force its recal-
are shown in orange. in the pop-up window, press the
culation ››› page 218.
The position of a symbol indicates the start of FREQUENT ROUTES button. To display fre-
Traffic reports on map (selection) the traffic jam if it is precisely specified in the quently followed routes press the
traffic bulletin. Show on map button ››› Fig. 224.
Symbol: Meaning

 : Slow traffic
 : Traffic jam
223
 Infotainment System

Importing vCards (electronic busi- Navigation with images tem can display them on the map (e.g. a
speed limit).
ness cards)
Take into account the age of the navigation
Importing vCards to the destination mem- data and the limitations of the navigation sys-
ory tem ››› page 214!
● Insert the data storage device with the stor-
ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainment
system ››› page 197. Recognition of road signs
● In the Navigation main menu, press the
SETTINGS function button. Some vehicles have a road sign recognition
camera. If the vehicle has road sign recogni-
● In the Navigation settings menu, press
tion and it is active, road signs detected by
the Import destinations function button. Fig. 225 Images main menu. the system will be displayed on the map,
● Select the data carrier with the vCards along with additional information.
saved in the list. Selecting an image and starting route
guidance Read and take into account the information
● Press Import all vCards from this folder .
and indications of the road signs recognition
● Press the Infotainment  button and then
● Confirm the import notice with the OK system ››› page 78.
select the Images context.
function button.
● Press the SOURCE ››› Fig. 225 function but-
Saved vCards will now be in the destinations ton and select the data storage device where
memory ››› page 219.
Route guidance in Demo mode
the images are stored.
● If the image displayed was taken using GPS If demo mode is activated in the Navigation
Note
localisation, the  function button will appear. settings menu, an additional pop-up win-
Only one address per vCard can be impor- Press to start guidance to a destination. dow opens when you start route guidance.
ted. In the event any vCards have multiple
addresses, only the main address will be ● Pressing the Demo mode function button
imported. starts a “virtual route guidance” to the desti-
Road signs indication
nation you have entered.
The road sign indication must be active in the ● If you press the Normal function button, a
Navigation settings menu ››› page 225. “real route guidance” starts.

If there are road signs stored in the navigation The development and operation of virtual
data for the route you are driving on, the sys- route guidance is compatible with the
224
 Operating modes

development and operation of real route Function button: function Function button: function
guidance.
Suggest 3 alternative routes : After starting route Show available toll stickers a): To mark the available
Virtual route guidance is repeated after guidance, 3 alternative routes are proposed toll stickers on the list
reaching the fictitious destination and re- ››› page 218. ( Avoid routes requiring toll stickers must be active).
starts from the starting point, if it is not inter- Routes requiring toll stickers will be taken into ac-
Route : Route type selection. count in the route calculation if it is marked that
rupted beforehand.
Economical : Route calculation, taking econom- the toll sticker is available.
When the starting point of the Demo mode is ic aspects into account. Include trailer : Calculate the route and arrival
manually set Navigation settings menu,
Fast : The fastest route to the destination. time, depending on whether a trailer is being tow-
the virtual route guidance starts from that po- ed.
sition. Short : The shortest route to the destination,
even if it results in longer travelling time. Map : To adjust the map display settings.
A manually entered starting point is overwrit-
ten with the current location of the vehicle, if Most frequent routes : Information on the user's most Show road signs : The road signs stored in the navi-
the vehicle starts moving. frequent routes. gation data for the road you are driving on are dis-
played during route guidance ››› page 224.
Dynamic route : Dynamic route guidance activates
Note when a TMC is received ››› page 222. Lane guidance : During route guidance, an addi-
tional indication is displayed to recommend a
Deactivate the Demo mode after use, oth- Avoid motorways and highways : Motorways will be lane when driving, and when turning on roads with
erwise you will always have to select excluded from the route calculation wherever several lanes. Only if the data bank contains infor-
whether to start a virtual route or normal possible. mation about the area that is being driven
route before starting route guidance. through.
Avoid ferries and motorail trains : Ferries and motorail
trains will not be taken into account for the route Show favourites : The destinations saved as favour-
calculation, wherever possible. ites on the map are displayed ().
Navigation settings Avoid toll roads : Toll roads will be excluded from Show POIs
the route calculation, whenever possible.
● In the Navigation main menu, press the Select categories for POIs : To select the POI cate-
Avoid tunnels : Tunnels will be excluded from the gories shown on the map ››› page 220.
SETTINGS function button.
route calculation, whenever possible.
Show brand logos for POIs : Displays logos of the
Function button: function Avoid routes requiring toll stickers : Mandatory toll selected special destinations categories (e.g.
stickers (stickers certifying that the toll has been displays logos of service stations).
Route options : To make the route calculation adjust- paid) will be excluded from the route calculation
ments. whenever possible. Manage memory : To make adjustments to the stored
destinations. »

225
 Infotainment System

Function button: function Function button: function Function button: function

Sort contacts : To select the sequential order of Select preferred petrol station : The brand of the se- Demo mode : When the Demo mode is active and
agenda entries recorded with postal addresses, lected service station is given priority in special route guidance is started, a virtual guide to the en-
see also ››› page 219. destination search results. tered destination may be started ››› page 224.

Define home address : To assign or edit a home ad- Fuel warning : The fuel warning is active. Define demo mode starting point : If the Demo
dress, see also ››› page 220. mode is active and the vehicle is stopped, a fic-
If the fuel level reaches the reserve, an appropri- titious starting point can be set for the virtual
Import destinations (SD/USB) : To import digital busi- ate warning is generated that enables the service route guidance.
ness cards (vCards) into the destination memory station search.
››› page 224. Waypoints mode b): To start Offroad navigation.
Version information : Information about stored naviga-
Delete user data : To delete stored destinations (e.g. tion data. a) This functionality will depend on the country.
Last destinations or the Destination
b) Only available on model: Navi System Plus.
memory). Advanced settings : For making advanced changes to
the navigation settings.
Navigation announcements : To change the navigation
announcements settings. Time display : Indication  during route guidance.

Volume : To adjust the volume of audible driving Time of arrival : The estimated time of arrival at Navigation in Offroad
the destination is displayed.
recommendations. mode*1)
Entertainment fading (nav. announcements) : Set the Running time : The envisaged travelling time to
volume of the active audio source during naviga- the destination is displayed.
Introduction
tion announcements. Status line : View  during route guidance.

No navigation announcements during calls : During a Destination : The calculated distance to the
Offroad* navigation is a function for offroad
telephone conversation, audio driving recommen- destination is shown. driving that provides directions in “non-digi-
dations will not be given. tised areas” at low speeds.
Next stopover : The calculated distance to the
Note: My POIs : Audible warning when approaching next stopover is shown. Non-digitised areas are areas about which
a special destination. the system does not have information for the
Note: National border crossed : Indication of the
Speed limits : Shows the speed limits, depending on speed limits of the country in question when streets or terrain. It does not detect streets,
the road, of the country that is being driven through. crossing a border. buildings or natural limits such as mountains
or rivers, although they may be shown on the
Fuel options : To change fuel related settings.
map.

1) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

226
 Operating modes

Offroad* navigation is not suitable for driving Function button: function The offroad markers can be recorded by in-
on conventional roads as it does not detect dicating a manual waypoint.
one-way streets, motorway entries or similar. MEMORY : Opens a list allowing the selection of a
stored Offroad tour. ● In the Offroad Navigation menu, press the
ADD WAYPOINT function button. The tour way-
EXIT : Ends Offroad navigation.
points defined manually are shown on the
Offroad Navigation Menu map by a marker.

Recording an Offroad tour Ending recording

● Press the STOP RECORDING function button
in the main Offroad Navigation menu.

Managing stored Offroad tours

Fig. 226 Offroad Navigation Menu start

Press the SETTINGS function button in the

Fig. 227 Recording an Offroad tour
main Navigation menu.

● In the menu, press the Waypoint mode An Offroad tour is formed by a series of stor-
function button. ed waypoints.

● The Offroad Navigation menu opens

Starting recording
››› Fig. 226. Fig. 228 Offroad Navigation menu, stored
● In the Offroad Navigation menu, in the pop-
tours
Function buttons in the Offroad Navigation up window press the RECORD pop-up button.
menu ● In the pop-up window, the user is able to ● Press the MEMORY function button in the
plot the tour with a given destination or start Offroad Navigation menu.
Function button: function plotting the route without giving a final desti- ● A list of stored Offroad tours opens, if there
RECORD : Initiates the plotting of an Offroad tour. nation. are any. »
● Starts plotting the route.

227
 Infotainment System

When a tour is selected, the following icons Start route guidance ● The general direction of travel is indica-
will appear ››› Fig. 228: ● Loads the stored Offroad tour. ted straight ahead by direction arrows in
the Infotainment System pop-up window
 Export the tour to an SD card. ● Starting off in a stored route is not detected
››› Fig. 229 A .
 Edit the name of the tour. by the system automatically.

 Delete the tour. Note

Setup
 Load tour If an Offroad tour is being recorded, this is
Function button: function automatically stored if Offroad navigation
Function button: function Invert : Reverses the direction of the stored Offroad is discontinued.
tour.
IMPORT : allows the import of an Offroad route in
“.GPX” format. Next point : Starts the Offroad tour from the nearest
point.
Vehicle Menu
Loading an Offroad tour Start : Starts the complete Offroad tour.
When the Offroad tour is selected, press Play Introduction to using the Vehicle
 and the selected tour will be loaded onto When route guidance starts, the system
switches to the map view. menu
the Navigation system.
Press the Infotainment    button and
Stopping route guidance
then select the Vehicle context to access
Creating an Offroad tour ● Press the OPTIONS button on the screen the main menu with the following options:
and then press Stop .
● VIEW
End waypoint navigation ● RADIO or MEDIA (to control playback in ra-
● Press the Exit function button in the Off- dio or media mode)
road Navigation menu ● PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen)
● SETTINGS ››› page 92
WARNING
Terrain features are disregarded during With the function button VIEW you can ac-
route guidance Drive slowly and following cess the following information:
the instructions in order to perform the ma-
● INSTRUMENT PANEL ››› page 229
noeuvre as far as possible!
Fig. 229 Offroad route guidance mode ● SPORT* ››› page 229

228
 Operating modes

● OFFROAD* ››› page 230 Classic View

● CONSUMERS ››› page 230 The needles are displayed at full length.
● DRIVING DATA ››› page 231
Views 1, 2, 3
● ECOTRAINER ››› page 231
● VEHICLE STATUS ››› page 232 Customise the information that appears in
the digital cockpit. The user chooses which to
display, and in what order, by moving a finger
vertically over the dials.
Instrument panel*
Depending on the version, the Views can be
3 Valid for vehicles equipped with the SEAT Digi-
memorised by existing the menu or keeping Fig. 232 SPORT Menu Lap timer
tal Cockpit
the View button pressed.
● Press the Infotainment button    and
then select the Vehicle context.
Sport* ● Press the VIEW function button and select
SPORT.

If the corresponding equipment is available,

the following information appears in the
Sport option ››› Fig. 231:

1. Instantaneous power expressed in kW

2. G forces
Fig. 230 Instrument panel
3. Turbo pressure, expressed in bar (“bar”),
Press the Instrument panel button to choose kilopascals (“kPa”) or in pounds per
from the various display options and custom- square inch (“psi”). Press the Settings
ise the information that appears in the SEAT Fig. 231 SPORT menu button to change the units of pressure
Digital Cockpit ››› page 70. ››› page 173
4. Coolant temperature
Automatic View 5. Oil temperature
Pre-set information depending on the Driving
mode. Only 3 of these items of information can be
displayed at the same time, but the user »
229
 Infotainment System

chooses which to display, and in what order, Offroad* Only 2 of these items of information can be
by moving the finger vertically over the dials. displayed at the same time, but the user
chooses which to display, and in what order,
Press the NEXT button to bring up the Lap
by moving the finger vertically over the dials.
timer1) menu that is described below
››› Fig. 232:
1 Analogue lap timer Consumers
2 New timing is started by pressing on the
surface of the digital lap timer +.
3 Stop lap timer/Lap time.
4 The analogue lap timer's time is stopped
for 5 seconds. After 5 seconds, the ana- Fig. 233 Offroad CAR Menu.
logue lap timer shows the real time again.
5 Statistics/delete last lap time. ● Press the Infotainment button    and
then select the Vehicle context.
● Press the VIEW function button and select
OFFROAD.
Fig. 234 Convenience consumers.
If the corresponding equipment is available,
the information that appears is the following: Access information about the vehicle’s main
convenience consumers. It is shown via a
1. Compass.
consumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h)2).
2. Turning angle of steered wheels.
3. Coolant temperature.
4. Lubricating oil temperature

1) This lap timer is independent of the one that

appears on the instrument panel ››› page 81.

2) In the case of Gas (CNG) vehicles, the units are

in kg/h.
230
 Operating modes

Driving data hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 mi-

nutes, or 1999.9 km (mi) or 9999 km (mi), de-
pending on the model of instrument panel.
When one of these values is reached (de-
pending on the version of the instrument pan-
el), the memory is automatically deleted and
starts counting again from 0.

Ecotrainer
Fig. 237 Driving style symbols.

Fig. 235 Driving data. Open the ECOTRAINER Menu

● While the vehicle is stopped, press the info-
The on-board computer has 3 memories. tainment button   , followed by Vehi-
They can be used to display: distance, time, cle context.
average speed, average consumption and
● Press the VIEW function button and select
range.
ECOTRAINER.

1. Since start Provides information about your driving style.

Indication and storage of distance travelled The information on driving style is only evalu-
and consumption values between the ignition ated and displayed when moving forward.
Fig. 236 CAR Ecotrainer menu.
being turned on and it being turned off.
∅ ECO points: indication on driving style
2. Since refuelling Indicates driving style efficiency since start
Display and storage of the values for the jour- on a scale of 0 to 100. The higher the value
ney and the consumption. By refuelling, the displayed, the more efficient the driving style.
memory will be erased automatically. Press on the display for more information.
Statistics are shown for the last 30 minutes of
3. Long-term driving from the start. If 30 minutes have not
elapsed, the values of the last trip are shown
The memory records the values for a specific
in grey. »
number of partial trips, up to a total of 19

231
 Infotainment System

∅ l/100 km: Average fuel consumption Indication ››› Fig. 236: Meaning Vehicle status
Shows the average fuel consumption. The
Columns representing driving style efficiency.
value is calculated using the kilometres trav-
Horizontally, the columns represent retrospec-
elled since start as a reference. Press on the tive driving efficiency, and move from left to
display for more information. Statistics are right approximately every 5 seconds. The high-
shown for the last 30 minutes of driving from 4 er the columns, the more efficient the driving
the start. If 30 minutes have not elapsed, the style.
values of the last trip are shown in grey. The colour of the sky represents the average of
the last 3 minutes. The colour changes from
grey (less efficient) to blue (more efficient).
Eco tips: Tips on how to save fuel
Press the ECO tips button to get advice on Symbols ››› Fig. 237: Meaning
how to save fuel. These tips can only be con-
Thinking ahead. Sudden changes in accelera- Fig. 238 Standard representation: vehicle sta-
sulted while the vehicle is stopped. A
tion lower the efficiency of the driving style. tus.

Efficient driving style assessment B Gear recommendation.

The representation uses different elements to Current speed has a negative impact on fuel
C
show driving style efficiency. consumption.

D Ecological driving style.

Indication ››› Fig. 236: Meaning
To the left of the columns are different symbols
1 that provide information about the current driv-
ing style ››› table on page 232.

The white column is an indication of where the

efficiency graph starts (from left to right).
2 Fig. 239 Standard representation: vehicle sta-
It shows the position of the evaluation that is
currently being performed. tus.

Bars to illustrate acceleration. Press the Vehicle status button to access infor-
The position of the car represents acceleration. mation on the Vehicle status messages
3 If the speed is constant, the car remains in the
and Start-Stop system.
central zone. If it accelerates or brakes, the car
moves backwards or forwards respectively.

232
 Operating modes

The Vehicle status messages are dis- Telephone functions can only be used if there WARNING
played ››› Fig. 238, in addition to being speci- is a mobile phone connected by Bluetooth to
General, mandatory, legal and country-
fied on the corresponding button. the infotainment system ››› page 235.
specific instructions and laws for the use of
According to the parties affected by these To do this, the phone must have the Blue- mobile phones inside the vehicle must al-
messages, they will be shown in different col- tooth® function activated. ways be considered.
ours (depending on their importance) on the
The instructions shown on the screen for the
vehicle's screen. WARNING
telephone menus will depend on the mobile
To access the Tyre Pressure Loss Indi- telephone used. Speaking by telephone and using the mo-
cator, press the FORWARD or BACK keys. bile telephone management system whilst
Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices. For
From this same menu, use the  SET button further information on compatible Bluetooth® driving can distract you from the road and
cause an accident.
to store the tyre pressures. products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer or
check on the internet. ● In areas of little coverage your call may
Note be cut off and you may not be able to make
Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele- even emergency calls.
The values shown on the figures ››› Fig. 234, phone and of any accessories.
››› Fig. 235, ››› Fig. 238 and ››› Fig. 239 are
indicative and may vary depending on the If you detect any operating issues between WARNING
equipment. your mobile telephone and the Infotainment
Mobile telephones may interfere with and
system, restart your mobile by switching it off
alter the correct operation of pacemakers
and on again.
if they are carried directly over them.
Some functions and setup can only be per- ● Maintain a minimum distance of at least
Telephone formed when the vehicle is stopped and are 20 centimetres between the aerials of the
not available on all mobile telephones. mobile telephone and the pacemaker.
General information ● Do not carry your switched-on mobile
You may experience poor reception or may
be cut off in areas where the signal is weak. telephone in your breast pocket directly
over the pacemaker.
Most electronic devices are shielded against
● If you suspect interference, switch off the
HF (high-frequency) signals. In any case, the
mobile telephone immediately.
electronic equipment may not be protected
from the HF signals of the telephone man-
agement system. This may cause interfer- CAUTION
Fig. 240 Related video
ence. High speeds, poor weather or road condi-
tions and the quality of reception can all »
233
 Infotainment System

● places where the air is laden with chemi- phone management system. Prior pairing be-
affect the audio quality of a telephone con-
versation in the vehicle. cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal tween the two is required for this purpose.
powder.
Some Bluetooth® mobile telephones connect
● all other places where the vehicle engine automatically when turning on the ignition if a
Note
must be switched off. connection has been previously established.
● Restrictions on the use of devices using
Its Bluetooth® function must be activated for
Bluetooth® technology may apply in some
WARNING this purpose, and there must be no Bluetooth®
countries. For further information, contact
the local authorities. Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a connection with other devices.
risk of explosion! The mobile telephone can
● If you wish to connect a device via Blue- Bluetooth® connections are free.
automatically connect to the mobile tele-
tooth®, consult the safety warnings in its in-
phone network again if it loses the Blue- Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
struction manual. Only use compatible
tooth® connection to the telephone man- tooth® SIG, Inc.
Bluetooth® devices.
agement system.
● Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-
Bluetooth profiles®
cle may provoke noise in the speakers.
CAUTION When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-
● Some networks may not recognise all of
In areas where special regulations apply or ephone management system, a data ex-
the language characters or offer all of the
services. the use of mobile telephones is prohibited, change takes place via one of the Bluetooth®
both the telephone and the telephone profiles.
management system must always be
● Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the
switched off. Interference may be caused
Places with special regulations with sensitive technical and medical equip- HFP can be used to manage calls through the
ment, possibly resulting in a malfunction or infotainment system.
In the majority of cases, these places are damage to the equipment. ● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows
signposted, but not always clearly. They in- audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It
clude, for example: may require connecting other profiles for
● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks Bluetooth® managing and controlling playback.
● Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows
● The lower decks of boats and ferries.
Bluetooth® technology allows a mobile tele- phone book contents to be downloaded from
● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele- the mobile telephone.
gas (such as propane or butane).

234
 Operating modes

● Message profile (MAP):1) It allows short ● The keypad lock on the mobile telephone you can edit this name via the Bluetooth
messages (SMS) to be downloaded and must be deactivated. settings menu.
synchronised.
Follow instructions in the manual for the mo- The search process can take up to 1 minute.
Note bile telephone. As soon as the search is completed, the
During the pairing process, it is necessary to names of the Bluetooth® devices found are
The mobile telephone's button and warning
tones should be off. Where necessary, dis- enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad. displayed on-screen.
connect the headset from the mobile tele- ● Select the Bluetooth® device you want to
phone you wish to connect to the system. Pairing a mobile telephone
connect. Additional data may need to be en-
● Press the infotainment button    > tered.
Phone > Find telephone > Search re- ● Use your mobile telephone to enter and
Pairing and connecting a mobile sults. confirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis-
telephone to the Infotainment sys- play of the infotainment system.
OR:
tem ● Press the infotainment button    >
● If more Bluetooth® profile pairing requests

Phone > Settings > Select mobile are received on the mobile telephone, make
In order to manage a mobile telephone via sure to reply to them.
phone > Search results.
the Infotainment system, it is necessary to
pair both devices once. OR:
OR:
For your safety, pairing should be done when ● Compare the PIN code shown on the dis-
● Press the infotainment button    >
the vehicle is stationary. In some countries it is Phone > Settings > Bluetooth > Find play of the Infotainment system with the one
not possible to perform the pairing with the devices> Search results. shown on the mobile phone. If they match,
vehicle running. confirm on both devices.
OR:
Now, the infotainment system and the mobile
Conditions ● Make the connection from the settings
phone will be connected to each other.
● The ignition must be switched on. menu of the mobile phone itself.
When the pairing has been finalized correct-
● The Bluetooth® function of the mobile The name of your Infotainment system will be ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. The
phone and the Infotainment system must be displayed on the main Telephone screen and phone book, call list and SMS messages stor-
active and visible. ed in the mobile phone will be loaded once »

1) Not available for the Media System Colour

model.
235
 Infotainment System

the requests have been accepted in the mo- soon as the device is once again within Blue- Telephone main menu
bile phone. After downloading, the data will tooth® range.
be available on the Infotainment system.
If the maximum number of paired devices is
reached and you want to pair another one,
Pairing and connection of mobile tele-
the system will automatically replace the
phones
least recent one with it. If it is to replace an-
You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to other one, the user must delete that one first.
the Infotainment system, but the number of si- Do do this:
multaneous connections varies:
● Press the SETTINGS function button in the
● Media System Colour: a phone connected telephone context.
to the hands-free profile and the same or a ● Press the function button Bluetooth set-
different one as Bluetooth® audio. tings > Paired devices. Fig. 241 Phone main menu.
● Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo-
● In the list of linked devices, press the func-
bile phones simultaneously connected to the Assign a user profile
tion button  after the mobile phone to be
hands-free profile, and one of them as Blue- deleted, and then press Delete to confirm The phonebook, the call lists and the speed
tooth® audio. the process. dial buttons are assigned to a user profile and
● Navi System Plus: two mobile phones simul- remain stored on the telephone management
taneously connected to the hands-free pro- WARNING system. This information will be available ev-
file and one of them or a third one connected ery time the mobile telephone is connected.
Do not perform the pairing and connection
to the Bluetooth® audio. process while driving. This may cause an After the first connection, it will take a few mi-
accident! nutes for the data from the linked mobile
When the Infotainment system is switched on,
it connects to the last connected mobile tele- phone to be available in the system. The next
phone. If it is not possible to connect to this Note time that the mobile telephone is connected
mobile telephone, the system will try to con- the phonebook is updated automatically.
Check that there are no requests pending
nect to the next mobile telephone on the list acceptance in your mobile phone. If there If the mobile phonebook has been modified
of paired devices. are, this could block some of the functions while connected, a manual update of the
The maximum range of the connection is ap- in the Telephone menu. phonebook data can be started from the
prox. 10 metres. The connection will be inter- User profile settings menu.
rupted if this distance is exceeded. The con- Telephone management can store a maxi-
nection is automatically re-established as mum of 4 profiles for mobile phones. If you

236
 Operating modes

wish to pair another mobile phone, the oldest Function button: function
user profile will be replaced.
To open the Phone settings
SETTINGS
Telephone management system function menu.
buttons a) Not available for the Media System Colour model.
● Press the infotainment button    and b) Only valid for the Media System Colour model.
then select the Telephone context to access
the Telephone main menu.
Instructions and symbols of the
Function button: function
phone management system Fig. 243 Conference call.
Name of connected mobile tele-
1 phone. Press the icon to the left to
connect another mobile phone. Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 242
Speed-dial buttons, connected tel- Name of the mobile operator of the connec-
2 A
ephone contacts favourites. ted device.

To change to another telephone Stored telephone number or name. If the

connected to the hands-free profile. name stored in the phonebook has an as-
3 a)
Only visible when there are two tele- signed photo, it can be displayed: select
B
phones connected as hands-free. Telephone > Settings > User
profile > Show pictures for
Open the numeric keypad contacts*.
DIAL NO.
››› page 238.
Fig. 242 Active call.
To open the phonebook of the con-
 To accept a call.
CONTACTS
nected telephone. To end a call.
Text mes-

To open the SMS menu. OR: To reject an incoming call.
sagea)
To mute or to reactivate the ring tone during
Activate the voice control of the  an incoming call.
ACTIVATEb) connected mobile phone (compati-
ble with Android and Apple devices). To mute the microphone during an active
 call and to reactivate it. »
To open call lists of the connected
CALLS
mobile telephone ››› page 241.

237
 Infotainment System

Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 242

Once the conference call is established, the Enter telephone number menu
user can consult the list of participants by
The active call is put on hold. While on hold pressing on the conference call image
the listener will not hear the conversation. To ››› Fig. 243 C .
 reactivate it, press the call accept button .
Depending on the mobile device, the call
To reject it, press the reject button .
from a conference call participant can be
hung up or excluded from the conference call
 Press to add a participant to the active call. but kept on a separate call.
a)

 Connected mobile telephone charge status. WARNING

Strength of the signal received by the mo- Remember that the driver should not oper-
 bile telephone. ate the mobile phone while driving.
Fig. 244 Enter telephone number menu.
a) Not available for the Media System Colour model.
Note ● Press the DIAL NUMBER function button from
Multiple calls Multi-call and conference call functionali- the Telephone main menu.
ties are subject to the services associated
The telephony management system allows
with the user's SIM card. Enter telephone number
the user to interact with up to three calls on
the screen. ● Enter a phone number with the keypad.
Press the  function button to make a call.
Only one of the calls can be active.
Select a contact from the list
Conference call
● Enter the first few letters of the contact. The
The user can merge several calls into a single
available entries appear in the phonebook.
one by making a conference call by pressing
● Select the desired contact to make the call.
button 1). There must be a minimum of two
calls for this to work. Once the conference
call has started, the user can add up to 5 par- Enter the country code
ticipants. ● Press the function button 0 for approx. 2
seconds to add the +.

1) Not available for the Media System Colour

model.
238
 Operating modes

 Assistance call Phonebook Menu (contacts) data that has to be transferred, the process
● Press the function button to obtain help in may take several minutes. It may be necessa-
the event of breakdown. ry to confirm the data transmission on the
mobile phone.
 Information call The phonebook can also be viewed during a
● Press the function button to obtain informa- telephone conversation.
tion on the SEAT brand and the additional If the name saved in the phonebook has an
contracted services. assigned photo, it can be displayed on the list
next to the name. To do this, the option
 Call mailbox Show pictures for contacts in the Phone set-
● Press the function button to make the call. tings context must be enabled and your mo-
bile phone must support this functionality
● OR: Press the  function button for about 2 Fig. 245 Contacts Menu.
(check the compatibility list) ››› page 242,
seconds to make a call.
Phone settings.
Note In the Telephone main menu, press the
Contacts function button to access the con-
● Breakdown service and information calls
can incur an additional cost on your tele-
tacts list.
phone bill.
Select a contact from the list
● The Roadside Assistance and Information
services might not work properly, for exam- ● Search the list and press on the desired
ple, if the vehicle and the operator of the contact to make the call.
connected mobile telephone are in differ- ● OR: If the contact has several numbers, first
ent countries. If you are not able to use
press on the contact and then press on the
these services contact an authorised SEAT Fig. 246 Search window.
desired number for making the call.
workshop.
Once the first pairing is made, it may take
some time until the phonebook data1) of the Search for a contact in the search window
paired mobile are available in the infotain- ● Press the Search function button
ment system. Depending on the volume of ››› Fig. 245 to open the search window. »

1) Depending on the device, only contacts in the

phone's memory are loaded.

239
 Infotainment System

● Enter the name of the contact you are look- ● Press the  icon to edit the number before Short messages (SMS) menu
ing for in the window ››› Fig. 246. While the calling.
3 Not available for model: Media System Colour
characters are being entered, a contact is
displayed in the input field. Send SMS to a contact
● The number of matching results is dis- ● Press the function button  on the detailed
played to the right of the input field. Press the list1 ).
function button to go to the list.
● Search the list and press on the desired Start route guidance to a contact's ad-
contact to make the call. dress2)
If the contact’s address data has been saved,
Opening the detailed view of a contact route guidance can be started to the con-
● Press the function button  ››› Fig. 245 lo- tact's address.
cated next to the entry on the contacts list.
● Press address data in the detailed view to Fig. 247 Short messages (SMS) menu.
All the telephone numbers are displayed in start route guidance.
the detailed view, and where applicable, the If the mobile phone connected to the HFP
address recorded for the contact in question. Note profile also supports the SMS profile, a new
function button will appear in the upper left
If you edit a number before calling, it will
Read contact name corner of your Telephone menu, which will al-
not be saved in the phonebook but only
used for the call. low you to receive, view and send SMS mes-
● Press the function button  on the detailed
sages through the infotainment system.
list if you want the voice control system to
read the name of the contact 1). Whether or not the aforementioned functions
work correctly will depend on the compatibil-
Call a contact ity of the connected mobile phone.

● Press the desired telephone number on the

SMS menu function buttons
detailed list to make the call.
● Press the SMS function button from the Tel-
ephone main menu.

1) Not available for the Media System Colour

model.
2) Valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus.
240
 Operating modes

Function button: function Function button: function If a telephone number is stored in the phone
book, the saved name is displayed on the call
New text To write and send an SMS (includes To enter a telephone number or list instead of the number.
message the possibility of accessing preset to select a recipient from the
text templates). contact list. If a photo is assigned to the name stored in
Enter number the phonebook, it can be displayed on the
Inbox To open the received SMS folder. Press the Recipients function call list next to the name ››› page 242.
button to select multiple recipi-
Outbox To open the outbox folder. SMS ents.
messages that have not been sent Possible displays in the Calls menu
are stored here. To select multiple recipients
Recipients
from the contact list. Display: Meaning
Sent To open the sent SMS folder.

Drafts To select a message that has been

Delete To delete an SMS.  Missed calls : Missed and unanswered calls.

stored but not sent.  Calls : Dialled numbers.

Send contact To send the details of a contact

details from the contact list.
Calls Menu (call lists)  Received calls : Received calls.

Note
Possible submenu function buttons
The availability of the call lists will depend
Function button: function on the mobile phone used.

For the voice control system to

READ OUT
read the text of the SMS.

Options Open the Options menu.

Reply with To select a text template from a

template list.

Delete current The SMS is deleted from the Fig. 248 Call lists menu.
text message Inbox folder.
● Press the Calls function button from the
Telephone The sender's telephone number
Telephone main menu.
number is displayed.
● Press the FILTER function button.
FORWARD To forward an SMS.
● Select the desired call list: All calls ,
REPLY To reply to an incoming SMS. Missed calls , Calls or Received calls .

241
 Infotainment System

Quick dial keys ● Select the desired contact from the list. If Note
the selected contact has several phone num-
The contacts stored in the speed dial keys
bers, select the number you want.
are NOT updated automatically. If a con-
tact stored on a speed dial key is modified
Edit assigned speed dial keys
on the mobile phone, the speed dial key
● Press and hold an occupied speed dial key must be assigned again.
in the Telephone main menu until the Con-
tacts menu opens.
● Select the desired contact from the list. If Phone settings
the selected contact has several phone num-
bers, select the number you want. In the Telephone main menu, press the
● To close the Contacts menu without apply- SETTINGS function button.
Fig. 249 Quick access to the phone book.
ing the changes, press the BACK function
button. Function button: function
The speed dial keys ››› Fig. 249 1 can be
assigned a telephone number from the Private mode : Private mode can only be activated
phone book. Delete assigned speed dial keys during an active call. When private mode is disabled
● The phone numbers stored in the speed di- (by default), the call’s audio is managed through the
If a photo is assigned to the name stored in vehicle. When private mode is activated, call audio is
the phone book, it can be displayed on the al buttons can be deleted in the menu User managed through the mobile phone.
speed dial key ››› page 2421). profile settings > Manage favourites
››› page 243. Select mobile phone : From the list, select the mobile
All speed dial keys have to be manually edi- phone to be connected to the hands-free profile with
ted and will be assigned to a user profile. Up the infotainment system.
Make a call with a speed dial button OR: Press Find telephone to connect a new mobile
to 12 contacts can be added to the speed di- phone.
● Briefly press an assigned speed dial key in
al keys.
the Telephone main menu to call the tele- Bluetooth® : Opens the menu Bluetooth® set-
phone number stored in it. tings ››› page 243.
Assign the speed dial keys
● In the main Telephone menu, press a free User profile : Open the User profile settings
menu ››› page 243.
speed dial key.

1) Not available for the Media System Colour

model.
242
 Operating modes

Note Function button: function Function button: function

Some telephones require a restart to down- Find devices : Search for visible Bluetooth® devices Reminder: remember your mobile phone : If a Bluetooth®
load the last added contacts again. that are within range of the infotainment system. The connection is active with a mobile phone, the mes-
maximum range is approx. 10 meters. sage “Do not forget your mobile phone”
appears when the ignition is switched off.
Bluetooth® Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) : If an external audio
Bluetooth® settings source is to be connected to the infotainment system Show pictures for contacts a): If the contacts in the
via Bluetooth®, this function must be active phone book have been saved with a photo, it can be
In the main Telephone menu, press the ››› page 208. displayed on the speed dial keys, call lists and
SETTINGS function button and then press the
phone book.
Bluetooth® function button. a) Depending on the mobile phone.
User profile settings
Function button: function Note
In the main Telephone menu, press the Some telephones require a restart to down-
Bluetooth® : Press to deactivate Bluetooth®. All active
connections are disconnected. SETTINGS function button and then press the load the last added contacts again.
User profile function button.
Visibility : Activating and deactivating Bluetooth® visi-
bility.
Function button: function
Visible : Bluetooth® visibility is active.
Manage favourites : Edit the speed dial keys.
Hidden : Bluetooth® visibility is deactivated.
Bluetooth® visibility must be active for external Occupied speed dial key: Press to delete the
pairing of a Bluetooth® device with the infotain- stored number.
ment system. When a Bluetooth® audio device Free speed dial key: Press to save a phone
is active and playing, visibility is automatically book number on the speed dial key.
set to Hidden.
Mailbox number : To enter or change the voice mailbox
Forename : Display or change the Bluetooth® name of
number.
the infotainment system. This will be the name shown
to other Bluetooth® devices. Sort by : To set the order of appearance of the phone
book entries (Forname and Surname or vice versa).
Paired devices : Viewing paired devices. To disconnect
and connect Bluetooth® devices and Bluetooth® pro- Import contacts : Press to import the phone book of the
files. connected telephone or to update the imported
phone book.

243
 Infotainment System

Multimedia Depending on the special characteristics and

the country, the vehicle may have a
USB/AUX-IN port.
USB/AUX-IN input
The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the
storage compartment area of the centre
console ››› Fig. 250.
Depending on the equipment and the coun-
try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-
tions exclusively for charging or as a power
socket.
Fig. 253 In the centre console: pad for the mo-
These USB ports are located at the rear of bile phone connection.
the console, between the front seats
››› Fig. 251. The Connectivity Box includes different func-
tions that will help to use your mobile device.
Fig. 250 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.
They are the “Wireless Charger” and the
Connectivity Box* / Wireless “Mobile Signal Amplifier”.
Charger* The Wireless Charger only features the
“Wireless Charger” function.

“Wireless Charger”
The “Wireless Charger” allows mobile devi-
ces with Qi1) technology to be charged with-
out a cable.
Fig. 252 Related video
To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:
Fig. 251 Rear part of the centre console: USB
● Place your mobile device in the middle of
connectors.
the pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 253
››› .

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-

bile phone wirelessly.

244
 Operating modes

Make sure there are no objects between the you pick it up, and take care when removing
pad and the mobile phone. it.
The mobile phone will start charging auto- ● There must be no metallic or other ob-
matically. For further information about jects between the mobile phone and the
whether your mobile device uses Qi technol- housing, to prevent the functionality of the
ogy, check your phone's user manual or visit Connectivity Box from being affected.
the SEAT website.
Note
“Mobile Signal Amplifier”
● Your mobile device must support the Qi
The “Mobile Signal Amplifier” allows you to inductive charging interface standard for
reduce the radiation in your vehicle and enjoy proper operation.
better reception. ● The charging time and the temperature
For safety reasons, it is recommended that vary in accordance with the device used.
you pair the system and the mobile using ● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.
Bluetooth® and place it on the Connectivity ● Qi technology does not allow you to
Box pad, for the best reception without hav- charge more than one mobile device simul-
ing to handle the mobile phone. taneously.
To establish a connection with the vehicle's ● No improvement in reception can be
external aerial: guaranteed if there is more than one mo-
bile phone on the pad.
● Place your mobile device in the middle of ● You are advised to keep the engine run-
the pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 253 ning to guarantee proper wireless charg-
››› . ing.
● When a telephone with Qi technology is
Make sure there are no objects between the
pad and the mobile phone. connected by USB, it will be charged by the
means specified by the manufacturer.
Your mobile phone will automatically be
ready to make use of the external aerial.

WARNING
● The mobile phone may heat up due to the
wireless charging. Think about this before
245
 Driving

Driving Locking and unlocking the steering wheel

● Lock the steering wheel: remove the key
standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be
immediately blocked- Risk of accident!
from the ignition and turn the wheel until it
Start and driving locks. Depending on the country, in vehicles Note
with automatic transmission, in order to re-
● If it is difficult to turn the ignition key to
move the key, move the gear shift to the P po-
Starting and stopping the sition. If necessary, press the gear shift block-
the position 2 , move the steering wheel to
both sides to release the steering lock.
engine ing key and release it.
● If the vehicle battery is disconnected and
● Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into
reconnected, the key must remain in the
Ignition lock the ignition and turn it at the same time as the position 2 for around 5 seconds before
steering wheel in the direction indicated by starting up.
the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer-
● Vehicles with automatic transmission,de-
ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.
pending on the country, after switching off
the ignition, you can only remove the igni-
Start-Stop system* tion key if the selector lever is in position
If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop “P” (parking lock). Next, the selector lever
system* switches off the engine, the ignition is locked.
remains switched on.
Automatic transmission: before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the ignition is switch-
ed off and the selector lever is in position P.
Fig. 254 Ignition key positions.

Key positions ››› Fig. 254 WARNING

● Always remove the key from the ignition
1 Ignition off. Key can be removed from the
when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a
vehicle.
short period. This is especially important if
2 Ignition is switched on. Preheating occurs children or disabled people are left alone
in diesel vehicles . in the vehicle. They could accidentally
3 Starting the engine. start the engine or operate electrical
equipment, resulting in an accident.
● The ignition key must NOT be removed
from the lock until the vehicle comes to a

246
 Start and driving

Ignition and start button* The start button text START ENGINE STOP flash- onds to restart it. A warning will display on the
es like a heartbeat when the system is ready dash panel screen.
for the ignition to be turned on or off.
After this interval, it will not be possible to
start the engine without a valid key inside the
Automatic ignition disconnection
vehicle.
If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the key
with them but leaving the ignition on, the igni- WARNING
tion does not switch off automatically. The ig-
When switching on the ignition, do not
nition is switched off by pressing the lock but- press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise
ton on the remote control  or by pressing the engine could start immediately.
the sensor surface on the door lever
››› Fig. 100.
Fig. 255 In the lower part of the centre con- WARNING
sole: start button. Automatic deactivation of the ignition on If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-
vehicles with the Start-Stop system out due care, this may cause accidents and
The engine can be started with a start button serious injury.
(Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid The ignition is switched off automatically
● Never leave any key inside the vehicle
key inside the vehicle in the area of the front when the vehicle is stopped and the auto-
matic engine shutdown is active, if: when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un-
or rear seats, or on the centre console. authorised person could lock the vehicle,
In vehicles with the Keyless Access ● The driver's seat belt is not fastened, start the engine or connect the ignition and
operate any of the electrical equipment.
››› page 100 system, the engine can also be ● the driver does not step on any pedal,
started with the key in the luggage compart-
● the driver door is opened.
ment. Note
Opening the driver's door when exiting the After automatically turning off the ignition, if ● Before leaving the vehicle, always dis-
vehicle activates the electronic lock on the the dipped beam  is on, the side light re- connect the ignition and, if appropriate,
steering column if the ignition is disabled. mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is take into account the instructions on the
enough charge in the battery). If the driver screen of the dash panel.
Switching the ignition on/off manually locks the vehicle or manually turns off the ● If the vehicle is stationary for a long time
light, the side light goes out. with the engine off and the ignition on, the
If you only want to switch on the ignition
vehicle battery might be discharged and it
(without starting the engine), briefly press the Engine restart feature might not be possible to start the engine. »
start button once without pressing the brake
pedal or the clutch pedal ››› . If no key is detected inside the vehicle after
the engine stops, you will only have 5 sec-
247
 Driving

● In vehicles with diesel engines, wait until ● If the engine does not start, stop and wait Starting a diesel engine after having run
the warning light  ››› page 248 goes off for around 1 minute to try again. out of fuel
before starting the engine. If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it
● If during the STOP phase you press the Vehicles with start buttons may take longer than normal (up to one mi-
START ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is ● Press and hold the brake pedal until the en- nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.
switched off and the button flashes. gine starts. This is because the fuel system must elimi-
● If the indication is displayed on the in- ● Press the starter button ››› Fig. 255; do not nate air first.
strument panel display “Start-Stop system press the accelerator. There needs to be a
deactivated: Start the engine manually”, valid key inside the vehicle for the engine to WARNING
the START ENGINE STOP button will blink. start. After starting the engine, the lighting of Do not keep the engine running in confined
the START ENGINE STOP button changes to spaces, as there is a danger of poisoning.
steady lighting, indicating that the engine has ● The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
Starting the engine started. oxide, an odourless and colourless poison-
● Once the engine starts, release the start-up ous gas that can cause loss of conscious-
Before starting the engine button. ness and death.
● Vehicles with manual gearboxes: put the ● If the engine does not start, stop and wait
gear lever in neutral, press the clutch pedal for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary, WARNING
and keep it it in this position until the engine perform an emergency start ››› page 250. Do not get out of the vehicle with the en-
starts. gine running, especially if a gear is engag-
● Vehicles with automatic transmission: put Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer ed. The vehicle could then suddenly move
the lever in position P or N. than usual to start on cold days. During pre- or something strange could happen that
heating, the warning lamp  remains lit. To would cause damage, fire or serious injury.
avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-
Vehicles with ignition locks
tery, do not use any other major electrical
● Turn the key to position ››› Fig. 254 2 . Pre- WARNING
equipment while the glow plugs are pre-
heating occurs in diesel vehicles . heating. Never use cold start sprays, they could ex-
● Keep turning the key to position plode or cause the engine to run at high
The preheating time depends on the coolant revs. Doing this risks injury.
››› Fig. 254 3 without stepping on the accel-
and exterior temperatures. With the engine at
erator.
operating temperature, or at outside temper-
● Once the engine starts, release the key. atures above +8°C, the warning lamp  will CAUTION
When it is released, the key returns to position light up for about one second. This means ● The starter motor or the engine may be
2 . that the engine starts immediately. damaged if you try to start the engine while

248
 Start and driving

driving or if you restart it immediately after Turning off the engine ● Power steering does not work when the
switching it off. engine is not running. You need more
● Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› . strength to steer when the engine is switch-
● When the engine is cold, you should
avoid high engine speeds, driving at full ● With manual transmission, press the clutch ed off.
throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk all the way down. If the vehicle is automatic, ● If the ignition is switched off, the steering
of engine damage. set the selector lever to the P position. column could be locked, making it impossi-
● Apply the electronic parking brake. ble to control the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment ● Never remove the key from the ignition if
● Vehicles with ignition locks: Turn the key to
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the
Do not warm-up the engine by running the position ››› Fig. 254 1 .
steering could suddenly lock, making it im-
engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off ● Vehicles with start buttons: Briefly press the possible to steer the vehicle: risk of acci-
immediately, driving gently. This helps the start-up button ››› Fig. 255. dent!
engine reach operating temperature faster
and reduces emissions.
Emergency disconnection WARNING
If the engine does not switch off after briefly Always take the key with you when you
Note
pressing the starter button, an emergency leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-
● Electrical components with a high power disconnect will be required: tant if there are children in the vehicle, as
consumption are switched off temporarily they might otherwise be able to start the
when the engine starts. ● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-
engine or use power-operated equipment
● When starting with a cold engine, noise onds or press it once for more than 1 sec- (e.g. the electric windows), which could
levels may briefly increase. This is quite ond ››› in Ignition and start button* on cause injuries.
normal, and no cause for concern. page 247.
● When the outside temperature is below CAUTION
+5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, some
WARNING
● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-
smoke may appear under the vehicle when Never switch off the engine while the vehi-
the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on. cle is moving. This could cause loss of con- Stop system* switches off the engine, the
trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in- ignition remains switched on. Make sure
● In vehicles with a natural gas engine
jury. that the ignition is switched off before leav-
(CNG), by default, the engine starts with ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could
gas, with the exception of the following ca- ● The airbags and belt tensioners do not
discharge.
ses: work when the ignition is switched off.
● If the engine has been driven at high
– Coolant temperature below -10°C. ● The brake servo does not work with the
speed for a prolonged period of time, it
– After refuelling CNG. engine off. Therefore, you need to press the may overheat when turned off. To avoid en-
break pedal harder to brake the vehicle. gine damage, allow the engine to run for »
249
 Driving

approximately two minutes in neutral be- Note Instructions for the driver on the in-
fore switching it off.
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur- strument panel display
ed if genuine SEAT keys are used.
Note Press the clutch

After the engine is switched off the radiator This message appears on vehicles with a
fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if Emergency starting function manual gearbox if the driver tries to start the
the ignition is switched off. It is also possi- engine without having the clutch pedal
ble that the fan turns itself on once more if pressed. The engine will only start if you press
the coolant temperature increases due to the clutch pedal.
the heat accumulated in the engine com-
Press the brake
partment or due to its prolonged exposure
to solar radiation. This message appears on vehicles with an
automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start
the engine without having the brake pedal
Electronic immobilizer pressed.
Select N or P
The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-
thorised persons from driving the vehicle. This message appears if you try to start or
Fig. 256 On the right of the steering column:
stop the engine when the selector lever of the
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates emergency start.
automatic gearbox is not in position P or N.
the electronic immobiliser automatically The engine can only be started and stopped
when the key is inserted into the ignition. If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,
an emergency start-up will be required. The in those positions.
The electronic immobiliser will be activated relevant message will appear in the dash Engage position P; the vehicle can
again automatically as soon as you pull the panel display. This may happen when, for ex- move; doors can only close in po-
key out of the ignition lock. For vehicles with ample, the vehicle key battery is very low: sition P.
the “Keyless Access” system, the key has to
be outside the vehicle. ● Immediately after pushing the starter but- For safety reasons, this driver message ap-
ton, keep the key next to the right trim of the pears and an audible warning sounds if the
If the following message is shown on the in- selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not
steering column ››› Fig. 256, as close as pos-
strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle in position P after you switch off the ignition.
sible to the Kessy logo.
cannot be started. Move the selector lever to the P position, oth-
● The ignition connects and the engine starts
The engine can only be started using a genu- erwise the vehicle could move.
automatically.
ine SEAT key with its correct code.

250
 Start and driving

Gear change: selector lever in the user starts the engine with the start button
drive position! button and the lighting changes from flashing
 It lights up
to fixed will depend on specific engine size The Start-Stop system is not available or has been
This driver message is displayed when the disconnected.
characteristics. When the start button is used
selector lever is not in the position P when the
to stop the engine, the button starts flashing
driver door is opened. Additionally, a buzzing
again. Instructions for the driver on the instru-
sound is emitted. Put the selector lever in po-
ment panel display
sition P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away. In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the
“My Beat” function also offers additional in- Start-Stop system deactivated.
Ignition is switched on
formation: Start the engine manually
This driver message is displayed and a buz-
● When the engine stops during the Stop This indication for the driver shows that the
zer is sounded when the driver door is
phase, the light of the start button button Start-Stop system cannot start the engine
opened with the ignition switched on.
stays on, as the Start-Stop system remains again.
active even though the engine is off. Start-Stop system: Fault! Function
● When the engine cannot be started again not available
“My Beat” function
with the Start-Stop system, ››› page 251, and There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take
For vehicles with a convenience key there is needs to be started manually, the start but- the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re-
the “My Beat” function. This feature provides ton flashes to indicate this situation. paired.
an additional indication of the vehicle ignition
system.
When entering the vehicle, the start button Start-Stop system* Description and operation
››› Fig. 255 flashes to draw attention to it.
The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel
When the ignition is on/off, the engine start Control lamps
and reduce CO2 emissions.
button flashes. With the ignition is switched
off, the start button goes off after a few sec- In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-
 It lights up
onds. cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is
The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en- stopping. The ignition remains switched on.
With the engine running, the start button light gine shutdown is active. The engine automatically switches back on
stays on, indicating that the engine is running.
when required. »
The time elapsed between the moment the

251
 Driving

In this scenario, the light of the    ● When you take your foot off the brake ped- ● The temperature selected on the climate
button stays lit1). al the engine will start up again. The warning control has not been reached.
lamp will switch off. In vehicles with the Auto ● The interior temperature is very high/low.
When the ignition is switched on, the Start-
Hold* system, when the system is active, the
Stop function is automatically activated. ● Defrost function button activated
engine will not start if you remove your foot
In the Easy Connect system you can find from the brake pedal. The car starts when ››› page 155.
more information about the Start-Stop sys- you press the accelerator pedal. ● The parking aid* is switched on.
tem: press the button    > Vehicle > ● The battery is very low.
View > Vehicle status. Basic requirements for the Start-Stop ● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-
mode
ing turned.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox ● The driver door must be closed.
● If there is a danger of misting.
● When the vehicle or when it is stopped, put
● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
● After engaging reverse gear.
it into neutral and release the clutch pedal.
● The bonnet must be closed.
The engine will switch off. The warning lamp ● In case of a very steep gradient.
 will light up. The engine can be stopped ● The engine has reached operating temper-
before stopping completely (approximately 7 ature.  is shown on the instrument panel display,
km/h). as well as on the driver information system*
● The reverse gear must not be engaged.
.
● When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- ● The vehicle must not be on a very steep
gine will start up again. The warning lamp will slope. The engine starts by itself
switch off.
When stopped, the normal system mode may
The engine does not turn off for various
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox be interrupted in the following situations. The
reasons
engine restarts by itself without involvement
● Brake until it is stopped, and keep your foot Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri- from the driver.
on the brake pedal or activate the Auto Hold* fies whether certain conditions are met. The
system so that the vehicle remains braked. engine does not switch off, in the following ● The interior temperature differs from the
The engine will switch off. The warning lamp situations for example: temperature selected on the climate control.
 will appear in the display. The engine can ● Defrost function button activated
be stopped before stopping completely (ap- ● The engine has not yet reached the re-
››› page 155.
proximately 7 or 2 km/h depending on the ve- quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode.
● The brake has been pressed several times
hicle's gearbox).
consecutively.

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.

252
 Start and driving

● The battery is too low. WARNING ● When stopped, the brake pedal must be
● High power consumption.
● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-
kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle
does not move.
cle is stationary. The operation of the brake
Additional information related to the auto- and steering will not be fully guaranteed. ● If the engine “stalls” with a manual gear-
matic gearbox More force will be needed to turn the steer- box, it can be directly started up again by
ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer an immediately pressing the clutch pedal.
The engine stops when the selector lever is in
accident and even serious injuries. ● With an automatic gearbox, if the lever is
the positions P, D, N and S1) in addition to
when in Tiptronic mode. With the selector lev- ● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- placed in position D, N or S after engaging
er in P, the engine will also remain switched Stop system is switched off when working reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards
off when you take your foot off the brake in the engine compartment ››› page 254. direction must be reached for the system to
be in a status to stop the engine.
pedal. In order to start the engine up again
the accelerator must be pressed, or another CAUTION
gear engaged or the brake released.
The Start-Stop system must always be
If the selector lever is placed in R while stop- switched off when driving through flooded
ped, the engine will start up again. areas ››› page 269.

Change from D to P to prevent the engine

from accidentally starting when passing Note
through R. ● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,
you can control whether the engine should
Additional information about vehicles with switch off or not by reducing or increasing
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) the brake force applied. While the vehicle
remains stopped, the engine will not stop if
In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will
the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic
start up again in certain operating conditions
jams with frequent stopping and starting
if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle for example. As soon as strong pressure is
ahead drives off again. applied to the brake pedal, the engine will
stop.

1) Except in the CUPRA model. In this case, when

you place the selector lever in the S position or in

the Tiptronic mode, the Start/Stop system will
prevent the engine from switching off.
253
 Driving

Manually connecting and discon- Manual gearbox ● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it
downwards, move it to the left as far as it will
necting the Start-Stop system
go and then forwards to select reverse
Changing gears ››› Fig. 258 R .
● Release the clutch.

Changing down gears

While driving, changing down a gear must al-
ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-
rectly below and when the engine speed is
not too high ››› . Changing down while by-
passing one or various gears at high speeds
or at high engine speeds can damage the
Fig. 257 Centre console: Start-stop system clutch and the gearbox, even if the clutch
button. pedal remains depressed ››› .
Fig. 258 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed
manual gearbox.
If you do not wish to use the system, you can WARNING
switch it off manually. The position of the gears is indicated on the When the engine is running, the vehicle will
● To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop
gearbox lever ››› Fig. 258. start to move as soon as a gear is engaged
system, press the  button ››› Fig. 257. ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
and the clutch released. This also happens
if the electronic parking brake is switched
right down.
The button symbol  remains lit up yellow on.
when the system is switched off. ● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-
● Never engage reverse gear when the ve-
sition. hicle is moving.
Note ● Release the clutch.
The system switches on every time the en- WARNING
gine is turned off voluntarily. Selecting reverse gear
If the gear is changed down inappropriate-
Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is ly by selecting a gear that is too low, you
stopped. may lose control of the vehicle, causing an
accident and serious injuries.
● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.

254
 Start and driving

CAUTION Automatic gearbox/DSG au- Selector lever positions

When travelling at high speeds or at high tomatic gearbox*
engine speeds, selecting a gear that is too
low can cause considerable damage to the
clutch and the gearbox. This can also oc- Introduction
cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and held
and it does not engage. Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-
ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be-
tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-
CAUTION mitted via two independent clutches. They
To prevent damage and avoid premature replace the torque converter found on con-
wear, please observe the following: ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for
● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve- Fig. 259 Selector lever lock.
while driving. The pressure applied by your hicle.
hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector The selector lever position is shown when the
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to
forks. corresponding sign lights up. With the selec-
change gears manually ››› page 257,
● Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped- Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*. tor lever in the manual gearbox positions M, D
al; although the pressure may seem insig- and S, the engaged gear is also shown on the
nificant, it can cause the premature wear of display.
the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you
do not need to change gear. Control lamps
 – Parking lock
● Always ensure that the vehicle is com-
When the lever is put in this position, the drive
pletely stopped before engaging the re-  It lights up green
wheels are locked. The lever must only be put
verse gear.
The brake is not pressed. in P when the vehicle is stationary ››› .
● Always press the clutch to the floor when To select a gear range, press the brake pedal.
changing gears. To put the lever in P or take it out of P , the
locking button must be pressed and held and
● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on  Flashes green the brake pedal pressed simultaneously.
hills with the engine on.
The selector lever locking button is not engaged.
The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. En-  – Reverse gear
gage the selector lever lock.
Reverse gear must be engaged only when
the vehicle is stationary and the engine is
idling ››› . »
255
 Driving

To move the lever to position R, the lock but- Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun- position P. While the key is not in the ignition,
ton must be pressed and held while pressing tain roads) it can be advantageous to switch the selector lever is locked in position P.
the brake pedal at the same time. The reverse tiptronic mode ››› page 257, to adapt the
lights come on when the lever is in the R posi- gears to suit the road conditions. WARNING
tion with the ignition on. ● Take care not to press the accelerator
Selector lever lock pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve-
 – Neutral In P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear range hicle could start moving immediately (in
With the lever in this position, the gear is in from being engaged, and prevents the vehi- some cases even if the parking brake is en-
neutral. cle from moving off accidentally. gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.
● Never move the lever to R or P when driv-
Press the brake pedal to move the lever from To release the gear lever lock, press and hold
ing. Failure to follow this instruction could
N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at the brake pedal with the ignition on. At the result in an accident or failure.
speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) ››› . same time, press the lever lock in the direc-
● With lever in any position (except P), the
tion of the arrow ››› Fig. 259.
foot brake must be pushed down whenever
 – Permanent forward drive position As a reminder to the driver, when the lever is the engine is running. This is because an
The lever in the D/S position enables the in positions P or N the following indication will automatic gearbox still transmits power
gears to be operated in normal mode (D) or be shown on the screen: even at idling speed.
sport mode (S). To select Sport mode S, ● While you are selecting a gear and the
When stationary, apply footbrake
move the lever backwards. Pushing the lever vehicle is stopped with the engine running,
while selecting a gear.
again will select normal mode D. The selec- do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-
ted driving mode is shown on the instrument The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly struction could result in an accident.
panel display. through position N (e.g. when shifting from R ● As a driver you should never leave your
to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is
In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the
“rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” if engaged. Switch on the electronic parking
best gear ratio. This depends on the engine
it is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en- brake and select the parking lock (P).
load, the road speed and the dynamic gear
gages automatically if the brake pedal is not
control programme (DCP).
pressed and the lever is in position N for more
Note
Sport mode (S) should be selected for a than about one second at a speed of less
sporty driving style. This setting makes use of than 5 km/h (3 mph). ● If the lever is moved accidentally to N
the engine's maximum power output. When when driving, release the accelerator and
accelerating the gear shifts will be noticea- Safety interlock for ignition key let the engine speed drop to idling before
ble. selecting gear range D or S again.
Once the ignition has been turned off, the key
● Should the power supply to the lever be
may be removed only if the gear selector is in
interrupted in position P, it will not be
256
 Start and driving

possible to move the lever. If this should Changing gear in Tiptronic mode* system is not changing gear automatically
happen the manual release can be used due to a traffic situation.
››› page 262.
Using Tiptronic with the selector lever
Note It is possible to change to Tiptronic mode,
both when the vehicle is stopped and while
● If the lever lock does not engage, there is
driving.
a fault. The transmission is interrupted to
prevent the vehicle from accidentally mov- ● Starting from the D/S position, move the
ing. Follow the procedure below in order for
lever to the right. The instrument panel will
the lever lock to engage again:
show whether the lever is in manual or Tip-
– With a 6-speed gearbox: press the tronic mode (e.g. M4).
brake pedal and release it again.
Fig. 260 Lever in the Tiptronic position ● Push the lever forwards + or backwards –
– With a 7-speed gearbox: press the
to move up or down a gear ››› Fig. 260.
brake pedal. Move the lever to posi-
tion P or N and subsequently engage a ● To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to the
gear. left.
● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi-
cle does not move forwards or back. Pro- Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel
ceed to the next mode: paddles*
– When the vehicle does not move in the The gearshift paddles can be used when the
required direction, the system may not selector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic)
have the gear range correctly engag- positions.
ed. Press the brake pedal and engage
the gear range again. ● Press the gearshift paddle + to select a
Fig. 261 Steering wheel: automatic transmis- higher gear ››› Fig. 261.
– If the vehicle still does not move in the sion levers
required direction, there is a system ● Press the gearshift paddle – to select a
malfunction. Seek specialist assistance Tiptronic gives the driver the option to lower gear.
and have the system checked. change gears manually. ● To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-
hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap-
When you change to the Tiptronic pro-
proximately 1 second or move the lever to the
gramme, the vehicle remains in the currently
selected gear. This is possible as long as the
left. »

257
 Driving

If the paddles are not operated for some time Stop/Park ● Once you have engaged a gear, gently
and the lever is not in the Tiptronic selection On level ground, just use the lever to engage press the accelerator and pull on the elec-
position, it will automatically exit from Tip- position P. On slopes you should first apply tronic parking brake button.
tronic mode. the parking brake and then set the lever to P.
This makes it easier to remove the lever from Back-up programme
CAUTION position P when starting. If all the positions of the lever are shown over
● When accelerating, if a higher gear is not a light background on the instrument panel
If the driver door is opened and the lever is
selected, it will automatically change display, there is a system fault and the auto-
not in position P, the vehicle could move. The
shortly before reaching the maximum per- matic gearbox will operate in with the backup
mitted RPM. following warning is displayed on the instru-
programme. It is still possible to drive the ve-
ment panel:  Gear change: selector
● Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys- hicle, however, at low speeds and within a se-
lever in the drive position!. Addi-
tem will not change until it detects that the lected range of gears. Driving in reverse
tionally, a buzzer will sound.
engine will not reach its maximum RPM. gear may not be possible.
Stopping on a downhill
Kick-down
Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-
Driving with an automatic gearbox The kick-down system provides maximum ac-
vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary,
celeration when the gear selector lever is in
apply the electronic parking brake ››› .
The gearbox changes gear ratios automati- the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position.
cally as the vehicle moves. Do not accelerate while a range of gears is
When the accelerator pedal is pressed right
engaged to prevent the car from rolling
The engine can only start with the selector down, the automatic gearbox will shift down
downhill ››› .
lever in position P or N. At low temperatures, to a lower gear, depending on road speed
below -10 °C (+14 °F), the engine can only and engine speed. This takes advantage of
start with the selector lever in position P. Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func-
the maximum acceleration of the vehicle
tion
››› .
Driving down hills ● Once you have engaged a gear, take your
foot off the brake pedal and gently press the The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed
Under certain circumstances it may be ad- until the engine reaches maximum rpm.
accelerator.
vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se-
lect the gear manually according to driving WARNING
conditions ››› . Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold
function Observe the safety warnings ››› in Selec-
tor lever positions on page 256.
● Pull on the electronic parking brake button.
● Never allow the brake to rub and do not
use the brake pedal too often or for long
258
 Start and driving

periods, as the brakes can overheat. This stop the vehicle as soon as you can and On vehicles with the driver information sys-
reduces the braking power, increases the wait for the gearbox to cool ››› page 261. tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and
braking distance or even causes a brake the corresponding text message Stability
● If the gearbox operates with the backup
system fault. control deactivated (temporary) appears
programme, take the vehicle to a special-
● If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi- ised workshop and have the fault repaired
on the instrument panel to indicate the deac-
cle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal or without delay. tivation status.
parking brake.
● With the engine running, switch off traction
control (ASR) ››› page 2981).
WARNING Launch-control program ● Press the brake pedal with your left foot
Please note that if the road surface is slip- 3 Value for vehicles: diesel with power of more and hold it down for at least one second.
pery or wet, the kick-down feature could than 125 kW, and petrol of more than 140 kW. ● Turn the selector lever to position S or Tip-
cause the driving wheels to spin, which
tronic, or else select the sport driving mode
could result in skidding. The Launch-control programme enables
from the SEAT Drive Profile* ››› page 264.
maximum acceleration from a standstill.
● With your right foot, press the accelerator
CAUTION Condition: the engine must have reached op-
down to the full throttle or kick-down position.
● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do erating temperature and the steering wheel
The engine speed will stabilise at about
not attempt to stop it from rolling by de- must not be turned.
3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about
pressing the accelerator when a gear has The engine speed for Launch-control is differ- 2,000 rpm (diesel engine).
been selected. This could cause overheat- ent on petrol and diesel engines. ● Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The
ing and damage the automatic gearbox.
To use the Launch-control you must discon- vehicle starts with maximum acceleration.
● If you allow the vehicle to roll with the
lever in position N and the engine off, the nect the anti-slip regulation (ASR) through the
Easy Connect system menu ››› page 92. The WARNING
automatic gearbox will be damaged by
lack of lubrication. warning lamp  will stay switched on or will ● Always adapt your driving style to the
flash slowly depending on whether or not the traffic conditions.
● In certain driving situations or traffic con-
vehicle has a driver information system*. ● Only use the Launch control programme
ditions, the gears could overheat and be
damaged! If the warning lamp  lights up, when road and traffic conditions permit, »

1) Vehicles without a driver information system:

the warning lamp flashes slowly. Vehicles with a

driver information system: the warning lamp re-
mains on.
259
 Driving

and make sure your manner of driving and The assistant attempts to maintain the speed Activation of the inertia mode
accelerating the vehicle does not incon- at which the vehicle was travelling when the Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less
venience or endanger other road users. brake was applied, within logical limits. It may than 12% and speeds between 20 and 130
● Make sure that the ESC remains switched
be necessary to correct the speed by press- km / h (12 and 80 mph).
on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC
ing the brake.
are deactivated, the wheels may start to ● Gently take your foot off the accelerator.
The assistant can only change down as far
spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk as 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep The indication will be shown on the instru-
of accident! slopes you have to switch to tiptronic mode ment cluster , the engaged gear and cur-
● After moving off, the ESC “sport” mode and change down to 2nd or 1st gear to take rent consumption will disappear and the
should be deactivated by briefly pressing advantage of engine braking and take the word Inertia will appear.
the   button. load off the brake system.
The gears will automatically disengage and
Downhill speed control is deactivated as the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of
Note soon as the road levels out again or you press the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, the
● After using the Launch control pro- the accelerator pedal. engine runs at idling speed.
gramme, the temperature in the gearbox
On vehicles with cruise control system*
may have increased considerably. In this
case, the programme could be disabled for
››› page 270, downhill speed control is acti- Stopping inertia mode
vated when you set a cruising speed. ● Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.
several minutes. The programme can be
used again after the cooling phase.
WARNING To take advantage of the engine's inertia
● Accelerating with the launch control pro-
mode, simply remove your foot from the ac-
gramme places a heavy load on all parts of The downhill speed control cannot defy the
laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot celerator.
the vehicle. This can result in increased
wear and tear. be maintained constant in all situations. Al- Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged
ways be prepared to use the brakes! section with less energy) and inertia discon-
nection (= shorter section without the need
for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption
Downhill assistant*
Inertia mode and emission balance.
Downhill speed control is activated when the If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile
lever is in the D/S position and the brake is The inertia mode allows you to travel certain
››› page 264, the inertia mode can be activa-
applied. An appropriate lower gear is engag- distances without using the accelerator,
ted in Normal, Eco and Individual modes. In
ed. which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in-
Eco mode, it is activated whenever the oper-
ertia mode to “let” the vehicle “roll”.
ating conditions are met, regardless of the

260
 Start and driving

smoothness with which the foot is removed Indications on the instrument panel Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
from the accelerator. and have the fault repaired.
display
 Gearbox: System fault! You can
WARNING Clutch continue driving in D until
● If the inertia mode has been switched on, switching off the engine
 Clutch overheating! Please stop!
take into account, when approaching an
obstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler- The clutch has overheated and could be Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek special-
ate in the usual manner: risk of accident! damaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox to ist assistance.
● When using inertia mode while travelling cool with the engine at idling speed and the  Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your
down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: selector lever in position P. When the warning driving accordingly
risk of accident! lamp and the driver message switch off, have
the fault corrected by a specialised work- Continue driving at moderate speeds. When
● If other users drive your vehicle, warn
shop without delay. If they do not turn off, do the warning lamp switches off, you can con-
them about inertia mode.
not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- tinue driving in a normal manner.
tance.  Gearbox: press the brake and en-
Note
gage a gear again.
● The driver message Inertia is only dis- Faults in the gearbox
played with the current consumption. In in- If the warning was caused by the tempera-
 Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle ture of the gearbox, this driver message will
ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis-
and place the lever in the posi- be displayed when the gearbox has cooled
played (for example “D” or “E” will appear
tion P. again.
instead of “D7” or “E7”).
● The inertia mode will be automatically There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-
disconnected on gradients steeper than cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-
15%. ing. Seek specialist assistance.
● In the case of the TDI, TGI and 2.0l TSI en-  Gearbox: System fault! You may
gines, the inertia mode will only work in the continue driving.
Eco driving mode.
Have the fault corrected by a specialised
workshop without delay.
 Gearbox: System fault! You can
continue driving with restric-
tions. Reverse gear disabled

261
 Driving

Manual release of the selector lev- Releasing the selector lever

Gear-change recommenda-
er ● Using the flat part of a screwdriver, press
the yellow tab sideways and keep it pressed
tion
down ››› Fig. 262.
● Press the lock button on the selector lev-
Selecting the optimal gear
er and move it to position N.
● After completing the emergency release,
reattach the selector lever boot to the gear-
box console.

WARNING
Do not move the lever from position P if the
parking brake is not firmly engaged. If you
Fig. 262 Gear selector lever: manual release
from the parking position. still think the car could move, press the
brake pedal. Danger! The vehicle could
In the event of a power failure when starting move in an unforeseen way and cause an
Fig. 263 Instrument panel: gear-change indi-
accident or serious injury.
(e.g. discharged battery), the lever will remain cator (manual gearbox).
locked in position P. To move it to position N to
move the vehicle, there is an emergency re- Depending on the equipment on the instru-
lease device under the centre console, on the ment panel screen, a recommendation is
right side. Releasing the selector lever re- shown with the gear that should be engaged
quires a certain degree of practical skill. to optimise consumption.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the
Removing the cover from the selector lev- lever must be in Tiptronic mode ››› page 257.
er
No recommendation will appear if the opti-
● Apply the electronic parking brake  ››› . mal gear is engaged. The current gear will be
● Carefully pull the corners of the selector displayed.
lever boot and twist it upwards over the lever
handle.

262
 Start and driving

Display Meaning the lever is removed from the tiptronic posi- Steering assist
tion. This help assists the driver in critical situa-
 Optimum gear.
tions. It recommends turning the steering
Changing to a higher gear is rec- wheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre
 ommended. (counter-steering), turning slightly to avoid
Steering skidding ››› .
Changing to a lower gear is rec-
 ommended.
Information relating to different ve- WARNING

Information regarding the “cleanliness” of

hicle processes. Steering assist helps the driver in critical
situations. The driver is the person who has
the particulate filter
Electro-mechanical power steering adapts to control the vehicle's steering at all times.
When the exhaust system detects that the electronically to the speed of the car, torque
particulate filter is close to saturation, this and steering angle.
system’s self-cleaning function recommends
the optimal gear for that function
Even if the power steering fails or the engine Control lamp
is stopped, it is possible to continue to rotate
››› page 330.
the steering wheel as long as the key remains
 It lights up red
in the ignition lock, but more force must be
WARNING
applied. Faulty steering.
The gear change recommendation is an Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon as
auxiliary function and in no case should be possible and in a safe manner.
Progressive steering Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have
a substitute for careful driving.
Depending on the vehicle’s features, it may or the fault repaired as soon as possible.
● Responsibility for selecting the correct
may not incorporate a progressive steering
gear, depending on the circumstances,
rests solely with the driver.
system.  It lights up yellow
In city traffic you do not need to turn so much Limited steering operation.
For the sake of the environment on parking, manoeuvring or in very tight turns. Drive carefully to a specialised workshop to have the
steering checked.
Selecting the correct gear can help to save On the road or on the motorway, progressive If the warning light does not come on again after re-
fuel. steering transmits, for example, in bends, a starting the engine and driving a short distance, it is
sportier, more direct and noticeably more dy- not necessary to check the steering.
namic driving sensation.
Note OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and re-
connected.
The recommended gear indication turns off
Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph). »
when the clutch pedal is pressed or when
263
 Driving

 It flashes yellow SEAT Driving modes (SEAT Engine

Depending on the profile selected, the engine
The steering column is jammed. Drive Profile)* responds more quickly or smoothly to the ac-
When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc-
tions. celerator being pressed. When Eco mode is
Introduction selected, the Start-stop function is activated.
OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock.
Remove the key from the ignition switch and recon- The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
nect it. Consider the messages shown on the instru- choose between the Eco, Normal, Sport and gear change timing is changed to put the
ment panel display. changes at higher or lower revolutions. Eco
Individual profiles and modes, which modi-
Do not continue driving if the steering column re- mode activates the Inertia function, thereby
mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek fy the behaviour of various vehicle functions,
providing different driving experiences. In the reducing consumption. The rest of the driving
specialist assistance.
FR and X-PERIENCE models equipped with modes will activate the inertia use function
The control lamp should light up for a few dynamic chassis control (DCC), the Comfort when the selector lever is not in the S posi-
seconds when the ignition is switched on. It profile is also available. tion, depending on how the accelerator ped-
should go out once the engine is started. al is released ››› page 260. When the vehicle
In the Leon Cupra model the four profiles are is turned on again, the function is activated
Comfort, Sport, Cupra and Individual. by default to reduce consumption.
WARNING
The Individual profile can be configured With a manual gearbox, the Eco mode 1)
Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-
according to personal preferences. The other changes the gear changes recommenda-
es.
profiles have a fixed configuration. tions to facilitate more efficient driving.
● If the warning lamps and the correspond-
ing messages are ignored, the vehicle may
stall in traffic, causing serious damage or Dynamic chassis control (DCC)
accidents and injuries. Description DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb-
● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity ers to the condition of the road and current
Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-
and in a safe place. driving conditions, according to the pre-set
hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the
programme.
following functions:
In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow-
ing message is displayed on the instrument

1) In the Leon Cupra model, the Eco mode can be

selected through the Individual profile by setting

the engine characteristic to Eco.
264
 Start and driving

screen Fault: shock absorber regula- Setting the driving profile You can select the required mode either by
tion repeatedly pressing selection button
››› Fig. 264, ››› Fig. 265, or on the touch
Steering screen, in the menu that opens when the
above button is pressed.
Power steering becomes more robust in
Sport mode to enable a sportier driving style. An icon on the touch screen provides infor-
mation about the active mode.
In the Leon Cupra the power steering be-
comes more robust in Cupra mode. Button  lights up when the active mode is
different to Normal.
Air conditioning
In the Cupra model, the button stays on only
In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate when the Cupra profile is active.
in eco mode, especially restricting fuel con- Fig. 264 Centre console: MODE button. You
sumption. can select from Normal, Sport, Eco, Comfort Driving pro-
and Individual. Characteristics
file
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Places the vehicle in a low state
The ACC’s acceleration and braking mode of consumption, facilitating a
varies according to the driving profile a) fuel-saving driving style that is
››› page 276. respectful to the environment.

 Offers a balanced driving experi-

Electronic self-locking differential1)
Normal ence, suitable for everyday use.
The self-locking differential adapts its behav-
iour depending on the driving profile chosen. Provides a complete dynamic
Normal mode or Cupra mode can be selec- performance in the vehicle, ena-
bling the user a more sporty driv-
ted to prioritise improved traction in sport
ing style.
driving. Fig. 265 Centre console: Cupra Drive Profile 
Sport Only for Cupra models: It repre-
button. You can select from Comfort, Sport, Cu-
pra and Individual sents the vehicle's default be-
haviour, suitable for dynamic
driving. »

1) Applies to the Leon Cupra model.

265
 Driving

Driving pro- WARNING internal friction in the engine is greater than

Characteristics later on when all the moving parts have bed-
file When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at-
ded down.
It permits more relaxed and tention to all traffic: doing otherwise could
comfortable driving, for example cause an accident. How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km
 for long motorway journeys. Its (1000 miles) influences the future engine per-
Convenienceb) main characteristic is the soft formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it
Note
suspension setting (DCC). should be driven at a moderate speed (espe-
● When the engine is switched off it will cially when the engine is cold) this will reduce
It gives the vehicle a decidedly store the driving profile that was selected
 sportier nature, and makes for engine wear and increase its useful life. Never
Cuprac) when the ignition was turned off. When re- drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always
maximum performance.
started, the engine and the gearbox will
engage a lower gear when the engine works
It allows you to personalise the start in their Normal mode. To return the en-
“irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or
 configuration. The functions that gine and gear to your desired mode, rese-
can be adjusted depend on the 600 miles, please note:
Individual lect the corresponding driving profile.
equipment fitted in the vehicle.
● Your speed and driving style must always ● Do not use full throttle.
a)Not available for Cupra models (Eco mode is selec- be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf- ● Do not force the engine above two thirds of
ted in the Individual profile). fic conditions.
its maximum speed.
b)Only for models fitted with adaptive suspension ● The Eco profile is not recommended when
● Do not tow a trailer.
(DCC) and Cupra models. towing a vehicle.
c) Only for Cupra models. Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600
to 1000 miles), gradually increase power
Kick-down* until reaching the maximum speed and high
The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-
Driving tips engine speeds.
celeration ››› page 258.
Running in Running in new tyres and brake pads
If eco mode has been selected in SEAT Drive
Profile*, and the accelerator is pressed be- ● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres
Please observe the instructions for running-in
yond a hard point, the engine power is auto- new components. ››› page 347.
matically controlled to give your vehicle max- ● Information about brakes ››› page 290.
imum acceleration. Running-in the engine
A new engine must be driven through a run-in
period during its first 1500 kilometres (1000
miles). During its first few hours of running, the

266
 Start and driving

For the sake of the environment season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to vehicle still has good acceleration in these
give even better braking response. conditions. Risk of accident!
If the engine is run in gently, the life of the
engine will be increased and the engine oil ● On wet roads bear in mind that the front
Snow chains wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose
consumption reduced.
On roads where snow chains are mandatory, contact with the road if the car is driven too
this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive fast. If this should happen, there will be no
››› page 351. sudden increase in engine speed to warn
Four-wheel drive (4Drive) the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel
3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive Changing tyres drive car. For this reason you should always
choose a driving speed suitable for the
On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow- On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four road conditions. Risk of accident!
er is distributed to all four wheels tyres must have the same rolling circumfer-
ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying
General notes tread depths ››› page 347.
Economical and environmentally
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine friendly driving
Off-roader?
power is distributed to all four wheels. The
distribution of power is controlled automati- If your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: it Fuel consumption, environmental pollution
cally according to your driving style and the does not have enough ground clearance to and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres all
road conditions. Also see ››› page 296. be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid depend largely on driving style. Consumption
rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as can be reduced between 10-15% with an effi-
The four-wheel drive is specially designed to possible.
complement the superior engine power. This cient driving type. The following section gives
combination gives the vehicle exceptional you some tips on lessening the impact on the
WARNING environment and reducing your operating
handling and performance capabilities, both
on normal roads and in more difficult condi- ● Even with four-wheel drive, you should al- costs at the same time.
ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-
tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per-
tions. Do not let the extra safety features Active cylinder management (ACT®)*
haps especially for this reason), it is important
tempt you into taking any risks when driv-
to observe certain safety points ››› . Depending on vehicle equipment, the active
ing. Risk of accident!
cylinder management (ACT®) may deacti-
● The braking capability of your vehicle is
Winter tyres vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv-
limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no
Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will ing situation does not require too much pow-
different from a car without four-wheel
have plenty of traction in winter conditions, er. The number of active cylinders can be
drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast
even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, seen on the instrument panel display.
on firm or slippery roads just because the
we still recommend that winter tyres or all- ››› page 72. »
267
 Driving

Foresight when driving Reduce idling time in order to minimise fuel consumption and
If you think ahead when driving, you will need In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is emissions.
to brake less and thus accelerate less. Take automatically reduced. In vehicles without A cold engine consumes a disproportionate
advantage of the inertia of the vehicle when- the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-
ever possible, with a gear engaged. This the engine, for example, at level crossings ing temperature after about four kilometres
takes advantage of the engine braking effect, and at traffic lights that remain red for long (2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return
reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis- periods of time. When an engine has reached to a normal level.
sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero. operating temperature, and depending on
the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off Check tyre pressure
Changing gear to save energy for a minimum of about 5 seconds already
Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the
saves more than the amount of fuel necessa-
An effective way of saving is to change in ad- correct pressures ››› page 348 to save fuel. If
ry for restarting.
vance to a higher gear. the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-
The engine takes a long time to warm up tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater
Manual transmission: shift up from first to
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-
second gear as soon as possible. Choosing
tant emissions are also especially high during ses tyre wear and impairs handling.
the right gear enables fuel savings. Select the
this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best
highest possible gear appropriate for the Do not use winter tyres all year round as
to drive off immediately after starting the en-
driving situation (the engine should continue they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
functioning with cyclical regularity).
Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu- Avoid carrying unnecessary loads
Regular maintenance
ally and without reaching the “kick-down” Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-
Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even
position. crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable
before the engine is started. A well-serviced
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel
Avoid driving at high speed ing transported.
efficiency as well as maximum reliability and
Avoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed, an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced Since the luggage rack increases the aero-
whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis- engine can consume up to 10% more fuel dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re-
sion of harmful gases and noise pollution than necessary. move it when not needed. At speeds of
multiply as speed is increased. Driving at 100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12%
moderate speeds will help to save fuel. Avoid short journeys of fuel.
The engine and catalytic converter need to
reach their optimal operating temperature

268
 Start and driving

Save electrical energy Driving on flooded roads ● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-
The engine drives the alternator, thereby sion) ››› page 359.
generating electricity. This implies that any To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on
increase in power consumption also increa- flooded roads, take the following into ac-
ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch count:
Trips abroad
off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices ● The water should never come above the
that use a lot of electricity includes the blow- ● With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured
lower edge of the bodywork.
er at a high setting, the rear window heating that lead-free petrol is available throughout
● Drive at pedestrian speed.
or the seat heating* ››› page 228. the journey ››› page 324, Fuel types. Seek
information about service station networks
Note WARNING
selling unleaded fuel.
● If you have the Start-Stop system, it is After driving through flooded zones, brak-
● In some countries, it is possible that your
recommended that it should not be discon- ing effectiveness can decrease if the brake
vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may
nected. discs or pads are damp ››› page 290.
not be available or the technical services
● It is recommended that you close the may only be able to make limited repairs.
windows when driving at more than CAUTION
60 km/h (37 mph). SEAT importers and distributors will provide
● Driving through flooded areas may dam-
● Do not drive with your foot resting on the
information about the technical preparation
age vehicle components such as the en-
clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the gine, transmission or electrical system. that your vehicle requires and also about
plate slip. This causes wear and can dam- necessary maintenance and repair possibili-
● Whenever driving through water, the
age the clutch plate. ties.
Start-Stop system* must be switched off
● Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the ››› page 251.
CAUTION
brake. The fuel consumption will be lower
and you will prevent the clutch plate from SEAT does not accept liability for any dam-
Note
being damaged. age to the vehicle due to the use of a lower
● Check the depth of the water before en- quality fuel, an inadequate service or the
● Use the engine brake on downhills by
changing to the gear that is best suited for tering the flooded zone. non-availability of genuine spare parts.
the gradient. Fuel consumption will be ● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,
“zero” and the brakes will not suffer. or stop the engine.
● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc-
tion cause waves that could exceed your
vehicle's critical height.

269
 Driving

Driver assistance systems WARNING A CCS temporarily switched off. The set
speed is displayed in small or darkened
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con-
figures.
Cruise control system trol and warning lamps on page 90.
B System error. Contact a specialised
(CCS)* workshop.
C CCS switched on. The speed memory is
Introduction
Related video empty.
D The CCS is switched on. The set speed is
displayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS mode

The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch
pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-
Fig. 266 Dash panel cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCS

Control lamp If the CCS cannot maintain a constant vehi-
cle speed downhill, brake and change down
It lights up green a gear if necessary. The GRA is temporarily
 disabled by pressing the brake.
The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and Fig. 267 Instrument panel display: GRA status
active. indications. Automatic off
OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) is The GRA disconnects automatically or is
The cruise control system (CCS) is able to
switched on and active. temporarily interrupted:
maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15
The control lamps light up when the ignition is mph). ● If the system detects a fault that could af-
switched on and should turn off after approxi- The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by fect the working order of the CCS.
mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for ceasing to accelerate, not by actively braking ● If you press and maintain the accelerator
the function check. the vehicle ››› . pedal for a certain time, driving faster than
the stored speed.
Status display
● If the dynamic driving control systems inter-
GRA status ››› Fig. 267 vene, ASR, ESC, etc.
270
 Driver assistance systems

● If the brake pedal is pressed. Operating the cruise control Reinstating the cruise control
● If the airbag is triggered. ● Press button ››› Fig. 268 2 in area .
● If the lever is taken out of the D/S position.
Cruise control is activated at the stored
speed.
WARNING
Use of GRA could cause accidents and se- Adjusting the speed
vere injuries if it is not possible to drive at a
constant speed maintaining the safety dis- While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be
tance. adjusted with button ››› Fig. 268 2 :
● Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis- ● To increase in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)
tance from the vehicle in front is insuffi- briefly press button ››› Fig. 268 2 in the area
cient, on steep roads, with several bends or .
Fig. 268 On the turn signal lever: controls for
in slippery circumstances or on flooded
operating the GRA. ● To increase the speed without interruption,
roads.
keep button ››› Fig. 268 2 pressed down in
● Never use the CCS when driving off-road Connecting the area .
or on unpaved roads.
● Move the control ››› Fig. 268 1 to . ● To reduce in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)
● Adapt your speed and the distance to the
vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath-
briefly press button ››› Fig. 268 2 in the area
If no speed has been programmed, the sys-
er, the condition of the road and the traffic .
tem will not control it.
situation. ● To reduce the speed without interruption,
● To avoid unexpected operation of the Activating the cruise control keep button ››› Fig. 268 2 pressed down in
cruise control system, turn it off every time the area .
● Press button ››› Fig. 268 2 in area .
you finish using it.
The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac-
● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is The current speed is stored and the cruise
celerating or stopping accelerating. The vehi-
too high for other conditions. control is activated.
cle does not brake actively.
● If driving down a steep gradient, the GRA
cannot maintain a constant speed. The Temporarily interrupting
Switching off
speed can increase. In this case, brake and ● Move the control ››› Fig. 268 1 to  or
change down a gear. ● Move control ››› Fig. 268 1 to .
step on the brake.
The system is disconnected and the memo-
The cruise control system is switched off tem-
rised speed is deleted.
porarily. The speed is stored.

271
 Driving

Emergency brake assistance may not activate in other hazard situations Critical warning
››› . If the driver fails to react to the advance
system (Front Assist)* Front Assist is active between 4 km/h (2.5 warning, the system may actively intervene
mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn
Introduction on a range of conditions, some of the func- the driver of the imminent danger of a colli-
tions described below are omitted to optimize sion.
the behaviour of the system.
Automatic braking
Front Assist is a driving assistance function
that can never replace the driver’s atten- If the driver also fails to react to the critical
tion. warning, the system may initiate independ-
ent emergency braking by progressively in-
Safety distance warning creasing the braking in accordance with how
critical the situation is.
If the system detects that you are driving too
close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the
Driver emergency brake assistance sys-
driver with this indication on the instrument
tem
Fig. 269 On the instrument panel display: ad- panel display .
vance warning indications. The system may detect that the driver is not
The timing of the warning varies depending braking hard enough to avoid the collision. In
on driver behaviour and the traffic situation. this case, it will increase the braking intensity.
The objective of the system is to prevent
head-on collisions against objects that may
Advance warning The system cannot prevent a collision, al-
be in the vehicle’s path or minimise the con-
though it can significantly minimise the con-
sequences of such impacts. If the system detects a possible collision with
sequences by reducing the speed and the
the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by
Depending on several factors and how criti- force of the impact.
means of an audible warning and an indica-
cal the situation is, the system operates in a
tion on the instrument panel display
staggered manner. First it warns the driver, WARNING
and if the driver’s reaction does not occur or
››› Fig. 269.
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con-
is insufficient, it activates independent emer- The warning moment varies depending on trol and warning lamps on page 90.
gency braking. the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At
the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a
The function is intended to prevent collisions WARNING
possible emergency braking ››› .
with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same
Front Assist cannot change the laws of
lane travelling in the same direction, or with
physics or replace the driver in terms of
pedestrians crossing the vehicle’s path. It
272
 Driver assistance systems

keeping control of the vehicle and reacting ● The Front Assist does not react to pedes- Radar sensors
to a possible emergency situation. trians walking head-on in the same lane.
● The driver must always be ready to take
WARNING over the control of the vehicle.

Following a Front Assist emergency warn-

ing, pay immediate attention to the situa- Note
tion and try to avoid the collision as appli- ● When Front Assist is connected, the indi-
cable. cations of other functions on the screen
● If the Front Assist does not work as de- may be hidden.
scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly ● When the Front Assist causes a braking,
intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off. the brake pedal is “harder”.
Have the system checked by a specialised
● Automatic interventions by the Front As- Fig. 270 On the front bumper: radar sensors.
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership. sist on the brakes may be interrupted by
pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving A radar sensor is fitted on the front bumper
● Always adapt your speed and distance
the wheel. ››› Fig. 270 1 .
away from the vehicle in front of you at all
● The Front Assist may brake the vehicle
times to suit visibility, weather, road and The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired
traffic conditions. until it stops completely. However, the by dirt, or by environmental influences such
brake system does not halt the vehicle per-
● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- as rain or mist. In this case, the Front Assist
manently. Use the foot brake!
dents and serious injuries. does not work. The instrument panel displays
● If the Front Assist does not work as de- the following message: Front Assist: No
● In complex driving situations, Front Assist
scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes sensor vision! Clean the radar sensor
may issue warnings and intervene in brak- several times unnecessarily), switch it off.
ing unnecessarily. ››› .
● If the operation of the Front Assist is im- When the radar sensor begins to operate
paired by dirt or because the radar sensor properly again, the Front Assist will be availa-
has lost its settings, the system may issue ble again. The message will disappear from
unnecessary warnings and intervene inop- the screen.
portunely in the braking.
Front Assist operation may be affected by a
● The Front Assist does not react to animals
strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-
or vehicles crossing your path or ap-
cur, for example, in a closed car park or due
proaching head-on down the same lane.
to the presence of metallic objects (e.g.
guard rails or sheets used in road works). »
273
 Driving

The area in front of and around the radar Operation of the emergency brake ● OR: using the Easy Connect system with
sensor should not be covered with adhesives, the button    > Vehicle > SETTINGS
assistance system (Front Assist)
additional or similar headlights, as this may > Driver assistance ››› page 92.
negatively affect Front Assist operation.
When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indi-
If the front of the vehicle is not properly re- cation  ››› Fig. 271 will be shown on the in-
paired or structural modifications are made strument panel.
to it, Front Assist operation may be affected.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership Activating or deactivating the pre-warning
for this purpose. (advance warning)

CAUTION The advance warning can be activated or

deactivated in the Easy Connect system us-
If you have the feeling that the radar sensor ing button    > Vehicle > SETTINGS
is damaged or has lost its settings, discon-
> Driver assistance ››› page 92.
nect the Front Assist. This will avoid possi- Fig. 271 On the instrument panel display: Front
ble dangerous situations caused by the in- Assist deactivated indication. The system will store the setting for the next
adequate operation of the system. If this time the ignition is switched on.
occurs have it adjusted. The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-
tion is switched on. SEAT recommends keeping advance warning
● The sensor may not be adjusted correct-
active.
ly if it receives an impact. This may com- When the Front Assist is switched off, so too
promise the system's efficacy or discon- are the advance warning and the distance Depending on the vehicle’s infotainment sys-
nect it. warning functions. tem the advance warning function may be
● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- adapted in the following modes:
SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist
cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT
activated. Exceptions ››› page 275, Deacti- ● Advance
recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
this purpose. vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol- ● Medium
lowing situations.
● A registration plate or plate holder on the ● Delayed
front that is larger than the space for the ● Deactivated
registration plate, or a registration plate
Switching the Front Assist on and off
that is curved or warped can cause the ra- With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist SEAT recommends driving with the function in
dar to malfunction. can be deactivated or activated as follows: “Medium” mode.
● Clean away the snow with a brush and ● Select the corresponding menu option us-
the ice preferably with a solvent-free de- ing the button for the driver assistance sys-
icer spray. tems ››› page 89.
274
 Driver assistance systems

Switching distance warning on and off System limitations ● Misaligned vehicles.

The distance warning can be activated or ● Vehicles crossing the other's path.
deactivated in the Easy Connect system us- Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to
● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-
ing button    > Vehicle > SETTINGS the system. Thus, in certain circumstances,
tion.
> Driver assistance ››› page 92. some of the reactions may be inappropriate
from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention ● Loads and accessories of other vehicles
The system will store the setting for the next in order to intervene if necessary. that protrude over the sides, backwards or
time the ignition is switched on. over the top.
SEAT recommends keeping the distance The following conditions may cause the
warning active. Front Assist not to react or to do so too
late:
● In the first few instants of driving after
Deactivating Front Assist tempora- switching on the ignition, due to the system’s
rily in the following situations initial auto-calibration.
● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-
In the following situations the Front Assist aged.
should be deactivated due to the system's ● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
limitations:
● On taking tight bends or complex paths.
● When the vehicle is to be towed. ● Pressing the accelerator all the way down.
● If the vehicle is on a test bed. ● If the ASR has been disconnected or the
● When the radar sensor is damaged. ESC activated in Sport mode ››› page 298.
● If the radar sensor receives a violent im- ● If the ESC is controlling.
pact. ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. trically connected trailer are damaged.
● If the radar sensor is temporarily covered ● If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails or
by an accessory. sheets used in road works.
● When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto ● If the vehicle is reversing.
transportation. ● In case of snow or heavy rain.
● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-
bikes.

275
 Driving

ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con- The ACC adapts the cruising speed of the the laws of physics. If used negligently or
vehicle, keeping a safe distance away from involuntarily, it may cause serious acci-
trol* the vehicle in front, if there is one, depending dents and injuries. The system is not a re-
on speed. placement for driver awareness.
Introduction When driving behind another vehicle, the ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to
ACC reduces speed until it is the same as the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
that of the vehicle ahead and maintains the visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
set distance between the vehicles. If the vehi- tions.
cle ahead accelerates, the ACC also accel- ● Do not use ACC in poor visibility, or on
erates the vehicle, going no higher than the roads that are steep, with lots of curves or
programmed target speed. slippery.
Fig. 272 Related video ● Never use ACC when driving off-road or
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic
on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de-
gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until
signed for use on paved roads only.
it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it
● ACC does not react when approaching a
stops.
fixed obstacle, such as the end of a traffic
The distance programmed should be in- jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop-
creased when the road surface is wet. ped at the traffic lights.
● The ACC only reacts to people if a pe-
Driver intervention prompt destrian monitoring system is available.
ACC is subject to certain limitations inherent The system does not react to animals or
to the system. In other words, in certain cir- vehicles crossing your path or approaching
cumstances the driver will have to adjust the head-on down the same lane.
Fig. 273 Detection area. speed and the distance from other vehicles. ● If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi-
ciently, brake the vehicle immediately.
In this case, the instrument panel screen will
The ACC is an extension of the vehicle’s ● If you are driving with a spare wheel fit-
warn you to intervene by applying the brake
cruise control function (GRA) ››› . ted, the ACC system could automatically
and a warning tone will be heard
switch off. Switch off the system when
It allows the driver to set a cruise speed be- ››› page 277. starting off.
tween 30 km/h (20 mph) and 210 km/h (130
mph), and select the desired distance from WARNING ● If the vehicle continues to move involun-

the previous in front. tarily after a driver intervention prompt,

The ACC’s technology cannot overcome brake the vehicle.
the system's inherent limitations or change

276
 Driver assistance systems

● If the instrument panel screen displays a  ACC is not currently availablea). WARNING
driver intervention prompt, adjust the dis-
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con-
tance. While the vehicle is stationary, switch off the engine
and start it again. Perform a visual check of the radar trol and warning lamps on page 90.
● The driver should be ready to accelerate
sensor ››› Fig. 275. If it is still unavailable, refer to a
or brake at all times. specialised workshop to have the system inspected.
a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour Status display
Note display is in colour.
● If the ACC does not work as described in
this chapter, do not use it until it has been  The ACC is active.
checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT
recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed
speed remains constant.
this purpose.
● Maximum speed with the ACC activated
is limited to 210 km/h (130 mph). If the symbol is white: the ACC is
 active.
● When the ACC is switched on, strange
noises may be heard during braking, A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad-
caused by the braking system. justs speed and distance from the vehicle in front.

If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac-

 tive (Standby)
Symbols on the instrument panel
display and control lamps The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

The speed reduction by the ACC  The lamp lights up green

 to maintain the distance from the
The ACC is active.
vehicle in front is not sufficient.
Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention Some control and warning lamps will light up
prompt. briefly when the ignition is switched on to Fig. 274 On the instrument panel display: 
ACC inactive (Standby).  ACC active.
check certain functions. They will switch off
after a few seconds.
Indications on the display ››› Fig. 274:
1 Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-
tive and is not regulating your speed. »
277
 Driving

2 Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is A radar sensor is fitted on the front bumper disconnect the ACC. This way you can
not active and is not regulating your dis- ››› Fig. 2751 . avoid possible damage. If this occurs have
tance. it adjusted.
The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired
3 Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active by dirt, or by environmental influences such ● The sensor may not be adjusted correct-
and is regulating your speed. as rain or mist. In this case the adaptive cruise ly if it receives an impact. This may com-
4 Distance level 2 set by the driver. control (ACC) does not work. The instrument promise the system's efficacy or discon-
panel displays the following message: ACC: nect it.
5 ACC is active and is regulating your dis-
No sensor vision! Clean the radar sensor ● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-
tance based on speed.
››› . cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT
6 Speed programmed with the ACC recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
When the radar sensor begins to operate this purpose.
Note properly, the ACC will become available. The
● A registration plate or plate holder on the
message on the screen will switch off and the
When the ACC is connected, the indica- front that is larger than the space for the
ACC may be reactivated.
tions on the instrument panel screen may registration plate, or a registration plate
be concealed by warnings from other func- ACC operation may be affected by a strong that is curved or warped can cause the ra-
tions, such as an incoming call. radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for dar to malfunction.
example, in a closed car park or due to the ● Clean away the snow with a brush and
presence of metallic objects (e.g. guard rails the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-
Radar sensors or sheets used in road works). icer spray.

The area in front of and around the radar

sensor should not be covered with adhesives,
additional or similar headlights, as this may
negatively affect ACC operation.
If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-
paired or structural modifications are made
to it, ACC operation may be affected. In this
scenario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership.

CAUTION
Fig. 275 On the front bumper: radar sensors.
If you have the sensation that the radar
sensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

278
 Driver assistance systems

ACC operation What ACC settings are possible? tivated and the current speed and distance
● Connecting and activating the ACC are programmed. The picture in the box will
change to Active mode ››› Fig. 274 .
››› page 279.
● Setting your speed ››› page 279. While ACC is active, the vehicle travels at a
● Setting your distance ››› page 279. set speed and distance from the vehicle
ahead. Both speed and distance can be
● Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC
changed at any time.
››› page 280.
● Adjusting the default distance level at the Setting speed
start of your journey ››› page 280.
● To set the speed, move the third lever up +
● Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 280.
or down – to the desired speed
Fig. 276 On the left of the steering column: op- ● Conditions in which the ACC does not re- ››› Fig. 274 6 . The speed adjustment is made
erating the ACC with the third lever. act ››› page 280. at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals.
● If you wish to increase speed by intervals of
Connecting and activating the ACC 1 km/h (0.6 mph), move the lever to position
To connect and activate the ACC, the posi-  ››› Fig. 276 2 , or to decrease it press
tion of the gearbox lever, the vehicle speed button  ››› Fig. 277 B .
and the position of the third level of the ACC
The set speed can be changed when the ve-
must all be taken into account.
hicle is stopped or during driving.
● With manual transmission, the gear lever
must be in any gear except first. With auto- Setting your distance level
matic transmission, the gear lever must be in ● To increase or reduce the distance, press
position D or S. Speed must be higher than button A to the right or left ››› Fig. 277.
Fig. 277 On the left of the steering column: op- 30 km/h (18 mph) approx.
erating the ACC with the third lever. ● To activate the ACC, move the third lever to The instrument panel display modifies the se-
position  ››› Fig. 276 1 . At this time, the lected distance ››› Fig. 274 4 . There are 5
When the ACC is connected, the green con- ACC is not active and there is no program- distance levels to choose from. SEAT recom-
trol lamp  will light up on the instrument med speed. mends level 3. The set distance can be
panel, and the programmed speed and ACC changed when the vehicle is stopped or while
● Next, press button  ››› Fig. 277 B or
status will be displayed ››› Fig. 274. driving ››› . »
move the lever to position 
››› Fig. 276 2 . At this moment the ACC is ac-
279
 Driving

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be- Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
● To disconnect the ACC move the lever to haviour of the ACC can also be affected if and have the fault repaired.
position  (fixed) ››› Fig. 276 0 . An ACC de- any of the following drive profiles are selec-
ted in the Easy Connect system:  ACC and Front Assist: currently
activated message appears and the func-
not available. No sensor vision
tion is totally deactivated. ● Normal ● This message is displayed if the radar sen-
If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just ● Sport sor's visibility is impaired by leaves, snow,
to switch it temporarily to inactive mode ● Eco dense fog or dirt. Clean the sensor
(Standby), move the third lever to position ››› Fig. 275.
● Convenience
 3 or press the brake pedal.
 ACC: currently not available.
It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby) In this case you must access the ACC set-
Gradient too steep
if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is tings using button    > Vehicle >
● The maximum road slope has been excee-
opened. SETTINGS > Driver assistance > ACC
››› page 92. ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be
guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched
Adjusting the default distance level at the
The following conditions may lead the on.
start of your journey
ACC not to react:
In wet road conditions, you should always set  ACC: only available in D, S or M
a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in ● If the accelerator is pressed. ● Select the D/S or M position on the selector
front than when driving in dry conditions ● If there is no gear engaged. lever.
››› . ● If the ESC is controlling.
 ACC: parking brake applied
In the Easy Connect system, you can pre-se- ● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.
● The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake
lect the distance level when connecting the
● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- is applied. The ACC is available once again
ACC to: Very short, Short, Medium, Long and
trically connected trailer are damaged. after the parking brake is released.
Very long using button    > Vehicle >
SETTINGS > Driver assistance ● If the vehicle is reversing.
 ACC: currently not available. In-
››› page 92. ● Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).
tervention of stability control
● The indication is displayed when the elec-
Changing the driving profile Driver messages
tronic stability control (ESC) intervenes. In this
In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving  ACC not available case, the ACC is automatically switched off.
profile selected can have an influence on the ● The system cannot continue to guarantee
ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour
safe vehicle detection and is deactivated.
››› page 264. The sensor has lost its setting or is damaged.
280
 Driver assistance systems

 ACC: Take action! Door open ● When the traction control system (ASR) is
● The indication is displayed if, when the ve- ● Vehicles with automatic transmission: the deactivated during acceleration or else the
hicle starts up on a hill with a slight slope, the ACC cannot be activated with the vehicle ESC is activated in Sport* Mode
vehicle rolls back even although the ACC is stationary and the door open. (››› page 92), the ACC switches off auto-
activated. Apply the brake to stop the vehicle matically.
from moving/colliding with another vehicle. WARNING ● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system,

There is a danger of rear collision when the the engine switches off during the ACC
 ACC: speed limit stopping phase and restarts for moving off.
distance to the vehicle in front is reduced
● The indication is displayed in vehicles with and the speed difference between both ve-
manual gearboxes if the current speed is too hicles is so great that a speed reduction by
low for the ACC mode. The speed limiter the ACC is not sufficient. In this case, brake Function to prevent overtaking on
switches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h immediately!
(12 mph). the right
● The ACC may not be able to detect all
situations properly.
 ACC: available as of the 2nd gear
● Stepping on the accelerator may cause
● The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear
the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver
(manual gearbox). braking will have priority over intervention
by the speed control or adaptive cruise
 ACC: engine speed
control.
● This indication is displayed if, when the
● Always be ready to use the brakes!
ACC accelerates or brakes, the driver does
● Observe country-specific provisions gov-
not shift up or down a gear in time, which
means exceeding or not reaching the permit- erning obligatory minimum distances be-
tween vehicles.
ted RPM. The ACC switches itself off. A buzzer
warning is heard. ● It is dangerous to activate control and re- Fig. 278 On the instrument panel display: ACC
sume the programmed speed if the road, active, vehicle detected in an outer lane.
 ACC: clutch applied traffic or weather conditions do not permit
● Vehicles with manual transmission: pressing this. Risk of accident! The ACC has a function to prevent overtaking
the clutch pedal for longer exits cruise con- on the right.
trol. Note If another vehicle is driving more slowly to the
● The programmed speed is erased once left of the vehicle, it is shown on the display
the ignition or the ACC are switched off. ››› Fig. 278. »

281
 Driving

The system brakes the vehicle to avoid over- ● Always switch off the ACC in critical sit-
taking on the right, and will avoid overtaking uations.
based on speed. The driver can interrupt the
intervention of the ACC by pressing the ac-
celerator. At low speeds the function is inac-
Note
tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or in If you do not switch off the ACC in the
city traffic. aforementioned situations, you may com-
mit a legal offence.

Deactivating the ACC temporarily

in certain situations Special driving recommendations

In the following situations the ACC should be

deactivated due to the system's limitations
››› :
Fig. 280  Vehicle changing lanes.  One
● When overtaking, on closed curves or vehicle turning and another stationary.
mountain roads, roundabouts, slip roads or
roadwork sections, preventing the system The ACC has certain limitations inherent to
from accelerating to reach the programmed the system. Certain reactions, under certain
speed. circumstances, may be unexpected or come
● When going through a tunnel, as operation late from the driver's point of view. So pay at-
could be affected. tention in order to intervene if necessary.
● When other vehicles are going slower in the The following situations require maximum at-
left lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be tention:
overtaken on the right.
● In case of heavy rain, snow or fog, the vehi- Starting driving after a stopping phase
Fig. 279  Vehicle on a bend.  Motorcyclist (only with automatic transmission)
cle in front may not be detected. ahead, out of range of the radar sensor.
After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin
WARNING driving when the vehicle in front moves off
If the ACC does not switch off in the situa- ››› .
tions described, serious accidents and inju-
ries may occur.
282
 Driver assistance systems

Overtaking Narrow or misaligned vehicles Vehicles driving in the opposite direction

When the turn signal lights up before the ve- The radar sensor can only detect narrow ve- and vehicles crossing your path
hicle starts to overtake, the ACC accelerates hicles or vehicles that circulate out of align- The ACC does not react to vehicles ap-
the vehicle automatically and thus reduces ment when they enter its range ››› Fig. 279 . proaching from the opposite direction or ve-
the distance from the vehicle in front. In these cases, you should brake as necessa- hicles crossing your path.
ry.
When the vehicle moves to the overtaking
Metal objects
lane, if the ACC does not detect another ve-
Vehicles with special loads and accesso- Metal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets used
hicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches the
ries in road works, can confuse the radar sensor
programmed speed.
Special loads and accessories of other vehi- and cause the ACC to react wrongly.
System acceleration can be interrupted at
cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or
any time by pressing the brake or moving the
over the top may be out of the ACC's range. Factors that may affect how the radar
third lever to position  ››› Fig. 276 3 .
SEAT recommends disconnecting it. sensor operates
Driving through a bend If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to
Other vehicles changing lanes heavy rain snow or mud, the ACC is deactiva-
When entering or leaving some curves, the
Vehicles changing lanes a short distance ted temporarily. A message will be displayed
radar sensor may cease to sense the vehicle
away from your own can only be detected stating this. If necessary, clean the radar sen-
driving in front of it, or react to a vehicle in the
when they are within range of the sensors. As sor ››› Fig. 275.
adjacent lane ››› Fig. 279 . The vehicle may
a consequence, the ACC will take longer to
brake unnecessarily or stop reacting to the When the radar sensor begins to operate
react ››› Fig. 280 . Brake yourself as neces-
vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has to properly, the ACC will become available. The
sary.
intervene by accelerating or interrupting message will turn off and the ACC may be
braking by applying the brake or pushing the reactivated.
Stationary vehicles
third lever to position  ››› Fig. 276 3 .
ACC operation may be affected by a strong
The ACC does not detect stationary objects
radar reverse reflection, for example in a
Driving in tunnels while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged
closed car park. SEAT recommends discon-
vehicles.
When driving through tunnels the radar sen- necting it.
sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun- If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or
nels. moves over and there is a stationary vehicle Trailer mode
in front of it, the ACC will not react to it
When driving with trailer the ACC controls
››› Fig. 280 . Brake yourself as necessary. less dynamically. »

283
 Driving

Overheated brakes
Lane Assist* Control lamp
If the brakes overheat, for example on long
and steep descents, the ACC may be deacti- Introduction It lights up yellow
 or 
vated temporarily. A message will be dis-
played stating this. In this case, adaptive Lane Assist system active but not available.
cruise control cannot be activated. The system cannot accurately recognize the lane.
See page 286, The lane assist system is active
Cruise control may be reactivated once the but it is not available (the control lamp is lit up
brake temperature has dropped. The mes- yellow).
sage will disappear. If the message ACC not
available remains on for quite a long time it It lights up green
means that there is a fault. Contact a speci-
 or 
alised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Lane Assist system active and available.
SEAT dealership.

  or   It lights up yellow
WARNING Fig. 281 On the windscreen: field of vision of
the Lane Assist system. Error in the lane departure warning system. Take the
If you do not pay attention to the Press
the brake message, the vehicle may move vehicle to a specialised workshop to repair the fault.
Using the camera located in the windscreen,
and crash into the vehicle ahead. Before
driving off again, check that the road is the Lane Assist system detects the possible Some control and warning lamps will light up
clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob- lines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in- briefly when the ignition is switched on to
stacles on the road. This could cause an voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has check certain functions. They will switch off
accident and serious injuries. If necessary, detected, the system notifies the driver with a after a few seconds.
apply the brake. corrective steering movement. The purpose is
not only to warn the driver, but also to keep WARNING
the vehicle inside the lane. This movement
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con-
can be over-regulated at any time. trol and warning lamps on page 90.
No warning is produced with the turn signals
activated, given that the Lane Assist system
understands that a lane change is required.

284
 Driver assistance systems

Indications on the instrument panel – Fig. 283 : The system is operational,

the highlighted line 1 indicates that
display
there was a risk of involuntarily crossing
the lane line and that the steering is be-
ing adjusted to correct the angle.
– Fig. 283 : The two highlighted lines 1
and 2 light up simultaneously when
both lane lines are recognised and the
Lane Assist function is activated.

Operating mode

Steering wheel vibration

The following situations can cause vibration
in the steering wheel and require the driver to
take active control of driving:

● When the steering angle assist value re-

quired to keep the vehicle in the lane is higher
Fig. 283 On the instrument panel display: Indi- than the system’s maximum operating value.
cation on the Lane Assist system display (ex-
● If the system ceases to display the lane
ample 2).
lines while assisting with steering.
Fig. 282 On the instrument panel display: In- Status display
dication on the Lane Assist system display (ex- Switching the Lane Assist system on or off
ample 1). – Fig. 282 : The system is active, but not
available, either because the minimum ● Select the corresponding menu option us-
speed has not been reached or because ing the button for the driver assistance sys-
the lane lines are not recognised. tems ››› page 89.
– Fig. 282 : The system is active and ● OR: by using the Easy Connect system with
available, both lane lines are recognised. button    > Vehicle > SETTINGS >
The steering angle is not being correc- Driver assistance ››› page 92. »
ted at this moment.

285
 Driving

Lane Assist with lane centring guide The lane assist system is active but it is not ● On roads in poor condition

The Lane Centring Guide function is inten- available (the control lamp is lit up yellow) ● In areas of road works
ded to keep the vehicle in the centre of the ● When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38
lane. mph). WARNING
If the driver has a tendency to veer slightly off ● When the Lane Assist system does not de- The intelligent technology in the Lane As-
centre in the lane, the system adapts to driver tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam- sist system cannot change the limits im-
preferences. ple, in the event warnings indicating road posed by the laws of physics and by the
works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflections. very nature of the system. Careless or un-
● The Lane Centring Guide function is ac- controlled use of the Lane Assist system
● When the radius of a curve is too small.
tivated/deactivated in the Easy Connect sys- may cause accidents and injury. The sys-
● When no road markings can be seen. tem is not a replacement for driver aware-
tem using the button    > Vehicle >
SETTINGS ››› page 92. ● When the distance to the next marking to ness.
too great. ● Always adapt your speed and the dis-
Automatic deactivation: the Lane Assist sys- tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-
● When the system does not detect any clear
tem can be automatically deactivated if bility, weather conditions, the condition of
and active steering movement during a long
there is a system malfunction. The control the road and the traffic situation.
period of time.
lamp disappears. ● Always keep your hands on the steering
● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic
wheel so it can be turned at any time.
Hands-Off Function driving styles.
● The Lane Assist system does not detect
In the absence of steering wheel activity the ● If a turn signal is activated. all road markings. The road surfaces, road
system alerts the driver with acoustic signals ● With the stability control system (ESC) in structures or objects in poor condition can
and a text message on the dash panel asking Sport mode or switched off. be incorrectly detected as road markings
to actively take over the steering. under certain circumstances by the Lane
Switching off the Lane Assist system in the Assist system. In such situations, switch the
If the driver does not react to this, the system Lane Assist system off immediately.
also alerts the driver with a little shaking mo- following situations
● Please observe the indications on the in-
tion through the brakes and, if the vehicle has Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system,
strument panel and act as is necessary.
it, activates the Emergency Assist function switch it off in the following situations:
● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-
››› page 288.
● When more attention is required of the driv- roundings.
In vehicles without Emergency Assist, the er ● When the area of vision of the camera
adaptive lane guidance function will be disa- becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the
● When driving in a sporty style
bled after the corresponding warnings to the Lane Assist system function can be affec-
driver. ● In unfavourable weather conditions
ted.

286
 Driver assistance systems

CAUTION Traffic Jam Assist has stopped. It automatically moves off again
when the vehicle ahead moves.
In order to avoid influencing the operation
of the system, the following points must be Description and operation Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use on
taken into account: motorways and wide roads. Therefore, never
● Regularly clean the area of vision of the use it in city traffic.
camera and keep it in a clean state, without
snow or ice ››› Fig. 281. Technical requirements for using Traffic
● Do not cover the area of vision of the Jam Assist
camera. ● Lane assist must be activated: button
● Check that the area of vision of the wind- Fig. 284 Related video    > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Driver
screen camera is not damaged. assistance > Lane assist system
Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep the ››› page 92.
Note car within its lane and to move in convoy in ● Adaptive lane guidance must be activated:
case of traffic congestion or slow traffic. button    > Vehicle > SETTINGS >
● The lane departure warning system has
Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function of Driver assistance > Lane assist sys-
been exclusively developed for driving on
Lane Assist ››› page 284 and combines Lane tem
paved roads only.
Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be
● If the Lane Assist system does not work as
described in this chapter, do not use it and (ACC) ››› page 276. Therefore, it is essential connected and active ››› page 279.
contact a specialised workshop. that you read these two chapters carefully ● The speed must be below 60 km/h
and note the limitations of the systems and (38 mph).
● If there is a fault in the system, have it
the information about them.
checked by a specialised workshop.
Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the Lane
Operation of Traffic Jam Assist Assist control light turns yellow)
At speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), Traffic ● If any of the conditions mentioned on
Jam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis- page 287, Technical requirements for us-
tance preset by the driver with respect to the ing Traffic Jam Assist are no longer met.
vehicle ahead and help stay within the lane
● If any of the conditions required for opera-
››› .
tion of the Lane Assist are not met
To do this, the system automatically controls ››› page 284. »
the accelerator, brakes and steering, and
slows the vehicle, stopping it fully if neces-
sary, when faced with a vehicle in front that
287
 Driving

● If any of the conditions necessary for the ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour- Note
adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no neys. ● If Traffic Jam Assist does not work as de-
longer fulfilled ››› page 276.
● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there is scribed in this chapter, stop using it and
poor visibility, for example, in case of snow, contact a specialised workshop.
Situations where traffic jam assist has to ice, rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slip- ● If the system is faulty, take it to a special-
be disconnected pery sections or flooded roads.
ised workshop and have it checked.
Due to the limitations of the system, Traffic ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or
Jam Assist must always be switched off in the on roads where the surface is not firm. Traf-
following situations: fic Jam Assist has been designed for use on

● When more attention is required by the

paved roads only. Emergency Assist
● Traffic Jam Assist does not react to peo-
driver.
ple or animals or vehicles crossing your Description and operation
● When driving in a very sporty style. path or that approach you head-on down
● In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in case the same lane. Emergency Assist detects whether there is in-
of snow or heavy rain. ● If Traffic Jam Assist does not reduce activity by the driver and can automatically
● When driving on roads in poor condition. speed sufficiently, brake the vehicle imme- keep the car within the lane and stop it alto-
diately by applying the pedal. gether if necessary. This way the system can
● In sections with roadworks.
● If the vehicle continues to move when you actively help avoid an accident.
● In city journeys. wish it to stop after a driver intervention
Emergency Assist is an additional function of
prompt, brake the vehicle by applying the
WARNING Lane Assist ››› page 284 and combines Lane
pedal.
Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control
The smart technology incorporated into ● If driver intervention is requested on the
(ACC) ››› page 276. Therefore, it is essential
Traffic Jam Assist cannot defy the laws of dash panel display, immediately resume
that you read these two chapters carefully
physics; it only works within the limits of the control of the vehicle.
and note the limitations of the systems and
system. Accidents and severe injury may ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times the information about them.
occur if Traffic Jam Assist is used negli- to be ready to intervene in the steering at
gently or involuntarily. The system is not a any time. The driver is always responsible
replacement for driver awareness. Operation of Emergency Assist
for keeping the vehicle in its own lane.
● Adapt your speed and safe distance to ● Always be prepared to take charge of
Emergency Assist detects when the driver
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit driving (accelerating or braking) yourself.
ceases to perform any activity and repeated-
the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- ly requests that he/she regain active control
ditions. of the vehicle, through the use of optical and

288
 Driver assistance systems

acoustic warnings and by applying the The following conditions may cause the of the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the
brakes. Emergency Assist not to react or to switch Lane Assist camera are covered or have
off automatically: lost their settings, the system may inter-
If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys-
tem automatically takes over the accelerator, ● If the driver accelerates, brakes or moves vene inopportunely in braking or in steer-
the steering wheel. ing.
brakes and steering in order to brake the ve-
hicle and keep it in its lane ››› . When the ● The Emergency Assist does not react to
● If any of the conditions mentioned in
emergency assistant is actively regulating, people or animal or vehicles crossing your
››› page 289, Technical requirements for
the hazard lights turn on ››› page 124. path or which approach you head-on in the
using the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled.
same lane.
If the remaining braking distance is sufficient, ● If any of the conditions required for opera-
if necessary the system slows down the vehi- tion of the Lane Assist are not met
WARNING
cle until it stops completely and automati- ››› page 284.
cally switches on the electronic parking ● If any of the conditions necessary for the If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor-
brake ››› page 292. adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no
tunely, serious accidents and injuries may
occur.
longer fulfilled ››› page 276.
Connecting and disconnecting Emergen- ● If the Emergency Assist does not operate
cy Assist WARNING properly, switch off the Lane Assist
››› page 284. Doing so will also switch off
The Emergency Assist is switched on auto- The smart technology incorporated into the Emergency Assist.
matically when the Lane Assist is switched on the Emergency Assist cannot overcome the
● Have the system checked by a special-
››› page 284. limits imposed by the laws of physics; it on-
ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a
ly works within the limits of the system. The
SEAT dealership for this.
Technical requirements for using the Emer- driver is responsible for driving the vehicle.
gency Assist ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to
● The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must be the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit Note
switched on ››› page 276. the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- ● Automatic interventions by the Emergen-
ditions. cy Assist on the brakes may be interrupted
● The Lane Assist must be switched on
● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times by pressing the accelerator or brake or by
››› page 284. moving the wheel.
to be ready to intervene in the steering at
● The selector lever must be in the D/S posi- any time. ● Hazard warning lights that come on auto-
tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate. ● The Emergency Assist alone cannot al- matically can be switched off by pressing
● The system must have detected a lane ways avoid accidents or serious injuries. the accelerator or the break, moving the
separation line on both sides of the vehicle steering wheel or pressing the hazard
››› Fig. 283.
● If the operation of the Emergency Assist
is impaired, for example if the radar sensor
warning light switch. »
289
 Driving

● If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may Braking and parking fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under
decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a certain circumstances, the rear of the vehi-
complete stop. cle may skid, with the danger of losing con-
● When the Emergency Assist is activated, Braking system trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.
it is only available again after the ignition ● If the  lamp lights up, alone or accom-
has been switched off and back on again. Control lamps panied by a warning message on the in-
strument panel display, please go immedi-
ately to a specialised workshop to check
 It lights up red
the brake pads and to replace them if they
Brake fluid level too low ››› page 339 or fault in the are worn.
brake system.
 Do not carry on driving!

Information about the brakes

 It lights up red
Electronic parking brake ››› page 292; OR hand New brake pads
brake applied ››› page 293. For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200
The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-
miles), new brake pads have not yet reached
leased.
their maximum braking capacity, and need to
be “run in” first. However, you can compen-
 It lights up yellow sate for the slightly reduced braking effect by
Front brake pads worn. applying more pressure on the brake pedal.
Contact a specialised workshop immediately. Avoid overloading the brakes while running
them in.
WARNING
Wear
● If the brake warning lamp  does not go
out or if it lights up when driving, the brake The rate of wear on the brake pads depends
fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there a great deal on how you drive and the condi-
is a risk of an accident ››› page 339, Brake tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a
fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. particular problem in urban traffic and short
Obtain technical assistance. stretches, or with very sporty driving.
● If the brake warning lamp lights up  to-
Depending on the speed, the braking force
gether with the ABS lamp  this could be
and the environmental conditions (e.g.
due to an ABS fault. When this function
290
 Braking and parking

temperature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly ● If you are driving on roads which have
produced when braking. a few times at a moderately high speed ››› . been salted, braking effectiveness may be
decreased.
Wet roads or road salt Fault in the brake system ● Brakes can overheat if used excessively
In certain situations (for example, on driving If the brake pedal travel should ever increase on slopes. Before driving down a long steep
through flooded areas, in severe downpours suddenly, this may mean that one of the two slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and
or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac- brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to change down into a lower gear or range.
tion could be delayed if the discs and pads the nearest specialised workshop and have Therefore, using the engine brake relieves
are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re- the brakes.
brakes should be “dried” by pressing the member that you will have to apply more ● Gentle continuous braking causes the
brake pedal several times. pressure on the brake pedal and allow for brakes to overheat and the braking dis-
longer stopping distances. tance will increase. Apply and then release
At high speed and with the windscreen wipers the brakes alternately.
activated, the brake pads will briefly touch
Low brake fluid level ● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the
the brake discs. This takes place, although
brake system only in a suitable traffic situa-
unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if
tion. Do not put other road users in danger:
to improve the response time of the brakes the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid
there is risk of causing an accident.
when they are wet. level is monitored electronically.
● Ensure the vehicle does not move while in
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be neutral, when the engine is stopped. The
Brake servo
temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for braking distance is increased considerably
some distance without using the brakes when The brake servo increases the pressure you when the brake servo is not active.
there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The apply to the brake pedal. It works only when ● If the brake is subjected to high stresses,
layer of salt that accumulates on the discs the engine is running. vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-
and pads can be removed by gently apply- tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of
ing the brakes a few times. WARNING the brakes.
Any anomaly in the brake system can in- ● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers
Corrosion crease the braking distance, with the re- could restrict the airflow to the brakes and
There may be a tendency for corrosion to sulting risk of an accident. cause them to overheat. Before purchasing
form on the discs and dirt to build up on the ● New brake pads and discs must be run in accessories please read the relevant in-
brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently and do not have the correct friction during structions. »
or the brakes are not used very often. the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced
braking capacity may be offset by pressing
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust on the brake pedal a little harder.
has formed on the disks, it is advisable to
291
 Driving

CAUTION Electronic parking brake* Disconnecting the electronic parking

brake
● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving
your foot on the pedal when it is not neces- ● Switch the ignition on.
sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re- ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 285. At the same
sulting in longer stopping distances and time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the
greater wear. engine is running, press the accelerator pedal
● Before driving down a long, steep gradi- slightly.
ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se- ● The control lamp of button ››› Fig. 285 (ar-
lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine
row) and the red  control lamp on the in-
braking and relieves the brakes. If you still
strument panel go out.
have to use the brakes, it is better to brake
firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes
continuously. Fig. 285 In the lower part of the centre con-
Automatic release of the electronic park-
sole: electronic parking brake button ing brake upon moving off

Note The electronic parking brake is automatically

The electronic parking brake replaces the switched off when starting if, after the driver's
● If the brake servo is out of action, for ex- handbrake. door is closed and the driver's seat belt fas-
ample when the car is being towed, you will
tened, any of the following situations take
have to press the brake pedal considerably Applying the electronic parking brake place:
harder than normal to make up for the lack
of servo assistance. The electronic parking brake can be activa-
● In vehicles with automatic transmission: a
ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill,
● If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac- gear range is engaged or the vehicle is
even when the ignition is switched off. Acti-
cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel switched to another one and the accelerator
covers, it is important that the flow of air to
vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi-
pedal is lightly pressed.
the front wheels is not obstructed, other- cle.
● In vehicles with manual transmission: the
wise the brakes can overheat.
● Pull and hold the  ››› Fig. 285 button. clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting
● The parking brake is activated when the off and the accelerator is pedal lightly press-
control light of button ››› Fig. 285 (arrow) is ed.
on and the red  control lamp on the instru- ● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are
ment panel is always on. exceptions that allow the automatic parking
● Release the button. brake to be released without the driver's seat
belt being fastened.

292
 Braking and parking

The parking brake can be prevented from be- ● To stop the braking process, release the  ● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be
ing automatically released by continuously button or press the accelerator. possible to disconnect the electronic park-
pulling up the  ››› Fig. 285 switch when ing brake. Use the jump-start ››› page 47.
starting off. WARNING ● When the electronic parking brake is ap-
The electronic parking brake is not discon- The improper use of the electronic parking plied or released, noises may be heard.
nected until the  button is released. This brake can cause accidents and serious in- ● The system performs automatic and au-
can facilitate starting off when a heavy load jury. dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi-
is towed ››› page 308. ● Never use the electronic parking brake to cle if some time elapses without the elec-
stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency. tronic parking brake being used.
Automatic activation of the electronic Braking distances can be considerably lon-
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in- ger, since, under certain circumstances,
correctly only the rear wheels brake. Always use the
foot brake. Handbrake
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
● Never accelerate from the engine when a
electronic parking brake is activated auto-
gear range or a gear is engaged and the
matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly
engine is running. The vehicle could move,
if: even if the electronic parking brake is acti-
● The selector lever is in the D/S or R position vated.
or in the Tiptronic selector gate.
● AND: the vehicle is stationary. CAUTION
● AND: the driver door is open. To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally
moving when parking it, first apply the
electronic parking brake and then remove
Emergency brake function
your foot from the brake pedal. Fig. 286 Handbrake between the front seats.
Only use the emergency brake function if you
are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot The handbrake should be applied firmly to
Note
brake ››› . prevent the vehicle from accidentally moving.
● In vehicles with a manual gearbox, re-
● Pull and hold the  ››› Fig. 285 button in Apply the handbrake when you leave your
leasing the clutch and accelerating at the
this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At vehicle and when you park.
same time automatically disconnects the
the same time, an acoustic warning can be electronic parking brake.
heard. Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up ››› Fig. 286. »
293
 Driving

Releasing the handbrake Auto Hold Function Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv-
– Pull the lever up slightly and press the re- er can lift their foot off the brake pedal.
lease knob in the direction of the arrow When the driver touches the accelerator
››› Fig. 286 and guide the handbrake lever pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv-
down fully ››› . ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake.
The vehicle moves according to the slope of
Always pull the handbrake all the way up, to
the road.
avoid driving off while the brake is on ››› .
If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-
If you drive faster than 6 km/h (4 mph) with
ditions required by the Auto Hold function is
the handbrake on, the following message*
impaired, it disconnects itself and the button's
will appear on the instrument panel: HAND-
control light goes out ››› Fig. 287. The elec-
BRAKE ON. You will also hear an audible
tronic parking brake connects automatically,
warning. Fig. 287 In the lower part of the centre con-
sole: Auto Hold function button. if necessary, to park the vehicle safely ››› .

WARNING
The control lamp on button  ››› Fig. 287 re- Conditions for keeping the vehicle station-
● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi- ary with the Auto Hold function
mains on while the Auto Hold function is con-
cle when it is in motion. The braking dis- nected. ● The driver door must be closed.
tance is considerably longer, because
braking is only applied to the rear wheels. Once connected, the Auto Hold function as- ● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
Risk of accident! sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station- ● The engine is running.
● Failure to fully lower the handbrake lever ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-
can affect the operation of the system, and od of time with the engine running, for exam- Switching the Auto Hold function on and
can also cause heating and wear of the ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at off
rear brakes. traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-
tent stops. Pulse button  ››› . The control lamp on
the button goes out when the Auto Hold func-
CAUTION When connected, the Auto Hold function au- tion is switched off.
Always apply the handbrake before you tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling
leave the vehicle. In addition, engage first when stationary without pressing the brake
or rear gear in the gradient function, or set pedal.
the selection lever to P. After detecting that the vehicle is stationary
and the brake pedal has been released, the

294
 Braking and parking

Automatically engaging and disengaging Automatic gearbox: If the accelerator is Hill driving assistant
the Auto Hold function pressed
3 Valid for vehicles without the Auto Hold func-
If the Auto Hold function was switched on with 5. Automatic gearbox: If any of the tyres tion
the  button before disconnecting the igni- has only minimal contact with the
tion, the function will remain on after the ground, e.g. in the case of axle articula- The hill driving assistant helps the driver to
ignition is re-connected. tion. move off and upward on a hill, both forwards
and backwards, when the vehicle is station-
If the Auto Hold function was not switched on, ary.
WARNING
it will automatically remain off next time the
ignition is engaged. The smart technology incorporated into The system maintains brake pressure for ap-
the Auto Hold function cannot defy the proximately two seconds after the foot is tak-
The Auto Hold function connects automat- laws of physics; it only works within the lim- en off the brake pedal, to prevent the vehicle
ically if the following conditions are met its of the system. The greater convenience from moving when it is started. During these 2
(all points must be met at the same time provided by the Auto Hold function should seconds, the driver has enough time to re-
››› ): never tempt you to take any risk that may lease the clutch pedal and accelerate with-
compromise safety. out the vehicle moving and without having to
1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the
● Never leave the vehicle running and with use the handbrake, making start-up easier,
brake pedal on a flat surface or on a
the Auto Hold function switched on. more comfortable and safer.
slope.
● The Auto Hold function cannot always
2. The engine rotates “correctly”. These are the basic operation conditions:
keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down-
hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on ● being on a ramp or hill/slope,
The Auto Hold function is automatically
slippery or frozen surfaces.
turned off if the following conditions are ● driver door closed,
met: ● vehicle completely stationary,
Note
1. If any of the conditions mentioned on ● engine running and foot on the brake,
Before entering a car wash, always switch
››› page 294, Conditions for keeping off the Auto Hold function, because if the ● having a gear engaged or being in neutral
the vehicle stationary with the Au- for a manual gearbox, or with the selector
electronic parking brake is automatically
to Hold function are no longer met. lever at positions D/S or R for an automatic
connected, it may cause damage.
2. If the engine is running irregularly or an gearbox.
anomaly is detected.
3. If the engine is turned off or stalls. WARNING
● If you do not start the vehicle immediate-
4. Manual gearbox: The clutch and the ac-
celerator are pressed at the same time. ly after taking your foot off the brake pedal,
the vehicle may roll back under certain »
295
 Driving

ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by

conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use  It lights up
changing the torque.
the hand brake immediately.
ASR manually deactivated.
● If the engine stalls, depress the brake The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin
pedal or use the hand brake immediately. Or: ESC in Sport mode ››› page 298. is desirable ››› page 298.
● When following a line of traffic uphill, if
you want to prevent the vehicle from rolling  It lights up Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
back when starting off, hold the brake ped- ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-
al down for a few seconds before starting ABS faulty or does not work.
der braking until the vehicle has reached a
off.
The control lamps light up together when the virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the
ignition is switched on and should turn off af- vehicle even when the brakes are on full.
Note ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not
The Official Service or a specialist work- taken for the function check. pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal
shop can tell you if your vehicle is equip- pulsate while the ABS is working.
ped with this system. If the running gear or brake system is modi-
Brake assist systems fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-
verely limited.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Stabilisation and brake as- Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)
The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces
sistance systems the tendency to skid and improves the stabili- The brake assist system can reduce the re-
ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC quired braking distance. The braking force is
Control lamps detects critical handling situations, such as automatically boosted if you press the brake
vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin pedal quickly in an emergency. You must
 It lights up on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicle keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-
by braking individual wheels or by reducing ger has passed.
Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused by the engine torque. The warning lamp will
the system. flash on the instrument panel when the ESC is Traction control system (ASR)
The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the
intervening .
ABS fails, the lamp also lights up. In the event of wheelspin, the traction control
The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system system reduces the engine torque to match
 Flashes (ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the the amount of grip available. This helps the
traction control system (ASR), electronic dif- car to start moving, accelerate or climb a
ESC or ASR activated. ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control gradient.
(XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitigation*.
296
 Braking and parking

Electronic differential lock (EDL) hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower ● When the driver presses the accelerator,

When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes drive torque than it could transmit. This can the automatic braking does not take place.
the spinning wheel and directs the power to cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this ● When the braking pressure through press-
the other driven wheel. This function is active case the front axle, which results in under- ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-
up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph). steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory. tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake
The XDS can detect and correct this effect automatically.
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel
from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati- via the sensors and signals of the ESC. ● Multi-collision braking will not be available
cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve- Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside if ESC is malfunctioning.
hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on wheel and counter the excess driving torque
again automatically when the brake has of that wheel. This means that the requested WARNING
cooled down. trajectory is much more precise. Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet
ground can result in loss of vehicle control
XDS works in combination with the ESC and is
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation* and serious injury to the driver and passen-
always active, even when ASR is disconnec- gers.
If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control ted, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis-
the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway. ● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron-
connected.
When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the ic torque control system cannot exceed the
vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto- limits imposed by the laws of physics. Al-
Multi-collision brake ways bear this in mind, especially on wet or
matically brake the towing vehicle within the
In an accident, the multi-collision brake can slippery roads. If you notice the systems
limits of the system and mitigate the sway.
help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of cutting in, you should reduce your speed
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available
skidding during the accident and causing immediately to suit the road and traffic
in all countries ››› page 314. conditions. Do not be encouraged to take
other collisions.
risks by the presence of more safety sys-
Electronic engine torque management The multi-collision brake works for front, side tems. If you do, an accident may occur.
(XDS) or rear accidents, when the airbag control ● Please remember that the accident risk
When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- unit records its activation level and the acci- always increases if you drive fast, espe-
tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h cially in corners or on a slippery road, or if
speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the (6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the you follow too close behind the vehicle in
wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re- vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam- front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist,
ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel. aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on- EDS and the electronic torque control sys-
This may mean that in certain situations the board network tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-
torque delivered to the inner wheel is too The following actions control automatic brak-
dents! »
high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other ing during the accident:

297
 Driving

● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur- Connecting and disconnecting the ››› page 92. In vehicles with a driver informa-
tion system* the corresponding indication will
faces (for example, icy or snow-covered). ESC and ASR
Despite the control systems, the driven be displayed.
wheels could spin, affecting the stability of
the vehicle: risk of accident! When the ASR is disconnected, the control
warning light  lights up on the instrument
cluster.
Note
● The ABS and ASR will only operate cor- Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in
rectly if the four wheels have identical “Sport” mode
tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius
● In “Sport” mode, the ESC can be discon-
of the tyres can cause the system to re-
nected and connected using the Easy Con-
duce engine power when this is not desired.
nect system ››› page 92. In vehicles with a
● The regulating processes of the systems
driver information system* the corresponding
can make noises due to their operation. Fig. 288 Centre console: Button for switching
indication will be displayed.
on/off the ESC and ASR
● If the warning lamp  or  lights up,
there could be a fault ››› page 89. When “Sport” mode is connected, the inter-
The ESC is switched on automatically when
● Any modifications made to the vehicle ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle,
the engine is started, and only works when
(for example, to the engine, brake system, and the anti-slip regulation (ASR1)) interven-
the engine is running and includes the ABS,
running gear or to the combination of tions are limited. In addition, the  control
EDS and ASR systems.
wheels and tyres) may affect the operation lamp lights up on the instrument panel.
of the ABS, ASR and EDS. The ASR function should only be switched off
in situations in which traction is insufficient. Disconnection of the ESC*
Depending on the finishes and versions, there In some versions of the model, besides the
is the possibility of disconnecting only the traction control system (ASR), the electronic
ASR or activating the ESC in “Sport” mode. stability programme (ESC) can also be
switched off.
Disconnecting and connecting the ASR
● Press the  button ››› Fig. 288 for approxi-
● The ASR can be disconnected and connec- mately 1 second to switch to ESC Sport
ted using the Easy Connect system mode.

1) In vehicles with 4-wheel drive, the ASR is dis-

connected completely ››› .

298
 Braking and parking

● Press the button  ››› Fig. 288 for approxi- Additionally, on steep slopes and inclines
sive mode when the brake pedal is re-
mately 3 seconds to switch off the Electronic leased (depending on the model version). Before switching off the engine, rotate the
Stability programme (ESC), including the ASR steering wheel so that if the vehicle should
function. The  control lamp lights up and the move, it will be held by the kerb.
ESC OFF message is displayed permanently
on the instrument panel display. Parking ● On slopes, turn the front wheels so that
● The ASR and ESC function are reconnected they are against the edge of the kerb.
by pressing the button  ››› Fig. 288. To park the vehicle ● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of
● OR: Activate or deactivate the ESC Sport or the road.
ESC in the Easy Connect system ››› page 92. When parking your vehicle, all legal require-
The  control lamp and the ESC OFF text on ments should be observed. WARNING
the instrument panel switch off. Always note the following points when park- ● Avoid parking the vehicle where the hot
ing the vehicle: exhaust system could ignite inflammable
WARNING materials, such as dry grass, low bushes,
● Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› . spilt fuel or flammable materials.
The ESC Sport mode should be activated
only when traffic conditions and the ability ● Set the parking brake ››› page 293 or con- ● Do not leave passengers inside a closed
of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding! nect the electronic parking brake vehicle, they may not be able to open
● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising ››› page 292. doors or windows. Locked doors hinder the
possibility of a rescue.
function will be limited to allow for a sporti- ● For an automatic gearbox, move the selec-
er drive. The driving wheels could spin and tor lever to position P. ● Children should not be left alone in the
the vehicle could skid. vehicle. They could tamper with the hand-
● Switch the engine off and remove the key
● If the ESC is deactivated, the vehicle sta-
brake or the gears, which could cause the
from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel vehicle to move without control.
bilisation function is not available. slightly to engage the steering lock.
● Depending on weather conditions, it may
● With a manual gearbox, engage first gear become extremely hot or cold inside the
Note on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse vehicle. This can be fatal.
● If the ASR is disconnected or the Sport gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.
mode is selected, cruise control* will be ● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with Note
switched off. you.
● In ESC OFF mode, the ESC will be tempo-
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
key can only be removed from the ignition
rarily reactivated to assist the driver during
when the lever is in position P.
braking and will then switch back to pas-

299
 Driving

Help with parking and ma- for driver awareness. Responsibility always being detected by the system, the obstacle
lies with the driver. in question may disappear from the meas-
noeuvring ● The sensors have blind spots in which ob- urement sensors as the vehicle moves clos-
stacles and people are not detected. Pay er, and the system will no longer warn of its
presence. In certain circumstances, ob-
Parking aid parking and ma- special attention to children and animals.
jects such as high kerbs that could damage
● Always keep visual control of the sur-
noeuvring (ParkPilot) roundings: use the mirrors for additional
the underside of the vehicle are not detec-
ted.
help.
● If the parking distance warning system is
Introduction
ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera-
CAUTION ble damage.
Parking distance warning system functions ● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,
can be affected by different factors that wheel arch and vehicle underbody can
can cause damage: modify the orientation of the sensors. This
● Under certain circumstances, the system can affect the parking aid function. Have
does not detect or display certain objects: the function checked by a specialised
Fig. 289 Related video workshop.
– Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,
posts and thin trees. ● A number plate or number plate holder
These assist systems help you when parking with dimensions that exceed the space for
and manoeuvring: – Objects that are located above the
the number plate, or a cured or deformed
sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.
– Park assist plus. It is an assistant that gives number plate can cause false detections or
– Objects with certain surfaces or struc- a loss of visibility for the sensors.
a visual and audio warning of obstacles de-
tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-
tected in front and behind the vehicle
der snow.
››› page 301. Note
● Certain surfaces of objects and gar-
– Rear parking aid. An audio assistant that ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- ● The display on the Easy Connect screen
warns about obstacles detected behind the sors' signals. The system cannot detect shows a slight time delay.
vehicle ››› page 304. these objects or people wearing such ● In certain situations, the system can give
clothes correctly. a warning even though there is no obstacle
WARNING ● Sensor signals may be affected by exter- in the detected area;
● Always pay attention, by looking directly, nal sound sources. This may prevent them – rough or cobbled surfaces or with long
to traffic and the area around the vehicle. from detecting people or objects. grass,
Assistance systems are not a replacement ● If the system warns you of the proximity
of a low obstacle, please note that after
300
 Help with parking and manoeuvring

– external ultrasound sources, such as Parking System Plus* B 0.60 m

other vehicles equipped with C 1.60 m
ultrasound systems,
Description D 0.60 m
– downpours, heavy snow, hail or dense
exhaust gases, As you approach the obstacle, the frequency
– if the number plate is not perfectly se- of the audible signals will increase. The signal
cured to the bumper surface, will sound continuously at around 0.30 m:
Stop!
– in gradient changes.
● In order to guarantee good operation, If separation is maintained, the warning vol-
keep the sensors clean, free of snow and ume reduces after about 4 seconds.
ice, and do not cover them with stickers or
other objects.
● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- Parking Aid operation
ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,
unless you do so very briefly, and always Fig. 290 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-
keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. nect system screen.
● Fitting certain accessories to the front of
Parking aid plus assists the driver by giving
the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-
vertising, may interfere with the operation
visual and audio warnings about obstacles
of the Park Assist. detected in front of and behind the vehicle.
● We recommend that you practice park- The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When an
ing in an area without traffic. obstacle is detected, it is indicated by audible
● The volume and tone of the signals and signals and in the Easy Connect system
indications can be changed ››› page 305. ››› Fig. 290.
● In vehicles without an infotainment sys- When moving close to an obstacle, it is possi- Fig. 291 Centre console: parking aid button.
tem, these parameters can be modified in a ble to know if the obstacle is in front of the ve-
SEAT Official Service or in a specialised Manually connecting and disconnecting
hicle or behind it by choosing different
workshop. the parking aid
sounds.
● Please observe information on towing a ● Press the  button once. »
The approximate measurement range of the
trailer ››› page 305.
sensors is:

A 1.20 m

301
 Driving

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- ● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis- segments will appear on the left of the dis-
play (the audible sounds remain active) tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approx play ››› Fig. 292.
● Press a button on the main menu of the fac- depending on whether or not an obstacle is
It only operates every time the speed is re-
tory-assembled infotainment system. detected).
duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first
● OR press the BACK  function button. time.
Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear
View Camera “RVC”) If it is switched off using the  button, one of
Automatic connection of Parking Aid the following actions must be taken for it to
● Select reverse gear.
● Select reverse gear. reactivate automatically:
● OR press the RVC function button.
● OR: If you drive forward at a speed of less ● Switch off the ignition and switch it on
than 15 km/h (9 mph) and you encounter an A short confirmation signal will be heard and again.
obstacle, it is detected when it is approx. less the button symbol will light up when the sys-
● OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph)
than 95 cm. away. If the automatic connec- tem is switched on.
approx.
tion is activated, a reduced display is shown
››› Fig. 292. ● OR: move the lever into position P and pack
again.
● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis- Automatic activation
tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approx ● OR: switch the automatic activation on and
depending on whether or not an obstacle is off in the Easy Connect system.
detected)
The automatic activation of the parking aid
can be switched on and off in the Easy Con-
Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid
nect system ››› page 92:
● Move the selector lever to position P.
● Switch the ignition on.
● OR: drive forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph) or
faster. ● Select: infotainment button    > Ve-
hicle > SETTINGS > Parking and ma-
Temporary suppression of sound in Park- noeuvring.
ing Aid ● Select Automatic activation. If the box
Fig. 292 Miniature indication of automatic ac-
● Press the  function button. tivation. is checked , the function is connected.

If activated automatically, an audible sound

Change from reduced view to full view When the parking aid plus connects auto-
warning will only be given when obstacles in
matically, a diagram of the vehicle and the
● Select reverse gear. front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap-
● OR: press the car icon on the reduced view. prox.
302
 Help with parking and manoeuvring

CAUTION – Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on Front volume*

the vehicle’s path and are at a distance Volume in the front and rear area.
The automatic connection of the Parking
of less than approx. 30 cm away.
Aid only works when you are driving slowly.
If driving style is not adapted to the circum- – Red segments: obstacles are less than Front sound settings/sharpness*
stances, an accident and serious injury or approx. 30 cm away.
Sound tone in the front area.
damage may be caused.
With the Media System Plus, Navi System or
Navi System Plus, yellow lines show the ex- Rear volume*
pected trajectory based on turns of the steer- Volume in the rear area.
Visual indication segments ing wheel.
If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way, Rear sound settings/sharpness*
the corresponding audible warning will Sound tone in the rear area.
sound.
When the penultimate segment is displayed, Adjust volume
the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In When the parking aid is switched on, the vol-
the collision zone, the obstacles are repre- ume of the audio source will be reduced, de-
sented in red, including those out of the path. pending on the selected option.
Stop the vehicle! ››› in Introduction on
page 300, ››› in Introduction on
page 300 ! Error messages
Fig. 293 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-
nect system screen. If a an error or fault message appears on the
Setting the indications and audio instrument panel in Parking assist, there is a
The optical indication of the segments works fault.
as follows:
signals
If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-
– White segments: the obstacle is more The indications and audio signal settings are necting the ignition, it will not be indicated
than approx. 30 cm away from the path in Easy Connect* ››› page 92. next time the parking aid is connected.
or in the direction opposite to travel.
Automatic activation If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in
They are also displayed when the elec-
the areas A and B are displayed
tronic parking brake is activated.  on –  off.
››› Fig. 290. If a front sensor is faulty, only the
obstacles in the areas C and D will be dis-
played. Symbol  is displayed. »
303
 Driving

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci- tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6
Rear parking aid*
alised workshop to have the fault repaired. mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and
10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear.
Description
Following an intervention, the braking while
Trailer mode manoeuvring function will be inactive in the The rear parking aid is an audible assistant
same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once that warns of obstacles located behind the
On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch, the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s vehicle.
when the trailer is connected, the rear sen- position is changed, the function will be ac-
sors will not activate when reverse gear is en- There are sensors integrated in the rear
tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply.
gaged or button  is pressed. Therefore, any bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you
objects behind or to the side of the vehicle The manoeuvre braking function is set in the are alerted by audible warnings and visually
will not be indicated on the screen and no Easy Connect system with button    > on the Easy Connect system.
audio signals will sound. Vehicle > SETTINGS > Parking and ma-
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
noeuvring.
The screen will only display objects detected not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and
at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will ●  on – permits the use of the braking while the like, as this could affect the system's op-
be hidden. manoeuvring function. eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 360.
●  off – does not permit the use of the The approximate measurement range of the
braking while manoeuvring function. rear sensors is:
Manoeuvre braking function*
Temporary suppression of emergency Side area: 0.60 m
3 Only valid with Parking System Plus
braking Central area: 1.60 m
The emergency braking function is used to ● When the function is deactivated with the
minimise damage in the event of a collision. As you approach the obstacle, the frequency
Manoeuvre braking button that appears on of the audible signals will increase. The signal
Depending on the equipment, if the Parking the Parking assist screen of the Easy Con- will sound continuously at around 0.30 m:
Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring nect system. Stop! ››› in Introduction on page 300,
function activates emergency braking when it ● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or ››› in Introduction on page 300!
detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path that bonnet are opened.
could cause a collision, driving forwards or in If the separation is maintained, the warning
reverse. volume is reduced after about 4 seconds.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is

activated automatically. For the system to
operate, manoeuvring speed must be be-
304
 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parking Aid operation Towing device reality. Distance perception is also distor-
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket ted.
Parking Aid connection device from the factory, when the trailer is ● Due to the screen resolution or light con-
● Select reverse gear. connected, the parking aid will not be activa- ditions, some items may be blurry or not
ted when reverse gear is engaged. displayed at all. Take care with thin posts,
Parking Aid disconnection fences, railings or trees that might not be
seen on the screen and could damage the
● Place the selector level in position P, N or D
vehicle.
(for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re- Reverse Assist (Rear View ● The reverse assist has blind spots where
verse (for manual gearboxes).
Camera)* it cannot see people or objects. Monitor the
vehicle's surrounding area at all times.
Setting the indications and audio signals
● Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice
The indications and audio signal settings are Operating and safety warnings
and snow, and do not cover it.
in Easy Connect* ››› page 92.
● The system is not a replacement for driv-
● Rear volume*: volume in the rear area. er awareness. Supervise the parking ma-
noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding area
● Rear sound settings/treble*: sound
at all times.
tone in the rear area.
● Do not be distracted from the traffic by
● Lower volume: when the parking aid is looking at the screen.
switched on, the volume of the audio source Fig. 294 Related video
● The images are only two-dimensional.
will be reduced, depending on the selected Protruding objects or holes in the road, for
option. WARNING example, are more difficult to detect or
● The reverse assist does not make it possi- may not be seen at all.
Error messages ble to precisely calculate the distance from ● Vehicle load modifies the representation
If a an error or fault message appears on the obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys- of the guide lines ››› Fig. 296. The width rep-
instrument panel in Parking assist, there is a tem's own limits, hence its negligent use resented by the lines decreases with vehi-
fault. may cause serious accidents and injuries if cle load. Pay special attention to the sur-
used without due care. The driver should be roundings when the inside of the vehicle of
If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- aware of his/her surroundings at all times the luggage compartment are loaded.
necting the ignition, it will not be indicated to ensure safe driving.
● In the following situations, objects or oth-
next time the parking aid is connected. ● The camera lens expands and distorts er vehicles appear to be further away or
We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci- the field of view and displays the objects closer than they actually are. Pay special
alised workshop to have the fault repaired. on the screen in a way that is different from attention: »
305
 Driving

– If moving from a flat surface to a slope A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver ● If the image displayed is not very reliable or
and vice-versa. when reverse parking or manoeuvring is distorted, or if the lens is dirty.
– If the vehicle is heavily loaded.
››› Fig. 295 ● If the area behind the vehicle is incomplete.

– When the vehicle approaches objects The camera image is viewed together with ● If the vehicle is heavily loaded.
that are not on the ground surface or orientation lines projected on the Infotain- ● If the position of the camera has changed
that protrude from it. These objects ment system screen. Part of the bumper can
after a rear-end collision. Have the system
may be outside the camera angle when be seen at the bottom, which can be used by
checked by a specialised workshop.
reversing. the driver as a reference point.
Familiarising yourself with the system
Note Rear assist settings
To familiarise yourself with the system, the
● It is important to take great care and pay Rear assist offers the user the possibility to
orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-
special attention if the driver is not familiar change the image's brightness, contrast and
ommends practising in a place without too
with the system. colour settings.
much traffic or in a car park when there are
● Reverse assist will not be available if the To change these settings: good weather and visibility conditions.
rear lid is open.
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place without
Cleaning the camera lens
switching off the ignition or the infotainment
system. Keep the camera lens clean and clear of
Usage instructions snow and ice:
● Apply the parking brake.
● Select reverse gear. ● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-
based glass cleaning product and clean the
● Press the  function button displayed on
lens with a dry cloth.
the screen.
● Remove snow using a small brush.
● Make the desired adjustments on the menu
by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by ● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.
moving the scroll button.
CAUTION
Requirements for parking and manoeu- ● Do not use abrasive cleaning products to
vring with the rear assist clean the camera lens.
The system should not be used in the follow- ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove
Fig. 295 In the rear bumper: location of the re-
ing cases: ice or snow from the camera lens, as it
verse assist camera.
could be damaged.

306
 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parking and manoeuvring with re- Switching the system on and off Parking manoeuvre
verse assist ● Reverse assist is connected by a contact ● Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se-
when engaging reverse gear. lect reverse gear.
● The system switches off 8 seconds after ● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel
disengaging reverse gear and immediately so that the side lines lead towards the park-
after removing the contact. ing space.
● The camera will stop transmitting images ● Guide the vehicle into the parking space so
above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re- that the side lines run parallel to it.
verse engaged.

In combination with the parking aid plus sys-

tem ››› page 301, the camera image will no
longer be displayed when reverse gear is dis-
Fig. 296 Display on the Easy Connect system engaged, and the system will display the op-
screen: guide lines. tical information provided by the parking aid
system.
Meaning of the orientation lines ››› Fig. 296
It is also possible to hide the reverse assist im-
1 Lateral lines: extension of the vehicle
age:
(approximately in its total width) on the
road. ● By pressing one of the Infotainment system
2 End of the side lines: approx. 2 m behind buttons on the display.
the vehicle on the road. ● OR: by clicking on the miniature vehicle
3 Intermediate line: approx. 1 m behind the shown on the screen.
vehicle on the road.
If you wish to display the rear assist image
4 Horizontal red line: a safe distance of again:
approx. 40 cm at the rear of the vehicle
on the road. ● Disengage and re-engage reverse gear.
● OR: Press the RVC function button1)

1) The RVC button will only be displayed when re-

verse gear is engaged.

307
 Driving

Towing bracket device* Start-Stop system operates as normal. No

special characteristics need to be taken into
drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing
bracket, but do not exceed the specified lim-
account. it.
Trailer mode If the system does not recognise the trailer or
WARNING
the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by
Introduction SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon- Never use the trailer to transport people,
nected by pressing the corresponding button since it would put their life in danger and is
Take into account country-specific regula- in the lower part of the centre console before also prohibited.
tions about driving with a trailer and the use driving with the trailer, and it should remain
of a towing bracket. off for the rest of the journey ››› . WARNING
The vehicle has been developed primarily for Undue use of the towing bracket may
carrying people, although it can also be used Vehicles with driving profile selection cause injury and accidents.
to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use ● Only use the towing bracket if it is in a
technical equipment. This additional load has of the Eco driving profile is not recommen- perfect state of repair and is properly se-
an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption ded. You are advised to select another of the cured.
and vehicle performance and in some cases available driving profiles before beginning to ● Never modify or repair the towing bracket
can reduce the service intervals. drive with a trailer. in any way.
Driving with a trailer requires more force from ● In order to reduce the danger of injury in
the vehicle, and thus more concentration Trailer weight/drawbar load
the event of rear-end collisions and to
from the driver. Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists
In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both you do not load the trailer up to the maximum when parking the vehicle, cover or remove
permitted trailer weight, you can then climb the tow hook when you are not using a trail-
the vehicle and the trailer.
correspondingly steeper slopes. er.
● Never fit a towing bracket “with weight
Maximum vertical load technically permit- The maximum trailer weights listed are only
ted on the coupling device distribution” or “load compensation”. The
applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above
vehicle has not been designed for this type
The maximum technically permitted vertical sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en-
of towing bracket. The towing bracket
load of the trailer’s drawbar on the hitch of gine performance and the ability to climb
could fail and the trailer could be released
the towing device is 80 kg. slopes, the tow load decreases proportional- from the vehicle.
ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-
Vehicles with the Start-Stop system bination must be reduced by 10% for every
1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing the trailer with the maximum authorised
bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the
308
 Towing bracket device*

WARNING system must be disconnected manually Technical requirements

whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise
Driving with a trailer and transporting
the brake system could be damaged and Vehicles that are factory-fitted with a towing
heavy or large objects can affect driving
could consequently cause a serious acci- bracket meet all the technical and legal re-
properties and even cause an accident.
dent or injury. quirements for driving with a trailer
● Always secure the load properly using
● Always disconnect the Start-Stop system ››› page 315.
belts or straps that are suitable and in
manually when using a towing bracket that If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing
good condition.
has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop. bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for
● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and the maximum authorised load of the trailer
traffic conditions. Note that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing
● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al- bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and
● Trailers with a high centre of gravity are
ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm the trailer and must be properly secured to
more likely to overturn than those with a
low one. ››› page 100. Otherwise, the tilt sensor the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing
could cause the alarm to go off. bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for
● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's
this vehicle. Always check and take into ac-
● Take great care when overtaking. count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-
first 1000 km ››› page 266.
● Reduce speed immediately if you notice structions. Never fit a towing bracket “with
● SEAT recommends that, if possible, the
that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. weight distribution” or “load compensation”.
tow hook be removed or covered when it is
● Never drive at more than 80 km/h not going to be used. In the event of a rear-
(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more Towing bracket fitted on the bumper
end collision, the damage to the vehicle
than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir- could be greater if the tow hook is fitted. Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to
cumstances). This also applies in countries the area where the bumper is mounted. The
● Some retrofitted towing brackets cover
where driving at higher speeds is permit-
the rear towing eye. In these cases, the towing bracket should not impair the bum-
ted. Take into account the speed limit for
towing eye should not be used for tow- per's function. Do not make modifications or
vehicles with trailers in the corresponding
starting or for towing other vehicles. For repairs to the exhaust system or the brake
country, as it could be less than the speed
this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit- system. Make regular checks to ensure that
limit for vehicles without a trailer.
ted with a towing bracket, always keep the the towing bracket is secure.
● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.
vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
Engine cooling system
Driving with a trailer increases the load on the
WARNING
engine and cooling system. The cooling sys-
If the towing bracket has been retrofitted tem should have sufficient coolant and be »
by a non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop
309
 Driving

prepared for the additional effort involved in Trailer maximum electricity consumption Hitching and connecting a trailer
driving with a trailer. Never exceed the values indicated!

Trailer brakes Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

If the trailer has its own brake system, please
Turn signal (on each side) 42 watts
take the relevant legal requirements into ac-
count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys- Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts
tem to the vehicle's brake system.
Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts

Tow cable Rear fog light 42 Watts

Always use a cable between the vehicle and
the trailer ››› page 310. WARNING Fig. 297 Schematic representation: assign-
ment of the pins of the trailer's electrical sock-
If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is
et.
Trailer tail lights not the right one, the trailer could become
detached from the vehicle and cause seri-
The trailer's rear lights should comply with
ous injury. Pin Meaning
the statutory safety regulations ››› page 310.
1 Left turn signal
Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly
CAUTION
to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not 2 Rear fog light
sure that the trailer's electrical connection is ● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-
rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic 3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
correct, have it checked by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT system may be damaged.
4 Right turn signal
dealership for this. ● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric
current, the vehicle's electronic system 5 Rear light, right
Exterior mirrors may be damaged.
6 Brake lights
● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
If you cannot see the area behind the trailer 7 Rear light, left
tem directly to the electrical connections
with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle,
of the tail lights or any other power sour- 8 Reverse lights
additional mirrors will have to be installed in
ces. Only use the connections intended for
accordance with the regulations of the coun-
providing electric current to the trailer. 9 Permanent live
try in question. The exterior mirrors should be
adjusted before you start driving and must 10 Live charge cable
provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.
11 Earth for pin 10

310
 Towing bracket device*

Pin Meaning that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly. Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always
However, make sure that the cable does not turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt
12 Unassigned rub on the ground while driving. sensor could cause the alarm to go off.
13 Earth for pin 9
Trailer tail lights Trailers with LED tail lights

Power socket for trailer Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED
they are working correctly and that they rear lights cannot be connected to the anti-
The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power comply with the relevant safety regulations. theft alarm system.
socket for the connection between the trailer Make sure that the maximum permissible
and the vehicle. With the engine running, When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does
power that can be absorbed by the trailer is
electrical devices on the trailer receive power not go off when the electrical connection
not exceeded ››› page 310.
from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with
10 of the trailer power socket). light-emitting diodes.
Include in the anti-theft alarm
If the system detects that a trailer has been If the Eco driving profile was selected when
The trailer is included in the anti-theft system
connected, the consumers on the trailer will hitching the trailer, this will automatically
if the following conditions are met:
receive electricity through this connection switch to the Normal profile. If the system
(pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live. ● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an cannot detect the attached trailer or if the
This powers, for example, the trailer's interior anti-theft alarm and towing bracket. towing bracket has been retrofitted by an au-
lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in to repair shop other than SEAT, you must
● If the trailer is electrically connected to the
a caravan only receive electrical power if the manually select the Normal profile before
towing vehicle through the trailer power sock-
engine is running (through pin 10). you start driving with a trailer attached. To re-
et.
connect the Eco profile once the trailer has
To avoid overloading the electrical system, ● If the electrical systems of the vehicle and been unhitched, switch the ignition off and
you cannot connect the ground wires of pin trailer are in perfect condition and have no back on once.
3 , pin 11 or pin 13 to each other. faults or damage.
If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you ● If the vehicle is locked with the key and the WARNING
will need to use an adapter cable. In this case anti-theft alarm is activated. If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
the function corresponding to pin 10 will not connected, it may lead to an excessive
be available. When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-
amount of current supplied to the trailer,
gered if the electrical connection with the
which can cause abnormalities in the entire
trailer is cut off.
Tow cable vehicle electronic system, as well as acci-
The tow rope must always be securely fixed
dents and serious injuries. »
to the towing vehicle and loose enough so
311
 Driving

● Ensure that any repairs that need to be the anti-theft alarm system, have them in- tical load technically permissible on the
carried out on the electrical system are spected by a specialised workshop. coupling device ››› page 308. An insufficient
carried out by a specialised workshop. vertical load has a negative influence on the
● If the trailer accessories consume energy
● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.
through the power socket to the trailer and
tem directly to the electrical connections the engine is turned off, the battery will dis- The vertical load increases the weight on the
of the tail lights or any other power sour- charge. rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-
ces. ● If the vehicle battery is running low, the pacity.
electrical connection with the trailer will be
WARNING automatically cut. Gross combination weight of the towing
vehicle and trailer
Contact between the pins of the trailer
power socket can cause short circuits, The gross combination weight is the actual
overloading of the electrical system or fail- Trailer loading weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual
ure of the lighting system, and consequent- weight of the loaded trailer.
ly can cause accidents and serious injuries. Technically permissible maximum trailer
In some countries trailers are classified into
● Never connect the pins of the trailer pow- weight and vertical load on the coupling
distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-
er socket to each other. device
taining information from a specialised work-
● Make sure any work on bent pins is car- The technically permissible maximum trailer shop regarding which type of trailer is most
ried out by a specialised workshop. weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow suitable for your vehicle.
››› . The vertical load on the coupling is ex-
CAUTION erted vertically from above on the hook of the Trailer loading
towing bracket.
Do not leave the trailer connected to the The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
vehicle when parked; place it on its support The information on the maximum trailer must be balanced. In order to do this, the
wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or weight and vertical load on the coupling de- load must be as close as possible to the max-
falls due, for example, to a variation of the vice contained in the type plate of the towing imum vertical load technically permissible on
load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will bracket are experimental values only. The the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-
be placed on the towing bracket and the correct figures for your specific model, which tributed between the back and front of the
trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer may be lower than these figures, are given in trailer:
can be damaged. the vehicle documentation. The information in
the vehicle documentation takes precedence ● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
Note at all times. objects are as near to the axle as possible or
above it.
● In case of anomalies in the electrical sys- To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-
mends making the most of the maximum ver- ● Secure the trailer load properly.
tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in
312
 Towing bracket device*

Tyre pressure ● Always load the trailer correctly. engine. Otherwise, the braking system could
Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac- overheat and even fail.
● Always secure the load properly using
cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec- belts or straps that are suitable and in ● The trailer weight, as well as the gross com-
ommendations. good condition. bination weight of the towing vehicle and
trailer, change the centre of gravity and the
When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the
properties of the vehicle.
towing vehicle with the maximum allowable
pressure ››› page 348. Driving with a trailer ● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer
is loaded, then the load distribution is incor-
WARNING Adjusting the headlights rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and
with extra caution.
If the maximum permissible axle weight, the The front part of the vehicle may be raised
maximum load technically permissible on when the trailer is connected and the light
Hill starts with a trailer
the coupling point, the maximum author- may dazzle the rest of the traffic.
ised vehicle weight or the gross combina- Depending on the slope of the hill and the
tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
Adapt the height of the headlights using the
combination weight of the towing vehicle and
are exceeded, accidents and serious inju- headlight range adjuster ››› page 1251).
trailer, the vehicle might start rolling back-
ries may occur. wards slightly when you first start up.
● Never exceed the values indicated!
Specific features of driving with a trailer
For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:
● The actual weight on the front and rear
● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake
axles must never exceed the maximum per- gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre- ● Press and hold the brake pedal.
missible axle weight. The weight on the vent the jerking that can be caused by the
● Press the  button once to disconnect the
front and rear axles must never exceed the locking of trailer wheels.
electronic parking brake ››› page 292.
maximum permissible weight. ● Due to the gross combination weight of the
● If the vehicle is equipped with a manual
towing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-
gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way
WARNING tance increases.
down.
A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil- ● When going down a slope, go into a lower
● Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se-
gear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip-
ity and security of the towing vehicle and
tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad-
lector lever to position D/S ››› page 254. »
trailer, which could lead to accidents and
serious injuries. vantage of the braking power provided by the

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED

xenon headlights.
313
 Driving

● Pull out the  button and hold it in that po- ● Take into account the speed limit for vehi- ● The trailer has a rigid draw bar.
sition to immobilise the towing vehicle and cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than ● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped
trailer with the electronic parking brake. for vehicles without a trailer. with a mechanical overrun brake.
● Release the brake pedal.
● Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case of WARNING
a manual gearbox, slowly release the clutch Stabilisation of the towing vehicle The enhanced safety provided by the elec-
pedal. and trailer combination tric stability control of the vehicle and trail-
● Do not release the  button until the en- er should not lead you to take any risks that
The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer could compromise your safety.
gine has sufficient power to start driving.
combination is an additional function of the ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
WARNING electronic stability control (ESC). times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may If the vehicle and trailer stabilisation system
● Accelerate with caution when the road is
lead to loss of control of the vehicle and detects that the trailer is weaving, it takes ac-
serious injury. slippery.
tion on the steering control to reduce the
weaving of the trailer. ● When adjusting any settings, stop accel-
● Driving with a trailer and transporting
heavy or large objects will change the ve- erating.
hicle handling and braking distances. Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa-
● Always drive cautiously and carefully. tion requirements WARNING
Brake earlier than usual. ● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow- The electric stability control for the vehicle
● Adapt your speed and driving style at all ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a and trailer may not correctly detect all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and compatible towing bracket. driving conditions.
traffic conditions. Slow down, especially ● The ESC and ASR are active. The control ● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-
when driving down hills or slopes. sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-
lamp  or  is not lit up on the instrument
● Accelerate with particular care and cau- cluster. so switched off.
tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu- ● The stability system does not always de-
● The trailer is connected to the towing vehi-
vres. tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise
cle through the trailer power socket.
● Take great care when overtaking. Reduce these correctly.
● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h
speed immediately if you notice that the ● When driving on surfaces with poor grip,
trailer is swaying, however slightly. (approx. 37 mph).
the trailer can even interfere with the sta-
● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing ● The maximum vertical load technically per- bility system.
vehicle and trailer while accelerating. missible is not being exceeded on the cou- ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity can
pling device. tip over without having previously weaved.
314
 Towing bracket device*

● If a trailer is not attached, but a connec- Depending on the country or version, the re- Clean the housing cavity surfaces and treat
tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g. movable hook of the towing device is under them with an appropriate conservation prod-
installation of a bicycle rack with lights), the cover of the load area of the luggage uct.
repeated automatic braking may occur in compartment.
extreme driving conditions. WARNING
The tow hook is fitted and removed by hand
and is supplied with a key. ● Before each journey with the tow hook fit-
ted, make sure that it is correctly adjusted
1 13-pin connector and attached in its housing.
Towing bracket device* 2 Safety lug ● If the tow hook is not properly fitted and

3 Hook housing attached, do not use it.

Description ● Do not use the towing bracket device for
4 Hook housing cap
towing if it is damaged or has missing parts.
5 Protective cap of the ball head
● Do not modify or adapt the towing device
6 Removable tow hook connection.
7 Locking lever ● Never unhook the tow hook while the
8 Lock cover trailer is hitched.

9 Release bolt
CAUTION
10 Lock
● Handle the tow hook with care in order to
11 Locking balls
avoid damaging the bumper paintwork.
12 Key ● The top part of the hook housing is
greased ››› Fig. 298 3 . When using the de-
Operation and conservation vice, make sure that it has not been re-
Put the cover on the housing cavity so that moved.
dirt cannot get in.
Before hooking up a trailer, always check the Note
ball head and apply suitable grease if neces- ● Contact a specialised workshop if you
sary. lose your key.

Use the protective cap to store the tow hook. ● Towing the vehicle with the tow hook
Fig. 298 The towing device supports trailers /
tow hook / key ››› page 49.

315
 Driving

Placing in the standby position ● Lever ››› Fig. 300 C is in the lower position.

When adjusted in this way, the tow hook is

ready to be installed.

CAUTION
The key cannot be removed or turned in the
standby position.

Fig. 300 Reserve position: position verification

Before assembling it, place the tow hook in

the standby position with the following two
steps.

● Insert and turn the key in the direction of the

arrow ››› Fig. 299 1 until the hole in the key
faces upwards (arrow).
● Grab the tow hook under the protective
cover.
● Press the release bolt ››› Fig. 299 B in the
Fig. 299 Tow hook reserve position direction of arrow 2 , while pressing lever C
in the direction of arrow 3 as far as it will go.
● The lever will remain blocked in this posi-
tion.

Verification of the reserve position

● Key ››› Fig. 300 A is in the released posi-
tion (the key hole is facing upwards).
● The release bolt ››› Fig. 300 B can be
moved.

316
 Towing bracket device*

Fitting the tow hook Lever ››› Fig. 301 A automatically turns in
the direction of arrow 2 upwards, and the re-
lease bolt B moves outwards (its red and
green parts are visible) ››› .
If lever A does not turn or the release bolt B
does not come out, the tow hook should be
removed by turning the lever as far as possi-
ble downwards from the housing cavity, and
the tow hook’s support surfaces and the cavi-
ty should then be cleaned.

Step 2.
Fig. 301 Putting the tow hook in place. Step 1.
● Turn the key to the right just half a turn, until
the hole in the key faces downwards
››› Fig. 302 1 .

● Remove the key 2 .

● Place the cover B on the lock 3
››› Fig. 302 ››› .
● Check that the tow hook is correctly fixed in
Fig. 302 Putting the tow hook in place. Step 2.
place ››› page 318, Safety check.
Step 1.
WARNING
● Remove the hook housing cap ››› Fig. 298
● Keep your hands away from the lever
4 downwards.
when fitting the tow hook to avoid trapping
● Put the tow hook in its standby position your fingers ››› Fig. 301 A .
››› page 316. ● Do not try to force the lever up to turn the
● Hold the tow hook from below and fit it into key. The detachable ball would not be se-
the hook hosing in the direction of the arrow cured properly! »
››› Fig. 301 1 until it is heard to fit into place
››› .

317
 Driving

CAUTION ● The red and green part of the unlocking Removing the tow hook
bolt B is completely visible ››› Fig. 303.
● After removing the key, place the cover
● The key has been removed.
over the lever's lock. If the lock becomes
soiled it will be impossible to insert the key. ● Cover C is over the lock ››› Fig. 303.
● Keep the device's housing cavity clean.
Dirtiness can prevent the tow hook from WARNING
being safety secured! ● Keep your hands away from the lever
● If the device is removed, always place when releasing the tow hook to avoid trap-
the cap in the hook's housing. ping your fingers ››› Fig. 303 A .
● The towing device should only be used if
the tow hook has been properly locked in
Safety check place!

Fig. 304 Removing the tow hook

Fig. 303 Tow hook fixed correctly

Make sure that the tow hook is correctly at-

tached before each use.

Tow hook fixed correctly:

● The tow hook will not fall out of the housing
cavity after a strong “impact”.
● Lever A is facing upwards ››› Fig. 303.
318
 Towing bracket device*

WARNING Connecting the trailer

● Never remove the tow hook while the
trailer is hitched.
● Never leave the tow hook loose in the lug-
gage compartment. It could cause damage
in the even of sharp braking, and even jeop-
ardise passenger safety!

CAUTION
Fig. 305 Removing the tow hook ● If the lever is not pressed down as far as it
will go, after removing the tow hook it will
● Remove cover A from lock 1 ››› Fig. 304. continue upwards and will not lock into its Fig. 306 Turning the 13-pin connector
standby position. The tow hook must re-
● Insert key B in the lock 2 ››› Fig. 304.
main in this position before being fitted ● Grip the connector in area A and remove it
● Turn the key to the left 3 just half turn, until
again. in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 306.
the hole in the key is facing upwards
● Store the device in the reserve position ● Remove the protective cap from the ball
››› Fig. 304. with the key inserted and with the same head ››› Fig. 298 5 .
● Hold the tow hook from below. side facing upwards. Risk of damaging the
● Attach the trailer to the ball head.
● Press the release bolt A in the direction of key!
arrow 1 , and at the same time press lever B ● When operating the lever, do not apply ● Open the cover of connector A and con-
as far as it will go in the direction of arrow 2 too much pressure (for example, do not nect the trailer ››› Fig. 306.
››› Fig. 305. stand on it)! ● Hook the trailer retention cable into the
safety eyelet ››› Fig. 306 B . When hooked,
Now the tow hook has been released and the retaining cable must curve in all trailer
Note
falls freely. If this does not occur, press with positions in front of the vehicle (sharp curves,
the other hand from above. ● Before extracting the tow hook, we rec-
reverse, etc.).
ommend fitting the protective cover over
The tow hook is now in the standby position the ball head. Follow these steps in reverse to unhitch the
and is therefore ready to be reinserted into
● Remove dirt from the tow hook before trailer.
the hook housing ››› .
storing it with the vehicle tools.
● Fit cover 4 ››› Fig. 298 onto its housing. WARNING
● Never use the safety lug to tow! »
319
 Driving

● After hooking up the trailer and connect- Retrofitting a towing bracket ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-
ing the socket, check that all the trailer's just the cooling system or mount thermal pro-
rear lights are working properly. tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a
Description SEAT dealership for this.
Note If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance
● If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting,
specifications should always be kept in mind.
check the fuses on the instrument panel The distance between the centre of the ball
››› page 54. head and the road ››› Fig. 307 C must never
● The contact between the retainer cable be less than that indicated. This also applies
and the safety lug may give cause wear in when the vehicle is fully loaded, including the
the lug. This wear does not stop it from op- technically permissible maximum vertical
erating properly and is not a fault. It is ex- load on the coupling device.
cluded from the warranty.
● When hitching and unhitching the trailer,
Distance specifications ››› Fig. 307:
the vehicle's handbrake should be applied. A Attachment points (lower part of the vehi-
cle)
B 65 mm (minimum)
C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
D 1040 mm
E 317 mm
F 319 mm (Leon) / 596 mm (Leon Sportour-
er ST)

WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
connected, this may lead to malfunctions
Fig. 307 Limits and attachment points for ret- in the entire vehicle electronic system, as
rofitting a towing bracket. well as to accidents and serious injuries.
● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
SEAT recommends that towing brackets be tem to the electrical connections of the tail
retrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex- lights or any other unsuitable power

320
 Towing bracket device*

sources. Only use suitable connectors to

connect the trailer.
● The towing bracket should be retrofitted
only at a specialised workshop.

WARNING
If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-
suitable, the trailer may separate from the
vehicle while driving. This could cause seri-
ous accidents and fatal injuries.

Note
● Only use towing brackets that have been
approved by SEAT for the model in ques-
tion.
● In some versions, the fitting of a conven-
tional towing hook solution is not recom-
mended. Please consult your Technical
Service.

321
 Practical tips

Practical tips ● Place it in the space on the hinge of the

open flap ››› Fig. 308.
● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or
a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in
● Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as the vicinity due to the risk of explosion.
Checking and refilling lev- the pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off the fuel ● Observe legislation governing the use,
supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis-
els nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion ter in the vehicle.
chamber in the fuel tank. ● For safety reasons we do not recommend
Refuelling ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-
far as it will go. cle. In an accident the canister could be
damaged and could leak.
Refuelling ● Close the lid.
● If, in exceptional circumstances, you
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- have to carry a spare fuel canister, please
en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank observe the following points:
flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at – Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-
››› page 324. ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.
This could cause an explosion. Always
The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-
place the canister on the ground to fill
en in ››› page 372.
it.
– Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-
Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy-
ble into the spare fuel canister.
brids
– If the spare fuel canister is made of
Every 6 months it is necessary to run on pet-
Fig. 308 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attach- metal, the filling nozzle must be in con-
rol until the control lamp  switches off, and tact with the canister during filling. This
ed.
then the tank must be refilled. This is neces- helps prevent an electrostatic charge
sary to ensure that the system works proper- building up.
The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the
ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv-
vehicle. – Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the
ing with petrol.
luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is
The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked
explosive. Risk of fatal accident!
and locked automatically using the central WARNING
locking.
Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se-
● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the rious burns and other injuries.
left side. ● When refuelling, turn off the engine and
turn off the ignition for safety reasons.
● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
322
 Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION ● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if Read the instructions on how to use the natu-
it is very small, it is possible that it will not ral gas pump carefully.
● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it
be able to open the protective device. Be-
should be removed immediately. It could
fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by Refuelling
otherwise damage the paintwork.
turning it, try a different pump or request
● Never run the tank completely dry. The The natural gas filler mouth is behind the fuel
specialist help.
catalytic converter can be damaged. tank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth
● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can- ››› Fig. 309.
● When filling the fuel tank after having run ister, the protective device will not open.
it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in ● Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth
engine, the ignition must be switched on for very slowly. 1 .
at least 30 seconds before starting the en-
● Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gas
gine. When you then start the engine it may
take longer than normal (up to one minute) filler mouth.
to start firing. Refuelling natural gas ● The fuel tank will be full when the pump
compressor automatically cuts the supply.
For the sake of the environment ● If you wish to finish refuelling in advance,

Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause press the button on the pump to stop the flow.
the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
If the ambient temperature is very high, the
natural gas pump’s overheating protection
Note disconnects it automatically.
There is no emergency mechanism for the
manual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec- Closing the fuel tank cap
essary, request assistance from special- ● Check that the mouth retainer 2 of the gas
ised personnel. filler is not trapped with the filler. If this hap-
Fig. 309 Tank cap open: gas filler mouth 1 , pens, replace it in the filler mouth.
filler mouth retainer 2 .
Note ● Insert the plug in the filler mouth.
Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective Before refuelling, the engine and the ignition, ● Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it
device that prevents the insertion of the mobile telephone and heating must be click into place. »
wrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to re- switched off separately ››› .
fuel with Diesel nozzles.

1) Depending on country
323
 Practical tips

WARNING again until the natural gas system has been Fuel types
inspected.
Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily
flammable substance. Incorrect handling Identification of fuels1)
of the natural gas can cause accidents se- Note
rious burns and other injuries.
● The filling nozzles of natural gas pumps
● Before refuelling with natural gas, en- can differ in the way they are operated. Ask
gage the filling mouth correctly. If you can a qualified employee at the petrol station
smell gas, stop refuelling immediately. to do the refuelling if you do not know how.
● Read and take note ››› in Natural gas ● Noises heard when refuelling are normal
on page 327. and do not indicate damage in the system.
● The vehicle natural gas system is pre-
WARNING pared both for refuelling with a small com-
pressor (slow refuel) and a large compres-
The vehicle is not suitable for liquefied nat-
sor (fast refuel) at natural gas service sta-
ural gas (LNG) or liquefied petrol gas (LPG),
tions. Fig. 310 Identification of fuels according to
so LNG or LPG should not be used under
European Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/
any circumstances. Liquid gas can cause
an explosion of the natural gas tanks and
Fuels are identified by different symbols on
cause severe injuries! .
the pump and on your vehicle's tank flap. The
identification serves to prevent confusion
WARNING when choosing the fuel.
If the vehicle underbody touches the
1 Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-
ground or in the event of a rear collision,
nol). The number indicates the percent-
there could be damage to the natural gas
age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,
tanks. If damaged, natural gas tanks are
full of fuel and can explode, causing seri- for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.
ous or fatal injuries. 2 Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-
● Even if you don't notice the smell of gas, diesel). The number indicates the per-
take the vehicle to a specialised workshop centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”
immediately and have the natural gas sys- means, for example, a proportion of bio-
tem checked. Do not refuel natural gas diesel of max. 7%.

1) Depending on country
324
 Checking and refilling levels

3 Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- ● Only use fuel additives that have been
Natural Gas. mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only approved by SEAT. The products that con-
use moderate engine speeds and a light tain substances to increase the octane rat-
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- ing or decrease knocking may contain met-
Type of petrol ble. al additives that damage the engine and
catalytic converter. This type of products
3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol engines must not be used.
Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or
The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the super 95 octane petrol at least ● Do not use fuels shown in the pump as
fuel tank flap. We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 containing metals. LRP (lead replacement
octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- metal additives. Risk of engine damage!
95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power
verter and must only be run on unleaded ● High engine speed and full throttle can
loss).
petrol. The petrol must comply with the damage the engine when using petrol with
standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- an octane rating lower than the correct
with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only grade for the engine.
(E10)1). The types of petrol are differentiated use moderate engine speeds and a light
by using the octane numbers (RON) or via throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-
the anti-knock index (AKI). Note
ble.
● Fuel with an octane rating higher than the
Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or CAUTION one required by the engine can be used.
normal 91 octane petrol at least ● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g. ● In countries in which there is no sulphur-

We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc- E30 - E100 button must not be used. The free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-
fuel system would be damaged. Exception: phur content fuel.
tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91
octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power vehicles with Totalflex engine ››› page 326,
loss) may be used. Ethanol fuel.
● A single refuelling with leaded fuel or
Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at other metal additives entails a permanent
least deterioration of the effectiveness of the
catalytic converter.
You should use super 95 octane petrol (91
AKI) at least.

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are

driving in.
325
 Practical tips

Ethanol fuel The diesel can thicken at very low tempera- Natural gas
tures, thus affecting the start or operation of
3 Valid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines 3 Valid for: vehicles with natural gas engines
the engine. Ask your service station attendant
You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en- if their diesel is suitable for winter use. Natural gas can be compressed or in liquid
gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with with form, addition to others.
the marking “Petrol/ethanol”. Water in the fuel filter2)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is Use of compressed natural gas (CNG)
Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with
unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord- equipped with a fuel filter with a water sep- Vehicles with a natural gas engine must only
ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high arator, the instrument panel may display the be working with CNG (Compressed Natural
percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel- following warning:  Water in the fuel Gas CNG), or with a mixture of biomethane if
led in the same way as petrol refuelling. filter. If this is the case, take the vehicle to it complies with Regulation EN 16723-2.
Also consider that ››› page 325, Type of pet- a specialised workshop so that they can Fuels such as liquefied natural gas (LNG), liq-
rol drain the fuel filter. uefied petroleum gas (LPG) or hithane (mix-
ture of hydrogen and methane) should not be
Note CAUTION used to fill the tank.
● Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol,
SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-
sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de- heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents Natural gas quality and consumption
crease impurities that using E100 ethanol as they can cause severely damage the
Natural gas is divided into the groups H and L
fuel might have left in the engine. fuel system and the engine.
depending on its quality.
● If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not
start the engine under any circumstances. Gas type H has a superior heating power and
Risk of damaging the fuel system and the inferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide content
Diesel engine! Obtain technical assistance. than type L. The higher the heating power of
3 Valid for: vehicles with diesel engines the natural gas, the lower the consumption
will be.
Please note the information on the inside of
the fuel tank flap. The engine management automatically
adapts to the natural gas used according to
We recommend you use Diesel according to its quality. Therefore, different quality gases
standard EN 590. can be mixed in the tank, without the need for

1) This motor is only available in some markets.

2) Depending upon country.
326
 Checking and refilling levels

comprehensive draining before applying a ● If necessary, warn the emergency serv- AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11 °C (+13
different quality gas. ices. °F). The system has heating elements that
guarantee its operation even at low tempera-
Updated information relating to natural gas
tures.
quality is displayed on the instrument panel WARNING
››› page 74. Damaged, corroded or rusted tanks can re-
The capacity of the AdBlue® tank is approx.
11 litres.
sult in serious injury or even death.
Regular checks of the natural gas system
● Have the natural gas deposits checked at When the range is less than 2400 km the
The natural gas tanks may be damaged or least every 4 years (visual check). instrument panel screen displays a message
corroded by external factors. The walls of the ● Natural gas tanks have a limited service requesting an AdBlue® refill.
gas tanks are weakened by deformations, life. Have the natural gas tanks replaced If this message is ignored, the yellow warning
damage or corrosion. The vehicle owner must when required. You can obtain further infor- lamp  will come on when the remaining
have a specialised workshop check (visual mation about this at SEAT dealers or speci- range is less than 1000 km. The indication
check) the gas system at least once every alised workshops. that in XXX km it will no longer be possible to
4 years. Natural gas tanks must be replaced
restart the engine will appear on the instru-
at a specialised workshop.
ment panel display.
WARNING AdBlue® If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, when
Failure to act when you can smell gas in the remaining range of 0 km is displayed, it will
vehicle or when refuelling can cause seri- Information about AdBlue® no longer be possible to restart the engine.
ous injuries. The red warning lamp  will light up.
● Stop the vehicle immediately. AdBlue® is a registered brand of the German
● Switch the ignition off. Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA)
and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel
● Open the doors to appropriately venti-
Exhaust Fluid).
late the vehicle.
● Extinguish cigarettes immediately.
CAUTION
Fig. 311 Related video
● Move away from the vehicle or switch off
Filling the AdBlue® tank excessively can
objects that may cause sparks or a fire.
The consumption of AdBlue® depends on cause damage to the tank.
● If you continue to smell gas, do not con- your personal driving style, the temperature
tinue driving! of the system and on the outdoor tempera-
● Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault ture when the vehicle is used.
repaired.

327
 Practical tips

Control and warning lamps WARNING Fill with a refill bottle

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO
 It lights up red trol and warning lamps on page 90. 22241-1. Only use original containers.

The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue level ● Open the tank cover ››› Fig. 312.
is too low.
● Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-
Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then Fill AdBlue®
top up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue ti-clockwise direction.
››› page 328. ● Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-
tions, indicated on the refill bottle.
 and  They light up red ● Check the expiry date.

The engine cannot be restarted! Fault in the ● Remove the cap of the refill bottle.
AdBlue system. ● Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler
Contact a specialised workshop. Have the system
neck vertically and screw the bottle on by
checked there.
hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.
● Press the refill bottle in the direction of the
 It lights up yellow
filler neck and hold it in this position.
The AdBlue reserve is low. ● Wait until the contents of the refill bottle
Fig. 312 AdBlue tank cap.
Refill AdBlue within the next kilometres (or miles) that
are indicated ››› page 328. SEAT recommends con-
have been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Do
tacting a specialised workshop. Operations prior to refilling not compress or break the bottle!
Park the vehicle on a flat surface and turn off ● Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di-
They light up yellow the ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on a rection and gently pull it upwards ››› .
 and  curb, the level indicator may not detect the ● The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liquid
There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitable refill properly. comes out of the bottle.
AdBlue fluid has been used.
Contact a specialised workshop. Have the system If a warning message about AdBlue® levels ● Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-
checked there. appears on the dash panel display, fill at tion until it is tightly closed.
least the minimum amount required (ap- ● Close the fuel tank flap.
Several warning and control lamps should prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amount
light up for a few seconds when the ignition is will the system detect that AdBlue® has been
Operations before driving
switched on, signalling that the function is be- added and you will be able to start the en-
ing verified. They will switch off after a few gine again. The maximum amount that can ● After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig-
seconds. be refilled is 11 litres. nition.

328
 Checking and refilling levels

● Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec- ● Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO should not park your vehicle near a surface
onds for the system to detect the fluid load. 22241-1. Only use original containers. that can catch fire easily. Fire hazard!
● Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds ● Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or ad- ● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
before starting the engine! ditives. Any type of damage caused by around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
such a mixture will not be covered by the hazard!
Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue warranty.
Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re- ● Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank.
duction. This could result in engine damage. Control lamps
● Do not carry the refill bottle inside the
● Open the tank cap. vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera-
● Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise ture changes or damage to the bottle), the
 It lights up

››› Fig. 312. AdBlue® may damage the vehicle. Fault in the emission control system.
Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-
● Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the
cialised workshop to have the engine checked.
first time. For the sake of the environment
● Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ-
ment-friendly manner.
 Flashes
until you hear a click.
Combustion failures that can damage the catalytic
WARNING converter.
Note Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-
AdBlue® should only be stored in the origi- You can buy refill bottles that are adequate cialised workshop to have the engine checked.
nal container, which should be tightly for AdBlue® use at SEAT dealerships .
closed and kept in a safe place.
 It lights up
Particulate filter blocked ››› page 330.
CAUTION
● When refilling, the nozzle grip should be
Engine management and
aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle emissions control system  It lights up
will not connect automatically. Fault in the petrol engine management.
Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a
● Do not try to add any more additive after Introduction specialised workshop.
the nozzle has stopped for the first time.
The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue When the ignition is switched on, the  (Electronic
WARNING
could spill out. Power Control) lights up and should go off once the
● Due to the high temperatures reached by engine has started. »
the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you
329
 Practical tips

If you should notice misfiring, uneven running mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If
 It lights up
or loss of power when the car is moving, have the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short
Diesel engine preheating system. the vehicle inspected by a specialised work- journeys are made continuously), it becomes
The engine can be started straight away when the shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp blocked with soot and the following indica-
lamp switches off.
 will light up when any of these symptoms tion is displayed to the driver:  Particu-
occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel can late filter: cleaned while the vehi-
 Flashes enter the exhaust system and escape into the cle is moving. See Manual. The partic-
atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also ulate filter needs cleaning (regeneration).
Fault in the diesel engine management.
Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a be damaged by overheating.
specialised workshop. Regeneration of the petrol particulate fil-
CAUTION ter (only for 2.0l TSI engines)
Note Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- Requirements for the regeneration journey:
cause an irregular fuel supply can cause the engine is at operating temperature.
While the control lamps , ,  or  are
ignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to
on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel
enter the exhaust system, which could ● Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h ›››
consumption may go up and the engine
cause overheating and damage the cata- ● Completely remove your foot from the ac-
might lose power.
lytic converter.
celerator pedal for a few seconds to let the
vehicle roll with the gear engaged.
For the sake of the environment ● Consider the legal speed limits as well as
Catalytic converter
Even when the emission control system is the recommended gears.
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic working perfectly, there may be a smell of ● Repeat this procedure (accelerate and let
converter sulphur from the gases on occasions. This roll) until the control lamp turns off.
depends on the sulphur content of the fuel
● Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en-
used. This can quite often be avoided by This procedure involves an autonomous par-
gines. changing to another brand of fuel. ticulate filter cleaning process and may take
● Never run the fuel tank dry. some time.
● When changing or adding engine oil, do not
If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im-
exceed the necessary amount ››› page 336, Particulate filter mediately to a specialised workshop to repair
Topping up the engine oil.
3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol or diesel particu- the fault.
● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump late filters
leads if necessary ››› page 47.
The particulate filter eliminates most of the
soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor-
330
 Checking and refilling levels

Regeneration of the petrol (except the TSI is possible that the radiator fan will acti- The vehicle's engine compartment is a po-
2.0l engine) and diesel particulate filter vate after stopping the engine, even it its tentially hazardous area ››› .
Requirements for the regeneration journey: operating temperature has not been
the engine is at operating temperature. reached. WARNING
● Noise, smells and high idle speeds can When work is done in the engine compart-
● Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h occur during regeneration. ment, injuries, burns, accidents and even
(31-75 mph). This increases the temperature fires can occur.
● Always use the correct engine oil and the
and burns the soot in the filter ››› . ● Switch the engine off, remove the key
correct fuel to make sure the useful life of
● Consider the legal speed limits as well as the particulate filter is not affected. Also from the ignition and apply the electronic
the recommended gears. avoid making short trips all the time. parking brake. If the vehicle has a manual
● End the regeneration journey once the con- gearbox, place the lever in neutral; if it has
an automatic gearbox, place the selector
trol warning lamp has gone out.
lever in position P. Wait for the engine to
If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes Engine compartment cool down.
of running in regeneration mode, have a spe- ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam
cialised workshop repair the fault Working in the engine compart- or drips of coolant being released from the
engine compartment. Wait until no steam
ment or coolant can be seen before opening the
WARNING
bonnet.
Always adjust your speed to suit the weath-
● Keep children away from the engine
er conditions, roads, braking distance and
traffic if the particulate filter is in its regen- compartment.
eration phase. Route recommendations ● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-
should never make you disregard each tion on the engine compartment, as these
country's specific traffic regulations. may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-
Fig. 313 Related video ant).
CAUTION ● Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
trical system, particularly at the points
● When the exhaust system detects that scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire
where the jump leads are attached
the particulate filter is close to saturation, when working in the engine compartment ››› page 47. The battery could explode.
the self-cleaning function of this system (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids).
● If working inside the engine compart-
recommends optimal driving for this func-
tion. Always observe the warnings listed below ment, remember that, even when the igni-

● Due to the high temperatures caused by

and follow all general safety precautions. tion is switched off, the radiator fan may »
the regeneration of the particulate filter, it
331
 Practical tips

start up automatically, and therefore there lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear Note
is a risk of injury. tight-fitting clothes.
In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake
● Never cover the engine with additional in- – Never accelerate with a gear engaged fluid reservoirs are on the other side of the
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of without taking the necessary precau- engine compartment ››› Fig. 316.
fire! tions. The vehicle could move, even if
● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant the handbrake is applied. Danger of
expansion tank when the engine is hot. The death.
Opening and closing the bonnet
cooling system is under pressure. ● Observe the following additional warn-
● Protect face, hands and arms by cover- ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-
ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protect trical system is necessary:
against escaping coolant and steam. – Always disconnect the battery from the
● Always make sure you have not left any on-board network.
objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in – Do not smoke.
the engine compartment. – Never work near naked flames.
● If you have to work underneath the vehi-
– Always keep an approved fire extin-
cle, you must use suitable stands addition- guisher immediately available.
ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of
accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for
securing the vehicle and there is a risk of For the sake of the environment
Fig. 314 Release lever in the driver's footwell
injury. ● Inspect the ground underneath your vehi- area.
● If any work has to be performed when the cle regularly so that any leaks are detec-
engine is started or with the engine running, ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil
there is an additional, potentially fatal, or other fluids in the area where it was
safety risk from the rotating parts, such as parked, have your vehicle inspected at the
the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., workshop.
and from the high-voltage ignition system. ● Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en-
You should also observe the following: vironment. For this reason you should make
– Never touch the electrical wiring of the regular checks on the ground underneath
ignition system. your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other
– Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing
fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a
and long hair do not get trapped in ro- specialised workshop.
tating engine parts. Danger of death.
Before starting any work remove jewel- Fig. 315 Cam under the bonnet

332
 Checking and refilling levels

Opening the bonnet Closing the bonnet CAUTION

The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- ● Slightly lift the bonnet.
To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the
cle. ● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its windscreen wiper arms, only open it when
Before opening the bonnet, make sure that support. the windscreen wipers are in place against
the windscreen.
the windscreen wiper arms are in place ● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall
against the windscreen. so it locks.
● Open the door and pull the lever under the If the bonnet does not close, do not press
dashboard ››› Fig. 314 1 . downwards. Open it again and let it fall as
● To lift the bonnet, press the release catch mentioned above.
under the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 315 2 . The
arrester hook under the bonnet is released. WARNING
● The bonnet can be opened. Release the Make sure that the bonnet is properly
bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de- closed. If it opens when driving, it can
signed for this in the bonnet. cause an accident.

333
 Practical tips

Checking levels

Fig. 316 Diagram for the location of the various el-

ements.

From time to time, the levels of the different Note changing oil, use only those oils that comply
fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never with VW standards.
The layout of parts may vary depending on
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious
the engine. We recommend that the oil change be done
damage to the engine may be caused.
by a technical service or specialised work-
1 Coolant expansion tank ››› page 338 shop.
Engine oil level dipstick ››› page 336
2
Engine oil If the engine oil level is too low
3 Engine oil filler cap ››› page 336
You can get information about the correct en-
4 Brake fluid reservoir ››› page 339 General notes gine oil for your vehicle at your workshop.
5 Battery (under the cover) ››› page 341
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade If the recommended engine oil is not availa-
6 Windscreen washer reservoir ble, in the event of an emergency you can
oil that can be used all year round.
››› page 340 change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L
Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- of the next oil until the next oil change:
tial for the correct operation of the engine
and its long useful life, when topping up or
334
 Checking and refilling levels

– Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00, (once) conforming to the specifications Engine oil specifications
VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,
API SN. VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l) Diesel engines
– Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00, ››› page 334.
Type of Specifica-
VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4. Engine type
Service tion
Engine oil additives
Have the oil changed by a specialised work- Set Service
No type of additive should be mixed with the
shop. With particulate and Flexible
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these VW 507 00
filter (DPF)a) Service Inter-
Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW additives is not covered by the warranty. vals
504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00
could increase consumption and the vehicle’s Note Without particu- Set Service VW 505 01b)
late filter (DPF) Intervals VW 506 01b)
CO2 emissions. Before a long trip, we recommend finding
an engine oil that conforms to the corre- a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may

 sponding VW specifications and recom- damage the engine.

Recommended by SEAT mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the b) If the quality of the fuel available in the country

correct engine oil will always be available does not fulfil the EN 590 (for diesel) standard.
for a top-up if needed.
SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to
guarantee high SEAT engine performance.
Warning lamp
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
 It lights up red
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash
formation, may be used in diesel engines  Do not carry on driving!
equipped with particulate filter. Using other Engine oil pressure too low.
Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.
types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-
tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- If this warning lamp  starts to flash, and is accom-
fore: panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en-
gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more
● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils. oil ››› page 336.
● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the If the warning lamp  flashes although the oil level
engine oil level is too low ››› page 336 and is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at
you cannot obtain the oil specified for your idle speed! Obtain technical assistance. »
vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil

335
 Practical tips

Checking oil level WARNING

 It lights up yellow
– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. Any work carried out in the engine com-
Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.
Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to – Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the partment or on the engine must be carried
do so ››› page 336. operating temperature is reached and then out cautiously.
stop. ● When working in the engine compart-
 It flashes yellow ment, always observe the safety warnings
– Wait for about two minutes.
››› page 331.
Fault in the oil level sensor. – Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with
Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Un-
til then it is advisable to check the oil level every time
a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it CAUTION
you refuel. in as far as it will go.
If the oil level is above area A , do not start
– Then pull it out once more and check the oil the engine. This could result in damage to
WARNING level ››› Fig. 317. Top up with engine oil if the engine and catalytic converter. Con-
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- necessary. tact a Technical Service.
trol and warning lamps on page 90.
The oil must leave a mark between zones A
and C . It can never go above zone A .
Topping up the engine oil
Checking the engine oil level ● Zone A : do not add oil.
● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level
in that zone.
● Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Depending on how you drive and the condi-

tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-
sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil
consumption is likely to be higher for the first
5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level
must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-
bly when filling the tank and before a journey. Fig. 318 In the engine compartment: Engine oil
filler cap.
Fig. 317 Engine oil dipstick.

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of

the oil.
336
 Checking and refilling levels

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe damage to the engine and catalytic con- ● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,
the warnings ››› in Working in the engine verter. Contact a specialised workshop. such as acid burns, caused by splashes of
compartment on page 331. oil.
For the sake of the environment ● When removing the oil drain plug with
Topping up engine oil your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to
The oil level must never be above zone help prevent oil from running down your
● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening
››› Fig. 317 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in arm.
››› Fig. 318. through the crankcase breather and leak
● Carefully add oil in small quantities (no ● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-
more than 0.5 l). tem. contact with engine oil.
● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
● To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you
stored in a safe place out of the reach of
add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes Note
children.
and recheck the oil level ››› page 336.
Before a long trip, we recommend finding
● If necessary, add some more oil. an engine oil that conforms to the corre-
CAUTION
● When the oil level reaches at least zone sponding VW specifications and recom-
mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the No additives should be used with engine oil.
››› Fig. 317 , unscrew the engine oil filler
B
correct engine oil will always be available This could result in engine damage. Any
cap carefully ››› .
for a top-up if needed. damage caused by the use of such addi-
The position of the oil filler opening is shown tives would not be covered by the factory
in the corresponding engine compartment il- warranty.
lustration ››› page 334. Engine oil change
Engine oil specification ››› page 335. For the sake of the environment
We recommend that you have the engine oil ● We recommend that you change the en-
WARNING changed by a Technical Service. gine oil and the filter at a technical service
centre.
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil
WARNING ● Never pour oil down drains or into the
comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents when topping up. Only change the engine oil yourself if you ground.
have the specialist knowledge required! ● Use a suitable container when draining
● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- the used oil. It must be large enough to hold
CAUTION
serve the warnings ››› page 331. all the engine oil.
If the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 317 A ,
● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil
do not start the engine. This could result in
may cause burn injuries.

337
 Practical tips

Cooling system WARNING Refilling coolant

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the
Coolant specifications coolant system, the engine may fail lead-
ing to serious damage.
The engine cooling system is supplied from ● Ensure that the percentage of additive is
the factory with a specially treated mixture of correct for the lowest expected ambient
water and at least 40 % of the additive temperature in the zone in which the vehi-
G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture cle is to be used.
gives the necessary frost protection down to ● When the outside temperature is very
-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-
parts of the engine cooling system against cle would be immobilised.
corrosion. It also prevents scaling and con-
siderably raises the boiling point of the cool- Fig. 319 In the engine compartment: marking
CAUTION on coolant expansion tank.
ant.
The original additives should never be
To protect the cooling system, the percent- mixed with coolants which are not ap-
age of additive must always be at least 40 %, proved by SEAT.
even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-
● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not
tection is not required.
purple but is, for example, brown, this indi-
If for weather reasons further protection is cates that the G12evo additive has been
necessary, the proportion of additive may be mixed with an inadequate coolant. The
increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an- coolant must be changed as soon as possi-
tifreeze protection will diminish and this will ble if this is the case!
worsen cooling.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture For the sake of the environment
Fig. 320 Engine compartment: coolant expan-
of distilled water and at least 40 % of the Coolants and additives can contaminate
sion tank cap.
additive G12evo for optimal protection the environment. If any fluids are spilled,
against corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13 they should be collected and correctly dis-
The coolant tank is located in the engine
(TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G), posed of, with respect to the environment.
compartment ››› page 334.
G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11
(green blue) engine coolants decreases pro- Top up coolant when the level is below the 
tection again corrosion and should be avoi- (minimum) mark.
ded.
338
 Checking and refilling levels

Checking coolant level WARNING Brake fluid

– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. ● The cooling system is under pressure. Do
– Switch the ignition off. not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- Check and refill the brake fluid
sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of
– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- burns!
pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the ● Store the antifreeze in its original con-
coolant level should be between the marks tainer and keep it out of reach of children.
››› Fig. 319. When the engine is hot, it may
● If working inside the engine compart-
be slightly above the upper mark.
ment, remember that, even when the igni-
tion is switched off, the radiator fan may
Topping up coolant start up automatically, and therefore there
– Wait for the engine to cool down. is a risk of injury.

– Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with

a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left CAUTION
››› . Fig. 321 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-
If you run out of coolant in the expansion
ervoir cap.
– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- tank, park the car in a safe place and do
not continue driving. Obtain technical as-
ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-
sistance.
could damage the engine. If there is no gine compartment ››› page 334.
coolant in the expansion tank, do not con-
tinue driving. You should obtain professional Checking the brake fluid level
assistance ››› .
The brake fluid level must be between the 
– If there is still some coolant in the expansion and  markings.
tank, top up to the upper mark.
However, if the brake fluid level goes down
– Top up with coolant until the level becomes noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
stable.  mark, there may be a leak in the brake
system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning
– Screw the cap back on correctly.
light on the instrument panel display monitors
If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe- the brake fluid level ››› page 89.
cialised workshop to have the cooling system In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid
examined. reservoir is on the other side of the engine
compartment. »
339
 Practical tips

Changing brake fluid CAUTION Check the water level in the windscreen
We recommend that you have the brake fluid washer reservoir regularly and top up as re-
Brake fluid should not come into contact
changed by a Technical Service. quired.
with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.
The container for the windscreen washer
WARNING contains the cleaning fluid for the wind-
For the sake of the environment
If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita- screen, the rear window and the headlight
ble/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys- Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. washer system*.
tem may fail or braking power may be re- Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a
professional to dispose of them. ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 331.
duced.
● Check the brake system and the brake ● The window washer tank is marked with the
fluid level regularly!  symbol on the cap.
● When the brake fluid is used and brakes Windscreen washer reservoir ● Check there is enough windscreen water in
are subjected to extreme braking forces, the reservoir.
bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys-
tem. These bubbles can significantly re-
Checking the level of the window Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-
duce braking power, notably increasing washer tank and refilling it screen and headlights. We recommend that
braking distance, and could result in the to- you always add a product to the windscreen
tal failure of the brake system. washer fluid.
● Be sure to always use the correct brake
fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly Recommended windscreen wipers
meets the VW 501 14 standard. ● For the hottest seasons we recommend
● You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-
fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:
Service. If none is available, use only high- 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-
quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 ter).
CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards
● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.
FMVSS 116 DOT 4.
Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,
● The replacement brake fluid must be Fig. 322 In the engine compartment: window up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2
new. washer tank cap.
parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of
● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed mixture in the washer fluid tank.
The window washer tank is in the engine
original container in a safe place out of
compartment ››› page 334. The capacity of the window washer tank can
reach of children. Risk of poisoning!
be found in ››› page 372.
340
 Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION ids could cause serious malfunctions and  Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-
engine damage! tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse any
If the water from the windscreen washer splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.
does not contain enough anti-freeze, it may ● Not having windscreen wiper fluid re-
freeze on the windscreen and rear window, duces visibility through the windscreen,  Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are
reducing forward and rear visibility. and leads to loss of visibility in headlights prohibited.
● In winter, ensure the windscreen washer
in models with headlight washer.
contains enough anti-freeze.
 The battery should only be charged in a well-
ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!
● In cold conditions, you should not use the
 Keep children away from acid and batteries!
windscreen wiper system unless you have
warmed the windscreen with the ventila-
Battery
tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on Disconnecting the battery
the windscreen and reduce visibility. General information
The battery should only be disconnected in
The battery is located in the engine compart- exceptional cases. When the battery is dis-
CAUTION ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is connected, some of the vehicle's functions
checked as part of the Inspection Service. are lost. These functions will require resetting
Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other
similar additives with the windscreen wash- Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean after the battery is reconnected.
er water. A greasy layer may be formed on and have the correct tightening torque, espe- When disconnecting the battery from the ve-
the windscreen which will impair visibility. cially in summer and winter. hicle on-board network, disconnect first the
● Use clean water with a window cleaner
All work on batteries requires specialist negative cable and then the positive cable.
recommended by SEAT.
knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you
● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to Service or a workshop specialising in batter- disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm
the water in the reservoir. ies: risk of burns or exploding battery! will be triggered.
The battery must not be opened. Never try
CAUTION to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth- If the vehicle is not used for long periods
● Do not mix cleaning products recommen- erwise explosive gas is released from the bat- The vehicle has a system for monitoring the
ded by SEAT with other products. This tery that could cause an explosion. current consumption when the engine is left
could lead to flocculation and may block unused for long periods of time ››› page 344.
the windscreen washer jets. Battery warning indications Some functions, such as the interior lights, or
● When topping up service fluids, make ab-  Wear eye protection. the remote door opening, may be temporarily
solutely certain that you fill the fluids into disabled to prevent the battery from running
the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu- flat. These functions will come back on as »
341
 Practical tips

soon as the ignition is switched on and the The batteries should be charged in a well- ● Never use a defective battery. This could
engine started. ventilated room only. cause an explosion. Replace a damaged
● Keep children away from acid and bat- battery immediately.
Winter conditions teries.
During the winter, the starting power may be ● Before working on the electrical system, CAUTION
reduced, and if necessary, the battery should you must switch off the engine, the ignition ● Do not expose the battery to direct sun-
be charged ››› and all electrical devices. The negative ca- light over a long period of time, as the in-
ble on the battery must be disconnected. tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the
WARNING When a light bulb is changed, you need on- battery housing.
ly switch off the light.
Always be aware of the danger of injury ● If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-
and chemical burns as well as the risk of ● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-
ditions for a long period, protect the bat-
accident or fire when working on the bat- locking the vehicle before you disconnect tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be
tery and the electrical system: the battery! The alarm will otherwise be damaged.
● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,
triggered.
skin and clothing from acid and particles ● When disconnecting the battery from the
containing lead. vehicle on-board network, disconnect first
the negative cable and then the positive Warning lamp
● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear
cable.
protective gloves and eye protection. Do
not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid ● Switch off all electrical devices before  It lights up
through the vents. reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first
Alternator fault.
● Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on
the positive cable and then the negative
cable. Never reverse the polarity of the
the skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu- The control lamp lights up when the ignition is
connections. This could cause an electrical
tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. If switched on. It should go out when the engine
fire.
acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a has started running.
doctor immediately. ● Never charge a frozen battery, or one
which has thawed. This could result in ex- If the control lamp  lights up while driving,
● Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking
plosions and chemical burns. Always re- the alternator is no longer charging the bat-
are prohibited. When handling cables and
place a battery which has frozen. A flat tery. You should immediately drive to the
electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks
battery can also freeze at temperatures nearest specialised workshop.
and electrostatic charge. Never short the
close to 0°C (+32°F).
battery terminals. High-energy sparks can You should avoid using electrical equipment
cause injury. ● Ensure that the vent hose is always con- that is not absolutely necessary because this
● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-
nected to the battery. will drain the battery.
leased when the battery is under charge.
342
 Checking and refilling levels

Checking the battery electrolyte Charging or changing the battery Start-Stop systems (››› page 251) are equip-
ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must
level
If you often drive short distances or if the ve- only be replaced with a battery of the same
The electrolyte level should be checked reg- hicle is not driven for long periods, the battery specifications.
ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun- should be checked by a specialised work-
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
tries and in older batteries. shop between the scheduled services.
power management system to control the
If the battery has discharged and you have distribution of electrical energy ››› page 344.
● Open the bonnet and then lift the cover
problems starting the vehicle, the battery The power management function ensures
that protects the front part of the battery
might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- that the battery is charged much more effi-
››› in Working in the engine compart- ciently than on vehicles without a power
ommend you have the vehicle battery
ment on page 331.
checked by a Technical Service where it will management system. To maintain this func-
● Check the colour display in the "magic eye" be re-charged or replaced. tion after replacing the battery, we recom-
on the top of the battery. mend that the replacement battery used is of
● If there are air bubbles in the window, tap Charging the battery the same make and type as the original fitted
the window gently until they disperse. battery. To make proper use of the power
The vehicle battery should be charged by a
management function after the battery has
The position of the battery is shown in the specialised workshop only, as batteries using
been changed, have the battery coded to the
corresponding engine compartment diagram special technology have been installed and
power management mode at a specialised
they must be charged in a controlled environ-
››› page 334. workshop.
ment.
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top
of the battery changes colour, depending on WARNING
Replacing a vehicle battery
the charge state and electrolyte level of the ● Always use only maintenance free bat-
The battery has been developed to suit the
battery. teries that do not run flat alone and whose
conditions of its location and has special properties, specifications and size corre-
There are two different colours: safety features. If the battery must be re- spond to the standard battery. The specifi-
placed, consult a technical service for infor- cations are indicated on the battery case.
● Black: correct charge status.
mation on electromagnetic compatibility, the
● Before starting any work on the batteries,
● Transparent/light yellow: the battery must size and maintenance, performance and
you must read and observe the warnings
be replaced. Contact a specialised work- safety requirements of the new battery in
››› in General information on page 342.
shop. your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT
recommends you have the battery replaced
by a technical service. For the sake of the environment
 Batteries contain toxic substances such
as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be »
343
 Practical tips

disposed of appropriately and must not be Battery diagnosis Note

disposed of with ordinary household waste. The battery diagnosis function constantly ● Neither is the power management system
registers the condition of the battery. Sensors able to overcome the given physical limits.
detect the battery voltage, battery current Please remember that the power and use-
and battery temperature. This enables the ful life of the battery are limited.
Energy management system to calculate the current power level ● When there is a risk that the vehicle will
and charge condition of the battery. not start, the alternator power failure or
Optimisation of the starting ca- low battery charge level warning lamp will
pacity Residual current management be shown  ››› page 89.
The residual current management reduces
The power management controls the distri- power consumption while the vehicle is
bution of electrical energy and thus helps to parked. It controls the supply of power to the Flat battery
ensure that there is always enough power various electrical devices while the ignition is
available to start the engine. switched off. The system takes the battery di- Starting ability has first priority.
If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys- agnosis data into consideration.
Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures
tem is left parked for a long time, the battery Depending on the power level of the battery, all place a heavy load on the battery. In
will gradually lose its charge because certain switch off the individual electrical devices these conditions a large amount of power is
electrical devices, such as the electronic one after the other to prevent the battery consumed, but only a small amount is sup-
gearbox lock continues to draw current even from losing too much charge and to ensure plied. The situation is also critical if electrical
when the ignition is off. In some cases there that the engine can be started reliably. devices are in use when the engine is not run-
may not be enough power available to start ning. In this case power is consumed when
the engine. Dynamic power management none is being generated.
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent While the vehicle is moving, this function dis- In these situations you will be aware that the
power management system to control the tributes the available power to the various power management system is intervening to
distribution of electrical energy. This signifi- electrical devices and systems according to control the distribution of electrical power.
cantly improves reliability when starting the their requirements. The power management
engine, and also prolongs the useful life of the ensures that on-board systems do not con- When the vehicle is parked for long peri-
battery. sume more electrical power than the alterna- ods
The main functions incorporated in the power tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi-
If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of
management system are battery diagnosis, mum possible battery power level.
several days or weeks, the power manage-
residual current management and dynam- ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-
ic power management. vices one by one or reduce the amount of
344
 Wheels

current they are using. This limits the amount

of power consumed and helps to ensure reli-
reduce the current they are consuming. Heat-
ing systems in particular use a large amount
Wheels
able starting even after a long period. Some of electrical power. If you notice, for instance,
convenience functions, such as remote vehi- that the seat heating* or the rear window Wheels and tyres
cle opening, may not be available under cer- heater is not working, they may have been
tain circumstances. These functions will be temporarily switched off or regulated to a General notes
restored when you switch on the ignition and lower heat output. These systems will be
start the engine. available again as soon as sufficient electri- – When driving with new tyres, be especially
cal power is available. careful during the first 500 km (300 miles).
With the engine switched off
You may also notice that the engine runs at a – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar
For example, if you listen to the sound system slightly faster idling speed when necessary. obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as
with the engine switched off the battery will This is quite normal, and no cause for con- possible at a right angle to the obstacle.
run down. cern. The increased idling speed allows the
– Check from time to time if the tyres are
alternator to meet the greater power require-
If the energy consumption means there is a damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or
ment and charge the battery at the same
risk that the engine will not start, a text will dents). Remove any foreign objects em-
time.
appear in vehicles with a driver information bedded in the treads.
system*.
– Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
This driver indicator tells you that you must placed immediately.
start the engine so that the battery can re-
charge. – Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

– Replace any missing valve caps as soon as

When the engine is running possible.
Although the alternator generates electrical – Mark the wheels before taking them off so
power, the battery can still become dis- that they rotate in the same direction when
charged while the vehicle is being driven. This put back.
can occur when a lot of power is being con-
sumed but only a small amount supplied, es- – When removed, the wheels or tyres should
pecially if the battery is not fully charged ini- be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark
tially. place. »
To restore the necessary energy balance, the
system will then temporarily shut off the elec-
trical devices that are using a lot of power, or
345
 Practical tips

Low profile tyres Foreign objects inserted in the tyre P max. 150 km/h (93 mph)
Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger ● Do not remove foreign bodies if they have Q max. 160 km/h (99 mph)
wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height. penetrated through the tyre wall! R max. 170 km/h (106 mph)
Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile. ● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility S max. 180 km/h (112 mph)
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- system, where necessary seal the damaged
T max. 190 km/h (118 mph)
ly than standard tyres, for instance due to tyre as shown in section ››› page 38. Use a
strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and specialised workshop for repair or replace- U max. 200 km/h (124 mph)
kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT H max. 210 km/h (130 mph)
››› page 348. dealership for this.
V max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread Z max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
with special care when driving on roads in wraps around the foreign body and provision- W max. 270 km/h (168 mph)
poor condition. ally seals the tyre.
Y max. 300 km/h (186 mph)
Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.
Tyres with directional tread pattern Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for
If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- tyres with a maximum authorised speed
pact or have been damaged, have a special-
rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- above 240 km/h (149 mph).
ised workshop check whether or not it is nec-
ways note the direction of rotation indicated
essary to change the tyre.
when mounting the wheel. This makes sure WARNING
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- that optimal use is made of tyre properties in ● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur-
ly than standard tyres. terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly
and wear. carefully to avoid possible accidents.
Concealed damage ● Never drive with damaged tyres. This
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily Subsequent fitting of accessories may cause an accident.
visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or ● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the
car pulling to one side, this may indicate wheel trims, we recommend that you consult vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop
that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice the vehicle immediately and check the
speed immediately if there is any reason to regarding current techniques. tyres.
suspect that damage may have occurred. In- ● Never use old tyres or those with an un-
spect the tyres for damage. If no external Speed symbols known history of use.
damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully
The speed rating indicates the maximum
to the nearest specialised workshop and
speed permitted for the tyres.
have the car inspected.
346
 Wheels

New wheels and tyres event of a puncture, and the vehicle should ● Always ensure that the tyres you have
be driven with care. Refit the normal road chosen have adequate clearance. When
It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced wheel as soon as possible. selecting replacement tyres, do not rely
by a specialised workshop. There they have entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on
In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheels
the required knowledge, the special tools and the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-
must be fitted with tyres of the same brand,
the corresponding spare parts. fer significantly depending on the manu-
type and tread so that the traction system is
facturer. Lack of clearance can damage
● Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you not damaged by a difference in the number
the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en-
have installed new tyres, drive the first 500 of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the event danger road safety. Risk of accident!
km carefully and at a moderate speed. of a puncture, only a spare wheel with the
● Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in
same perimeter as normal tyres should be
● All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of an emergency, and drive with due care.
used.
the same type, size (rolling circumference) ● The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-
and, if possible, tread pattern. ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-
Manufacturing date
● When changing tyres, do not change just hibited use can cause accidents or can
The manufacturing date is also indicated on damage your vehicle.
one; change at least two on the same axle.
the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the ● If decorative hubcaps are subsequently
● If you want to equip your vehicle with a wheel):
fitted, make sure that they allow enough air
combination tyres and rims that are different
DOT ... 2218 ... in to cool the braking system. Risk of acci-
to those fitted in the factory, inform your spe-
dent!
cialised workshop before purchasing them it means, for example, that the tyre was man-
››› ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.
For the sake of the environment
The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for
WARNING Old tyres must be disposed of according to
your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-
● Use only combinations of tyres and rims, the laws in the country concerned.
mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity
or COC document1)). The vehicle documen- as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by
tation varies depending on the country of res- SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam- Note
idence. aged, causing an accident.
● A SEAT Service Centre should be consul-
● For technical reasons it is not possible to ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of
If the type of spare wheel is different form the use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases different sizes to those originally fitted by
normal wheels — e.g. in the case of winter
tyres or particularly wide tyres — the spare
not even wheels from the same vehicle SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about »
model should be used.
wheel should only be used temporarily in the

1) COC = certificate of conformity.

347
 Practical tips

● The tyre pressure should only be checked Do not forget the spare wheel when checking
the combinations allowed between the
front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-
pressure of warm tyres. flated to the highest pressure required for the
● Never mount used tyres if you are not
● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car- road wheels.
sure of their “previous history”.
ried by the vehicle ››› Fig. 323. In the case of a minimised temporary spare
● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, wheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18) inflate to a
Tyre life save the modified tyre pressure ››› page 352. pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre
● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration. pressure label ››› Fig. 323.

● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from

Driving style
time to time.
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
Tyre pressure braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre
wear.
The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a
sticker on the rear of the front left door frame Wheel balance
››› Fig. 323.
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re- However, certain circumstances may lead to
duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse- imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-
ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor- brations in the steering wheel.
rect inflation pressures are very important,
especially at high speeds. Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,
as they otherwise cause excessive wear on
Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must
be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted
ing comfort (tyre pressure  ››› Fig. 323). or if a tyre is repaired.
Fig. 323 Location of the tyre pressure sticker. When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel
consumption may increase slightly. Incorrect wheel alignment
Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-
The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord- Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-
ing habits will increase the useful life of your
ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the
tyres.
vehicle is going to carry the maximum load, vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you
● Check tyre pressure at least once a month, the tyre pressure should be increased to the should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-
and also prior to any long trip. maximum value indicated on the sticker ficial Service.
››› Fig. 323.
348
 Wheels

WARNING For the sake of the environment

Unsuitable handling of the wheels and Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
tyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los- sumption.
ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-
out.
● The driver is responsible for ensuring that
Tread wear indicators
all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-
ted to the right pressure. The recommen-
ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label
››› Fig. 323.
● Check tyre pressures regularly and en- Fig. 325 Interchanging tyres.
sure they are maintained at the pressures
Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be
indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low
could cause overheating, resulting in tread found on the base of the original tyre treads,
detachment or even burst tyres. ordered at regular intervals and running
across the tread ››› Fig. 324. The letters "TWI"
● When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure
or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre mark
should be that indicated on the label
the position of the wear indicators.
››› Fig. 323.
Fig. 324 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.
● Regularly check the cold inflation pres- The minimum permitted profile depth1) have
sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the been reached when the tyres have worn
tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they down to the wear indicators. Replace the
are cold. tyres with new ones ››› .
● Regularly check your tyres for damage
and wear. Changing wheels around
● Never exceed the maximum permitted To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres
speed or loads specified for the type of the wheels should be changed round from
tyre fitted on your vehicle. time to time according to the system
››› Fig. 325. The useful life of all the tyres will
then be about the same time. »

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are

driving in.
349
 Practical tips

WARNING curely and that the brake system functions – Please note that the maximum permissible
correctly. speed for winter tyres may be lower than
The tyres must be replaced at the latest
for summer tyres.
when the tread is worn down to the tread The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily.
wear indicators. Failure to follow this in- – Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-
struction could result in an accident. fective when the tread is worn down.
theft wheel nuts* ››› page 42.
● Particularly in difficult driving conditions – After fitting the wheels you must always
such as wet or icy roads. It is important that WARNING check the tyre pressures. When doing so,
the tyre tread be as deep as possible and take into account the correct tyre pressures
be approximately the same on the tyres of Wheel nuts should never be greased or
oiled. listed on the rear of the front left door frame
both the front and the rear axles.
● Use only wheel nuts which belong to the
››› page 348.
● The scant driving safety due to insuffi-
cient tread depth is particularly evident in wheel. In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-
vehicle handling, when there is a risk of ● If the prescribed torque of the wheel nuts siderably improve vehicle handling. The de-
“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water is too low, they could loosen whilst the ve- sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-
and when driving through corners, and hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice
braking is also adversely affected. tightening torque is too high, the wheel nuts and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles
● The speed has to be adapted according- and threads can be damaged. equipped with wide section tyres or with
ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on
over the vehicle. CAUTION the sidewall).
See ››› page 45 to find out the recommen- Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-
ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these
Wheel nuts steel and alloy rims. tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents
(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)).
The wheel nuts are matched to the rims. The vehicle documentation varies depending
When installing different wheels (for instance on the country of residence.
alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is
Winter tyres
important to use the correct wheel nuts with Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-
– Winter tyres must be fitted on all four ties when the tread is worn down to a depth
the right length and correctly shaped bolt
wheels. of 4 mm.
heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-
– Only use winter tyres that are approved for
your vehicle.

1) COC = certificate of conformity.

350
 Wheels

The performance of winter tyres is also se- WARNING Snow chains will improve braking ability as
verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is well as traction in winter conditions.
Exceeding the maximum speed permitted
still much deeper than 4 mm.
for the winter tyres fitted on your car can For technical reasons snow chains may only
A code letter indicating the speed limit is cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con- be used with the following wheel rim/tyre
stamped on all winter tyres ››› page 346. trol of the vehicle – risk of accident. combination.
Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds
195/65 R15
must have an appropriate sticker attached For the sake of the environment Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick- When winter is over, change back to sum- 205/55 R16
ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv- mer tyres at an appropriate moment. In
225/45 R17
ice and specialised workshop. Please note temperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform- Chains with links of maximum 9 mm
the regulations to this effect in your country. ance will be improved if summer tyres are 225/40 R18
used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises
“All-weather” tyres can also be used instead 225/35 R19 Chains with links of maximum 7 mm
while driving will all be reduced.
of winter tyres.
Other dimensions do not allow chains
Using winter tyres with V-rating
Snow chains Remove any central wheel trims and the rim
Please note that the generally applicable ring before fitting snow chains.
240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres
Snow chains must only be fitted to the front
with the letter V is subject to technical re- WARNING
wheels, even on vehicles with four-wheel
strictions; the maximum permissible speed
drive. The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted
for your vehicle may be significantly lower.
chains could lead to serious accidents and
The maximum speed limit for these tyres de- ● Check that they are correctly seated after
damage.
pends directly on the maximum axle weights driving for a few yards; correct the position if
● Always the appropriate snow chains.
for your car and on the listed weight rating of necessary, in accordance with the manufac-
the tyres being used. turer's fitting instructions. ● Observe the fitting instructions provided
by the snow chain manufacturer.
It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to ● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).
● Never exceed the maximum permitted
check the maximum speed which is permissi- ● If there is a danger of being trapped de-
speeds when driving with snow chains.
ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on spite having mounted the chains, it is best to
the basis of this information. disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC
››› page 298, Connecting and disconnect- CAUTION
ing the ESC and ASR. ● Remove the snow chains to drive on
roads without snow. Otherwise they will »
351
 Practical tips

impair vehicle handling, damage the tyres Several control and warning lamps light up
and wear out very quickly. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on while the function is verified. They will
● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch-
switch off after a few seconds.
ed if the chains come into direct contact
with them. SEAT recommends the use of
covered snow chains. WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con-
trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Tyre pressure loss indicator

Tyre monitor system Fig. 327 Glove compartment: tyre pressure
Control lamp loss control switch.

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel

 It lights up
revolutions and, with this information, the
The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is much tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors.
lower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre has
structural damage.
If the rolling circumference of one or more
In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text wheels has changed, the tyre monitoring indi-
message is displayed on the instrument panel cator will indicate this on the instrument pan-
screen. el through a warning lamp and a warning to
 Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon the driver ››› Fig. 326. When only one specific
as possible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replace
tyre is affected, its position within the vehicle
any damaged tyres.
Fig. 326 Instrument panel: warning of loss of
will be indicated.
tyre pressure.  Loss of pressure: Check left
 Flashes
tyre pressure!
System fault
The control lamp flashes for approximately 1 minute
Wheel tread change
and then lights up permanently.
If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition off The wheel diameter changes when:
and on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure loss in-
dicator ››› page 353. If the fault continues, go to a ● Tyre pressure is changed manually.
specialised workshop.
● Tyre pressure is insufficient.
● The tyre structure is damaged.

352
 Wheels

● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a speeds the programmed values are collected ● If excessively low tyre pressure is detec-
load. and monitored. ted with the ignition on, an audible warning
● The wheels on an axle are subject to a With the wheels under very heavy loads, the will sound. In the event that there is a fault
heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load). tyre pressure must be increased to the total in the system, an audible warning will
sound.
● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. recommended tyre pressure before calibra-
tion ››› Fig. 323. ● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of
● The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
time or driving in a sporty style can tempo-
● The wheel on one axle is changed. WARNING rarily deactivate the TPMS. The control
lamp shows a fault, but disappears when
There may be a delay in the reaction of the When the tyres are inflated at different road conditions or the driving style change.
tyre  monitoring indicator or it may not indi- pressures or at a pressure that is too low
● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring
cate anything under certain circumstances then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a
system. Regularly check your tyres to en-
(e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un- loss of control of the vehicle and a serious
sure that the tyre pressure is correct and
paved roads, or when driving with snow or fatal accident.
that the tyres are not damaged due to
chains). ● If the lamp  lights up, reduce speed im-
puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents.
mediately and avoid any sudden turning or Remove objects from the tyres only when
Calibrating the tyre monitoring indicator braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible, they have not pierced the tyres.
and check the tyre pressure and status.
After changing the tyre pressure or replacing ● The tyre monitoring indicator does not
● The tyre monitoring system can only op-
one or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi- function when there is a fault in the ESC or
erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla- ABS ››› page 296.
cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for
ted to the correct pressure when cold.
example, when the front and rear wheels are
● If a tyre has not been punctured and it
swapped.
does not have to be changed immediately,
● Switch the ignition on. drive to the nearest specialised workshop
at a moderate speed and have the tyre
● Store the new inflation pressure in the Easy
checked and inflated to the correct pres-
Connect system with the button    >
sure.
Vehicle > SETTINGS > Tyres ››› page 92 .
● Vehicles without the Easy Connect system:
Note
press and hold button   ››› Fig. 327 until
a sound is heard. ● Driving for the first time with new tyres at
a high speed can cause them to slightly ex-
When driving, the system self-calibrates the pand, which could then produce an air
tyre pressure provided by the driver and the pressure warning.
wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied
353
 Practical tips

Spare wheel ● Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles

Location and use of the temporary with BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with sub-
spare wheel woofer)*
To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-
move the subwoofer.

● Vehicles without a variable floor in the lug-

gage compartment: pull the floor of the lug-
gage compartment (carpet) upwards to get it
out.
Fig. 329 In the luggage compartment: remove ● Vehicles with a variable luggage compart-
the subwoofer.
ment floor: lift and secure the floor storage
The temporary spare wheel is stored under compartment as explained in ››› page 143
the floor panel in the luggage compartment ››› page 142.
and is attached by a thumbnut. ● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 329 1
Fig. 328 In the luggage compartment: load speaker cable.
The temporary spare wheel has been de-
floor raised. ● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-
signed to be used for short periods of time.
Have the tyres checked and replaced as wise direction ››› Fig. 329 2 .
soon as possible at a SEAT Official Service or ● Remove the subwoofer speaker and the
at a specialised workshop. spare wheel.
The spare wheel must not be switched for a ● When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the
spare wheel from another vehicle. subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with
care. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT”
Removing the temporary spare wheel arrow on the subwoofer should point forward.
● Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove ● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-
the temporary spare wheel ››› page 143 tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the
››› page 142. subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in
place.
● Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise
››› Fig. 328.

354
 Wheels

Chains switch off during the journey. Switch off the

For technical reasons, snow chains must not system when starting off.
be used on the temporary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one of the front
wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-
porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear
wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel
that you have removed and replace the
punctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING
● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,
check the tyre pressures as soon as possi-
ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci-
dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back
of the left front door frame ››› Fig. 323.
● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)
when the temporary spare wheel is fitted
on the vehicle: risk of accident!
● Never travel more than 200 km using a
temporary spare wheel.
● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking
and fast cornering: risk of accident!
● Never use more than one temporary
spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-
dent.
● No other type of tyre (normal summer or
winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact
temporary spare wheel rim.
● If you are driving using the spare wheel,
the ACC system could automatically

355
 Maintenance

Maintenance Service works ● Make sure that any repairs are carried
out by a SEAT authorised service or speci-
In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT
authorised service or specialised workshop alised workshop.
SEAT Maintenance Pro- documents the following information:
CAUTION
gramme ● When each one of the services was carried
out. SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of
Service intervals ● Whether a specific repair has been sugges-
lack of availability of spare parts.
ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near
future.
Service work and the Digital Main- Note
● If you have expressed a special request for
tenance Plan Regular services on the vehicle not only
the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will
write the work order. maintain its value, but also its correct oper-
Log of services performed (“Digital Main- ation and road safety. For this reason, con-
tenance Plan”) ● The components or fluids that were
duct the services in accordance with SEAT
changed. guidelines.
The SEAT dealership or a specialised work-
shop records Service receipts in a central ● The date of the next service.
system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-
The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until
mentation of the service history, it is possible Set Service or Flexible Service In-
the next inspection. This information is docu-
to reproduce the services performed any
time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service
mented in all checks performed. tervals
receipt after every service carried out con- The type and the volume of the service may
Services are classified as oil change service
taining all the services carried out on the sys- vary from one vehicle to another. A special-
and inspection. The service interval display
tem. ised workshop will be able to provide specific
on the instrument panel display serves as a
information on the jobs for your vehicle.
Whenever there is a new service the receipt is reminder of the next service.
replaced with a current one.
WARNING Depending on the features, the engine and
The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail- the conditions of use of the car, either the
If the services are insufficient or not per-
able in some markets. In this case, your Fixed service or the Flexible service will be
formed and if the service intervals are not
SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur- observed, the vehicle may be immobilised applied for an oil change service..
rent documentation of the work. in traffic cause an accident and severe in-
juries.

356
 SEAT Maintenance Programme

How to know which type of service needs Particular characteristics of the Flexible Information about the terms of use
to his vehicle Service
● Check the tables below: Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil The service intervals and groups are usually
change service only has to be performed based on normal conditions of use.
Oil change servicea) when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-
you have to carry out this service, take into verse conditions of use, some of the work
Type of account the individual conditions of use and
PR No. Service interval must be carried out before the next service
service personal driving style. A major component of period or even between service intervals.
Every 5000 km or after the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-
QI1 stead of conventional engine oil. Conditions of use adverse include:
1 yearb)
Bear in mind the information about the speci- ● The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.
Every 7500 km or after
QI2 fications of the engine oil according to the
1 yearb) ● Frequent short trips.
Fixed VW standard ››› page 335.
Every 10000 km or after ● Letting the engine idle for a long period of
QI3
1 yearb) If you do not want to the flexible service time, as in the case of taxis.
you can select the fixed service However, ● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.
Every 15000 km or after
QI4 a fixed service may affect service costs
1 yearb) ● Frequent driving with a trailer (depending
The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.
According to the service in- on equipment).
QI6 Flexible
terval display Service interval display ● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a
lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).
a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-
b) ted by the service interval display on the in- ● Using the vehicle mostly in winter.
Whatever happens first.
strument panel ››› page 85 or in the Vehicle
This applies especially for the following
Inspection Servicea) settings menu of the infotainment system
parts (depending on equipment):
››› page 92.
According to the service interval display
The service interval display gives information ● Dust and pollen filter
a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. for service dates that involve an engine oil ● Air Care allergen filter
Bear in mind the information about the speci- change or an inspection. When the time for ● Air filter
fications of the engine oil according to the the corresponding service comes, additional
● Toothed chain
VW standard ››› page 335. work required, such as the change of brake
fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out. ● Particulate filter
● Engine oil »
357
 Maintenance

The Service Advisor of your specialised ● Your SEAT authorised service placing complete sets, such as: light engine,
workshop will gladly inform you about the ● Your specialised workshop gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical
need of performing service work between components, etc.
normal service intervals, always considering Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-
These parts are, approved parts, and are the
the conditions of use of your vehicle. opment of components) the sets of services
same as the factory parts, which are also ap-
may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or
proved spare parts.
WARNING specialised workshop is always receiving up-
If the services are insufficient or not per- dates in time.
formed and if the service intervals are not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised
Original accessories
in traffic and cause accidents and severe
injuries.
Additional service offers We recommend you only use SEAT Original
Accessories and SEAT approved accessories
● Have the services conducted at author-
Approved spare parts for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and
ised SEAT services or specialised work-
suitability of these accessories have been in-
shops.
Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- spected specifically for this type of vehicle.
ceived for their vehicles and approved by SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and
CAUTION SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. suitability of parts from other manufacturers.
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage These parts correspond exactly to the manu-
to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of facturer's requirements in terms of design,
lack of availability of spare parts. accuracy of the measurements and materi- SEAT Service Mobility
als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been
conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this Since the moment you purchase your SEAT
reason, we always recommend the use of vehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits
Service sets
Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.
Sets of services include all the maintenance held liable for the safety and suitability of
For the first two years after the purchase,
works needed to ensure the safety and the parts from other manufacturers.
your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-
smooth running of the vehicle (depending on ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-
the conditions of use and the features of ditional costs.
the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or Approved spare parts
If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-
operating fluids). Maintenance services are
Approved spare parts, following the manu- od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as
divided into inspection and review services.
facturer's requirements, are an additional you carry out the recommended Inspection
Consult the details of the jobs required for
your vehicle at: service to you, offering the possibility of re-
358
 Vehicle maintenance

and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-

ised Service.
Vehicle maintenance Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a
fault or an accident, our assistance services
Maintenance and cleaning remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin
or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the
will help you keep moving.
Basic observations more damage it can cause to the surface.
Take into account that the SEAT Mobility High temperatures, for instance strong sun-
Service differs depending on the country in Regular and careful care helps to maintain light, further intensify the damage.
which the vehicle was purchased. For further the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may Before washing the car, soften the dirt using
information ask your SEAT dealership or the become a prerequisite to demand the war- plenty of water.
SEAT website in your country. ranty in the event of corrosion damage and
deficiencies in the paint coat of the body- To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird
work. droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and
a microfibre cloth.
Warranty Specialised workshops have the necessary
care products. Please follow the instructions Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-
for application on the packaging. ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.
Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect WARNING High pressure cleaning equipment
condition of new vehicles. Check the pur- ● Cleaning products and other materials When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-
chase agreement or complementary addi- used for car care can be damaging to your sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-
tional documentation provided by your Tech- health if misused. structions for the equipment. This applies
nical Service to see the conditions and the ● Always keep care products in a safe particularly to the operating pressure and the
terms of the warranty. Consult further infor- place, out of the reach of children. Danger distance between the spraying water. Do not
mation in this regard in your SEAT Official of poisoning! aim the jet directly to the side window gas-
Service. kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-
roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-
For the sake of the environment
ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or
● When purchasing car care products, camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least
chose products that are compatible with 40 cm.
the environment.
Do not remove snow and ice with a high-
● The waste from car-care products should
not be disposed of with ordinary household
pressure cleaner. »
waste.

359
 Maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To view mirrors must always be folded/de-
in a direct stream or one that has a rotating avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do ployed electrically!
jet for forcing off dirt. not apply too much pressure.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
The water temperature must not exceed Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with Risk of damaging the paint job!
60°C. a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi- ● Do not use sponges, abrasive household
bre cloth. sponges or similar to clean insect remains.
Automatic car washes Risk of damaging the surface!
Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water
Spray the vehicle before starting the car and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of ● Vehicle parts with matte paint:
wash. water with a leather cloth. – Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of
damaging the surface!
Make sure that the windows and the panor-
WARNING – Never select washing programs that in-
amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen
wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in- ● Only wash the vehicle with the ignition clude the use of wax. This could dam-
structions of the car wash tunnel operator, switched off or according to the specifica- age the appearance of matte paint.
especially if your vehicle has detachable tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk – Do not put stickers or magnets on parts
parts. of accident! with matte paint, as removing them
● When cleaning the underbody or the in- may damage the paint.
Use of car washes without brushes if possible.
side of the wheel arches, protect yourself
from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of For the sake of the environment
Washing by hand cut!
Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a The car should only be washed in special
● After cleaning the brakes could act more
wash bays. These places are prepared to
soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice
prevent oily water from getting into the
ing products that do not contain solvents. on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-
public drains.
dent! In this case the brakes should be
Washing vehicles with a matte paint by dried by pressing the brake pedal several
hand times.

To prevent damage to the vehicle when

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-
washing it, first remove the thicker dust and CAUTION tions
dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and ● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-
fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner The cleaning and maintenance of individual
matic car wash, please make sure to re-
for matte paint. components of the vehicle can be checked in
tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them
from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-
the following tables. The contents should be
understood merely as a recommendation. Go
to your specialised workshop if you have
360
 Vehicle maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed. Wheels

Problem Solution
Take he general considerations into account
Problem Solution
››› in Take special care with... on Corrosion
Have your specialised work-
page 364. Antifreeze salt Water shop take care of this

Brake abrasion Acid-free special cleaning The water does

dust product not create drop- Maintain with hard wax (at
Cleaning the exterior lets on the clean least 2 times a year)
paint
End exhausts
Windscreen wipers Treat with suitable wax and ap-
Problem Solution No shine de- ply paint preservative after-
Problem Solution spite sober main- wards if the wax used does not
Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-
Dirt Soft cloth with wipers uct is required tenance/paint contain preservative ingredi-
ents
Headlights / Tail lights Covers / Trims Tanks, e.g. insect
Immediately soften with water
remains, bird
Problem Solution Problem Solution droppings, tree
and remove with a microfibre
cloth
sap, road salt
Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a
solutiona) steel cleaning product is re- Fat-based dirt,
quired Delete immediately with a neu-
e.g. cosmetic
a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in tral soap solutiona) and a soft
products or
1 litre of water a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in cloth
sunscreen
1 litre of water
Sensors / Camera lenses a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
Paint
Problem Solution 1 litre of water
Problem Solution
Sensors: soft cloth with a sol- Carbon fibre parts
vent-free cleaning product Check the paint's colour code
Dirt Camera lenses: soft cloth with Paint flaws in an authorised service and re-
Problem Solution
an alcohol-free cleaning prod- store with a touch-up pencil Dirt Clean the same way as pain-
uct
Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water
ted parts ››› page 359 »
Hand brush/Anti frost spray
Snow/ice Apply rust remover and then
with no solvents
Environmental rust apply hard wax. Go you your
tank specialised workshop if you
have any queries

361
 Maintenance

Decoration slides Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution
Problem Solution Problem Solution
Grease-based Apply a neutral soap solutiona).
Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal dirt, e.g. oil, make- Absorb the dissolved grease
solutiona) display cleaner up, etc. and paint particles drying with
an absorbent cloth, in case you
a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in must treat it with water after-
Control panels
1 litre of water wards
Problem Solution Special dirt, e.g. Special stain remove: dry with
Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with pens, nail polish, an absorbent cloth, if applica-
Interior cleaning neutral soap solutiona) dispersion paint, ble, apply neutral soap solution
shoe cream etc. afterwardsa)
a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
Windows a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litre of water
Problem Solution 1 litre of water
Seat belts
Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and Natural leather
then dry with a cloth Problem Solution
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), al-
Covers / Trims Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap
lowed to dry before retracting
solutiona)
Problem Solution a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
Water-based dirt, Recent stains: absorbent cloth
Dirt Neutral soap solutiona) 1 litre of water
e.g. coffee, tea, Dry stains: stain remover suita-
a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather blood etc. ble for leather
1 litre of water Grease-based Recent stains: absorbent cloth
Problem Solution
dirt, e.g. oil, make- and suitable stain remover for
Plastic parts up, etc. leather
Particles of dirt Vacuum cleaner
stuck to surfaces Dry stains: grease solvent
Problem Solution
spray
Dirt Damp cloth Water-based dirt, Absorbent cloth and neutral
e.g. coffee, tea, soap solutiona) Special dirt, e.g. Stain remover suitable for
Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos- blood etc. pens, nail polish, leather
sible solvent-free plastic clean- dispersion paint,
er shoe cream etc.

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of water
362
 Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution Camera lenses ● The ambient rust deposits must not be re-
● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice moved through friction. Risk of damaging the
Care Apply preservative cream regu- or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of paint job!
larly to protect from sunlight.
cracking the lens! ● Remove cosmetic products and sunlight
Use a colour preservative if re-
quired ● To clean the camera lens, never use abra- immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!
sive cleaning products or products with alco-
a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
hol. Risk of scratches and cracks! Displays/instrument panel
1 litre of water ● The screens, the instrument panel and the
Carbon fibre parts Windows trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of
● Remove snow and ice from windows and scratches!
Problem Solution exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To ● Make sure that the instrument panel is
Dirt Clean like plastic parts avoid scratches, the scraper should only be switched off and cooled down before clean-
pushed in one direction and not moved to ing.
and fro. ● Make sure that no liquid leaks between the
● Never remove snow or ice from windows instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-
Take special care with...
and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. age!
Risk of cracks on the windows!
Headlights/tail lights
● To prevent damage to the heating of the Control panels
● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with
rear window, do not put stickers over the ● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-
a dry cloth or sponge.
heating elements. trol panels. Risk of damage!
● Do not use cleaning products that contain
alcohol. Risk of cracks! Covers/trims Seat belts
● Do not use cleaning products or chrome ● Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.
Wheels
based cleaning agents. ● Seat belts and their components must nev-
● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive
er be cleaned with chemical products, nor
products. Paint should they be allowed to come into contact
● If the protective coating on the paint of the ● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-
rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, before applying wax or care products. Risk of jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!
scratches, etc., the damage should be re- scratches! ● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,
paired immediately. ● Do not apply wax or care products if the belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,
vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of ask your specialised workshop to replace the
damaging the paint job! belt in question. »
363
 Maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-

er
longed period in the bright sun, it is best to
cover the leather.
Accessories and modifi-
● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara cations to the vehicle
leather with leather cleaning products, sol- WARNING
vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers
or similar products.
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the
windscreen. In bad visibility conditions
Accessories, spare parts and
● If the stain is very hard to remove, take the such as humid weather, darkness or when repair work
vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may
be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-
removed there. This will prevent damage. Introduction
ings can also cause the windscreen wiper
● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard blades to make noise.
sponges, etc. to clean. Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer
for advice before purchasing accessories
● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the
Note and replacement parts.
seats.
● Remains of insects can be removed much Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-
● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-
more easily with previously treated paint. ard of active and passive safety. For this rea-
ets or belts can damage the surface.
● Regular car care treatments can prevent son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi-
● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage deposits of ambient rust. cial Service for advice before fitting accesso-
the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT Official
fasteners are closed. Service has the latest information from the
manufacturer and can recommend accesso-
Natural leather Remove the vehicle from traffic
ries and replacement parts which are suita-
● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, ble for your requirements. They can also an-
If you want to leave your vehicle stationary
spot removers or similar products on leather. swer any questions you might have regarding
for a long period of time, contact a qualified
● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- workshop. They will gladly inform you about official regulations.
ets or belts can damage the surface. the necessary measures, such as anti-corro- We recommend you to use only SEAT acces-
● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sion protection, Service and storage. sories and Genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT has
sponges, etc. to clean. tested these parts and accessories for suita-
Also take into account instructions regarding
● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the the vehicle's battery ››› page 341. bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official
seats. Services have the necessary experience and
facilities to ensure that the parts are installed
● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for
correctly and professionally.
long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose
some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

364
 Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di- We therefore recommend that all work should Mobile radio transmitters
rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is be performed by a SEAT Official Service us- Commercial mobile telephones or radio
driven, such as a cruise control system or ing genuine SEAT parts®. equipment might interfere with the electron-
electronically-controlled suspension, must ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.
be approved for use in your vehicle and bear WARNING This may be due to:
the e mark (the European Union's authorisa- Incorrectly performed modifications or
tion symbol). other work on your vehicle can lead to mal- ● No external aerial.

If any additional electrical devices are fit- functions and cause accidents. ● External aerial incorrectly installed.
ted which do not serve to control the vehicle ● Transmitting power more than 10 W.
itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop
or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the  Radio telephones and office equip- You must, therefore, do not operate portable
sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in mobile telephones or radio equipment inside
ment the vehicle without a properly installed exter-
the European Union).
nal aerial ››› .
Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
WARNING Please note also that the maximum range of
Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters
Accessories, for example telephone hold- in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT the equipment can only be achieved with an
ers or cup holders, should never be fitted external aerial.
generally authorises in-vehicle installations
on the covers, or within the working range
of approved types of radio transmitters provi-
of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger Business equipment
ded that:
of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-
dent. Retrofit installation of business or private
● The antenna is installed correctly.
equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-
● The aerial is installed on the exterior of the ded the equipment cannot interfere with the
vehicle (and shielded cables are used to- driver's immediate control of the vehicle and
Technical modifications gether with non-reflective aerial trimming). that any such equipment carries the  mark.
● The effective transmitting power does not Any retrofit equipment that could influence
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic the driver's control of the vehicle must have a
exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.
components, software, wiring or data transfer type approval for your vehicle and must carry
in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- the e mark.
You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership shop will be able to inform you about options
cannot be held liable for any damage for installing and operating radio transmitters WARNING
caused by modifications and/or work per- with a higher transmitting power.
Mobile telephones or radio equipment
formed incorrectly. which is operated inside the vehicle without »
365
 Maintenance

a properly installed external aerial can

create excessive magnetic fields that
could cause a health hazard.

Note
● The posterior fitting of electric and elec-
tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its
licence and could lead to the withdrawal of
the vehicle registration document under
certain circumstances.
● Please use the mobile telephone/radio
operating instructions.

366
 Information for the user

Information for the user Data from the driving assist systems are also
recorded. This includes data such as whether
SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless
the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee
the systems were inactive or active and if or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-
Information for the user such action had an impact on the vehicle’s
dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the
ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-
tractual provisions.
aforementioned situations, accelerating or
Due to legal requirements in safety-related
Information stored by the decelerating the vehicle.
products, SEAT may use the EDR data for
control units Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- field research and in order to improve vehicle
cludes data from systems such as: system quality. Any data used for the purpo-
Storage of accident data (Event ses of research will be treated anonymously
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(in other words, no reference will be made to
Data Recorder) ● Emergency brake assistance system (Front the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).
Assist).
Your vehicle has an event data recorder
(EDR). ● Park Pilot system

The EDR’s function is to record data in the ● Lane Assist Other important information
event of a mild or serious accident. These da-
The EDR data are only recorded in specific
ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-
accident situations. No data are recorded in Environmental compatibility
ferent vehicle systems behaved.
normal driving conditions.
Environmental protection is a top priority in
The EDR records, over a reduced time range
No audio or video data inside or around the the design, choice of materials and manufac-
(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-
vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan- ture of your new SEAT.
ing data and data from the restraint systems,
ces are personal data such as name, age, or
such as:
gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties Constructive measures to encourage re-
● How different vehicle systems worked. (such as criminal proceedings authorities) cycling
may relate the contents of the EDR data to
● Whether the driver and the occupants were ● Joints and connections designed for easy
other data sources and create a personal
wearing their seat belts. dismantling.
reference in the context of an accident inves-
● How hard the acceleration or brake pedal tigation. ● Modular construction to facilitate disman-
was pressed. tling.
In order to read the EDR data it is necessary
● Vehicle speed.
to access (if legally permitted to do so) the
● Increased use of single-grade materials. »
vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-
These data will provide a better understand-
face while the vehicle is switched on.
ing of the circumstances of the accident.
367
 Information for the user

● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in ● Use of systems for the recovery of residual
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
www.seat.com/generalinfo 
ISO 1629. etc.).
● The use of water-soluble paints.
Choice of materials Table of correspondences
● Use of recycled materials.
The table of correspondences will help you to
● Use of compatible plastics in the same part Recycling of electrical or electron- associate the name of the device in the dec-
if its components are not easily separated. ic devices laration of compliance with the features of
● Use of recycled materials and/or materials the vehicle and the terminology used in the
originating from renewable sources. All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that on-board documentation.
are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must
● Reduction of volatile components, including
be marked with the following symbol: Features of the Name of the device
odour, in plastic materials.
vehicle according to the dec-
● Use of CFC-free coolants.  laration of compli-
This symbol indicates that EED must not be ance
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive discarded as home waste but through selec- Radiofrequency re- FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477,
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, tive waste collection. mote control (vehicle) FS94
hexavalent chromium.
Radio frequency re- Sender STH SEAT -
mote control (auxili- 50000914
Manufacturing methods
Information about the EU Di- ary heater)
Telestart
● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities. rective 2014/53/EU Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW
● Use of plastic film as protection during vehi- Telestart
cle transport.
Simplified EU compliance declara-
● Use of solvent-free adhesives.
tion Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- MIB Standard 2

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-
tems. ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- MIB2 Main-Unit
● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- clare that they comply with Directive
A580 / A270
dues (RDF). 2014/53/EU when legally required.
● Improvement in the quality of waste water. The full text of the EU compliance declaration
is available online at the following address:
368
 Information for the user

Features of the Name of the device Features of the Name of the device Features of the Name of the device
vehicle according to the dec- vehicle according to the dec- vehicle according to the dec-
laration of compli- laration of compli- laration of compli-
ance ance ance
Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit Instrument panel eNSF Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.225
6F9.035.225
A580 / A270 Immobilizer integrated in 3V5.035.577.A
dashboard module 7N0.035.552.J
Keyless Access Sys- MQB-B B instrument cluster 7N0.035.552.K
tem 7N0.035.552.Q
Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base 5F4.035.225
Radar sensors for as- ARS4-B
5F4.035.225.A
sistance systems Antennas MQB27 Small/Big
MRRevo14F 5F4.035.225.B
family
5F9.035.225
BSD3.0 Antennas KSA Small Fam III 5F9.035.225.A
5F9.035.225.B
Central control unit 5WK50254 5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna 575,035,225
575.035.225.A
5WK50474 GNSS Antenna VAG 575.035.225.B
720166002 5FJ.035.225
Infotainment system MIB2 Entry
5FJ.035.225.A
8S7.035.503.B 5FJ.035.225.B
MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270 Addresses of the manufacturers

Wireless charging WCH-183
According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all
WCH-185 relevant components must include the ad-
dress of the manufacturer.
5G0.980.611
The address of the manufacturers of compo-
Connection to the ex- UMTS/GSM-MMC
nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot
ternal antenna of the
car UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2 include a sticker are listed below, as long as it
is legally required: »
LTE-MBC-EU

369
 Information for the user

Radioelectrical Radioelectrical
Addresses of the Addresses of the
equipment fitted equipment fitted
manufacturers manufacturers
in the vehicle in the vehicle
Della KGaA Hueck & Co. ADC Automotive Distance
Radiofrequency remote Rixbecker Straße 75 Control Systems GmbH
control key 59552 Lippstadt, Peter-Dornier-Straße 10
GERMANY Radar sensors for as- 88131 Lindau, GERMANY

Digades gmbH sistance systems Robert Bosch GmbH

Äußere Weberstraße 20 Postfach 16 61
Radio frequency re- 02763 Zittau, GERMANY 71226 Leonberg,
mote control (auxiliary GERMANY
Webasto Thermo &
heater) Comfort SE
Friedrichshafener Str. 9
82205 Gilching, GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW
Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle) All SEAT models
868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco
Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)
868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra
Auxiliary heating
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

370
 Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm
Bluethooth All SEAT models
2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Alhambra
WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm and Tarraco

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm

Connection to the external antenna of the car
LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm

Tarraco
LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 703-748 MHz 23 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra

76 GHz-77 GHz
Radar sensors for assistance systems 35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

371
 Technical data

Technical data Vehicle identification data tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-
cle at the time of purchase.
Vehicle ID number
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de-
Indications about the The vehicle ID number can be found in the pend on the equipment/features of each indi-
following places: vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,
technical data road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-
● In the infotainment system using button
mental conditions, load or number of passen-
   > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Serv-
Important information ice > Vehicle ID number.
gers.

● One the vehicle's data label.

Introduction
● In front, under the windscreen. Filling capacities
The values indicated in the technical data ● To the right in the engine compartment.
may differ depending on optional equipment Tank level
or version of the model, as well as in the case Type plate Vehicles with front-wheel drive:
of special vehicles and equipment for certain 50 l, 7 l reserve
The type plate is located on the vehicle’s right Petrol and die-
countries. sel engines
hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export Vehicles with four-wheel drive:
The information in the official vehicle docu- countries do not have a type plate. 55 l, 8.5 l reserve
mentation takes precedence at all times.
approx. 17.3 kg
Natural gas en-
Additional petrol tank: 9 l, of
Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci- ginea)
Fuel consumption which approx 7.6 l is a reserve
fications section
a) The capacity depends on the efficacy and charac-

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement. Approved consumption values are derived teristics of the natural gas pumps. The capacity indi-
from measurements performed or supervised cated is based on a minimum loading pressure of 200
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly by certified EU laboratories, according to the bar.
PS
used to denote engine power. legislation in force at the time (for more infor-
rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed. mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-
ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque. ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and
Cetane number, indication of the die- apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.
CZ
sel combustion power. The values relating to fuel consumption and
Research octane number, indication of CO2 emissions can be found in the documen-
RON
the knock resistance of petrol.
372
 Indications about the technical data

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con- Empty weight, total weight, axle loads WARNING
tainer
The empty weight of the vehicle with driver The values indicated for the maximum per-
Versions without (75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU) mitted weights must not be exceeded.
headlight washer approx. 3 litres 1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment can There is a risk of accident and damage!
system increase the empty weight, which means that
Versions with the possible useful load decreases propor-
headlight washer approx. 5 litres tionally.
system
Trailer weight
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the
Weights ball head of the towing device is 80 kg.

Load on the roof

The maximum authorised roof load for your
vehicle is 75 kg.

373
 Technical data

Engine specifications

1.0 EcoTSI Start-Stop 1.5 Start-Stop ACT®

Petrol engines
Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon Leon Sportourer ST
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/5,000-5,500 96 (131)/5,000-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/2,000-3,500 200/1,400-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement
3/999 4/1,498
(cm3)

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual manual manual

Top speed (km/h) 195 (V) 196 (V) 203 (V) 207 (V)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec-

9.8 10.1 9.4 9.5
onds)

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,720 1,780 1,780 1,840

374
 Indications about the technical data

1.5 Start-Stop ACT® 2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Petrol engines
Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon Sportourer ST
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 213 (290)/5,400-6,500 221 (300)/5,300-6,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 380/1,950-5,300 400/2,000-5,200

No. of cylinders/displacement 4/1,498 4/1,984 4/1,984

(cm3)

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ Super 98 / Super 95 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual DSG manual DSG DSG DSG DSG / 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 215 (V) 213 (VI) 215 (IV) 215 (V) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec-

8.2 8.3 8.2 8.3 6.0 6.3 4.9
onds)

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,780 1,790 1,840 1,860 1,920 2,020 2,090 »

375
 Technical data

1.5 TGI Start-Stop

Natural gas / petrol engine
Leon Leon Sportourer ST
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 96 (131)/5,000-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/1,400-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,498

CNG
Fuel
Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual automatic manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 206 (VI) 206 (VI) 206 (VI) 206 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.1 9.9 10.1 10

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,810 1,840 1,850 1,880

1.6 TDI Start-Stop 2.0 TDI Start-Stop

Diesel engines
Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon Leon Sportourer ST
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/3,250-4,000 110 (150)/3,500-4,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,250 340/1,750-3,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,598 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual manual manual DSG manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 197 (V) 194 (V) 215 (VI) 211 (VII) 215 (VI) 212 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec-

9.8 10.6 8.5 8.4 8.8 8.7
onds)

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,870 1,920 1,850 1,890 1,940 1,980

376
 Indications about the technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 330 Dimensions.

Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon X-Perience

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 861/785 861/1,052 861/1,060

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,636 2,636 2,630

D Length (mm) 4,282 4,549 4,551

1,533/1,504 1,541/1,504
E/F Front/reara) track width (mm)
1,549/1,520 1,547/1,510

G Width (mm) 1,816 1,816 1,816

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,459 1,454b) 1,481b)

Turning radius (m) 10.9

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
b) Dimension to the roof bars.

377
 Index

Index seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Anti-trap function
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Numbers and Symbols Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 App
A Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
ABS activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Apple CarPlay™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183
see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Aspects to think about before starting the ve-
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ASR
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 364 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Active cylinder management (ACT) how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Assistance systems
status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Air conditioning ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
function to prevent overtaking on the right . 281 usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Alternator driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 272
temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
AdBlue Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 184 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 road sign detection system messages . . . . . . 78
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 39 traffic jam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
minimum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Audible warning
Adjust sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
379
 Index

Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Blown bulbs remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . . . 294 Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 119 connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Cetane index (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331, 334 Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 tail light in the bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
emergency release of the selector lever. . . 262 brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Changing the main beam headlight bulbs
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . 257 Braking system dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 257 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 C Checking levels
external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Camera engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
AUX-IN multimedia socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Childproof locks
Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Capacities Child seats
B AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Backrest of the front passenger seat natural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Care securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Backrest of the rear seat see Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Cleaning the vehicle
raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 359
Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 153 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
380
 Index

Clocks
set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 298
D
DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
see: RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329, 330
Deactivation of cylinders
Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 277
see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 72
Communication between the Infotainment refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 322
System and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Delayed shutdown (Infotainment system) . . . 169
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Diesel
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Controls and displays
Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Display of road signs on the instrument panel
Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Convenience close function
adBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Disposal
Convenience open function
airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Distance control
Cooling system
anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 298 Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Drink holder
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Driver
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
381
 Index

Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Emergency opening

Driver information system lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
lap timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Driving Electronic engine torque management Emergency operation
driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 (XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 250 gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Emissions control system
park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 269 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 296 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313, 315, 319 Emergencies particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Engine
Driving mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206, 212 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 start (driver instructions with the mechani-
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 cal contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Engine and ignition
see Emergency Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 automatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . . . 247
E Emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
E10 Emergency braking assist system My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
EDL operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 248
see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Electric system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331, 334
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Electrical accessories Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
see Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Emergency locking of the front passenger coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
382
 Index

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 364 Frequency band

window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 ESC AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 296 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Front Assist
G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 272
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Exterior lighting Front drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Front fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Exterior mirrors Front passenger front airbag
Engine failure driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Fuel
Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Engine oil Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 337 External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 F petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Fabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Factors that have a negative influence on saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Fuel consumption
refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 inertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 335 Filling capacities why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . . 329
Engine oil pressure fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Fuel tank cap
Enlarge FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 123 Fuel tank flap
Environment Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Environmental tip winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
383
 Index

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
I navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
navigation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Identification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55, 56 on-screen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Identifying letters on engine (LDM)
preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 166
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
G Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
GALA (speed-dependent volume) . . . . . . . . . . . 174 rotary/push buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Gearbox DSG scroll button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 scroll (screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Gear change search on lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
engage the gears (manual change) . . . . . . 254 selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . 193
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 sound distribution (Balance and Fader) . . . . 174
CD or DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
change the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
checkboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
H DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
DVD settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
see also Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . 292 text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
FM, AM, DAB settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 17 updating navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Head-protection airbags USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
image settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Headlights Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 voice control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
input window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 volume and sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 135 wait time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Media settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 WLAN audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
384
 Index

Infotainment system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 356
K Lap timer
lap times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Keyless Access
Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Keyless Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . 259
Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Leather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 74 Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 104
menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Keyless Access lock and ignition system:
service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . 88 Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Keyless Entry
use with the wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72 audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Keyless Exit
Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Interferences caused by mobile phones . . . . . 169 change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Keys
Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
assign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Interior mirror control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
instructions for the driver (mechanical con-
Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
tact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 110
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 fog light with cornering light function . . . . . . 123
vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
J Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Kick-down
instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
L motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Lane Assist system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
385
 Index

switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Malfunctions Multifunction steering wheel
Loading the luggage compartment adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 with voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 emergency brake assistance system (Front My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 138 Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 N
positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 146 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323, 326
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Media special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Lock and unlock changing track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 change view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 entering the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 import vCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 138 playback modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 playback order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 requirements for data media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 my destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 select track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 navigation with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 148 switching the Media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 offroad navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
retractable shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 unreadable CD or DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 predictive navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 142 MEDIA road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
variable luggage compartment floor . 142, 143 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 143 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 selecting the destination on the map . . . . . . 217
Luggage compartment shelf MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 142 Mirrors special destinations (POI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 traffic bulletins (TRAFFIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
M see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 updating the installing navigation data . . . . 216
Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Net bag
Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Maintenance Mobile Signal Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Net for luggage
see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
386
 Index

Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 148 Operation in winter Parking brake

Noise battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 automatic connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
refuelling natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Parking distance warning system
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346, 350 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301, 304
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Parking (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 ParkPilot
O Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301, 304
Octane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70 Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 14
partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 P Petrol
total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Painting the vehicle additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Offroad Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Panoramic sliding sunroof Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 see Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Power sockets
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Parking aid Power steering
tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 323 automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . 263
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 braking during the manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303, 305 Preheating system
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Press & Drive
in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 setting the indications and audio sig- start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 nals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303, 305 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Properties of oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 323 towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 R
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 278
Operating fault Parking aid system
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301, 304
387
 Index

Radio RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Road signs

frequency change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 automatic station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
indications and icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 RDS Regional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Rear fog light how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
save station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 113 shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
RADIO Rear mounting speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
additional DAB services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
additional DAB stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Rear seat Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
DAB memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 fold down with the remote unlocking lever . 137 fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
DAB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 folding down and raising the backrest . . . . . 136 Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
DAB radio text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
DAB slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Rotary/push knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
DAB station information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Recognition of road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Rotation direction
DAB transmission standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Refuelling tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
indication of station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Running in
radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 gas tank indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . 193 natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 S
station tracking by RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Remote control key Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
tracking of DAB stations on FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Radio-operated remote control Retractable shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Safety
see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Safety instructions
function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Reverse assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70, 82 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

388
 Index

using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Special characteristics
Save fuel Selector lever (automatic gearbox) AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Service trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 volume reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
fitting the seat belt strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 21 proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 SSD
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 see Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Start-Stop system
information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Service Menu how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 251
data transmission and control functions . . . 186 restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Seats service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Starting up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
electric settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 257 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Side airbags Station
incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Signal amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 active cylinder management status (ACT) . . 72
Selective catalytic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
389
 Index

compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Storage compartment accessories vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 see Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Emergency brake assistance system (Front Storing objects Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Telephone
gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Bluetooth® profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 enter telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 favourites (quick access to the phone
road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 book) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 150 general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 255 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 146 pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 234
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 76 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Steering anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 short messages (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Sunshade blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 132 voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 anti-trap function (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Temperature indicator
Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Switch exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Steering wheel hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Time
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 80
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 T Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . 255, 257
shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . 257 Tail light bulbs in the bodywork To change the battery
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 remove the tail light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Tail lights To park the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36
glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Tail lights on the rear lid Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36
glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 remove the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 63 Torque
on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Towable loads
other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
390
 Index

Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311 loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Tyres

Tow hook malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 305 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
place in the reserve position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
safety check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail- speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
operation and conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311 tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Towing device technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311 Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51 vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . 308, 312
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Trailer mode U
front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Unlock and lock
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51 Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . . 146 doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51 Trips abroad with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 connecting external data media . . . . . . . . . . 207
with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Turning the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Tyre Mobility System V
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
situations where it has to be disconnected . 288 Tyre monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Variable luggage compartment floor . . . 142, 143
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 315 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Vehicle
adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Tyre pressure loss indicator
data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 319 Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311 Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
391
 Index

raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 350 rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . 104 anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43 reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Vehicle battery torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Wheels thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 44 Winter conditions
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 341 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Wiper and rear window wiper blades
winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Vehicle care wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
wiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Wiper blades
Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Windows Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 connect external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 X
Voice control Window washer XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
available languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 window washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
W Window washer water
Warning symbols check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Washing the vehicle Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 359 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 359 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
392
Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
Model:
The following items were delivered
YES NO
with the vehicle:
Vehicle Registration:
On-board documentation
Vehicle identification
number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key

or vehicle delivery:
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
SEAT Official Service:
Location:

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
Date: right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Signature of owner: Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
Service advisor:
All rights on changes are reserved.

Telephone:
❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.19
Inglés 5F0012720BN (11.19)

5F0012720BN

SEAT Leon Inglés (11.19)

SEAT Leon
Owner’s manual